JP2018019735A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which is represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed type game machine, or a reel game machine (slot machine) and which has features in display means.SOLUTION: Big win symbols are more likely to be definitely displayed at last, when a first meter display MW is changed from a first state (empty state) to a third state (full state) (e.g., as shown in Fig. 25) than when the first meter display MW is kept in the first state (empty state) and not changed to the third state (full state). The big win symbols are more likely to be definitely displayed at last, when a fourth meter display MR is changed from a fourth state (empty state) to a sixth state (full state) (e.g., as shown in Fig. 16 and Fig. 17) than when the fourth meter display MR is kept in the fourth state (empty state) and not changed to the sixth state (full state).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 16

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  Some of these game tables have display means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display means.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, rather than when the first meter display remains in the first state and does not change to the third state. It ’s easier for the jackpot symbol to be finalized,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, rather than when the fourth meter display remains in the fourth state and does not change to the sixth state. In the end, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finalized.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a decorative design is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of button production in steps. It is a figure for demonstrating in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production in which the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production | presentation in which the operation means A was entangled, and the production | presentation in which the operation means B was entangled. It is a flowchart showing the execution timing regarding the production which entangled the operation means. It is a figure which shows an example of meter production in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the meter production shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which performs a meter production | presentation and makes a big hit in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the meter production shown in FIG. 16 in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production | presentation by the change ball icon cI demonstrated using FIG. 16 in steps. It is a figure for explaining in detail various kinds of meter displays. It is a figure which shows an example of the rank improvement effect which tells whether a meter display changes stepwise. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the rank improvement effect shown in FIG. 20 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the rank improvement effect shown in FIG. 21 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the re-lottery which may continue from FIG. 22 (41) in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini game which tells whether the meter display appears step by step. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which a big hit is decided by the said fluctuation | variation when a meter display will be in a full tank state. It is a figure which shows the example in which a meter display is displayed in a holding frame in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which acquires and stocks a mini item when the meter of a meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which several items are stocked in one full tank of a meter display in steps. It is a figure which shows the example in which the meter display of a full tank state may be carried over to the next symbol fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example which is digested without being stocked even if an item appears when the meter display becomes full. It is a figure which shows the example in which two meter displays are displayed and both of them disappear. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one side disappears. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 32 in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example which a display is started in the state which accumulated the meter display of the increase type to the middle. It is a figure which shows an example of the meter production | presentation by the meter display which shows a numerical value in steps. It is a figure which shows the example which changes the numerical type meter display shown in FIG. 35 according to operation of an operation means in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect different from the meter effect demonstrated so far in steps. It is a figure which shows an example in case an error generate | occur | produces during the display of a meter display in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of error display ER1 shown in FIG. 38 in steps. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. (A) is a flowchart of the main control unit power-on process, (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process. It is a flowchart of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a special figure state update process. (A) is a flowchart of special drawing related lottery processing, and (b) is a flowchart of lottery processing per special drawing. It is a flowchart of the process during symbol variation. It is a flowchart of a special figure display confirmation weight process. (A) is a flowchart of the hit start wait process, and (b) is a flowchart of the special power release process. It is a flowchart of a special power combination operation process. It is a flowchart of a special power combination control process. (A) is a figure explaining the content of the special electric power role operation pattern data table, (b) is a figure explaining the content of the special electric power role operation | movement data table. It is a flowchart of a special electric role remaining sphere detection process. It is a flowchart of a special electric power operation end process. It is a flowchart of a hit end display weight process. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and for special figures 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the second sub-control unit image control process. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of direction device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of direction device 206. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect applicable in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment in steps. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 69 in stages. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 70 in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of the customization which can be performed with the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment. It is a transition figure of the option menu screen in the state where the member service is not used. It is a figure which shows an example which calls an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from a demo screen. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 75. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 76. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a modification of the example described with reference to FIG. 76. It is a figure which shows the other modification. (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen, and (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen. It is a transition diagram of a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen. It is a figure which shows a model customization screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation using the fluctuation | variation icon. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the combination of the change effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM, and the change effect of a fluctuation icon. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 88, a modification, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect that a reservation frame becomes temporarily invisible. It is a figure which shows an example of the production where a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the production icon display area DIS. It is a figure which shows the modification etc. which are shown in FIG. An effect example in which the navigation character YM is accompanied by the effect of the button hold icon is shown. It is a figure which shows an example with the period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the example with another period when the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed. An example of an effect in which a normal decoration pattern is entwined with a navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the example by which a change notice display is displayed on standby. It is a figure which shows the example of production using the holding frame different from the holding frame demonstrated so far. It is a figure which shows the example which the icon I1 of the treasure chest which has been used as an icon of a change notice notice so far appears as a hold icon. An effect example in which a meter effect is entangled with the navigation character YM is shown. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the example demonstrated using FIG. An effect example in which a telop effect is entangled with the navigation character YM is shown. FIG. 68 shows an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). FIG. 68 shows an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of still another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which entangled the navigation character YM by the production | presentation apparatus 206 by which the 2nd display apparatus was provided below the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 (1st display apparatus). It is a figure showing an example when other productions are performed during execution of the production selected by the player. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 109. It is the table | surface which put together about the music which can be output from the speaker. It is a figure which shows the example in which the music selection demonstrated using FIG. 111 is performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 68 shows an example of an effect produced by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the holding frame which the player selected is changed. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 116. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine set to the setting in auto button mode. It is a figure which shows the continuation etc. of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 118. It is a figure explaining the overlap relationship with the display of the ball removal notification notified by generation | occurrence | production of a dish full tank error, and the other display of each brightness | luminance adjustment window. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a ball removal notification. It is a figure which shows the example in which a multiple types of error display is displayed. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the error which the payout control part 600 of the pachinko machine 100 can detect. It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting | reporting aspect of the error alerting | reporting by the pachinko machine. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  Hereinafter, a ball ball game machine (including a sealed type) such as a pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Note that the enclosed type here refers to an enclosed type gaming machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the gaming machine.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 (see FIG. 3). . The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. Note that the frame lamp 122 is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is referred to as a lamp. And emits light corresponds to an example of light emitting means.

  A game area 124 (see FIG. 3) is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In addition, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a door open sensor 609 (see FIG. 4) that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is provided with a transmission unit 190. The transmission unit 190 includes a transmission unit 191 that is different from the transparent plate member 118, and the transmission unit 191 is rotatable in the front-rear direction around a drive shaft (not shown) provided in the lower part. The transmission unit 190 includes a light emitting diode (LED). The transmission part 191 of the transmission part unit 190 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. The transmission unit 191 functions as an operation unit (button) and corresponds to an example of a movable unit.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by a player's operation, and a chance button 136 It provided an opportunity button lamp 138 to the. The chance button 136 is an effect button and corresponds to an example of an operation unit. The chance button 136 is also an example of a movable unit, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is in the initial position. As will be described in detail later, the chance button 136 can execute an advance / retreat operation. In addition, a lower pan full sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is full is provided.

  In addition, an operation key unit 181 is provided on the right side of the chance button 136. The operation key unit 181 includes a cross key 181a, an OK button 181b, and a cancel button 181c. A panel display unit 183 is also provided at the upper right of the operation key unit 181.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod (not shown) that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching ball that hits the game ball at the tip of the launching rod (not shown). And a launcher. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. Note that the game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through the discharge port 152a and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is configured to play games. Pays out a ball to the person

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 3 is a so-called right-handed machine game board. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. In a generally known right-handed game board, by changing the strength of launching a game ball by a player's operation, a general-purpose starting port 228 and a second special-purpose starting port 232, which will be described later, 1 special drawing start port 230. Specifically, the game ball that rolls in the first area (the left side in the game area) provided with the first special figure starting port 230 is disposed on the game area 124 by arranging the game nail 238 and the like. A game ball that rolls in the second area (the right side in the game area) where the second special figure start port 232 is provided is configured such that it is difficult or impossible to enter the special view start port 232. 1 It is difficult or impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230. The present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine 100 provided with a right-handed game board, and can be applied to a wide range of pachinko machines equipped with a general game board.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is also short. However, the display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are only required to be smaller than the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the length and height in the width direction are shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. The left end portion of 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the position of the third decorative symbol display 208N shown in FIG. 3 may be the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. However, the initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M does not partially overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position deviated from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position separated from the left side toward the left). Also, the initial position of the third decorative symbol display device 208M does not overlap with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is a position away from the first decorative symbol display device 208L (on the right side from the first decorative symbol display device 208L). It may be a position distant from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in the direction of contacting and separating from each other along the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Furthermore, there is no limitation on the number of decorative symbol display devices, and the decorative symbol display device may be a pachinko machine having only one, or may be a pachinko machine having only two. It may be a pachinko machine provided with two or more. Further, the positional relationship between the plurality of decorative symbol display devices is not limited to the positional relationship shown in FIG.

  In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. For example, a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is applied to the light guide plate. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Below the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a first special symbol. A holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 will be described later.

  The three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to 208 </ b> M are display devices for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and here are configured by liquid crystal display devices (Liquid Crystal Display). The display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L can be divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. The area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that a various effect and various game information can be displayed, for example, a dot matrix Other display devices including a display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and here, it is constituted by a 7-segment LED. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and here are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is also a kind of symbol display means.

  The general figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general figure variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. Here, the general figure variable game is held to a predetermined number (for example, two). Is possible. The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. Here, a predetermined number of special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a normal start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the rendering device 206, A central variable winning opening 234 and a right variable winning opening 235 are provided.

  A plurality of general winning ports 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning port 226 (when winning the general winning port 226). Then, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the following, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. Sometimes called a “ball (game ball)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. One is arranged. For this reason, the game start ball 228 is expected to enter a game ball by hitting it to the right. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  Only one first special figure starting port 230 is arranged at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  Only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200, and entering the ball is expected by hitting to the right. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with two variable winning openings. A central variable winning opening 234 (corresponding to the first variable winning opening) provided in the center of the game board 200 is disposed below the first special figure starting opening 230. Further, a right variable winning opening 235 (corresponding to a second variable winning opening) provided on the right side of the game board 200 is disposed below the second special figure starting opening 232, and can be entered by hitting right. There is expected. Each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 includes a winning opening and door members 2341 and 2351 that can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 may be referred to as attackers. The central variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started when the big hit is made in the non-electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. The right variable winning opening 235 is kept closed until the big hit game when the big hit is made in the electric support state, and when the big hit game is started, the state is changed between the open state and the closed state. repeat. In other words, each of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening / closing state) where the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. Is a variable winning means that can change the open / closed state from one to the other, and when the special figure change game is won in the non-electric support state and the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the jackpot symbol The door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. On the other hand, when the special figure variation game is won in the electric support state and the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2351 of the right variable prize winning opening 235 is set at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Open and close with. In any of the variable winning openings 234, 235, the closed state does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the central variable winning port 234 or the right variable winning port 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is used as a winning ball. It discharges to 126. It should be noted that both the ball that has entered the central variable winning opening 234 and the ball that has entered the right variable winning opening 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  According to the arrangement of the general figure starting port 228, the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the central variable winning port 234, and the right variable winning port 235 described above, Strike is an advantage for the player, and in the non-electric support state, a left strike is an advantage for the player.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning hole (general winning hole 226, central variable winning hole 234, right variable The winning opening 235) or the starting opening (the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special drawing starting opening 232), or without winning any of the winning opening or starting opening, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228 Just passing through will reach the outlet 240.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N described above are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are fully opened (fully open state), the player can visually recognize part or all of the display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, which decorative symbol is the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is possible to shield only a part of the decorative design to the extent that the player can identify the game. In addition, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are completely closed (fully closed state), the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Shield everything. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which are the effect display means, are both the shielding means and the effect moving means of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Note that the above-described chance button 136 capable of executing the advancing / retreating operation and the transmitting portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction are also a kind of effect moving means.

  Further, as the effect moving means, a family crest member 224E (see FIG. 14 and the like) (not shown) is prepared here. The family crest member 224E is disposed at an initial position below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the operation starts, the family crest member 224E rises from the initial position to the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side (player side). In the state in which the family crest character 224E is in the initial position, it is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the state in which it overlaps the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L from the front side. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

  Here, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) are common. The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. There may be. Therefore, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are each controlled by control means (for example, main control means (300), first sub control means (400), second sub control means (500). )), Or a combination of these three control units (300, 400, 500) can be regarded as a control means. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be regarded as a second control unit.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, a door opening of a front frame door opening sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, etc. A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor and a full plate sensor, and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result and a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a symbol display device such as the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the universal symbol display device 21. Drive circuit 326 for performing display control and various status display units 328 (for example, general map hold lamp 216, first special figure hold lamp 218, second special figure hold lamp 220, high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control, a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234, a door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that are opened and closed is connected.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number.

  The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. It is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 is also the same. Is latched, and the latched value is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 transmit / receive a communication confirmation command when the power is turned on, the main control unit 300 always transmits the number of payouts, and the payout control unit 600 transmits error information. Both can communicate bidirectionally. On the other hand, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock, and controls programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, various effect data, etc. Is connected to the ROM 406.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a second decorative design. A drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a position detection sensor 430 for detecting the current positions of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and , A detection unit 710 for detecting that the chance button 136 is pressed, and a detection signal from the operation key unit sensor 425 for detecting the operation of the position detection sensor 430, the detection unit 710 of the chance button 136, and the operation key unit 181. From the CPU 404 and the sensor circuit 428 that outputs the A VDP 434 (video display) that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436, and displays the image on each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N.・ Processor) is connected.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes various movable means (chance button 136 capable of performing advancing and retreating operations, a transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, an eight-story role 224Fa, a general role 224Fb, and a family crest role 224E). Based on a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control, various movable means sensors 424 for detecting the current positions of various movable means 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E, and detection signals from the various movable means sensors 424. A sensor circuit 518 that outputs to the circuit 502 is connected. Furthermore, the basic circuit 502 includes a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game table frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game table frame lamp 542, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication is connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to N, and the second sub-control unit 500 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E are controlled, the second sub-control unit 500 performs image display control of each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs various movable units 136, 191, 224 Fa, 224 Fb, 224 E may be controlled, or any one of the sub-control units may perform both controls.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500 also performs display control of the panel display unit 183 shown in FIG.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  Further, a detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 is input to the dispensing control unit 600, and a door opening command is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also, when there is a payout error, an error command is transmitted from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

  As for the door opening command, the detection signal of the door opening sensor 609 may be directly input to the main control unit 300 without using the dispensing control unit 600, or the dispensing control unit 600 is used as a relay base. Then, a door opening command may be transmitted from the door opening sensor 609 to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). Here, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400, and from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path. For example, the main control unit 300 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The second sub control unit 500 may be configured to supply a voltage after a predetermined voltage is supplied to the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the first sub control unit 400. The firing control unit 630 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400) and each device. The first sub-control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 via other control units (main control unit 300, payout control unit 600, etc.) and devices. The payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously. The payout control unit 600 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than both of the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 or at least one of them. The main control unit 300 may be configured to supply the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the first sub control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 may be supplied with the predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than at least one of the payout control unit 600 and the main control unit 300.

  The second sub control unit 500 may be supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660 almost simultaneously with the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400. The second sub control unit 500 is configured so that the predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 earlier than all of the payout control unit 600, the main control unit 300, and the first sub control unit 400, or one or more control units. May be. The second sub control unit 500 may be directly supplied with a predetermined voltage from the power supply control unit 660.

  In an island facility provided in a game machine installation store, a 100V AC power source is stepped down to a voltage of 24V, and a 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100. The 24V AC current is converted into a 12V DC voltage by the power supply control unit 660 of the main control unit 300. Although not shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage conversion circuit. The 12 V DC current is further stepped down to a predetermined voltage (here, 5 V) by the voltage conversion circuit, and the predetermined voltage (5 V ) Is supplied to the CPU 304 provided in the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300. Further, the direct current converted to a voltage of 12 V by the power supply control unit 660 is also supplied to the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and the start signal output circuit 340 of the main control unit 300. When the voltage value of the 12V supply current drops below a predetermined value (9V in this example), the voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the I / O port 310 of the basic circuit 302. Therefore, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 monitors the voltage value of the power line connecting the power control unit 660 and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 and through which a DC current of 12 V flows. This power line is an example of a predetermined power line. It corresponds to. Note that a low voltage signal may be directly input to the CPU 304. The power management unit 660 also outputs the input 24V AC current as it is, or converts it into a 36V DC current and outputs it. Furthermore, the current of the operating voltage (here, 5V) may be supplied to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via a circuit different from the voltage conversion circuit.

  The activation signal output circuit 340 outputs an activation signal when the voltage value of the direct current supplied from the power supply control unit 660 by turning on the power reaches a voltage value at which the CPU 304 can operate. Further, when the WDT 314 times out, a reset signal is output from the WDT 314 to the CPU 304. When the WDT 3141 times out, there is a case where the CPU 304 cannot perform the originally designed operation due to a runaway state due to a program mistake or a voltage drop caused by a lightning strike or an illegal act. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 3141 as an initial value. The activation signal from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal from the WDT 3141 are input to the CPU 304 through a common signal line, but may be input through dedicated lines. The activation signal output from the activation signal output circuit 340 and the reset signal output from the WDT 314 described here correspond to an example of a predetermined activation signal.

  In the case of a momentary power loss when the power supply is shut off and immediately recovered, that is, when the power supply switch 178 is automatically recovered without being turned on, a stop voltage signal is output and the WDT 3141 times out, and the main control unit 300 performs reset processing. Is executed. In this reset process, it is first determined whether or not the reset operation to be executed is a system reset operation. There are two reset operations executed by the basic circuit 302: a system reset operation and a user reset operation. Here, when the system reset operation is executed, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. Subsequently, a security check process is executed. In the security check process, recalculation is performed to determine whether the authentication code calculated based on the user program is correct. If the authentication code is correct, the extension process is executed. The extension time in the extension process may be a fixed time, or may be a time obtained by adding a randomly selected random time to the fixed time. When the extension process ends, a main process of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started. On the other hand, when executing the user reset operation, the values of the core of the CPU 304 and the built-in register are initialized. However, the value of the register that controls the random number generation circuit 318 is maintained in the state before the reset. Thereafter, main processing of the main control unit 300 described later is executed, and game control is started.

<Type of design>
Next, referring to FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are provided. The types of special maps and general maps to be stopped will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display. Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special symbol 2. Further, after that, a fixed display for maintaining the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec) is performed.

  Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop display of special figure 1 is stopped and finalized display is completed, or after “fluctuation display of special figure 2” is started The process up to the stop display of 2 stop symbol forms and the end of the final display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 5A shows ten types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, as will be described later, whether or not a big hit in a special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  "Special figure G" is a first small hit symbol, and "Special figure H" is a second small hit symbol, both of which are in a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here is equivalent to the same short hit big hit with 2R. That is, the “special drawing G” and “special drawing H” are in the same state as the “special drawing F”, but the effects displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are different from each other. The special interest G, “special H” and “special F” are provided to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are ten types of decoration designs, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the right In each symbol display area of the symbol display area 208c, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Switch the display with to “decorative pattern change display”. At the beginning of the decorative symbol change display, the decorative symbols change at a high speed for each symbol display area (scrolled). When the 15R jackpot of “Special Figure B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R jackpot called “hidden probability change” of “Special Figure E”, the 2R jackpot called “Special Figure F” suddenly, or the first small hit of “Special Figure G”, “Special Figure H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify the 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” or the 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction” of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is displayed. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 3B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  Further, the fifth symbol may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The fifth symbol is a display of a decorative symbol smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. For example, the decorative design shown in FIG. 5B may be reduced, or may be a number having a display form different from the display form of the decorative design shown in FIG. Therefore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N is also a kind of symbol display means. Note that the fifth symbol may be displayed in a region outside the symbol display regions 208a to 208c even in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208M. The 4th symbol is a display of a decorative symbol indicating that the symbol is changing or being stopped.

FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. There are two types of stop display modes for normal maps: “general map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes, for each of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, a counter for generating a big hit special figure determining random number counter initial value, a big hit special figure determining random number counter, and a small hit Special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, small hit special figure determination counter, loss special figure determination random number counter initial value generation counter, loss special figure determination random number counter, and special figure timer Each counter of a random number counter for number determination is provided. In addition, the RAM 308 stores, for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the number of holdings, the random number for determining the big hit, the random number for determining the special figure for the big hit, the random value for determining the special figure for the small hit, and the special figure for the lost time The random number value for use, the determination result of prior / impossible determination, the special determination result / pre-judgment result, the determination of correct / incorrect determination, the special figure determination result, and the special figure timer determination result are stored. Further, in RAM 308, special figure holding storage sections divided into the maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery) are separately provided for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is prepared. The special storage unit shown in FIG. 1 includes special figure 1 big hit determination random value, big hit special figure 1 determination random value, small hit special figure 1 determination random value, and lost special figure 1 determination random value. The four random number values are stored as one set for each area in the winning order (holding order). In addition, the special storage unit for special figure 2 big hit determination random number, big hit special figure 2 determination random value, small hit special figure 2 determination random value, and lost special figure 2 determination The four random number values of the random number value are set as one set, and these four random number values are stored for each area one set at a time in winning order (holding order).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 6A according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, first, as initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, various kinds of information stored in the RAM 308 Initial setting of variables, operation permission to WDT 314, setting of initial values, and the like are performed. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. Next, the value of the WDT 314 counter is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a WDT process). Following the WDT process, in the initialization process of step S101, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338, the power management unit 660 via the second sub control unit 500, the main control unit When the voltage value of the power source supplied to 300 is less than a predetermined value (for example, 9 v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to the WDT processing. When the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power supply is cut off), Perform setting 2. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  Next, in step S103, after setting for interrupt prohibition, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, three initial values for generating initial values of the big hit special figure determining random number counter, the small hit special figure determining random number counter, and the lost special figure determining random number counter are generated. Update the value generation counter. After this basic random number initial value update process ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, effect random number update processing is performed. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with random number counters for timer numbers for special drawings and for universal maps, and these counters determine timer numbers that can take values ranging from 0 to 99. Generate a random number value. In step S105, the value of this counter is updated. After this effect random number update process is completed, interrupt permission is set and the process returns to step S103.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S103 and S105 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period (for example, 4 ms).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing the flow of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (for example, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle. At the start of the timer interrupt processing, the values of the registers of the CPU 304 are temporarily saved in the stack area, or the WDT 314 is periodically saved (for example, once every about 2 ms which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle). ) Restart.

  First, in step S201, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in this step S201, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection signal is stored twice after the absence of the detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is no detection signal before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (for example, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal). In the case of the general winning port 226, the central variable winning port 234, the right variable winning port 235, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, It is determined that the starting port 228 has passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (for example, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the basic random number initial value update process (step S203), the value of the counter for generating various random number counter initial values is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and in the subsequent basic random number update process (step S205), the values of the various random number counters are updated. For example, every time the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter makes one round, the value of the generation counter is set in the big hit special figure 1 determination random number counter. The same processing is performed for other random number counters.

  In step S207, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  Subsequently, a winning determination process (step S209) is performed. In the winning determination process (step S209), first, in the case where the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, a prize provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number-of-balls storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original number of prize balls as the storage area.

  Subsequently, in this winning determination process, the first special figure starting port 230 or the second special figure starting port 232 has won a prize, and the number of special figure variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). If this is the case, the predetermined starting information is stored. That is, if the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, the jackpot determination random number value and various special figure determination random number values are stored. The jackpot determination random value is a value obtained by processing the value acquired from the random value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4 (for example, acquired value + value of R register + 1). On the other hand, the special figure determination random number value is a value obtained by processing a software random number derived from the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (software random number value + R register value + 1). A combination of the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 4, the special figure determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 that performs random number processing corresponds to an example of the starting information deriving unit. Various random values (starting information) are stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to a winning order (holding order) in a special-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This special figure storage unit stores a predetermined upper limit number (4 here) of start information derived based on the game ball entering the first special figure start port 230 or the second special figure start port 232. This corresponds to an example of starting information storage means that can store up to. At this time, various random values (starting information) may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in a special storage storage unit. In this case, the temporary area is started. Information storage means may be used, and the reserved storage section and temporary area of the special figure may be used as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the number of reserved special figures stored in the RAM 308, and the number of special figure held increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, when it is detected that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 and the number of the general map variable games held is less than a predetermined number (for example, 2), the general map winning selection at that timing is performed. The value of the random number counter for numerical value generation is stored in a random number value storage area provided in the RAM 308 that is different from that for the special figure, as a normal winning random number value as start information.

  In this winning determination process, the predetermined special ball detection sensor is used to move to the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, the central variable winning port 234, or the right variable winning port 235. The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal figure starting port 228, the central variable are included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 when the winning (winning) is detected. The winning acceptance information indicating the presence / absence of winning (winning) in the winning opening 234 and the right variable winning opening 235 is set.

  Whether the start information of the special figure or the start information of the usual figure, if the number of holdings is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the start information is not stored and the process proceeds to step S211.

  When this winning determination process (step S209) ends, the prefetch process is called. In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not the number of holds has increased from the prefetching process executed last time. That is, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 also stores the number of holds until now (the number of holds at the end of the previous timer interrupt process, which is referred to as the old number of holds). The pending number at the time of executing the current pre-reading process after the winning determination process (step S209) is compared with the old pending number, and it is determined whether or not the pending number is increasing. If the number of holds has not increased, the prefetching process is terminated without prefetching the starting information. On the other hand, if the number of reservations has increased, the increase in the random number for special figure 1 big hit determination in the special memory 1 in the special memory 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the special memory in the special memory in the special memory 2 in FIG. FIG. 2 Prefetch the increase in the random number for jackpot determination. In the prefetching here, only the increment is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that the prefetching here means that the start information is read first before the success / failure determination (final lottery), but in the subsequent prefetching processing, the word “prefetching” is used as the result of the predecessor (prevention / correction (final lottery)). ) May be used to mean read.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is in one of the control states of a special figure low probability state with a relatively low probability of winning a jackpot and a relatively high special figure high probability state. The special figure high probability state is called during probability fluctuation. A probability variation flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the probability fluctuation glag is set to ON, a special figure high probability state (during probability fluctuation) is set, and when the probability fluctuation glag is set to OFF, a special figure low probability state is set.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a pre-adjustment determination table used in the prefetching process. In this success / failure pre-determination table, a random number range is defined for a special figure high probability state and a special figure low probability state. When the pre-reading of the special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is completed, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is determined in advance. The random number range in the table is determined. That is, referring to the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308, in the case of the special figure low probability state, the pre-read special figure 1 big hit determination random value or the special figure 2 big hit determination random value is within a predetermined numerical range. In some cases, the success / failure determination result is determined in advance as “big hit”, and in other cases, the determination result is determined as “losing”. In the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B), which will be described later, the success / failure determination of the special figure variable game is performed again by using the success / failure determination table having the same contents as the previous / failure determination table. The determination result here is only a result of prior determination.

  When the pre-judgment result is “big hit”, the random number value for determining the big hit special figure 1 in the reserved storage part of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or in the reserved memory part of the special figure 2 Prefetch random number for determining special figure 2 for big hits. When the result of the determination in advance is “small hit”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of small hit in the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched, or the reserved memory in the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 for small hits in the department is prefetched. If the result of the preliminary determination is “losing”, the random number value for determining the special figure 1 at the time of losing in the special memory 1 of the special chart 1 provided in the RAM 308 is prefetched or the special memory in the special memory 2 of the special figure 2 is stored. The random number for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss is prefetched. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure prior determination table used in the prefetching process. In the special figure predetermination table, a random number range corresponding to each of the ten types of stop symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J") shown in FIG. 5A is defined. Depending on which random number range the figure determination random number value belongs to, a special figure prior determination result (which stop symbol form shown in FIG. 5A is stopped and displayed) is obtained. Here, the determination result of the special figure is also a result of the preliminary determination, and the determination of the stop symbol form of the special figure is also performed again in the special figure related process (step S213 shown in FIG. 6B) described later. .

  The pre-reading of the start information and the pre-determination using the pre-read start information described above are executed before the success / failure determination (main lottery) of the special figure related process (S213) described later is performed. The main controller 300 that pre-reads the special figure 1 big hit determination random number value and various special figure 1 determination random number values corresponds to an example of the first start information pre-reading means. The main control unit 300 that prefetches the special figure 2 determination random number value corresponds to an example of second start information prefetching means. Further, the main control unit 300 that performs pre-determination based on the special figure 1 big hit determination random value and various special figure 1 determination random numbers corresponds to an example of the first pre-determination means. The main control unit 300 that performs a prior determination based on the random value and various special figure 2 determination random values corresponds to an example of a second prior determination unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 1 divided into areas for each hold and a prefetch information temporary storage section for special figure 2 divided into areas for each hold. It has been. Information representing the special figure pre-determination result (which is also information representing the special figure and hereinafter referred to as prefetch information) is stored in a corresponding reserved area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit.

  If the number of holds has not increased, prefetch information “no hold” is stored in the corresponding hold area of the prefetch information temporary storage unit. Further, in the prefetching process, when the big hit game is being played and when the current control state is the electric support state (the time flag is on), the prefetching and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 1 is performed. In these cases, the “undetermined” information indicating that the stop symbol pre-determination based on the pre-read start information in FIG. 1 is not performed is stored in the corresponding reserved area in the pre-read information temporary storage unit. To remember. That is, it is acquired during a big hit game and during electric support based on entering a starting port where the pair of blade members 2321 are not provided (the first special figure starting port 230 which is a fixed starting region). The pre-determination based on the start information is not performed, and the pre-determination result is not notified (pre-reading notice). By doing so, the fairness of the player is secured. In addition, although the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed, the pre-reading may be performed and the preliminary determination and the result notification (pre-reading advance notice) may not be performed. The notification (pre-reading notice) may not be performed.

  In the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. 6B, the common figure related process is performed following the winning determination process in step S209 (step S211). In this common figure-related process, first, one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the state of the common figure is performed as the common figure state update process. For example, in the process during the normal symbol change display (the value of the above-mentioned general symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns on and off the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is performed. Do. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Further, in the processing at the timing when the normal symbol display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol are displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the universal display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in any one of the display modes (common figure B shown in FIG. 5C). In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the common drawing related processes here. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the lost symbols. Further, after that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 0.6 seconds), information indicating the stop period is always set in the storage area of the normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display. By this setting, the winning symbol that is confirmed and displayed is always stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is informed of the result of the usual figure variation game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set.

  Subsequently, in this general drawing-related lottery process, the opening and closing control of the general figure variable game and the second special figure starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal figure is inactive), and the pending general figure When the number of variable games is one or more, the result of the general variable game is won by the random lottery based on the normal random number value stored in the random value storage area described above, or is not selected A hit determination is performed to determine whether or not, and in the case of winning, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure related process (step S213) is performed following the common figure related process of step S211 described above. In this special figure related process, first, a special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 state update process) is performed, and then a special figure state update process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update). Process). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special figure display device 214 is performed based on the special figure determination result (special figure stop pattern mode), and special figure 2 stop display is being performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. Make settings to indicate this. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a 2R special jackpot symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time shortening symbol (special symbol). Figure D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small (special H), first loss (special) One of the symbols (Fig. I) and the first lost symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, when a value is set in the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, if the value is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the shortest number of times, and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0. In this case, if the special figure probability is not changing, the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during a big hit game (in a special game state) or a small hit game. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 enters the non-electric support state (first entry rate control state) when the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state (in the special gaming state).

  In addition, a predetermined transmission information indicating that a general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S215) to be described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and a pattern for stopping the variable display is displayed. Special figure 2 identification information indicating that it is special figure 2 is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  The RAM 308 also has a big hit flag. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on at the start of the special figure 2 variable game. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, special figure 2 is in operation, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, an image for notifying the player that the big hit game is started is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. In order to wait for a certain period, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command winning effect start setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the central variable winning opening 234 or the right variable winning opening 235, the door member 2341 of the central variable winning opening 234 or the door member of the right variable winning opening 235 A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in an open state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) 2351, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. To do. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the door member 2341 of the central variable prize opening 234 or the right side A signal for holding the door members 2341 and 2351 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2351 of the variable prize opening 235 for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) and provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the door closing time management timer. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process in which the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a big hit Production in the storage area of the production standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period during which the image for informing the player of the end of the game is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Information indicating the waiting period is set.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 changes the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the central variable winning port 234 or the door member 2351 of the right variable winning port 235 during the big hit gaming state (in the special gaming state). This corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing control. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns of the door members 2341 and 2351, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 stores the opening / closing patterns according to whether the special figure variation game is successful or not from the ROM 306. get.

  Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 to be on simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, based on the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to ON when the special figure determination result is “special figure A” or “special figure C” in the special figure lottery process described later. . When the special figure determination result is “special figure E”, only the probability variation flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag. Furthermore, when the special figure determination result is “special figure B” or “special figure D”, only the short time flag is set to ON among the probability variation flag and the short time flag, and the electric support number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is set. Set power support 100 times. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 sets the entry rate control state, which is a state in which the ease of entry (entry rate) of the game ball into the second special figure starting port 232 (variable starting region) is controlled, This corresponds to an example of an approach rate changing unit that changes between a non-electric support state that is an approach rate control state and an electrical support state that is a second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Furthermore, a loss flag is also prepared in the RAM 308. If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure 2 state update process is completed, the special figure 1 state update process is performed. In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process described above is completed, a special figure related lottery process is performed. In the special figure related lottery process, the process for the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 related lottery process) is first performed, and then the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) is performed. In this way, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the same timing (winning determination process in the main control unit timer interruption process started at a predetermined opportunity) When starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 in S209) and starting information is acquired based on the game ball entering the second special figure starting port 232 in S209) If the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied at the same time, or both the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the start condition of the special figure 1 variable game are satisfied Even in such a case, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. The lottery result notification based on the first special figure start opening 230 is prioritized over the lottery result notification based on the winning of the first special figure start opening 230. In the state where only the start information of FIG. 1 among the start information of 2 remains, when the start information of FIG. 2 is newly stored, it is based on the newly stored start information of FIG. The notification of the lottery result is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result based on the already stored start information of FIG. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special drawing related lottery process corresponds to an example of a lottery means (whether or not judgment means).

  In the special figure 2 related lottery process, a lottery (win / no decision) is executed, a special figure to be stopped and determined, and a timer number is determined. First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the second special figure display device 214 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display. Returning, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, the main controller timer interrupt processing Returning to FIG. 5, if the special figure is set to be inactive, it means that the validity determination prohibition condition has not been established, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined validity determination condition has been established. This determination is made by referring to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 to determine whether or not the number of the special figure 2 variable games held is larger than zero. If the number of holds is 0, the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process. If the number is 1 or more, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If a predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, one set of random values (the special figure 2 big hit judgment random number value) which is the start information stored in the past from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308. , Random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of big hit, random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of small hit, and random number value for determining special figure 2 at the time of loss), and starting information (random) The numerical value set) is transferred from the currently stored area to the next area. That is, if the starting information stored in the past is taken out from the holding storage unit of FIG. 2 and the starting information is stored in the holding storage unit of FIG. 2, the Nth oldest starting information is held in FIG. It is set as the (N-1) oldest starting information in the storage unit. Also, 1 is subtracted from the pending number stored in the RAM 308. One set of random values from the reserved storage unit of the special figure 2 of the RAM 308 (the special figure 2 big hit determination random value, the big hit special figure 2 decision random value, the small hit special figure 2 decision random value, and the loss time The main control unit 300 that performs processing for extracting the special figure 2 determination random number value) corresponds to an example of a second start-up information acquisition unit.

  Next, a success / failure determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a determination table for determining whether or not it is correct. The contents of this success / failure determination table are the same as the contents of the previous / failure determination table described above. In the success / failure determination process, the probability variation flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the special figure 2 big hit determination random number value is stored in the success / failure determination table in accordance with the control state (special figure low probability state, special figure high probability state). Based on which of the random number ranges, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” is derived as a result of the determination of success / failure. In the special figure high probability state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the special figure low probability state. Deriving “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing” corresponds to the determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the determination processing here selects lottery means (passage determination means). It corresponds to an example. Further, “big hit” corresponds to an example of a specific determination result.

  When the execution of the success / failure determination process is completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol design determination process. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table. The contents of the special figure determination table are the same as the contents of the special figure advance determination table described above. In this special symbol design determination process, when the result of the determination is “big hit”, based on which random number range in the special symbol determination table belongs to which random number value for determining the big bonus special figure 2 belongs, The special figure determination result is determined as one of “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F”. In addition, when the determination result is “small hit”, the special figure determination result is determined based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random number value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of small hits belongs. Determine "Special Figure G" or "Special Figure H". Further, when the determination result is “lost”, the special figure determination result is set to “special figure determination result” based on which random number range in the special figure determination table the random figure value for determining the special figure 2 at the time of loss belongs. The figure is determined as “I” or “Special Figure J”. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 30 that executes the special symbol design determining process corresponds to an example of a symbol determining unit.

  In the variation time determination process following the special symbol determination process, the variable display period in the special figure variable stop display is determined. In this variation time determination process, a timer number determination random number is acquired from a timer number determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308. The acquisition timing of the timer number determination random number is the timing immediately before the start of the special figure change, but may be the timing of acquiring the start information. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a timer number determination table. In the timer number determination table, a timer number and a random number range corresponding to the timer number are defined for each special figure determination result. The timer number is the time from when the second special symbol display device 214 or the first special symbol display device 212 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. This represents the fluctuation table time period (special figure fluctuation time) to be used, but may be a variation table time period of the decorative symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, timers 1 to 8 are prepared as timers. Timer 1 indicates that the special figure fluctuation stop period will be 2 seconds, resulting in an extremely shortened special figure fluctuation time. Represents that Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 has a special figure fluctuation stop period of 10 seconds. In the timers 1 to 3, the decorative pattern variation pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG.

  The timer 4 indicates that the special figure variation stop period is 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Normal reach is generally a stop display (strictly a temporary stop) of decorative symbols in which two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 3) are equal (first stop and second stop are performed). ) The remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is variably displayed, that is, the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (the symbol display area that is stopped and displayed). Is a state in which a combination of predetermined big hit symbols is stopped and displayed. Timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 60 seconds, and timer 7 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 80 seconds. When the timers 5 to 7 are determined, super reach is selected as the decorative pattern variation pattern in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.).

  The timer 8 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 120 seconds. When the timer 8 is determined, a special variation is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, and the like. When the timer 8 is determined, the full rotation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The The probability that timer 8 is selected is much lower than the probability that other timers are selected, and this full rotation reach corresponds to premier reach.

  Note that the term “reach” simply means a decorative pattern variation pattern including normal reach, super reach, and special variation.

  This reach is after the determination of whether or not the result of the determination of the success / failure (the final lottery) in the special figure related process is a specific determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not the reach is performed is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  In this variation time determination process, the timer number is determined based on the timer number determination random number using the timer number determination table. That is, the timer number is determined depending on which random number range corresponding to the special figure determination result the acquired timer number determination random number belongs to. In determining the timer number, if the timer number determination table defines the timer number according to the number of reservations, the timer number determination random number as well as the current number of reservations shown in FIG. Based on this, the timer number may be determined.

  The timer number representing the special figure variation time described above is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308.

  Before the special drawing lottery-related process is executed (for example, the above-described winning determination process S209), the special figure preliminary determination result is obtained from a plurality of types of timer selection tables including timer numbers as one or a plurality of period information. One type of timer selection table may be selected based on a predetermined dedicated random number lottery, and the timer number may be determined from the timer selection table here. In determining the timer number here, a lottery may be performed using a dedicated random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), or the timer number may be uniquely determined without performing the lottery. . In addition, a timer selection table may be selected in the special drawing lottery related process, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be selected based on the timer selection table.

  When the variation time determination process is completed, other processes are performed, and the special drawing 2 related lottery process is terminated.

  Subsequently, in the special figure related process, a special figure 1 related lottery process is performed. Each process performed in the special figure 1 related lottery process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 related lottery process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted.

  Thus, the special figure related process (step S213) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B ends, and the process proceeds to the command setting transmission process (step S215). In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (for example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect starting command, per round number designation command, winning prize opening command, winning prize closing command, power recovery command, RAM Information that can specify the type of command such as clear command, special figure hold increase command, general figure hold increase command), and bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol, information indicating a control state (information indicating a setting state of a time reduction flag and a probability variable flag), and information indicating a timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, it includes information indicating a special symbol stop symbol (special symbol determination result), information indicating a control state, etc., and in the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command. In the case of a per-round number designation command, information indicating the control state, the number of rounds, etc. are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, the presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, the winning at the central variable winning port 234 Presence or absence, presence or absence of winning in the right variable winning opening 235, and the like.

  In the general command rotation start setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, information indicating the timer number, information stored in the RAM 308 as command data Information indicating the number of the first special figure variable games or the second special figure variable games being set is set. In the general command rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the special figure stop symbol (special figure determination result), information indicating the control state, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-described general command winning effect start setting transmission process, the command data includes information indicating the special figure determination result, information indicating the control state, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. Set the information indicating. The winning effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game start command. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be output to the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, Information indicating the control state, information indicating the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. are set. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the end effect start command transmits an end effect control command to the second sub control unit 500 based on the end effect start command. Receiving the end effect control command, the second sub-control unit 500 displays on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like an image for notifying the player that the predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the big hit game is to end. And the jackpot game ends. The end effect start command here corresponds to a jackpot game end command. In the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set as command data of the special winning opening release command. . In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, the current round number stored in the RAM 308, the information indicating the control state, the first special figure variable game held as command data of the big prize opening closing command Alternatively, information indicating the number of second special figure variable games is set.

  In step S215, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase processing, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data of the special figure hold increase command, the control state And information indicating the stop symbol of special figure 1 or special figure 2 determined in advance (special figure preliminary determination result).

  Furthermore, in this step S215, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command. In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits to the first sub-control unit 400 a general map change start command indicating that the normal map display has started (or is) as a general command-related command. In addition, the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 start (do) the common figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the normal figure has stopped (do) or the pair of blade members 2321. An electric chew opening start command indicating that, or an electric chew closing command indicating that the pair of blade members 2321 are closed (to do) may be transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires the number of remaining rounds until all the rounds are completed based on the number of rounds included in the command and the current number of rounds.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  Next, in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6B, an external output signal setting process (step S217) is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336 shown in FIG.

  In step S219, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S201 described above are read, and the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full error is monitored to open the front frame door. When an error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The device information set here is included in the basic command and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Also, the solenoids 332 shown in FIG. Display data to be output to the normal symbol display device 210, the first special diagram display device 212, the second special diagram display device 214, various state display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  When the device monitoring process in step S219 ends, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6A. Before the return, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is returned to each original register. Make settings and enable interrupts. In addition, before recovery, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power-off is detected), it returns to the power-off state when power is restored. A specific variable or stack pointer for saving is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, subjected to an interruption process such as initialization of the input / output port, and then returned to the main process of the main control unit. Also good.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. An effect involving the operation means, which will be described below, is first controlled by this effect control process. In other words, when a symbol variation start command including information related to the symbol variation time is received, whether or not an effect involving the operation means is executed according to the length of the variation time is determined in this effect control process. When it is determined and executed by the lottery process, the effect data is read from the ROM 406. In accordance with the effect data read here, image display control in each of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is executed in step S313, and for the movable means control, the second sub control unit 500 reads the effect read here. A control command corresponding to the data is transmitted, and is performed by the second sub-control unit 500 in step S713 described later.

  In step S311, it is determined whether or not the chance button 136 has been pressed by detecting the detection signal output from the detection unit 710 via the sensor circuit 428. As a result of the determination here, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is detected, the processing of changing the effect data updated in step S309 to the effect data corresponding to the pressing operation of the chance button 136, or the pressing of the chance button 136 When the operation is valid, processing for preparing production data corresponding to an operation reception production described later is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319, if there is an operation command (movement command or rotation command) to the second decorative symbol display device 208M or / and the third decorative symbol display device 208N in the effect data read out in step S309, The command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, when there is a control command (for example, control commands related to various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, and 224E) to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309. The control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303. If the door opening command has been transmitted from the main control unit 300, the setting for outputting the door opening command to the second sub-control unit is performed in step S321.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms). Run in cycles.

  In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the like. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, initialization processing is executed in S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to the command is read from the ROM 506, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713, a movable means control process is performed, and then the process returns to step S703. In the movable means control processing here, various movable means (chance button 136 capable of executing advancing and retreating operation, transparent portion 191 that can be rotated in the front-rear direction, and eight-position movable object that can be moved up and down are provided from the first sub control unit 400. When a control command relating to 224Fa and the general character 224Fb, which is also a family crest character 224E that can be moved up and down, is received, various processes corresponding to the control command are performed, and various movable units 136, 191, 224Fa, 224Fb, 224E are performed. Control each operation.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (for example, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt processing is performed at a predetermined cycle triggered by this timer interrupt. Run with.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of button effects in stages. In FIG. 9, time elapses in the order of alphabets and the like written in parentheses (the same applies to the following figures unless otherwise noted). The time interval between the alphabet written in parentheses and the alphabet written next in parentheses may be equal or different in one figure. , Equal intervals and different intervals may be mixed (the same applies to the following drawings).

  In FIG. 9, among the three decorative symbol display devices 208208L to 208N, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown, and only the first decorative symbol display device 208L is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, a variable icon display area 208e is provided at the center of the effect display area 208d, and a hold icon display area 208f is located to the right of the variable icon display area 208e. Is provided. A frame-like image indicating the position of the fluctuation icon display area 208e is displayed on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area 208e. This frame-like image is always displayed, but when the display condition is satisfied (for example, when the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area or when it is displayed in the opposite direction, a reach effect is further performed. It may be displayed only when not). Note that only one of the change icon display area 208e and the hold icon display area 208f may be provided.

  One or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed in the hold icon display area 208f. Four hold icons h1 to h4 are displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. These four hold icons h1 to h4 are all displayed as black circles, and the display of white circles with dotted lines indicates that the hold icons are not displayed. The hold icon is an icon indicating that the start of the special symbol variation display or the start of special symbol determination is suspended, and the number of the hold icons to be displayed is basically that of the special diagram variable game. It is the same number as the number of holds. However, there may be a timing at which the display number of the hold icon does not represent the hold number before and after the hold use. The hold icons include the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2, and the hold icon display area 208f may be divided into two to display areas for both icons. Further, the hold icon can be pre-readed about whether or not the hold is appropriate depending on the display mode. As animation related to the hold icon, for example, an increase animation that is executed when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed, and the rank of the hold changes due to digestion of the previous hold, and the hold Moving animation that is executed when the icon moves to another display position (for example, the position on the left), change animation that is executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the look-ahead result, etc. Erase animation executed when the hold icon is deleted, and a save animation executed when the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure is evacuated when the hold of the priority side special figure increases in the priority change machine Etc. In addition to the above animation, the stand-by animation that can be executed independently during the period other than the execution of the animation (for example, the period during which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and can be executed in duplicate with the animation. There is. As an example of this standby animation, an animation that is performed on the spot without changing the display position (for example, a repeated animation of a certain scale of animation) is given as an example. Note that a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  One variation icon can be displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. A star-shaped variation icon c is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9B. The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is consumed and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area 208f to the change icon display area 208e, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon or the change icon moves. May be. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area 208e is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 208f and having the earliest start winning timing is changed to the change icon display area 208e when the hold is consumed. There are a movement animation for moving the icon as a variable icon and a change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon to the display mode of the variable icon. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the variation icon are the same, the execution of the change animation can be omitted.

  The animation related to the fluctuation icon includes a standby animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game, an erase animation executed when the special figure variable game ends and the fluctuation icon is deleted, and a fluctuation icon. There is a change animation executed when the display mode is changed in the middle. These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. Further, the standby animation of the variation icon may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special symbol 2 are displayed on the upper right. The 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 is a round display, and the 4th graphic 2082 of the special figure 2 is a square display. In any of the 4th symbols 2081 and 2082, gray indicates that the symbol is changing, black indicates that the jackpot symbol is stopped (determined display), and white indicates that the lose symbol is stopped (determined display). It represents that. These fourth symbols 2081 and 2082 are also a kind of decorative symbols.

  In addition to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, FIG. 9 includes a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp 220. It is shown.

  In addition, FIG. 9 also shows a chance button 136 on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9, the white display indicates the white lighting state or the non-lighting state of the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136, and the hatched display indicates the chance button lamp 138. Represents the red lighting state. The state in which the chance button lamp 138 is lit red is a state in which pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. The hatched display may be in a lighting state other than red. In addition, although “lit” is used here, it may be “flashing” (the same applies hereinafter).

  The background image of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 is a background image of the castle town. When the background image is a background image of a castle town, the pachinko machine 100 is in the castle town mode among a plurality of types of production modes. That is, the background image and the effect mode are associated with each other.

  In FIG. 9 (a), both the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 display a stop symbol of the losing (determined display), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has a random pattern. A certain “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1” is displayed. In addition, the fourth symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 2082 of the special figure 2 are both displayed in a stopped state. The four first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9A are lit, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays four black circle holding icons, which are the holding indications in FIG. Thus, no variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e.

  In FIG. 9B, the special symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also started. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol is updated (varied display) continuously in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Further, only three first special symbol holding lamps 218 shown in FIG. 9B are lit, and three holding icons (holding icons h1 to h3) are displayed in the holding icon display area 208f of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ) Only, and a star-shaped variation icon c is displayed in the variation icon display area 208e. This is because, among the four hold icons h1 to h4 displayed in FIG. 5A, the hold icon h1 with the oldest start winning timing becomes a change icon, and the change icon display from the hold icon display area 208f. This is a result of moving to the area 208e. Furthermore, the 4th symbol 2081 of the special figure 1 which is a round display is changed to a display during change (gray).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9C, the reach effect is started. Up to now, the variation display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, is reduced in the left corner and is in a reach state with the numeral 3. .

  In this example, when the reach effect is started, the button effect is also started. The button production here is the production that tells the development of super reach. In addition, the button effect may be an effect that tells the type of super reach that develops. When the button effect is started, as shown in FIG. 9D, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 and the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. An arrow display 136b and a character display “push” as a prompt display for prompting (pressing), and a remaining period meter display 136c as a display regarding a period (operation effective period) for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 as valid Are displayed as a set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Further, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 9 is in the initial position at any stage, and the chance button lamp 138 shown in FIG. 9D starts to light in red and prompts to be pressed.

  In this example, the player does not operate the chance button 136 immediately after the button effect is started, but operates (presses) the chance button 136 after a while (see FIG. 9F). When the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button 136, which has been lit in red until then, is switched to lighting in white or turned off.

  When the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a cut-in notice indicating whether or not it is likely to develop into super reach. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (g), the display “CHANCE” is interrupted so as to overlap the background image, and then developed into super reach A as shown in FIG. 9 (h). doing. On the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 9 (h), the character “super reach A” is displayed, indicating that the effect of super reach A is being performed. In this example, the background of the castle town is from the beginning to the end, and the effect display of Super Reach A is also performed in the background of the castle town. Moreover, when the effect display of super reach A is started, all the hold icons h1 to h3 disappear and are not visible. On the other hand, frame-like images indicating the positions of the fourth symbols 2081 and 2082, and the variation icon c and the variation icon display area 208e continue to be displayed. Note that the fourth symbols 2081, 2082, the variation icon c, and the frame-like image may be erased so that they cannot be seen. Super Reach A is not a big hit-determined super reach, but just because it has evolved into Super Reach A does not necessarily mean a big hit. In addition, even if a display that is expected to develop into a super reach called “CHANCE” is made, the super reach is not necessarily started, and the lose symbol is stopped and displayed without starting the super reach. There is also a case. Further, the display “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 9G may be a dedicated display that is not displayed unless the chance button 136 is operated, or a general-purpose display that is displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. It may be.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 9 (g ′) showing another example continued from FIG. 9 (f) in which the chance button 136 is operated (pressed), “unfortunate” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 11 (h ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not develop into a super reach, and the decorative symbol “Lack of decoration 3” − “Decoration 1” − “Decoration 3” is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The combination is stopped. Even if “unfortunately” is displayed, there may be a big hit due to the reverse effect.

  The operation of the chance button 136 is always accepted, but the operation outside the operation valid period is finally treated as invalid, and a new effect such as a cut-in notice is not started. That is, the state within the operation effective period in the pachinko machine 100 is a state (operation effective state) where execution of a new effect such as a cut-in notice is started when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the operation of the chance button 136 may not always be accepted, and control for accepting only the acceptance period may be performed.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining in detail the operation means provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a chance button 136 capable of performing an advance / retreat operation and a transmission part 191 that can rotate in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 10A shows a state in which the chance button 136 and the transmission part 191 are in their initial positions, as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. That is, the chance button 136 does not protrude, and the transmission part 191 is also substantially parallel to the transparent plate member 118. The chance button 136 can be operated (pressed) even in the initial position, and the built-in chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked. Further, the chance button 136 may vibrate, and can vibrate even at the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is vibrating, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be capable of vibrating only at the position where it is pushed.

  FIG. 10B shows a state in which the transmission portion 191 is rotated from the initial position around a drive shaft (not shown) and tilted forward. This drive shaft is a horizontal shaft extending in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 100. The transmission unit 191 rotates forward while the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The transmission part 191 may also vibrate and can vibrate even at the initial position. Further, even in a state where it is inclined forward as shown in FIG. Moreover, the transmission part 191 may rotate in the front-back direction in small increments as strong vibration with a large vibration amplitude. Even when the transmission part 191 is vibrating, the LED built in the transmission part unit 190 can be lit or blinking, and a sound effect or a production sound can be output from the speaker 120. The state (second state) of the transmission part 191 shown in FIG. 10B is closer to the player than the state (first state) in the initial position shown in FIG. The player can operate to push the transparent portion 191 toward the initial position by hand, and the transparent portion 191 corresponds to an example of an operation means. Even when the transmission unit 191 is operated and pushed in, the LED built in the transmission unit 190 is turned on or blinks, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. Note that the transmission part 191 may not vibrate at the initial position.

  FIG. 10C shows a state in which the chance button 136 has started to advance upward from the initial position. The chance button 136 advances while the built-in chance button lamp 138 is lit or blinking, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. FIG. 4D shows a state where the chance button 136 has advanced to the maximum advance position. The chance button 136 can be stopped at one or more positions between the initial position and the maximum advance position. Therefore, it is possible to advance in several stages. Further, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can also vibrate, and in the state of having advanced (protruded), it vibrates laterally or vertically. Also at this time, the chance button lamp 138 can be turned on or blinked, and a sound effect or effect sound can be output from the speaker 120. Furthermore, the chance button 136 that has advanced (protruded) from the initial position can be operated so as to be pushed toward the initial position. Even when the chance button 136 is operated and pushed in, the chance button lamp 138 lights up or flashes, and a sound effect or effect sound is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 may be automatically retracted toward the initial position only by being lightly pressed in the advanced state.

  It should be noted that the vibration of the chance button 136 and the vibration of the transmission part 191 may be a function that appears only in a certain setting state. For example, it may be a function that is manifested by a setting by a player's effect customization function or by a switch setting on the game store clerk side. That is, depending on the setting state, there may be a case where the vibration does not occur at all, or a case where only a part thereof vibrates.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an effect involving operating means in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  Here, as the operation means, the chance button 136 described with reference to FIG. When the operation means A and the operation means B are compared here, the operation means B is an operation means larger than the operation means A (an operation means having a large operation surface), and the operation means A can be operated even at the initial position. Although the means B cannot be operated at the initial position, the operating means B and the operating means A may be reversed, both may be the same size operating means, or the initial position Both may be an operation means that can be operated, or both may be an operation means that cannot be operated. It should be noted that only one type of examples among the plurality of types of operation means listed here may be applied, or multiple types of examples may be applied, or all types may be applied. Also good.

  Further, the operation means described as the transparent portion 191 in the following description can be replaced with other operation means such as a second chance button provided separately from the chance button 136.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (a), the effect involving the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is larger than the effect involving the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). Expectation is high. Further, both the function A are provided, but the function B is provided only in the operation means A. Examples of the function A include a function of vibrating at an operating position and a function of shining. Examples of function B include a function of rotating and a function of vibrating at an initial position. As shown in FIG. 11A, the operation means B is inferior in the number of functions than the operation means A.

  However, as shown in FIG. 11B, both may have the same number of functions. That is, the function B is provided only in the operation means A, but the operation means B may be provided with the function C. As an example of the function C, there is a function capable of performing strong vibration.

  The operation means A and the operation means B may have the same number of functions.

  FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a part of the effect data of the operation means A. Here, the display data on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “liquid crystal”, the operation data on the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, the general character 224Fb and the family crest character 224E is “movable means”, and the audio output data from the speaker 120 is “ “Sound”, frame lamp 122, LED, and light emission data of various built-in lamps are displayed as “LED”, and vibration data of operation means A is displayed as “vibration”. "..." in the figure represents omission of data. Production No. The data of “vibe” in 1 is “E0”, and this “E0” indicates that no vibration occurs. Production No. The data of “Vibration” in FIG. 2 is “E1”, and this “E1” represents that the operating means A is vibrated before the operating means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in No. 2 becomes the production data after operation of the operation means A, and the operating means A that is vibrating before the operation is operated. Then, the effect after the operation is started in accordance with each effect data. Production No. 3 is “E2”, and this “E2” indicates that the operation means A is vibrated after the operation means A (chance button 136) is operated. Production No. The production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED” in FIG. Production No. 2 data and production no. The data 3 may be called even when the operating means B (transparent portion 191) is operated. This is because the production data after the operation of the operation means B can be used for the production data of “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, and “LED”. In this case, after the operation means B is operated, the production No. 2 data or production No. The production according to the production data “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, “sound”, “LED” in the data 3 is started, and the operation means A vibrates according to the data “E1” or “E2”. That is, the production No. The data 2 includes data (E1) that vibrates the operating means A before operating the operating means A, and other data such as “liquid crystal” becomes data after the operating means A is operated. The operation No. When the second data is read, the “vibration” data is also executed after the operation means B is operated in accordance with other data such as “liquid crystal”. In addition, production No. 2 data and production no. 3 is different from at least “Liquid Crystal” data such as “A1” and “A2”, and the “Liquid Crystal” data of “A1” is used after the operation means B is operated. No. Production No. 3 2 data needs to be read.

  The production data related to the operation means B may also be called when the operation means A is operated. After the operation means A is operated, the “liquid crystal”, “movable means”, The production according to the production data of “Sound” and “LED” is started, and the operation means B vibrates according to the data of “Vibration”. However, the effect data related to the operation means B may not be called even when the operation means A is operated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means A and the effect involving the operation means B. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 12A to FIG. 12C, “operation means B related effects” started in response to the operation of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the operation means B are operated in order from the top. Then, the “operation means B operation valid state” that the operation means B related effects will be started, “operation means B operation” indicating that the operation means B is operated, and the operation means A (chance button 136). “Operation means A related effect” that is started in response to an operation, “Operation means A operation valid state” that the operation means A related effect is started when the operation means A is operated, and the operation means A is operated “Operation means A operation” is shown to indicate that. The “operation means B related effects” include effects in which the operation means B itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like. In addition, the “operation means A related effects” include effects in which the operation means A itself vibrates, and effects display, sound effect output, LED light emission, and the like are also included. However, the “operation means A related effects” may only indicate that the operation means A itself vibrates. It should be noted that during the “operation means B operation valid state”, there are cases where a notification prompting the user to operate the operation means B may or may not be performed. There is a case where a notification (operation promotion notification) prompting to operate the means A is performed and a case where it is not performed. If these notifications are made, the player can know that the operation is in an effective state, but if not, each operation means becomes a so-called back button.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12A, the operation means B is not operated during the operation means B operation valid state, but the operation means B related effects are started simultaneously with the end of the operation means B operation valid state. Thus, the “operation means B related effects” may be started even when the operation means B is not operated. The “operation means B related effects” may be effects that always start even if the operation means B is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means B related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated. On the other hand, with respect to the operation means A, the operation means A related effects are started simultaneously with the start of the operation means B related effects without passing through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. . Thus, the “operation means A related effects” may be started even when the operation means A is not operated. The “operation means A related effects” may also be effects that always start even if the operation means A is not operated. Further, the content of the “operation means A related effects” may be varied depending on whether or not the operation means A is operated. In this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is the same as the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 12 (b), when the operation means B is operated during the operation means B operation effective state and the operation means B is operated, the operation means B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation means B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. Also in this example, the execution period of the operation means B related effects and the execution period of the operation means A related effects are the same. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) and the vibration of the operation means A (chance button 136). Starts at the same time and ends at the same time.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 12C, when the operation unit B is operated during the operation unit B operation effective state and the operation unit B is operated, the operation unit B operation effective state is changed to the execution of the operation unit B related effects. Switch. On the other hand, regarding the operation means A, the operation means A-related effect starts simultaneously with the start of the operation means B-related effect without going through the “operation means A operation valid state” and without operating the operation means A. Has been. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, the execution period of the operation means B related effects is longer than the execution period of the operation means A related effects. For example, the vibration of the operation means B (transmission part 191) and the operation means The vibration of A (chance button 136) is started at the same time, but after the vibration of the operation means A is finished first and the vibration of the operation means A is finished, the vibration of the operation means B is finished.

  Note that the start times are the same, and the execution period of the operation means A related effects may be longer than the execution period of the operation means B related effects. Alternatively, the start time is different, the operation means B related effects start first, the operation means A related effects start, the operation means A related effects end first, and then the operation means B related effects end. May be. On the other hand, even if the operation means A related effect starts first, then the operation means B related effect starts, the operation means B related effect ends first, and then the operation means A related effect ends. Good. Also, the end time may be the same, the operation means B related effects start first, then the operation means A related effects start, and the operation means B related effects and the operation means A related effects end together. Or, conversely, the operation means A related effects start first, then the operation means B related effects start, and the operation means A related effects and the operation means B related effects may end together. .

  Also, as described with reference to FIG. 12A, when the operation unit B related effect is executed without operating the operation unit B, for example, the operation unit B related effect is effective for the operation unit B operation. As long as the operation unit B is operated at an early stage, the execution time of the operation unit B-related effects may be increased as long as the operation is performed until the first time has elapsed from the start of the state. become able to.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the execution timing related to the effect involving the operation means. An arrow in each of FIGS. 13A to 13C represents a vibration period of the operating means A.

  The example shown in FIG. 13 (a) is an example in which the decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. When the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, While the vibration of the means A (chance button 136) is started, a judgment effect is started in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like. The judge effect here is a judge effect for a big hit, and corresponds to an example of a first effect. This first effect is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136). The first effect is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136). When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect is ended, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts to display the fluctuation variation of the three decorative symbols as the decorative symbol variable display. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the middle of the execution period of the fluctuation variation display. Eventually, the fluctuation variation display ends, and the combination of the three decorative symbols is confirmed and displayed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13 (a), when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the fluctuation time of the whole decorative symbol is already determined, and therefore the fluctuation variation display of the three decorative symbols is displayed. Thus, the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened swing fluctuation display execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, before notification of the result related to the player's profit, such as a confirmation display, the effect such as the vibration of the operation means A is ended so that the player can concentrate on the notification of the result related to the profit. I have to.

  The example shown in FIG. 13B is an example during a big hit game. When the operation means B is operated while the operation promotion notification of the operation means B (transmission portion 191) is being performed, the operation means A ( The vibration of the chance button 136) is started, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, a judgment effect is started. The judge in the judge performance here is a judge related to whether or not to shift to the probability variation state. When the result of the judge effect is displayed, the judge effect ends, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is notified that it aims at a specific winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) in the next round. The vibration of the operating means A is continued halfway through this notification execution period. Eventually, the next round is started, and it is notified again that a specific winning opening (for example, V winning opening) is aimed.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13B, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the maximum allowable time of one round is already determined, so the specific winning mouth is aimed at the next round. The execution period for notifying this is shortened, and the vibration of the operating means A is continued until shortly before the end of the shortened notification execution period.

  As described above, even during the big hit game, the effect involving the operation means is executed. In addition, the rounds that should aim for the specific winning opening are limited, and if the specific winning opening can be won in that round, the game shifts to a probable state after the big hit game is over. For this reason, the round that should aim for the specific winning opening is an important round that leads to the profit of the player, and before the start of the round that leads to the profit of the player, the effect such as vibration of the operation means A is ended, It is possible to concentrate on aiming for a specific winning opening.

  In addition, the example shown in FIG. 13A and the example shown in FIG. 13B are examples in which the vibration period of the operation unit A remains constant even when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes.

  The example shown in FIG. 13C is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect during the decorative symbol variation display, and the operation means B is operated by the operation means B (transmission portion 191) while the operation promotion notification is being performed. Then, the vibration of the operating means A (chance button 136) is started, and at the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is started. The vibration of the operating means A is continued until the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, and at the same time as the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols is finished, the vibration of the operating means A is also finished. Then, the next pseudo-variable display is started, and the number of pseudo-continuous operations is n-th, and the operation promotion notification of the operation means B is also performed in this n-th pseudo-variable display.

  Here, as shown in the lower timing chart of FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation means B is delayed, the period of the pseudo continuous symbol stop display started by the operation of the operation means B is shortened. The vibration of the operation means A ends at the same time as the stop display of the shortened pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13C, when the operation timing of the operation unit B changes, the vibration period of the operation unit A also changes.

  In summary, including what has been described above, the operating means A can vibrate in a period during which at least a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is being executed. Further, the operation means A may be capable of vibrating during at least a part of a period in which a judge effect corresponding to an example of the first effect is executed. For example, the vibration may end simultaneously with the end of the judge effect, the vibration may continue even when the judge effect ends, or the vibration may end before the judge effect ends. Further, the vibration period during which the operation means A vibrates may be constant, or may be different depending on whether or not the operation means B is operated and the operation timing.

The upper example shown in FIG. 13D is an example in which the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation means A. The final judge effect is a judge related to whether or not a big hit will be made in the variation display during the decorative symbol variation display, or a judge indicating the end of the reach production (the final stage reach production such as strong SP reach). There is. In this upper example,
The period during which the operating means A vibrates is a period in which the operation of the operating means A is treated as valid. When the operating means A is operated, the vibration is finished and the final judgment effect is started. Therefore, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period L1 between the vibration start timing of the operation means A and the start timing of the final judge effect becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer. Even when the operation means A is not operated, the final judgment effect is started. In this case, the period L1 is the longest and has a certain period length.

  On the other hand, in the lower example shown in FIG. 13D, the final judge effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, and the vibration of the operation unit A is also started. Therefore, the vibration start timing of the operating means A and the start timing of the final judge effect are simultaneous, and the period length between them is zero. However, the period during which the operating means A vibrates can be secured for a certain period. The final judge effect here also corresponds to an example of the first effect, is a notice effect that does not use the operation of the operation means A (chance button 136), and is not a notice effect related to the operation means A (chance button 136).

  In addition, while the final judgment effect is started in response to the operation of the operation unit B, the vibration of the operation unit A is started by operating the operation unit A after the operation unit B is operated. As in the example, if the operation of the operation means A is delayed, the period between the start timing of the final judgment effect and the vibration start timing of the operation means A becomes longer, and the period during which the operation means A vibrates becomes longer.

  Next, meter production will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of the meter effect in stages.

  FIG. 14 (1) shows the first decorative symbol display device 208L at the center, the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

  Further, a family crest member 224E (not shown in FIG. 3) is shown below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The position of the family crest character 224E shown in FIG. 14A corresponds to the initial position. Note that the family crest character 224E and the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N have a front-rear relationship (positional relationship in the depth direction), with the crest character 224E being the forefront and the first decorative symbol display device 208L being the most. On the rear side, a second decorative symbol display device 208M and a third decorative symbol display device 208N are arranged between the family crest character 224E and the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  14, which is not shown in FIG. 14, is executed on the first special figure display device 212 (see FIG. 1, etc.) and the variable display symbol (special drawing) executed on the second special figure display device 214 (see FIG. 1, etc.). The variable display symbol (special symbol) corresponds to the first symbol. Also, a variable display symbol (ordinary symbol) executed in the ordinary symbol display device 210 (see FIG. 1 and the like) (not shown) corresponds to the second symbol. Then, the decorative symbol of variable display executed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. In other words, the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 5B displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L corresponds to the third symbol pd3. The third symbol pd3 is an effect symbol representing the first symbol (not shown) with an enhanced decoration. The display of the first symbol is controlled by the main control unit 300, and the display of the third symbol pd3 is controlled on the sub-control units 400 and 500 side. As described above, on the side of the sub-control units 400 and 500, the timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. For this reason, in the first symbol and the third symbol pd3, at least a time lag is generated for a predetermined period of the timer interrupt process on the sub-control unit 400, 500 side. When the symbol pd3 also starts to be changed and the first symbol is stopped, the third symbol pd3 is also stopped. The following description will be made using the third symbol pd3 or based on the third symbol pd3. However, the same thing can be said even if the third symbol pd3 is replaced with the first symbol.

  Further, in FIG. 14, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb are shown above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the 4th symbol pd4 is shown on the right side of the shogunate 224F. The fourth symbol pd4 has a square display and a circle display. The square display corresponds to FIG. 1 and the circle display corresponds to FIG. Whether it is a square display or a circle display, the gray display indicates that the stop symbol of the loss is being displayed in the special figure display device (212, 214), and the black display indicates the special figure display device. In (212, 214), the big hit stop symbol is being displayed, and the white display indicates that the symbol variation is being displayed in the special symbol display device (212, 214). This fourth symbol pd4 may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, may be displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or may be displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208M. It may be displayed on the device 208N, or may be displayed on other display means or dedicated display means. In addition, you may distinguish and display during change display and stop display by lighting of the LED lamp etc. of a board surface. Further, on the upper part of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side, a mini decorative symbol obtained by reducing and displaying the third symbol pd3 is shown, and this mini decorative symbol corresponds to the fifth symbol pd5. The display pattern of the fifth symbol pd5 may be different from that of the third symbol pd3, as long as it is smaller than the size of the third symbol pd3, the display position is different, or the display position is different. Good. The 5th symbol pd5 also performs a variable display and a stop display, and, like the 4th symbol pd4, plays a role of clearly indicating the variation display and the stop display of the 3rd symbol pd3. Accordingly, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 are synchronized with each other. A plurality of the third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed. The third symbol pd3, the fourth symbol pd4, and the fifth symbol pd5 correspond to decorative symbols in a broad sense.

  The state shown in FIG. 14 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is a gray square display and a gray circle display, and both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are being stopped.

  Further, a hold frame UI is shown in the effect display area 208d of the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. The hold frame UI can be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area, and can also be viewed as a user interface that provides various information to the player. The hold frame UI has a variable icon display area in the center, a hold icon display area on the left side, and an effect display area on the right side. In the hold icon display area, four stages hs1 to hs4 corresponding to the maximum number of balls to be held shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 2 are prepared, and one hold icon is displayed for each stage. In addition, the stage corresponding to the number (for example, eight) which added the number of reservation balls of special figure 1 and the number of reservation balls of special figure 2 may be prepared. In the variation icon display area, a stage cs that is higher and larger than the four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the hold icon display area is prepared, and the variation icon is displayed on the stage cs. In addition, the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 14 (1) is provided with a base icon UIb extending in the left and right directions with a vertical stripe pattern, and four stages hs1 to hs4 prepared in the holding icon display area, The stage cs prepared in the variable icon display area can also be viewed as a stage icon displayed overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side. Also, a tutorial display ts is displayed in the effect display area shown in FIG. This tutorial display ts can also be viewed as a tutorial icon overlapping the base icon UIb from the front side.

  In the hold icon display area 208f shown in FIG. 14 (1), one hold icon h1 is displayed, and it is informed that the number of holds in the current special figure is one. In other words, the hold icons are displayed for the number of reserved balls in the special figure, and the older the winning timing is, the closer to the center (right side) is displayed. A first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 14 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a red display mode that is a display mode of a prefetch notice. In addition to the white display mode, which is the default display mode, various display modes are prepared for the hold icon. For each display mode, the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold mode is provided. ). However, even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold is not necessarily a big hit, and there may be a loss. That is, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. In addition, the timing when the hold icon starts to be displayed in the pre-reading notice mode or the default display form and then changes to the pre-reading notice mode is as follows. The winning time can be given.

  In addition, on the stage cs in the variation icon display area shown in FIG. 14A, a variation icon c having a white display mode, which is a default display mode, is displayed. In FIG. 14 (1), as described above, both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 are in a stopped display, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also in a stopped display, but in FIG. 14 (1), in a stopped display. The change icon c is still left without disappearing. In FIG. 14 (2), the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears.

  In addition, a numerical display hn of the number of reservations is displayed in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 14 (1). The numerical value display hn of the number of holdings here indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is “1” and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is “0”. Further, a mini character display (hereinafter referred to as “mini character”) is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This mini character is a display that is displayed regardless of whether the third symbol pd3 (decorative symbol) is displayed in a variable state or not (so-called constant display), and is displayed across the variable display of the third symbol pd3 multiple times. The In the example shown in FIG. 14, the display of the character cd of the lord who becomes the main character is displayed on the display stage ss. The posture of the lord-like character cd shown in FIG. 14 (1) is the initial posture.

  In addition, an information display unit ST1 is provided at the lower part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 14, the name of the background stage is displayed on the information display unit ST1. Here, it is a castle town stage, “castle town” is displayed on the information display section ST1, and the streets of the castle town are displayed in common behind the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The information display unit ST1 may display an effect mode, a current control state (for example, during probability change), a pre-reading notice, or a currently performed symbol. A notice (normal notice) for the variable display may be displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 14A, the speaker 120 is shown in the left corner, and the chance button 136 (corresponding to the first operation means) is also shown in the lower left. A second chance button 137 (corresponding to the second operation means) is also shown on the right side of the chance button 136. The second chance button 137 may be the OK button 181b of the operation key unit 181 shown in FIG. 1 or may be an operating means newly provided separately from the chance button 136.

  Note that the display positions, sizes, and display numbers of the various displays described with reference to FIG. 14 are not limited to those described here, and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 and the fifth symbol pd5 may be displayed with priority over other displays. For example, when movable means such as the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb overlap with the fourth symbol pd4 or the fifth symbol pd5 from the front side, the fourth symbol pd4 or the second symbol A plurality of five symbols pd5 may be displayed, or the display position may be changed according to the movement of the movable means.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the fluctuation icon c disappears, in FIG. 14 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 14 (2). The symbol variation display based on the hold of is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 14 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, and the variable display is also started for the fifth symbol pd5. Note that the third symbol pd3 is a low-speed fluctuation because the fluctuation display has just started. A thick, short arrow with white outline represents a low-speed fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter). During low-speed fluctuations, it may be possible to recognize the changing symbols. Further, the first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 14 (2) moves to the stage cs of the fluctuation icon display area, and the red fluctuation icon c is displayed on the stage cs. Here, the display mode (red) of the icon when it has been a hold icon until then matches the display mode (red) of the icon after it has become a variable icon. The display mode of the variation icon represents the expectation degree (reliability) of the big hit in the symbol variation display being displayed. In other words, the normal notice is executed according to the display mode of the fluctuation icon. Even in a display mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is high, the symbol variation display during display is not necessarily a big hit and may result in a loss. In FIG. 14 (3), the hold icon disappears, and the numerical value display hn of the number of holds displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side becomes “0” for both FIG. 1 and FIG. In addition, the fourth symbol pd4 shown in FIG. 14 (3) shows that the square display corresponding to the special figure 1 has changed from gray to white, indicating that the special figure 1 is being changed. In FIG. 14 (3) where the symbol variation display is started, the display content of the tutorial display ts is not changed.

  The third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 14 (4) fluctuates at high speed. White thin and long arrows represent high-speed fluctuations (hereinafter the same). When it becomes high-speed fluctuation, it becomes difficult to recognize the fluctuating symbol. In FIG. 14 (4), a meter display appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display position of the meter display is above the third symbol pd3, but the display position is not limited to this position. The display size of the meter display is larger than the hold icon and larger than the fluctuation icon c, but the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter display is not only when the third symbol pd3 becomes a high-speed fluctuation, but also when the symbol fluctuation starts, when the movement of the fluctuation icon c is completed, when a prize is awarded to the special figure starting port (when holding increases), At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the third symbol pd3, at the temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect Alternatively, it is possible to enumerate when continuing (at the start of re-variation), when reaching a reach state, when starting a super reach, during super reach, and the like. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the meter display. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. When the meter display appears, the display contents of the tutorial display ts are changed to display contents related to the meter display. The meter display shown in FIG. 14 (4) has a white meter frame mf, and is hereinafter referred to as a white meter display MW. This white meter display MW corresponds to an example of a first meter display. The meter display includes an increase type, a decrease type, and an increase / decrease type. The meter display in the example shown in FIG. 14 is of an increasing type, is provided with five scales, and is full at the sixth stage. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 14 (4) is displayed in an empty state (the meter is 0). This empty state corresponds to an example of the first state.

  In FIG. 14 (5), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 14 (6), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In FIG. 14 (6), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. And in the same figure (7) following FIG. 14 (6), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation | variation is started (1st stop). In addition, the meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. The meter rising item UpI corresponds to the first mini item or the first mini icon (hereinafter the same), and the display position of the meter rising item UpI is a decorative pattern that fluctuates (temporarily stops). Although the position overlaps from the front side, the display position is not limited to this position. Moreover, although the display size of the meter rising item UpI is smaller than the decorative design that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped), the display size is not limited to this size. Furthermore, the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI is the first stop timing, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol variation, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, At the time of winning (when holding increases), at the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to the pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain production, at the time of temporary stop of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous production or continuation Time (at the start of re-variation), start of reach state, start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the meter rising item UpI. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. The meter raising item UpI is an item for raising the meter displayed meter. The meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 14 (7) is white, but as will be described later, a plurality of types of meter rising item UpI are prepared, and the rate of increase of the meter differs depending on the type.

  In FIG. 14 (8), the moving animation of the meter ascending item UpI is started, and the meter ascending item UpI displayed at the position overlapping from the front side on the decorative pattern that is fluctuating (temporarily stopped) is displayed on the white meter display MW. Move from the front side to the overlapping position. In FIG. 14 (9), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 6”) can be recognized. Further, the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by one scale. The color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased is a color different from the meter frame mf (here, blue), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the meter increase timing is the second stop timing, when the third symbol pd3 changes rapidly, at the start of symbol variation, when the movement of the variation icon c is completed, At the time of winning a prize at the starting point (when holding increases), at the start of a pre-reading notice at the time of winning (the meter display itself corresponds to a pre-fetching notice at the time of winning), at the success of a certain production, and at the pseudo-continuous production, When stopping or continuing (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, at the start of super reach, during super reach, etc. can be listed. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the timing of meter increase. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  In FIG. 14 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, and the fluctuation fluctuation starts (second stop), and the second meter rising item UpI appears. The display position of the second meter raising item UpI is a position overlapping the right symbol from which the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) has started from the front side. In FIG. 14 (11), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI is also moved from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 14 (12), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter on the white meter display MW rises (increases) by one scale. As a result, the meter of the white meter display MW has been raised to the second scale.

  In FIG. 14 (13), the change of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”). In FIG. 14 (14), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 14 (15), the cut-in display of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In the cut-in display here, the main character, Tono-sama, appears, and the line “Still Still” is displayed, indicating that re-variation is likely to start. In FIG. 14 (16), the cut-in display disappears, and the state in which the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7” — “continuation” — “decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped is displayed again and temporarily stopped. A character display of “× 2”, which is a continuous count display, is displayed so as to partially overlap the left pattern. In FIG. 14 (17), re-change of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, and each of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol starts high-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 14 (18), the character display of “× 2”, which is the continuous count display, is reduced and displayed in the lower left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 14 in stages.

  In FIG. 15 (19) following FIG. 14 (18), while the three symbols of the third symbol pd 3 continue to fluctuate at high speed, the second decorative symbol display device 208 M on the left starts a notice that a mini item will appear. . That is, a treasure chest icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 15 (20), a closed treasure chest icon I1 is displayed on the information display section ST1. This treasure box icon I1 becomes a notice icon for the appearance of a mini item. In FIG. 15 (21), the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and the meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box. Here, a white meter rising item UpI appears.

  It should be noted that the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 15 (20) is closed without being opened, disappears even when opened, or is an item different from the meter rising item UpI (for example, an item with a question mark) Or x-marked items or unfortunate character display items) may appear. In other words, even if the treasure box icon I1 is displayed, there may be a false notice as a notice that a mini item will appear.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI that appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 18 (22), the moving meter up item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, it appears that the left half of the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half thereof is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs the part of the meter rising item UpI.

  In FIG. 15 (23), the meter rising item UpI is displayed so as to reach the white meter display MW and overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 15 (24), the meter rising item UpI disappears, the meter of the white meter display MW is further increased by one scale, and the white meter display MW is increased to the third scale.

  When the meter rising item UpI is displayed, the meter may always rise, but the meter may not rise. For example, the meter rising item UpI may disappear without reaching the meter display, or the meter may not rise even if it reaches.

  In FIG. 15 (25), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. That is, “Decoration 4” temporarily stops in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fluctuation of the swing is started. A “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. In FIG. 15 (27), the change of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low, and in FIG. The right symbol that has moved to the upper left corner of 208L and also fluctuated similarly moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 15 (29), it has developed into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N remain the background screen of the castle town, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N still displays the display of the character cd on the display stage ss. Then, the information display unit ST1 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. However, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the treasure chest icon I1 disappears.

  In addition, when it develops into a super reach production, the hold frame UI disappears and the tutorial display ts also disappears. Here, no hold icon remains, but if the hold icon remains, the hold icon also disappears. However, only the variation icon c corresponding to the currently performed symbol variation is continuously displayed. However, the fluctuation icon c may also disappear together. Alternatively, when the hold icon remains, the display of the hold icon may be continued. Moreover, the display of the tutorial display ts may be continued, and further, the display of the hold frame UI may be continued.

  In FIG. 15 (30), the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N are all switched to the wilderness background, the information display unit ST1 disappears from the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. The display of the display stage ss and the Tono-sama character cd disappears from the device 208N. However, the fifth symbol pd5 is still displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the numerical value hn of the number of reservations is still displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (30), Tono-sama character and swordsman character are displayed, and a duel scene of two people is started. However, the white meter display MW is still displayed at the top here.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (31), the white meter display MW is enlarged and the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged white meter display MW. The enlarged white meter display MW shown in FIG. 15 (31) is a state where the meter has accumulated up to three scales (corresponding to an example of the second state). In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated. The meter is used from FIG. 15 (32) to FIG. 15 (33), and the white meter display MW is decreasing, and in FIG. 33 (33), the state is 0 (corresponding to an example of the first state). I'm back. In FIG. 15 (34), the white meter display MW that has been enlarged and returned to the 0 state disappears, and a green aura icon OI1 is added behind the main character's character. The color of the aura icon OI1 represents the degree of expectation that is a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. For example, the green aura icon has a higher expectation of jackpot than the blue aura icon, the red aura icon has a higher expectation of jackpot than the green aura icon, and the golden aura icon has a rich hit The rainbow-colored aura icon that changes into seven colors has the highest expectation level for the jackpot, and corresponds to a level higher than the jackpot concentration (for example, the jackpot determination).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 15 (35), a scene after the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed. In FIG. 36 (36), a scene in which the Tono-sama character was lost. Is displayed, and “decoration 3”, which is different from “decoration 4” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner, is displayed as a medium symbol. Thereafter, the symbol variation display is finished, and the third symbol pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 4” is fixedly displayed on the first ornamental symbol display device 208L, and the second ornamental symbol display device is displayed. In 208M, the fifth symbol pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 4” is stopped and displayed. The super reach production here was the Hazle Supa Reach production.

  The examples shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 described above are examples in which the white meter display MW does not change from the empty state (the meter is 0) to the full state, and the big hit symbol is not finally displayed. Become.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example in which a meter effect is performed and a big hit is made.

  Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIGS. 14 to 15 will be mainly described, and overlapping descriptions may be omitted.

  Similarly to the state shown in FIG. 14A, the state shown in FIG. 16A is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6”. Also, the first hold icon (first hold icon) h1 shown in FIG. 16 (1) is a hold icon for the special figure 1 and is displayed in a green display mode that is a display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. The green display mode has a lower jackpot expectation than the red display mode.

  In FIG. 16 (2), after the stop symbol is confirmed and the change icon c disappears, in FIG. 16 (3), the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. The base symbol variation display is started. On the stage cs of the fluctuation icon display area shown in FIG. 16 (3), the fluctuation icon c in green display mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 16 (4), a white meter display MW appears on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 16 (4) is also an increase type, and the display is started in an empty state (a state where the meter is 0).

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 16 (5), the line “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the Tono-sama character cd. The display of the line “Ikuzo” corresponds to a notice that a mini item will appear. In FIG. 16 (6), a change ball icon cI appears, and the Tono-sama character cd carries the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 16 (7), the Tono-sama character cd throws the change ball icon cI, and the movement animation of the change ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 16 (7), the changing ball icon cI is moved from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 16 (8), the changing ball icon cI is displayed in the white meter display MW. The white meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. The display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 16 (8) is changed, and an effect display ed1 is added. In FIG. 16 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with a red meter display MR. The effect that the Tono-sama character cd continues to appear as shown in FIGS. 16 (6) to (8) corresponds to an example of a meter change effect. The red meter display MR corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. The red meter display MR has a higher rank than the white meter display MW (for example, the appearance rate is low), and the meter change effects shown in FIGS. 16 (6) to (8) are a kind of rank-up effects. It corresponds to. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9) is also empty (the meter is 0). Also, a sound effect for notifying the change in meter display is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 16 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 11 (11), the left symbol fluctuates further, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In addition, the character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has returned to the initial posture. In FIG. 16 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. And in FIG. 16 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). Similarly to FIG. 14 (7), the white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. In FIG. 16 (13), as in FIG. 14 (8), the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI moves to the position overlapping the red meter display MR from the front side. In FIG. 16 (14), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) by three graduations. This means that the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 is easier to accumulate than the white meter display MW shown in FIG. In other words, the probability that the red meter display RM displayed in the empty state changes to the full tank state is higher than the probability that the white meter display MW displayed in the empty state changes to the full tank state. It is comprised so that it may become. This is a state change amount (amount of increase by one meter rising item UpI) in the red meter display MR rather than a state change amount (amount of increase by one meter increase item UpI) in the white meter display MW. There will be more. Note that the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased is a color different from the red color of the meter frame mf (blue color here), but may be the same color as the meter frame mf. The timing at which the meter rising item UpI disappears, that is, the timing at which the meter increases, is the same as the timing described in FIG. In FIG. 16 (14), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 starts to slow down, and in FIG. 16 (15), the variation of the right symbol becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration”). 7 ") becomes recognizable, and it will eventually reach the reach state. In FIG. 16 (16), it is a reach state, and the second meter rising item UpI appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. In FIG. 16 (17), the movement animation of the second meter rising item UpI is started, and the second meter rising item UpI is also moved from the front side to the position overlapping the red meter display MR. In FIG. 16 (18), the meter rising item UpI disappears, the meter of the red meter display MR rises (increases) by 3 scales again, and the red meter display MR is in a full state. Note that the “reach” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 16 (18) in which the meter rising item UpI has disappeared and the rising effect of the red meter display MR has ended.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the meter effect shown in FIG. 16 in stages.

  In FIG. 17 (19), which continues from FIG. 16 (18), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. The right design that has moved to the upper left corner of the first decorative design display device 208L and also fluctuated similarly moves to the upper right corner of the first decorative design display device 208L. Then, as shown in FIG. 17 (21), it has developed into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and as in FIG. 14 (29), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the holding frame UI disappears, and the castle town The screen changes from the background screen to the swordsman Misan screen. However, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top. In this super reach production, as shown in FIG. 17 (22), the background of only the first decorative symbol display device 208l among the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N is switched to the wilderness background, and the second decorative symbol is displayed. The background of the display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is still the background of the castle town, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M still has the display of the fifth symbol pd5 and the information display unit ST1. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the display of the display stage ss and the character cd of the lord remains. Also, the full red meter display MR is still displayed at the top here. The super reach effect shown in FIG. 15 may be the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. 17. Conversely, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 17 is the same as the super reach effect shown in FIG. 15. It may be.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 17 (23), the full red meter display MR is enlarged and the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character are hidden by the enlarged red meter display MR. Yes. In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated. Here, because the meter is full, Tono-sama greatly powers up and wins, that is, the expectation of jackpot increases. The meter is used from FIG. 17 (24) to FIG. 25 (25), the red meter display MR decreases, and after passing through the fifth state, in FIG. It corresponds to an example of a state). In FIG. 17 (26), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a gold aura icon OI2 is added behind the main character's character. As described above, the color of the aura icon OI2 corresponds to a color that suggests a big hit in the currently displayed symbol variation display. It should be noted that the color of the aura icon OI2 may be a rainbow color corresponding to a higher level of big hit (for example, big hit determination).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 17 (27), a scene after the swordsman character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed. In FIG. Is displayed, and “decoration 7”, which is the same as “decoration 7” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner, is displayed as a large symbol. In FIG. 17 (29), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 17 (30), these three third symbols are displayed. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability change is won.

  The example shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 described above is an example in which the red meter display MR changes from the empty state (the meter is 0 state) to the full state, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. become. When the red meter display MR changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the jackpot symbol is finally more than when the red meter display MR remains empty and does not change to the full state. It is easy to confirm. Further, in the red meter display MR, when the state changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the empty state does not change to the full tank state. Moreover, the super reach effect demonstrated using FIG. 17 is corresponded to an example of the notice display which a display is started when the red meter display MR changes to a full tank state.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing, in a step-by-step manner, modified examples of effects by the change ball icon cI described with reference to FIG.

  18 (1) to FIG. 18 (6) are the same as FIG. 16 (1) to FIG. 16 (6). In FIG. 18 (7), Tono-like character cd throws a change ball icon cI and changes. A moving animation of the ball icon cI is displayed. In FIG. 18 (7), the changing ball icon cI moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N toward the changing icon c in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. The icon cI hits the variation icon c, and the variation icon c is displayed so as to partially overlap from the front side. Further, the display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 18 (8) is changed, and an effect display ed2 is added. The effect display ed2 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 when the meter display hits as shown in FIG. 16 (8), but may be a different effect display. In FIG. 18 (9), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed2 is added disappears, and the change icon c that has been green so far changes to red. The red variation icon is more likely to win a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display than the green variation icon, and is ranked up here. Note that the rank may be lowered by the change ball icon cI. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the change ball icon cI changes the display mode of the variation icon c, but the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining various types of meter displays in detail. The meter display described with reference to FIG. 19 is an increase type.

  The meter display shown in FIGS. 19A to 19F corresponds to an example of the white meter display MW (first meter display shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 and FIGS. 16D to 8). ). That is, the meter frame mf is a white meter display. The white meter display MW is a default meter display. Further, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19A is in an empty state (a meter is in a 0 state), and corresponds to an example of a first state. Further, FIG. 19A also shows a white meter raising item UpI. The meter rising item UpI is an item whose rate of increase of the meter changes depending on the type of meter display, and the white meter rising item UpI is an item for raising the meter displayed meter by a first amount.

  FIG. 19B shows a state in which the meter of the white meter display MW that has been empty has been raised by one scale by the white meter raising item UpI shown in FIG. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by one scale with respect to the white meter display MW. The state of the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19B corresponds to an example of a second state that is a state between the full state and the empty state.

  FIG. 19 (c) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb having the same color as the color of the meter itself to be increased or decreased. This blue meter raising item UpIb is an item for raising the meter-displayed meter by a second amount.

  FIG. 19D shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW that is in the empty state is raised by two scales by the blue meter raising item UpIb shown in FIG. Has been. The blue meter rising item UpIb is an item to be raised by two scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

  FIG. 19 (e) shows a red meter rising item UpIr. This red meter rising item UpIr is an item for raising the meter-displayed meter by a third amount.

  FIG. 19 (f) shows a state (second state) in which the meter of the white meter display MW that has been empty has been raised by four scales by the red meter rising item UpIr shown in FIG. Has been. The red meter rising item UpIr is an item to be raised by 4 scales with respect to the white meter display MW.

  In addition, a golden meter rising item may be displayed. The meter of the white meter display MW that was in an empty state is in a state where it has been raised by 5 scales (second state) or a full tank state (in which it has been raised by 6 scales) by the golden meter rising item. . Thus, the rate of increase of the meter is not constant and may vary depending on the lottery result or the like.

  The meter display shown in FIGS. 19 (g) to (l) is the red meter display MR (corresponding to an example of the fourth meter display) shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to (18). That is, the meter frame mf is a red meter display. The red meter display MR has a greater amount of meter storage than the white meter display MW. In the increase type meter display, the closer to the full state, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the big hit. Therefore, the expectation level (reliability) of the big hit is higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The higher the degree of expectation for jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol form in the first symbol. Further, the expectation of winning an advantageous jackpot may be higher in the state in which the red meter display MR is displayed than in the state in which the white meter display MW is displayed. The advantageous big hit here is, for example, a big hit with probability variation or a big hit with a large number of rounds with a ball.

  FIG. 19 (g) shows a default white meter rise item UpI, and FIG. 19 (h) shows a red meter display MR meter in an empty state, the white meter rise item. A state (fifth state) is shown that is raised by 3 scales at a time by UpI. The white meter rising item UpI is an item to be raised by 3 scales with respect to the red meter display MR.

  FIG. 19 (i) shows a blue meter rising item UpIb. In FIG. 19 (j), a red meter display MR meter that is empty is displayed by the blue meter rising item UpIb. It shows a state where it has risen by 6 scales at once, that is, a state where the tank is full (sixth state). The blue meter rising item UpIb is an item to be raised by 6 scales (all scales) with respect to the red meter display MR.

  As described above, in the state where the red meter display MR is displayed, the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item UpI is tripled compared to the state where the white meter display MW is displayed.

  In FIG. 19 (k), a green meter rising item UpIm is shown. The green meter rising item UpIm is an item to be raised by 9 scales with respect to the red meter display MR. In the meter display, when the meter is full, the remaining scale (the overflowed scale) may be invalidated. However, in order to handle the remaining scale effectively, the empty meter display is additionally displayed. Is done. The type of meter display that is additionally displayed may be the same as the type of meter display that is full, or may be ranked up. That is, in FIG. 19L, a red meter display MR of the same type as that of the meter display in the full state is additionally displayed below the meter display in the full state. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 19L, a meter display in which the meter frame mf is a gold meter may be displayed below the red meter display MR that is full. The additionally displayed red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 (l) has risen to three scales corresponding to the remaining scales.

  The meter display shown in FIG. 19 (m) and FIG. 19 (n) is a rainbow meter display MN whose meter frame mf is rainbow color. This rainbow meter display MN also corresponds to an example of a fourth meter display. In the state in which the rainbow meter display MN is displayed, the rainbow meter display MN is always full no matter how many colors of the meter rising item are displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (m), even if the rainbow meter display MN is empty, and the white meter rising item UpI, the rainbow meter display MN is full as shown in FIG. 19 (n). Become a tongue. In such a rainbow meter display MN, when the meter rises, the rainbow meter is always full, and further, the jackpot is confirmed.

  However, in the rainbow meter display MN, even if there is a remaining scale (overflowed scale) when the tank is full, the big hit is confirmed, so a new meter as shown in FIG. The display is not added and the remaining scale is invalidated.

  In addition, when one meter rising item is displayed regardless of a color, you may make it raise only by the same scale (for example, 1 scale). In this case, the color of the meter rising item becomes the big hit expectation.

  In addition, the appearance timing of the meter rising item has been described above. However, if supplemented here, the meter rising item may be a big hit during symbol variation, long-term variation, pre-reach, super-reach, or temporary It may be easy to appear when stopping.

  The meter display described above may be a jackpot notice (so-called normal notice) in the symbol fluctuation display (the fluctuation) being displayed when the meter display starts to be displayed, or starts after the fluctuation. It may be a jackpot notice (pre-read notice) in the symbol variation display. That is, in the case of the expected degree of jackpot in the above description, the expected degree of jackpot in the fluctuation may be used, or the expected degree of jackpot in the symbol variation display started after that.

  Also, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (f), the red meter display MR shown in FIGS. 19 (g) to (l), FIGS. 19 (m) and 19 (n). In addition to the color of the meter frame mf, the rainbow meter display MN shown in) may have different display sizes, and may have different display positions. Further, in the white meter display MW, the red meter display MR, and the rainbow meter display MN, the colors of the meters themselves may be different so that all the colors are different.

  Further, when viewed with one meter display, the first state is that the meter frame is white and empty as shown in FIG. 19 (a) and the like, and FIG. 19 (b) or FIG. The intermediate state shown in (f) where the meter frame is white and is neither empty nor full is the second state, and the meter frame is white and full is the third state (not shown in FIG. 19). The meter frame shown in FIG. 19 (g) etc. is red and empty is the fourth state, and the meter frame shown in FIG. 19 (h) is red and is neither empty nor full. Is the fifth state, and the meter frame shown in FIG. 19 (j) is red and full, which is the sixth state.

  Hereinafter, the description of the meter effect will be continued, but the description of matters that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a rank-up effect that tells whether the meter display changes.

  The state shown in FIG. 20 (1) is a stop display of the combination of the decorative symbols of both the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5. However, here, it is a combination of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3”. In this state, there is no special figure hold, and the first symbol pd1 continues to be stopped until it wins the special figure starting port 230,232. Further, a white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The white meter display MW here is empty. The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed from the stage before FIG. 20 (1), and may already be displayed across multiple variations.

  In FIG. 20 (2), there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and in FIG. Then, on the stage cs in the variation icon display area, the display of the variation icon c in the white display mode which is the default display mode is started. Further, even when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the empty white meter display MW is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of the empty white meter display MW is displayed. Continues until FIG. 20 (18).

  In FIG. 20 (4), which is changing the pattern of special figure 1, there is a single ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and in the first stage hs1 of the holding icon display area shown in FIG. Display of the hold icon (the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 1) in the white display form, which is the default display form, has started. Further, in FIG. 20 (6), there is a single ball entrance at the first special figure starting port 230, and the display state of the pre-reading notice is displayed in the second stage hs2 in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. The display of the hold icon in the green display mode (second hold icon h2 in FIG. 1) is started.

  In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 20 (8), “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative pattern of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variation icon c having the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variation icon display area. The white meter display MW continues to be displayed even during the period during which the third symbol pd3 is being stopped (including during fixed display) in FIGS. 20 (1) and 20 (8) to (9). The meter display may be always displayed. That is, the meter display may be displayed across a plurality of variable displays in the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 20 (10), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the change icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 20 (10) is the default display mode, similar to the display mode for the hold icon. In FIG. 20 (9), the hold icon that was the second hold icon h2 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice is shifted and shifted to the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 10 (10). Yes.

  In FIG. 20 (11), a rank-up effect that tells whether the meter display changes is started, and a change icon I2 gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. In FIG. A change icon I2 is displayed on the display unit ST1. The change icon I2 is marked with the characters “weird”.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side shown in FIG. 20 (13), the Tono-like character cd draws a bow, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. It has been changed to "if you win."

  In FIG. 20 (14), the Tono-like character cd releases an arrow, and the arrow icon that is released and represents the arrow is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side. Flying toward the displayed change icon I2. In FIG. 20 (15), the flying arrow icon is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the left half of the arrow icon appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the right half appears to be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. However, the frame surrounding the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M obstructs and part of the arrow icon is invisible.

  In FIG. 20 (16), the arrow icon hits the change icon I2 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M brilliantly. In FIG. 20 (17), the hit arrow icon disappears, and the change icon The display mode of I2 is changed, and an effect display ed3 is added. The effect display ed3 here is the same effect display as the effect display ed1 shown in FIG. 16 (8), but may be a different effect display such as a different color. It should be noted that the character cd displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a different posture from the initial posture although the pose has been changed. In FIG. 20 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added moves from the second decorative symbol display device 208M toward the white meter display MW displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the white icon The meter display MW is displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 20 in stages.

  In FIG. 21 (19) following FIG. 20 (18), the change icon I2 to which the effect display ed3 is added disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is 0). It has changed. That is, the color of the meter frame mf is replaced with a red meter display MR. The red meter display MR shown in FIG. 21 (19) is also empty (the meter is 0). In the rank-up effect described above, the meter display has succeeded in raising the rank from the white meter display MW to the red meter display MR, but may fail. For example, an icon different from the change icon I2 (for example, an icon with a question mark) appears, and the character cd disappears without pulling the bow, or the arrow of the one with the bow pulled. The icon disappears without hitting the icon, and even if the arrow icon hits, the icon disappears without adding the effect display, or even if the effect display is added, the white meter display MW There may be a case where the icon disappears without moving and the meter display remains the white meter display MW without any change. Similarly, even with the change icon I2, the Tono-sama character cd does not draw a bow, the arrow icon does not hit, the effect display is not added, or the white meter display MW does not move. Then, the change icon I2 may disappear, and the meter display may remain unchanged with the white meter display MW. In addition, even if the change icon I2 with the effect display ed3 added or the change icon I2 not added has overlapped with the white meter display MW from the front side, the meter display itself is not ranked up, but the meter may rise. On the contrary, the meter may never rise. Furthermore, the meter display itself may be ranked down (for example, the red meter display MR changes to the white meter display MW).

  In FIG. 21 (20), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. The character cd has returned to the initial posture. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 21 (21), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the losing in the third symbol pd3 is performed, and the variation icon c disappears. The red meter display MR continues to be displayed even during the period in which the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed. Here, the red meter display MR is empty.

  In FIG. 21 (22), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 21 (21) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the meter display. In FIG. 21 (23), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side shown in FIG. That is, as in the example shown in FIG. 15, a treasure box icon gradually appears from the left end of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and in FIG. 21 (25), the closed treasure box icon is displayed on the information display unit ST1. I1 is displayed. In FIG. 21 (26), the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and a white meter rising item UpI appears from the treasure box.

  Next, the movement animation of the meter rising item UpI is started, and the meter rising item UpI that appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves toward the red meter display MR displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Start. In FIG. 21 (27), the meter rising item UpI is located between the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 21 (28), the meter rising item UpI is red. The meter display MR is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In FIG. 21 (29), the meter ascending item UpI disappears, and in the red meter display MR in which the meter can be stored more easily than the white meter display MW, the meter rises by 3 scales at once.

  In FIG. 21 (30), the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 change at a low speed, and in FIG. 21 (31), a reach state is entered. That is, “Decoration 4” temporarily stops in each of the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the fluctuation of the swing is started. In the following FIG. 21 (32), the left symbol that has fluctuated moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has fluctuated also changes to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to the corner. 21 (33), as in the example shown in FIG. 15, has evolved into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. It has changed. However, the red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

  In FIG. 21 (34), the backgrounds of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N all change to the wilderness background, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character. Duel scene of has started. The red meter display MR is still displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 21 (35), the red meter display MR is enlarged and displayed in a state where three scales are accumulated (corresponding to an example of the fifth state). In addition, the text “Power-up” is also displayed to notify the hero of the power-up that the meter has accumulated.

  Note that the meter of the white meter display MW may rise between FIGS. 20 (3) to (10) before the meter display changes.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the rank-up effect shown in FIG. 21 in stages.

  The meter is used from FIG. 21 (36) to FIG. 22 (37), and the red meter display MR decreases. In FIG. 22 (37), the state is 0 (corresponding to an example of the fourth state). I'm back. In FIG. 22 (38), the red meter display MR that has been enlarged and returned to the state of 0 disappears, and a golden aura icon OI2 suggesting a big hit is added behind the main character's character.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 22 (39), a scene after the swordsman character and the swordsman character cut each other is displayed, and in FIG. Is displayed, and “decoration 4” that is the same as “decoration 4” displayed in the upper left corner and upper right corner is displayed as a large symbol. In FIG. 22 (41), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” are displayed in a shaking manner. In FIG. 42 (42), these three third symbols are displayed. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is informed that the jackpot with a short time (electric support) is won.

  In the example shown in FIG. 15 and the examples shown in FIGS. 21 to 22, the meter display is in a state where the same three scales are accumulated, but in the example shown in FIG. 15 which is the white meter display MW, the lost super reach effect is produced. In this example, which is a red meter display MR, it is a big hit super reach production. In this way, the degree of expectation for jackpots varies depending on the meter display itself (here, the meter frame mf) separately from the storage state of the meter. That is, if the meter storage state (including the empty state) is the same, the red meter display MR has a higher expectation level than the white meter display MW.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a re-lottery that may continue from FIG. 22 (41) step by step.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, a red meter display MR having a higher expectation of jackpot than the white meter display MW is displayed, and the red meter display MR is not in an empty state but is in a state where three scales are accumulated. . Therefore, the expectation level for winning an advantageous jackpot is also high, and re-lottery may be performed as shown in FIG. In other words, winning big wins (for example, big hits with probability variation or big hits with many rounds) that are more advantageous when the red meter display MR is stored for 3 scales than the white meter display MW is stored for 3 scales. Expectation to be higher.

  Here, FIG. 23 (42 ′) is changed from a state where three third symbols pd3 “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” shown in FIG. As shown, a button effect is started at the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, the button effects include a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136, an arrow display 136b and a character display of “press” as a prompt display prompting the operation (pressing) of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136. The remaining period meter display 136c as a display relating to a period during which an operation is accepted as valid (operation valid period) is displayed as one set. The remaining period meter display 136c is a display representing the remaining period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. It should be noted that the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the user to press the button image 136a.

  In FIG. 23 (43 ') to (44'), the chance button 136 is not pressed, the operation effective period decreases, and the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (45 '). In response to pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 23 (46 '), the shaking display of "decoration 4"-"decoration 4"-"decoration 4" is "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-" In the same figure (47 '), the combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7" is confirmed and displayed, and it is informed that the jackpot with probability change has been won. Yes. In other words, it is promoted from jackpot with short time (electric support) to jackpot with probability change.

  Even when the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period elapses, the shaking display of “decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4” is displayed as “decoration 7”-“decoration”. 7 "-" decoration 7 "will change to a shaking display, will be confirmed, and will be promoted to a big hit with certainty.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a mini-game that tells whether or not a meter display appears step by step.

  In FIG. 24A, the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 24 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 24 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 24 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is related to the mini-game such as “If you win over drinking”. In FIG. 24 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 24 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image of the townscape of the castle town so far changes to the background image of the mini-game compared to drinking between Tonosama and Sakai. doing. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 24 (6), the first decorative symbol display device 208L for the mini-game background image displays an explanation display indicating that a sword dance meter (meter display) is displayed when Tono-sama wins the mini-game. In FIG. (7), a mini-game for drinking comparison is started. In FIG. 24 (8), the victory of Tono-sama in the mini game is notified, and in FIG. 24 (9), it is displayed that the sword dance meter has been acquired.

  In FIG. 24 (10), the effect display ed4 is displayed together with the sword dance meter on the display of the third symbol pd3 on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Here, it is difficult to visually recognize what color the sword dance meter is displayed by the effect display ed4. In the present specification, the phrase “difficult to visually recognize” means that it is relatively difficult to visually recognize compared to the states before and after that. In FIG. 24 (11), the effect display ed4 disappears, and the white meter display MW, which is a sword dance meter, is clearly displayed.

  If Tono-sama is defeated in the mini game, the sword dance meter is not displayed. The effect by the mini game described with reference to FIG. 24 corresponds to the effect of obtaining the meter display.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a big hit is determined by the change when the meter display is full.

  FIGS. 25 (1) to (9) are the same as FIGS. 14 (1) to (9). In FIG. 25 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, Swing fluctuation is started (second stop), and a golden meter rising item UpIg appears. As described above, the golden meter raising item UpIg raises the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales or 6 scales. In FIG. 25 (10), the white meter display MW stored for one scale is displayed, and the appearance of the golden meter rising item UpIg means that the big hit is determined in the fluctuation. That is, when a meter rising item (gold color here or red as shown in FIG. 19 (e)) that is easy to store the meter appears, a big hit is more likely than a meter rising item (for example, white) that is difficult to store the meter. Expectation increases. In FIG. 25 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 25 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. In the case of an increase of 6 divisions, there is an excess of one division, but since the big hit has been confirmed by the change and the next change will be after the big hit game ends, the remaining one division will continue until the next change. It cannot be carried over and is invalidated. In addition, a voice “congratulations” is output from the speaker 120 illustrated in FIG. The sound output here corresponds to a jackpot notification sound for notifying that the meter is full and the jackpot is confirmed.

  In FIG. 25 (13), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd 3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. In FIG. 25 (14), three third symbols pd3 of “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” − “decoration 7” are displayed in a shake manner. In FIG. 15 (15), the three third symbols pd3 are displayed. pd3 is fixedly displayed, and it is notified that the jackpot with probability change is won.

  The example shown in FIG. 25 described above is an example where the white meter display MW changes from the empty state (the meter is 0) to the full state, and the big hit symbol is finally displayed. When the white meter display MW changes from the empty state to the full tank state, the big hit symbol is finally reached, rather than when the white meter display MW remains empty and does not change to the full tank state. Is easy to confirm. Further, also in the white meter display MW, the case where the state is changed from the empty state to the full state is more than the case where the state is not changed from the empty state to the full state as in the examples shown in FIGS. However, it is easy to finally display the big hit symbol.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the meter display is displayed in the holding frame.

  The holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 26 is also provided with a base icon UIb ′ extending left and right with a vertical stripe pattern. The base icon UIb ′ shown in FIG. 26 is the base icon UIb shown in FIG. Higher than. In addition, an empty white meter display MW is displayed instead of the tutorial display ts in the effect display area provided on the right side in the holding frame UI 'shown in FIG. Since the white icon display MW has a high base icon UIb ′ shown in FIG. 26, the white meter display MW is completely within the holding frame UI ′ and integrated with the holding frame UI ′. It suffices if a part of UI ′ is covered. In other words, the meter display only needs to partially or entirely overlap with the holding frame UI ′, and the holding frame UI ′ corresponds to an example of a holding display area in a broad sense, and is also an example of an icon display area. Equivalent to. In the example shown in FIG. 26, the meter display is always displayed in the hold frame UI '. That is, the meter display is also displayed during the period in which the hold frame UI 'is displayed, and the meter display also disappears when the hold frame UI' disappears. However, the tutorial display ts is always displayed, and the meter display may be displayed instead of the tutorial display ts only when the meter is produced.

  In FIG. 26 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 26 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 26 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 26 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Then, the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 26 (5), the dialogue “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini-item appearance notice is performed. In FIG. 26 (6), a white meter rising item UpI has appeared, and the Tono-sama character cd carries the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 26 (7), the character cd of Tono throws the meter rising item UpI, and the meter rising item UpI is displayed on the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. Note that the meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 26 (7) does not overlap with the white meter display MW, but only partially overlaps the base icon UIb '. You may display so that all may overlap.

  In FIG. 26 (8), the meter rising item UpI disappears, and the white meter display MW changes to a state where one scale is accumulated. In the central portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 26 (9), a tutorial display such as “Continue when meter is full” is displayed.

  In FIG. 26 (10), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. (11), the fluctuation of the left symbol becomes even slower, and the left symbol (here “ The decoration 7 ") can be recognized. In FIG. 26 (11), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 also changes from high speed fluctuation to low speed fluctuation. Then, in FIG. 26 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops, and fluctuation fluctuation starts (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. In FIG. 26 (13), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves to above the white meter display MW in the holding frame UI '. In FIG. 26 (14), the variation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 6”) can be recognized. Further, the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW rises (increases) to a full tank at once.

  In FIG. 26 (15), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued the high-speed fluctuation in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”). In FIG. 26 (16), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 6 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous production is started. In FIG. 26 (17), similarly to FIG. 14 (15), the pseudo-continuous effect cut-in display is performed so as to overlap the entire third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 26 (18), the cut-in display disappears, re-variation of the third symbol pd3 in the pseudo-continuous effect is started, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol each start low-speed variation, and the left symbol A character display of “× 2”, which is a continuous count display, is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps. The white meter display MW that has been in a full state continues to be displayed until re-variation is started, but the white meter display MW returns to an empty state in response to the start of re-variation. Then, after the pseudo-continuous effect continues, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol variation display currently being performed.

  In the pseudo-continuous production described with reference to FIG. 26, the meter display (in this case, the white meter display MW, but other meter display (for example, the red meter display MR)) may be full. This corresponds to an example of a notice display that is displayed when the display changes.

  The white meter display MW may continue to be displayed in a full state until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Alternatively, the full white meter display MW may be displayed only until the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous symbol (start of the pseudo continuous effect) in FIG. 26 (16), and may return to an empty state.

  The timing at which the meter display returns to the empty state is the symbol variation display (including the symbol variation display subject to notice when the meter display is a normal notice), or the meter display. If the symbol is a prefetching advance notice, it is the symbol fluctuation display immediately before the symbol change display subject to the prefetching notice, or in the symbol change display subject to the prefetching notice, it is empty when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. You may return to the state. For example, in each of the symbol variation displays described above, the state may be returned to the empty state when the symbol is stopped without being full. That is, the second state may return to the first state, or the fifth state may return to the fourth state. Further, in the second state or the fifth state, it may be configured to always return to the empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or displayed. Alternatively, even in the third state or the sixth state, it may be configured to always return to an empty state at the timing when the lost symbol is stopped or confirmed. In addition, the meter display may be returned to the empty state and the display of the empty state may be continued only after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the next symbol variation display starts immediately without any subsequent hold. If not, the meter display may disappear, but the display may continue in an empty state. In addition, when there is a subsequent hold and the next symbol variation display is started immediately, the meter display may continue to be displayed in an empty state.

  Further, the white meter display MW may be changed to the red meter display MR within the holding frame UI ′, or the red meter display MR may be displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which a mini item is acquired and stocked when the meter display meter is full.

  FIGS. 27 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 14 (1) to (6). In FIG. 27 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Also, a red meter rising item UpIr appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This red meter rising item UpIr is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

  In FIG. 27 (8), the movement animation of the red meter rising item UpIr is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr moves from the front side to the position overlapping the empty white meter display MW. In FIG. 27 (9), the variation of the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. Further, the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased (increased) by 4 scales.

  In FIG. 27 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swinging fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. In addition, the golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the reach state is formed or at the timing before and after. In FIG. 27 (11), the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps the white meter display MW stored for four scales. In FIG. 27 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW becomes full. The golden meter rising item UpIg is an item for raising the meter of the white meter display MW by 5 scales. If the white meter display MW stored for 4 scales, the scale of 3 scales (overflow) However, in FIG. 27 (12), the remaining scale is not displayed at all. In FIG. 13 (13), the mini-item is displayed at the right end of the full white meter display MW. A pseudo-announcement item NI, which is a type, appears, and a character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap from the front side on the right symbol or the like temporarily stopped in the third symbol pd3. The pseudo-continuous notice item NI is an icon for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be started thereafter, and the character display “GET” is a character display indicating that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been acquired.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27 (14), the “decoration 7” is in the reach state. In the reach state, the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, the character display “GET” disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. And it is displayed on the information display part ST1. The second decorative symbol display device 208M functions as a means for displaying the stocked icon, and the pseudo continuous notice item NI is stocked.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 27 (15), the remaining three scales are added to the empty white meter display MW. In other words, the display of the overflowed state due to the full tank state is started at this timing. The opportunity to raise the white meter display MW continues after this.

  The white meter display MW in FIGS. 27 (12) to (15) described above is not ranked down, but the portion that has become full is replaced with the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the remaining portion. Is displayed again.

  In FIG. 27 (16), the pseudo continuous announcement item NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to change at high speed, and the pseudo continuous announcement item NI is digested. In addition, a text display of “Activate” is displayed below the pseudo-continuous notice item NI displayed at the position of the middle symbol. The character display of “Activation” is a character display indicating that the pseudo-announcement item NI is activated, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started immediately thereafter.

  In FIG. 27 (17), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 is fluctuating (temporarily stopped). The middle symbol here is a pseudo-continuous symbol ("continuation"), and the entire third symbol pd3 ("decoration 7"-"continuation"-"decoration 6") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous effect starts. Is done.

  In the example described above, when the meter display becomes full, various mini items appear without being limited to the pseudo-continuous notice item NI, and the appearing mini items can be stocked. If the mini item that appears is an item related to jackpot (for example, a pseudo-announcement item NI), the meter display full state is equivalent to high expectation of jackpot, Eventually, the big hit symbol is easily displayed.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example in which a plurality of items are stocked in a single full meter display.

  FIGS. 28 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 14 (1) to (6). In FIG. 28 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). Further, two meter rising items, a red meter rising item UpIr and a blue meter rising item UpIb, appear at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. That is, a plurality of meter rising items appear simultaneously.

  In FIG. 28 (8), the movement animation of the two meter rising items is started, and the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb move from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW in the empty state. To do. As described above with reference to FIG. 19, the red meter rising item UpIr is an item for raising the white meter display MW meter by 4 scales, and the blue meter rising item UpIb is an item for raising 2 scales. is there. In FIG. 28 (9), the meter rising item of both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW that has been empty until now is the red meter rising item. Ascending up to 4 scales as UpIr and ascending by 2 scales as blue meter rising item UpIb, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 28 (9) is full.

  In FIG. 28 (10), at the right end of the full white meter display MW, two pseudo-announcement items NI which are a kind of mini-item appear, and “decoration 7” of the right design temporarily stopped, etc. One character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the example shown in FIG. 27, the white meter display MW is filled up with one red meter rising item UpIr, but in this example, there are two red meter rising items UpIr and blue meter rising item UpIb. White meter display MW is full with meter rising items. Whether the red meter rise item UpIr or the blue meter rise item UpIb, the meter rise rate is higher than the default white meter rise item UpI, and the red meter rise item UpIr and the blue meter rise item UpIb This is an easy-to-store item. From this, it can be said that there is a high possibility that a plurality of items can be stocked when a meter rising item that easily stores the meter appears. The red meter display MR may be more likely to be able to stock a plurality of items than the white meter display MW.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 28 (11), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, and the character display “GET” disappears. One pseudo continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and two pseudo continuous notice items NI are stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 28 (12), the white meter display MW in an empty state is still displayed, and the opportunity to raise the white meter display MW remains after this. When there is no chance or when the big hit is confirmed, the white meter display MW may be erased when it becomes empty or may be erased after returning to the empty state. Also, one of the two pseudo-continuous notice items NI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed. “Activate” is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 28 (12), first, one pseudo-continuous notice item NI is digested, and the entire third symbol pd3 is temporarily stopped and re-variation is started. Then, a second temporary stop and a start of re-variation are performed by the stocked second pseudo-continuous notice item NI.

  Of the items stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, there are items that can be carried over until the next symbol variation display (for example, pre-reading notice items), but they cannot be carried over and are currently being carried out. There is also an item (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice item NI) that is digested during the symbol change display.

  Also, as in the example shown in FIG. 28, there may be a case where a plurality of items are stocked with one meter full, but on the contrary, there are cases where an item is not stocked even when the meter is full. May be. For example, when the white meter display MW becomes full due to the white meter rising item UpI, the pseudo continuous notice item NI itself does not appear or is not stocked even if it appears.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the meter display in a full state may be carried over to the next symbol variation display.

  FIGS. 29 (1) to (8) are the same as FIGS. 28 (1) to (8). In FIG. 28 (9), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes slowly. Thus, the right design (here “decoration 1”) can be recognized. In addition, the meter rising item of both the red meter rising item UpIr and the blue meter rising item UpIb disappears, and the white meter display MW meter that has been empty until now becomes full even in the example of FIG. It has become. However, as shown in FIG. 29 (10), in this example, an item such as the pseudo-continuous notice item NI does not appear, and the full state of the white meter display MW is maintained. Further, in the third symbol pd3, “decoration 1” different from the left symbol of “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. That is, it does not enter the reach state as in the example shown in FIG. In FIG. 29 (10), the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in response to the white meter display MW becoming full, and the display content is related to the pre-reading notice such as “next chance”. .

  In FIG. 29 (11), the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd 3 becomes slow, and the middle symbol (here “decoration 1”) can be recognized. In FIG. 29 (12), three third symbols pd 3 of “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1” are displayed in a shaking manner. This combination of “decoration 7”-“decoration 1”-“decoration 1” is an opportunity, and in FIG. 29 (13), the first ornament symbol display device 208 </ b> L according to the shaking display (temporary stop) of the chance. The flash pattern fd emits light with a transparent light guide plate arranged on the front side of the light. Note that the flash symbol may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L instead of the light guide plate.

  In FIG. 29 (14), the third symbol pd3 of the chance chance is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, indicating the loss of the special symbol 1 in FIG. In FIG. 29 (15), the third symbol pd3 of chance is confirmed and the fluctuation icon c disappears. Also, in response to the final display of the third symbol pd3, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed again, and the display content suggests a chance item such as “the order of 711”. Even if the third symbol pd3 is displayed in a stopped state or a final display, the full white meter display MW is still displayed. In FIG. 29 (16), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 29 (15), that is, the next symbol fluctuation display is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Has been. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the full white state meter display MW continues to be displayed in a full state and is displayed across the continuous symbol variation display. The full white meter display MW in FIGS. 29 (9) to (15) corresponds to a pre-reading notice, and the full white meter display MW in FIG. 16 (16) corresponds to a normal notice.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing, in stages, an example in which the meter display is full and the item is digested without being stocked even if the item appears.

  FIGS. 30 (1) to (6) are the same as FIGS. 14 (1) to (6). In FIG. 30 (7), the left symbol (here “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. The shaking fluctuation is started (first stop). In addition, a golden meter rising item UpIg appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after that. This golden meter rising item UpIg is displayed at a position overlapping the left symbol from the front side.

  In FIG. 30 (8), the movement animation of the golden meter rising item UpIg is started, and the golden meter rising item UpIg moves from the front side to the position overlapping the empty white meter display MW. In FIG. 30 (9), the variation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes even slower, and the right symbol (here “decoration 7”) can be recognized. Further, the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is full.

  In FIG. 30 (10), the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 temporarily stops, starts swinging fluctuation (second stop), and a reach state is formed. At the same time as the reach state is formed, or at the timing before and after the reach state, an operation means notice display icon 136I which is a kind of mini item appears on the right end of the full white meter display MW, and the third symbol pd3 is displayed. Among them, the character display of “GET” is displayed so as to overlap the temporarily stopped right symbol or the like from the front side. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon for notifying that an effect of the operation means notice (for example, button notice) will be started thereafter, and the character display “GET” has acquired the operation means notice display icon 136I. It is a character display showing that. The operation means notice display icon 136I is an icon imitating the operation means (here, the chance button 136), and the operation means notice display icon 136I shown in FIG. 30 (10) is a white icon. The white color here means that no change occurs even if the operating means is operated. That is, an effect (for example, a notice effect) according to the operation of the operation means is not started. Therefore, it can be said that the operation of the operation means has not been accepted, or that the operation has been invalidated as accepted. In the following description, it is assumed that the operation of the operation unit is not accepted, and that the operation is invalidated as accepted, and the operation of the operation unit is invalid. This color indicates that the operation is invalid.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L in the reach state shown in FIG. 30 (11), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state, and the character display of “GET” disappears and continues. In FIG. 12 (12), the operation means notice display icon 136I displayed at the right end of the white meter display MW moves to the position of the middle symbol during high-speed fluctuation, and changes the display mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 30 (13), the button effect is started for the middle symbol. Also in the button effect here, as with the button effect shown in FIG. 23, the button image 136a, the arrow display 136b and the character display of “press” as the promotion display, and the remaining period meter display 136c are one set. Is displayed. Further, red is a color that prompts the operation means to operate, the button image 136a is displayed in red, and the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the user to press the button.

  In FIG. 30 (14), the chance button 136 is not pressed and the operation effective period is reduced, but the chance button 136 is pressed at the next timing (15) in FIG. In response to pressing of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 30 (16), the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the third symbol pd3 from the front side. This character display corresponds to a normal notice.

  In the example shown in FIG. 30 described above, the item acquired by the meter full is used immediately. That is, the acquired item is used without moving to a decorative symbol display device that is different from the decorative symbol display device whose display has been started. It is also used during symbol variation display that is being performed when display is started. However, there may be cases where the operation means notice display icon 136I remains white and is stocked until the operation valid period of the operation means arrives, and in some cases, stock until the next and subsequent symbol fluctuation display may be stocked. Also good.

  Even if the chance button 136 is not pressed within the operation effective period, after the operation effective period has elapsed, the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed and the normal notice is executed.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and both of them disappear.

  In FIG. 31 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is finished, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. The 4 symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented. In FIG. 31 (2), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is displayed, and the change icon c disappears.

  In FIG. 31 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 31 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. As shown in FIG. 31 (4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, after the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is started, an empty white meter display MW (for example, on the upper left of the third symbol pd3) , Corresponding to an example of the first meter display). Next, as shown in FIG. 31 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3. Here, the display of the two white meter displays MW is started separately, but the display may be started together.

  In FIG. 31 (7), a red meter rising item UpIr appears in the left pattern of the temporarily decorated “decoration 7”, and in FIG. 31 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed on the left white meter display MW. To the position where it overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 31 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears, and only the meter on the left white meter display MW is increased by four scales.

  In FIG. 31 (10), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears in the right pattern of “decoration 7” temporarily stopped, and in FIG. 31 (11), the gold meter rising item UpIg is displayed on the right white meter display MW. To the position where it overlaps from the front side. In FIG. 31 (12), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and only the meter on the right white meter display MW is raised by 5 scales.

  In FIG. 31 (13), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”), and in FIG. 31 (15), the pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops) and overlaps the pseudo-continuous symbol from the front side. Three white meter rising items UpI are displayed. As shown in FIG. 31 (16), two of these three white meter rising items UpI move to the left white meter display MW, and the other one moves to the right white meter display MW.

  In each of the two white meter displays MW shown in FIG. 31 (17), the meter is raised by the meter raising item UpI that has moved. That is, the white meter display MW on the left side rises by two scales and becomes full, and the white meter display MW on the right side rises by one scale and becomes full. Furthermore, when the tank is full, a chance-up item CUI appears on the left white meter display MW and a character display of “GET” is displayed. On the right white meter display MW, the swordsman reach item RI is displayed. A character display of “GET” is displayed as it appears. The chance-up item CUI that appears on the left white meter display MW is an icon indicating that the degree of expectation to be a big hit in the current symbol change display has increased, and the swordsman reach item that appeared on the right white meter display MW RI is an icon for notifying that it will develop into a swordsman reach that is a kind of super reach production in the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 31 (18), each of the two white meter displays MW that have been full disappears, the character display of each “GET” also disappears, the chance-up item CUI, the swordsman reach item RI, and the second decorative design It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Note that each of the two white meter displays MW that are full may be changed to an empty state without erasing them. As shown in FIG. 31 (18), the meter display may be turned off.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example in which two meter displays are displayed and only one of them disappears.

  In the third symbol pd3 shown in FIG. 32 (1), “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the lost symbol, is stopped and displayed, and in FIG. The combination of the decorative pattern of the symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the variation icon c having the white display mode disappears from the stage cs in the variation icon display area.

  In FIG. 32 (3), the variable display of the third symbol pd3 by the hold of the special figure 1 represented by the first hold icon h1 which is the default display mode is started, and the first hold icon h1 is changed to the change icon c. doing. The variation icon c shown in FIG. 32 (3) is a default display mode similar to the display mode for the hold icon. In FIG. 32 (2), the hold icon that was the second hold icon h2 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice is shifted and shifted to the first hold icon h1 in FIG. 32 (3). Yes.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 32 (4), after the variation display of the third symbol pd3 is started, the empty white meter display MW (for example, the first symbol pd3 is displayed on the upper left of the third symbol pd3). Equivalent to an example of meter display). Next, as shown in FIG. 32 (5), an empty white meter display MW (for example, corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display) is displayed at the upper right of the third symbol pd3.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 32 (6), the dialogue “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini-item appearance notice is performed. In FIG. 32 (7), a change ball icon cI appears, and the character cd of Tono-sama bears the change ball icon cI. In FIG. 32 (8), Tono-sama character cd throws the change ball icon cI, and in FIG. 32 (9), the change ball icon cI hits the right white meter display MW, and the right white meter display MW It is displayed so as to overlap the right end from the front side. The display state of the change ball icon cI shown in FIG. 32 (9) is changed, and an effect display ed1 is added. The change ball icon cI displayed with the effect display ed1 added at the right end of the right white meter display MW is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Yes. In FIG. 32 (10), the change ball icon cI to which the effect display ed1 is added disappears, and only the white meter display MW on the right side changes to the red meter display MR while being in an empty state (the meter is 0). Yes. That is, it corresponds to an example in which the fourth meter display is changed from the first state to the fourth state. A plurality of meter displays MW may change at the same time. That is, according to this example, the white meter display MW on the left side may be changed to the red meter display MR while remaining empty (the meter is in the zero state) together with the white meter display MW on the right side.

  In FIG. 32 (11), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 32 (12), the left symbol temporarily stops and starts fluctuation fluctuation (first Stop). In addition, a blue meter rising item UpIb appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after. That is, one blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of “decoration 7” from the front side.

  In FIG. 32 (13), the split animation of the blue meter rising item UpIb is started, and one blue meter rising item UpIb is split into two, the left empty white meter display MW and the right side A blue meter rising item UpIb is displayed on each empty red meter display MR. As described above, the blue meter rising item UpIb is an item that is raised by 2 scales for the white meter display MW and is raised by 6 scales for the red meter display MR. In FIG. 32 (14), the left and right blue meter rising items UpIb disappear, the white meter display MW meter on the left side rises only by two scales, whereas the meter on the right red meter display MR It is rising to a full tank at once. In the red meter display MR on the right side that is full, a swordsman reach item RI appears and a character display of “GET” is displayed. It should be noted that no item has appeared in the left white meter display MW that has not reached the full state.

  In FIG. 32 (17), only the red meter display MR on the right side, which is full of two meter displays, disappears, and the character display of “GET” also disappears, and the swordsman reach item RI is the second decorative pattern. It moves to the display device 208M and is stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in FIG. 32 (17), the third symbol pd3 is stopped and displayed, and the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, indicating the loss of the special symbol 1 in FIG. In FIG. 32 (18), the third symbol pd3 is confirmed and the variation icon c disappears. After all, the stock swordsman reach item RI was not used in the symbol change display at the time of appearance. Accordingly, the swordsman reach item RI here corresponds to a pre-reading type icon for notifying the development of the swordsman reach which is a kind of super reach production in the next symbol variation display.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 32 in stages.

  In FIG. 33 (19) following FIG. 32 (18), the symbol variation display based on the hold of the red first hold icon h1 which is the pre-reading notice mode of FIG. In the 3 symbol pd3, the low speed fluctuation is started. Note that the fluctuation icon c is also displayed in a red display mode, and functions as a normal notice. Further, the white meter display MW on the left side accumulated up to two scales shown in FIG. 32 (18) is still displayed even after a new symbol variation display is started, and has been carried over to the next symbol variation display. become. That is, a continuous symbol variation display is straddled with the meter accumulated.

  In FIG. 33 (20), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. 33 (21), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In FIG. 33 (22), the left symbol variation becomes even slower, the left symbol (in this case “decoration 7”) can be recognized, and the right symbol in the third symbol pd3 also changes from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation. Has changed.

  In FIG. 33 (23), the left symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation of the shake starts (first stop). In addition, a white meter rising item UpI appears at the same time as the temporary stop of the left symbol or at the timing before and after.

  In FIG. 33 (24), the movement animation of the white meter rising item UpI is started, and the white meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. In FIG. 33 (25), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW is increased by one scale. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (25), the vehicle enters the reach state, and the sound “reach” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 33 (26) after entering the reach state in this way, the swordsman reach item RI stocked in the second decorative symbol display device 208M is activated, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays the character “invoking”. Is displayed. In FIG. 33 (27), the left symbol that has been fluctuating moves to the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol that has also fluctuated is the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Move to. The white meter display MW displayed at the upper left also moves to the center position. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (28), it has developed into a super reach production (swordsman reach production), and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has changed from a castle town background screen to a swordsman visit screen. The swordsman reach item RI has disappeared from the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 33 (28). The swordsman reach production started in this way is the same as the swordsman reach production shown in FIG. 17 (22) and later, and detailed explanation is omitted, but here, the white meter display MW has been stored only up to 3 scales. Nevertheless, in FIG. 33 (33), a golden aura icon OI2 is added behind the Tono-sama character. In the example shown in FIG. 15, in the power-up from the white meter display MW that has been stored only up to three scales, the green aura icon OI1 is shown in FIG. 15 (34), but this is shown in FIG. In the example, if multiple meter displays are displayed in the previous symbol variation display, it is easier to hit big than the case where only one meter display is shown, and the color of the aura icon is also a color with high expectation of big hit It becomes easy to become. Even when a plurality of meter displays are displayed, a meter display different from the white meter display MW (for example, a red meter display MR or the like) is displayed rather than only the default white meter display MW. Is displayed more easily, and the color of the aura icon is likely to be a color with a higher expectation level for the jackpot.

All of the meter displays so far are of the increase type, and the display was started in the empty state (the meter is 0), but the meter display is between the empty state and the full state. The display may be started in the state (second state or fifth state).

  FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the display is started in a state where the increase type meter display is accumulated halfway.

  In FIG. 34 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 34 (2), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  In FIG. 34 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 34 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and here, a character string such as “when the meter appears with a little accumulated” scrolls in the tutorial display ts. Displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation, and the display is started on the third symbol pd3 while the white meter display MW is accumulated from the beginning to the middle. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 34 (4) is a state in which one graduation is stored, and corresponds to an example of a second state. In addition, a “chance” sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 34 (4) in accordance with the appearance of the meter display in a state where the meter is accumulated halfway.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 34 (5), the dialogue “Ikuzo” is displayed on the display of the character cd of Tono-sama, and a mini item appearance notice is made. In FIG. 34 (6), a golden meter rising item UpIg appears, and the character cd of the lord carries the golden meter rising item UpIg. In FIG. 34 (7), Tono-like character cd throws a golden meter rising item UpIg, and the golden meter rising item UpIg is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. ing. In FIG. 34 (8), the gold meter rising item UpIg hits the white meter display MW and is displayed so as to overlap the white meter display MW from the front side. In FIG. 34 (9), the golden meter rising item UpIg disappears, and the white meter display MW changes from a state of being stored by one scale to a full state. Since the gold meter rising item UpIg is an item that raises the meter at least for 5 scales, when the display is started with the meter display accumulated halfway, when the golden meter rising item UpIg appears, The meter is full.

  In the white meter display MW, the big hit symbol is finally determined when the state of being stored halfway is changed to the full tank state than when the state of being stored halfway is not changed to the full tank state. Easy to display. Furthermore, in the case where the white meter display MW is displayed in the state where it is accumulated halfway, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the display is started in an empty state. The same applies to the red meter display MR.

  In the state where the meter is stored halfway (second state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item is increased. For example, compared with the state where the meter is 0 (first state), the rate of increase of the meter by the meter increase item may be doubled.

  So far, the bar type (gauge type) meter display has been described, but the meter display may be a display indicating a numerical value.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a meter effect by meter display showing numerical values in stages.

  In FIG. 35 (1), the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed, and the tutorial display ts has a display content such as “When the meter is red”. A white numerical meter display DW appears on the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 35 (2), and a sound effect (appearance) appears from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Sound) is output. The white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 35 (2) corresponds to an example of the first meter display, and its state is a state where the numerical value is 00%. This state is an example of the first state. Equivalent to. In FIG. 35 (2), the tutorial display ts has changed to display contents such as “Meter MAX reached”.

  In FIG. 35 (3), the eight-spot actor 224 Fa that is one of the movable means falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208 L. According to the operation of the movable means, a white meter rising item UpI appears as shown in FIG. However, the falling Yatsushiro character 224Fa is located in front of the white meter rising item UpI, and a part of the white meter rising item UpI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 35 (5), the white meter rising item UpI moves downward, the overlap with the falling Yatsushiro character 224Fa is eliminated, and the visibility of the meter rising item UpI is improved. In FIG. 35 (6), the eight generations 224Fa rises and returns to the initial position, and the movement animation of the white meter raising item UpI is started. The white meter rising item UpI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. The white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 35 (6) is located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the white meter rising item shown in FIG. 35 (7). The UpI is displayed at a position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW. The numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW shown in FIG. 35 (7) is temporarily difficult to visually recognize due to the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 35 (8), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, the visibility of the numerical display of the white numerical meter display DW is restored, and the numerical display increases from 00% to 10%. Yes. The state of the white numerical meter display DW that performs 10% numerical display shown in FIG. 35 (8) corresponds to an example of the second state.

  In FIG. 35 (9), the shogunate 224Fb falls from above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown in FIG. 35 (10), a change ball icon cI appears at a position behind the general character 224Fb in accordance with the movement of the general character 224Fb, which is a movable means. A part of the change ball icon cI is relatively difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 35 (11), the change ball icon cI moves downward, the overlap with the falling general character 224Fb is eliminated, and the visibility of the change ball icon cI is improved. In FIG. 35 (12), the general character 224Fb moves up and returns to the initial position, and the change ball icon cI moves from the front side to the position overlapping the white numerical meter display DW displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. doing. In FIG. 35 (13), the change ball icon cI disappears, and the white numerical meter display DW until then changes to a red numerical meter display DR (corresponding to an example of a fourth meter display). In other words, the meter display is replaced with a different type. The change of the meter display here is not made by the accumulated numerical value but by a change effect (in this case, an effect using the change ball icon cI). Further, the rate of increase of the numerical value varies depending on the relationship between the color of the numeric meter display and the color of the meter rising item, that is, the relationship between the type of the numeric meter display and the type of the item, as in the description using FIG. To do.

  In FIG. 35 (14), there is one ball in the first special figure starting port 230, and the first stage hs1 in the holding icon display area shown in FIG. Should be displayed. However, in FIG. 35 (15), the green meter rising item UpIm is displayed at the display position of the first hold icon h1, and it is difficult to confirm the presence of the first hold icon h1. . In FIG. 35 (16), the green meter rising item UpIm moves from the front side to the position where it overlaps the red numerical meter display DR, and the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. The presence of the hold icon h1 can be confirmed. Note that the hold icon may be displayed on the near side of the meter rising item.

  The appearance of the meter rising item here is triggered by winning a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, but it may be triggered by winning a prize at the usual figure starting port accompanied by a prize ball, or accompanied by a prize ball Regardless of whether or not it is possible to trigger a game ball passing through the usual figure starting gate, it may be triggered by winning a prize at the second special figure starting port 232 (electric Chu), or there is only a prize ball It may be triggered by winning a prize in the general winning opening 226, or may be triggered by entering a ball outlet for production.

  Further, when the meter display is displayed, the item (not limited to the meter rising item, for example, a chance-up item) can be obtained by winning or entering the special drawing start opening 230, 232, etc., compared to the case where the meter display is not displayed. CUI, swordsman reach item RI, etc.) are likely to appear.

  In FIG. 35 (17), the green meter rising item UpIm disappears, and the numerical display of the red numerical meter display DR increases from 10% to MAX. This MAX is a display representing 100%, for example. The state of the red numeric meter display DW shown in FIG. 35 (17) corresponds to an example of a sixth state.

  In the meter effect shown in FIG. 35, when the numerical meter display is in the MAX display state, as shown in FIG. 35 (18), the character display of “Gekiatsu” is displayed so as to overlap the numerical meter display from the front side. . The character display of “Gekiatsu” may be a display indicating that the big hit in the change is rich or that the big hit is confirmed.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the numerical meter display shown in FIG. 35 changes in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  FIG. 36 (1) shows that the third symbol pd3 is changing at high speed. In FIG. 36 (2), there is one ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the holding shown in FIG. In the first stage hs1 of the icon display area, the display of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 is started. The first hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 36 (3) is a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 displayed on the white round icon in red to prompt the operation. That is, the display mode of the first hold icon h1 is a so-called button hold display mode. In addition, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 is also lit in red to prompt the operation. In FIG. 36 (4), the chance button 136 is operated.

  In FIG. 36 (5), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the white numerical meter display DW is changed to the red numerical meter display DR. On the other hand, in the display mode of the first hold icon h1, the button image 136a is eliminated, and only the white round icon, that is, the default display mode is set. Here, when the chance button 136 is actually operated, the first hold icon h1 does not change to the display mode of the prefetch notice, even though the first hold icon h1 is in the button hold display mode. The meter display has been replaced with a different type of meter display. This is an effect of notifying the big hit with the change, and in the case of a pre-reading notice for notifying the big hit after the next change, the first hold icon h1 may be changed to the display form of the pre-reading notice. Note that the numerical meter display can also be used as a pre-reading notice (for example, carry over to the next change after the MAX display).

  Thus, when the meter display is displayed, the hold icon for the button hold is more likely to be displayed when winning or entering the special figure starting port 230, 232 or the like than when the meter display is not displayed.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of effects different from the meter effects described so far in stages.

  In FIG. 37, the display showing a certain amount or number is displayed as in the meter display described so far, but here, the appearance number of characters is used instead of the meter. The display using the number of appearances of the character corresponds to an example of the first meter display or an example of the fourth meter display.

  In FIG. 37 (1), the variation display of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. . In FIG. 37 (2), the combination display of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is displayed, and the change icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  In FIG. 37 (3), the symbol fluctuation display based on the hold of the first hold icon h1 of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 37 (2) is started, and the low speed fluctuation is started in the third symbol pd3. Further, the display content of the tutorial display ts is changed in accordance with the start of the variable display of the third symbol pd3, and the display content is “When a character appears”. In FIG. 37 (4), the third symbol pd3 starts high-speed fluctuation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (5), the third symbol pd3 disappears, and the background image of the streets of the castle town disappears so far. The silhouettes of the four characters are displayed in a horizontal row. The state shown in FIG. 37 (5) corresponds to an empty state (a state where the meter is 0) in the meter display, that is, no character display, ie, the first state or the fourth state. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the fifth symbol pd5 is continuously displayed.

  In FIG. 37 (6), the princess Chibi character display cd1 appears at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “3 more people”. In FIG. 37 (7), a heel character display cd2 appears at the left end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the character display changes to “two more”. In FIG. 37 (8), a princess character display cd3 appears on the left side of the little princess character display cd1, and the character display changes to “one more person”. The state shown in FIG. 37 (6), the state shown in FIG. 37 (7), and the state shown in FIG. 37 (8) correspond to the second state or the fifth state, respectively.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37, when three people are gathered, as shown in FIG. 37 (9), a character display of “failure” is displayed, and all the members cannot be assembled, and the first decorative design shown in FIG. The display device 208L returns to the background image of the castle town, and the display of the variable display of the third symbol pd3 is resumed. Then, in FIG. 37 (11), the display of variation of the third symbol pd3 and the fifth symbol pd5 is ended, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 5”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. ing. In FIG. 37 (12), the final display of the combination of the decorative pattern of the lost pattern in the third pattern pd3 is performed, and the change icon c disappears. Further, the fourth symbol pd4 is also displayed as a gray square and a gray circle, and the loss of the special figure 1 is represented.

  Note that the color of the character's silhouette is usually gray, but when the other person is left, the silhouette of the remaining one character may be displayed in red. In this case, the set of all four persons is confirmed, and the display of the red silhouette corresponds to a notice of success. The state in which all four people are gathered corresponds to the full state in the meter display, that is, the third state or the sixth state. In this example of gathering characters, when all four people are gathered, the expectation level of jackpot is very high, and the level of jackpot may be high, or a level higher than the jackpot density (for example, jackpot confirmation). Moreover, even if all four people do not gather, it does not become “failure”, and a degree of expectation of jackpot may be given to some extent, or even if only three people gather, there may be a big hit due to the change Alternatively, there may be a case where a big hit is caused by a symbol variation display started after the variation.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a case where an error occurs during the meter display.

  FIGS. 38 (1) to (4) are the same as FIGS. 32 (1) to (4). In FIG. 38 (5), a dish full tank error occurs, which is shown in FIG. In the upper center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (just above the third symbol pd3), an error display ER1 such as “please remove the sphere” is displayed. The error display ER1 hides the right half or more of the empty white meter display MW displayed at the upper left of the third symbol pd3. That is, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the white meter display MW from the front side. Note that at least a part (for example, all) of the error display ER1 may be displayed overlapping with at least a part (for example, all) of the white meter display MW from the front side. Further, the error display ER1 may be a display having transparency, and may overlap the meter display from the front side or the overlapping part may be seen through.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 38 (6), the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation, and in FIG. However, a part of the error display ER1 is displayed overlapping the part of the left symbol (here, “decoration 7”) that is temporarily stopped, from the front side, while the fluctuation fluctuation is started (first stop). Note that at least a part (for example, all) of the error display ER1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part (for example, all) of the decorative symbol from the front side. Thus, the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the meter display and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3.

  In FIG. 38 (7), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed so as to overlap the left symbol of the third symbol pd3 from the front side. In FIG. 38 (8), the red meter rising item UpIr is displayed. However, it has moved from the front side to the position where it overlaps the white meter display MW. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with a part of the red meter rising item UpIr from the front side. In FIG. 38 (9), the red meter rising item UpIr disappears and the meter on the white meter display MW should have risen by 4 scales, but the right half or more of the white meter display MW is hidden by the error display ER1. As a result, it is impossible to confirm how far the meter has risen. However, from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 38 (9), four notes are output here as one note rises by one scale. Note that the meter storage (rising state) is not limited to the output sound from the speaker 120, but can also be notified by the light emission mode of light emitting means such as lamps and frame lamps around the decorative symbol display device.

  In FIG. 38 (10), the fluctuation of the right symbol of the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and in FIG. 11 (11), the right symbol temporarily stops and the fluctuation fluctuation starts (second stop), 2 A white meter rising item UpI, which is the first meter rising item, appears so as to overlap the right symbol from the front side. As shown in FIG. 38 (12), the white meter rising item UpI is also moved from the front side to the position overlapping the white meter display MW. However, a part of the error display ER1 also overlaps with a part of the white meter rising item UpI from the front side. In FIG. 38 (13), the white meter rising item UpI disappears, and the meter of the white meter display MW should have increased by one scale, but the error display ER1 still overlaps, so how far the meter has increased Although it cannot be confirmed whether or not it has been performed, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 38 (14), a white meter rising item UpI has appeared without the mini item appearance notice shown in FIG. 26 (5) and the like, and Tono-sama's character cd bears the meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 38 (15), Tono-sama character cd throws a white meter rising item UpI, and the white meter rising item UpI hits the white meter display MW and should be displayed on the white meter display MW. However, since the error display ER1 overlaps, it is difficult to confirm the white meter rising item UpI. In FIG. 38 (16), the white meter display MW should have increased by one scale by the white meter increase item UpI. However, since the error display ER1 still overlaps, how far the meter has increased. However, the sound of one note is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Although not shown in the figure, the white meter display MW partially shown in FIG. 38 (16) is in a full state, and a full notification sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. It is output.

  In FIG. 38 (18), a pseudo-continuous notice item NI, which is a kind of mini item, appears at the right end of the full white meter display MW, and at the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3. Although the character display of “GET” is displayed, the error display ER1 overlaps both the pseudo-continuous notice item NI and the character display of “GET”, and it is difficult to recognize that the pseudo-continuous notice item NI has been acquired. .

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the error display ER1 shown in FIG. 38 in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (19) following FIG. 38 (18), the character display “GET” disappears, and the pseudo-continuous notice item NI moves to the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Stocked on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (20), the white meter display MW that has been full until then changes to an empty state. The white meter display MW is continuously displayed in an empty state. In FIG. 39 (21), the pseudo continuous announcement item NI stocked in the second decorative design display device 208M moves to the position of the middle symbol that continues to fluctuate at high speed, and the pseudo continuous announcement item NI is digested. An error display ER1 overlaps from the front side on the pseudo-continuous notice item NI that has moved to the position of the symbol, making it difficult to view. In FIG. 39 (22), the fluctuation of the middle symbol that has continued to fluctuate at high speed in the third symbol pd3 becomes low speed, and the middle symbol can be recognized. Here, the middle symbol is a pseudo-continuous symbol (“continuation”). In FIG. 39 (23), the pseudo-simultaneous symbol fluctuates (temporarily stops), and the entire third symbol pd3 (“decoration 7”-“continuation”). "-" Decoration 1 ") is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous effect is started. The error display ER1 also overlaps with the pseudo continuous symbol (“continuation”) from the front side, and the error display ER1 is displayed with priority over the pseudo continuous symbol.

  In FIG. 39 (24), the error display ER1 is still displayed, and in this example, the ball removal operation has not been performed until the end. That is, when the ball removal operation is performed, the error display ER1 such as “please remove the ball” is automatically hidden. In other words, if the error is resolved, the error display ER1 automatically disappears.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the player cannot visually confirm the state of the meter display (for example, the degree of accumulation, etc.), so the player is concerned about the state of the meter display. May display the error display ER1 superimposed on the meter display so that the ball removal operation can be performed quickly. In addition, since the meter display tends to be good for the player when accumulated, the player's line of sight is likely to gather all the time, and the error display ER1 is displayed on the meter display so that the error display ER1 can be easily noticed. There is also an effect.

  Also, in this example, a prize winning error that is more serious than the dish full error occurs, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (24) has a display size larger than the display size of the previous error display ER1. Thus, an error display ER2 for notifying the occurrence of a winning abnormality error is displayed. This error display ER2 overlaps the error display ER1 from the front side in addition to the third symbol pd3, and is displayed with priority over the third symbol pd3 and the error display ER1. It may be possible to tell that a serious error has occurred by overlapping another error display ER2 on the error display ER1. It should be noted that the error displays do not necessarily have to overlap with each other, and at least the display size may be larger for a serious error. As an example of the serious error mentioned here, an error detected by the main control unit 300 or the payout control unit 600, an error that cannot be resolved without calling a store clerk, or an error display is automatically displayed even if the error is resolved Errors that are not hidden (cannot be deleted) can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as serious errors. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Alternatively, the more serious the error is described in the list shown in FIG. That is, the most serious error is a magnetic (magnet) detection error. On the other hand, as an example of a minor error, an error detected by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, an error that can be resolved only by the player, and an error display is displayed when the error is resolved. Errors that automatically disappear (disappear) can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as minor errors. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Further, among minor errors, there may be an error in which the meter display is preferentially displayed or the third symbol pd3 is preferentially displayed.

  Further, the error display in FIGS. 38 and 39 is the same in various error displays described in FIGS. 124 to 126 described later. In particular, the notification content described as “liquid crystal display” in the “mode” in FIG. 126 showing the notification mode of error notification of various errors can be replaced with the error display in FIGS. 38 and 39.

  In the present specification, the description of “a certain display overlaps with another display from the front” is replaced with the description “at least a part of the display overlaps at least a part of the other display from the front”. All of one display may overlap all of the other displays from the front side, all of one display may overlap a part of the other display from the front side, The part may overlap all other displays from the front side, or a part of one display may overlap a part of the other display from the front side. Further, in the present specification, the description of “a certain display overlaps with another display from the front side” can be read in reverse, that is, “the other display overlaps with a certain display from the front side”.

  In the above description, the meter display is an increase type in which a display indicating a certain amount or number only increases. However, even if the display indicating a certain amount or number increases or decreases, Of course, it may be of a decreasing type in which the display representing a certain quantity or number only decreases.

  The meter display includes a white meter display MW, a red meter display MR, a rainbow meter display MN, a white numerical meter display DW and a red numerical meter display DR shown in FIGS. Although the display using the number of appearances of the character shown in 37 has been described, the display is not limited to these, and the display may indicate a certain amount or number of hands, or display using the number of figures and symbols. Also good.

  Furthermore, although the red meter display MR changes from the white meter display MW, the display of the red meter display MR itself may be started independently, instead of the change from the white meter display MW. Alternatively, the red meter display MR may be a meter display that is not displayed unless changed from the white meter display MW.

  Further, the red meter display MR may change when the white meter display MW is stored halfway, and the display of the white meter display MW may be taken over and the display may be started with the halfway stored. Alternatively, the display of the red meter display MR itself that has been stored halfway may be started alone. In these cases, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the display is started halfway than when the display is started in an empty state.

  Furthermore, it may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when the red meter display MR is stored halfway than when the white meter display MW is stored halfway.

  In addition, in the above description, it is easy to “definitely display a jackpot symbol in the end”. The statement to that effect is “easy to win a jackpot that is more advantageous than an unfavorable jackpot”. It can be replaced with a statement to that effect.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) is used. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and will be described more specifically with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 40 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied.

  In the encapsulated pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 40, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 41), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, an appropriate number of symbols are printed at equal intervals on a belt-like member, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by sticking this belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown in FIG. 41) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the rear surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, each time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted one by one. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  41 is provided with the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Furthermore, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 41, the display panel 1070 displaying the title of the device and the like can protrude toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 41 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
“A game machine having display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N],
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, red meter display MR, rainbow meter display MN, white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. Numerical type meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.]
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, a white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 or the like, and a left meter display shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17). 32 (4) to FIG. 18 (18), the left meter display, or the white numeric meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36].
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the like, and a right meter display shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17)]. 32 (5) to FIG. 15 (15), the right meter display, the red numeric meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters shown in FIG. ,
The first meter display is a display that may change from a first state [for example, an empty state (a state where the meter is 0)] to a third state (for example, a full state),
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from a fourth state [for example, an empty state (a state where the meter is 0)] to a sixth state (for example, a full state),
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, rather than when the first meter display remains in the first state and does not change to the third state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 25 or the example shown in FIG. 31]
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, rather than when the fourth meter display remains in the fourth state and does not change to the sixth state. [For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 or the example shown in FIG. 32]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the first meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The fourth meter display may be an analog meter display or a digital meter display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be meter displays having different display modes. Furthermore, there may be a period in which the first meter display and the fourth meter display are displayed simultaneously. That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be a display that is always displayed simultaneously, or may be a display that may be displayed simultaneously. Alternatively, the first meter display and the fourth meter display may be displayed separately without the period.

  The display means may be means for surely displaying a plurality of types of meter displays. The first meter display may be a display that always changes from the first state to the third state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that always changes from the fourth state to the sixth state.

Also,
'The fourth meter display displayed in the fourth state is more than the sixth meter display than the probability that the first meter display displayed in the first state changes to the third state. The probability of changing to the state of is configured to be higher,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the amount of one state change in the fourth meter display may be larger than the amount of one state change in the first meter display.

  Further, when the fourth meter display is changed from the fourth state to the sixth state, the first meter display is changed from the first state to the third state. Finally, the big hit symbol may be easily displayed.

Also,
“The first meter display is a display in which the display is started in the first state [for example, in the case of FIG. 16 (4)],
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in the first state is changed [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed in the fourth state, and the fourth meter display from the first meter display in the first state to the fourth state in the fourth state. The meter display may change, or the first meter display in the first state may change to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

  In addition, the first meter display in the third state is not changed to the fourth meter display, but the first meter display in the second state is changed to the fourth meter display. You may be there.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts in the first state. Further, the fourth meter display may be a display that always starts display in the fourth state. When the first meter display changes to the fourth meter display, the first meter display in the first state always changes to the fourth meter display in the fourth state. Alternatively, the first meter display in the first state may always change to the fourth meter display in the fifth state.

Also,
“The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect of changing the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, a meter using the change ball icon cI shown in FIGS. 16 (6) to (8). Change production],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth effect may be a so-called rank-up effect. More specifically, it may be an operation means effect (button effect), and the first meter display may change to the fourth meter display in response to the operation means being operated.

  Note that the fourth effect may always be started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed.

  Here, the first meter display is a display in which the display is ended by the fourth effect, and the fourth meter display is a display in which the display is started by the fourth effect. Also good. That is, the first meter display disappears, and the display of the fourth meter display is started. For example, the first effect is started in a state where the first meter display in the first state is displayed, and when the first effect ends, the first meter display disappears and the first effect is displayed. You may be comprised so that the display of the four meter display may be started.

Also,
The fourth production is a production using a fourth character.
In the case where the fourth character is displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol display by the display means [for example, FIG. 16 (1) and FIG. ] Is a character [for example, Tono-sama character cd],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the “decorative display of the decorative pattern” means that the decorative display of the variable display is being displayed, and includes the display of the variable display when the variable display is started again with the stop display interposed therebetween. Moreover, it can also be regarded as 1 fluctuation | variation from the start of a fluctuation | variation display to a fixed display. Furthermore, “stretching” means that a decorative symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched between them. Further, the fourth character may be a character that is continuously displayed during the display of the variation display of the decorative design, or may be a character that disappears in the middle. Further, the character may be displayed continuously during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or may be a character that disappears in the middle of the display, or it may continue to disappear during the display of the stop display. May be a character.

  Note that the fourth character may be a character that is displayed without fail over a continuous variation display of the decorative design.

Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display by the display means [for example, FIG. 20 (1), FIG. 20 (8) to FIG. ) White meter display MW]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the first meter may be a display that may be started during the display of the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display is started during the display of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The display may be a display that is continued until the stop display is being displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display that is always displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display.

  Here, the first meter display is a display that may change state during display of the decorative symbol variation display by the display means, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbol by the display means. It may be a display in which the state may change during the display of the variable display. The first meter display may be a display that always changes state during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the fourth meter display is always displayed during the display of the variation display of the decoration symbol. The display may change in state.

  Further, the fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed during display of the decorative symbol variation display by the display means, and the fourth meter display is a display of the decorative symbols by the display means. When the display is started during the display of the variable display, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol may be more easily stopped and displayed than the lost symbol. That is, the display of the fourth meter display is started during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the big hit symbol is stopped, rather than during the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol in which the loss symbol is stopped. Cheap. When the display is started, the fourth meter display may be a display that is always started during the display of the decorative symbol variation display.

Also,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The variation display of one of the plurality of decorative symbol variation displays is a variation display of the first decoration symbol [for example, the variation display stopped and displayed in FIG. 20 (1)]
The variation display of the decoration symbol of one of the plurality of decoration symbol variation displays is a variation display of the second decoration symbol [for example, the variation display of FIGS. 20 (3) to (9)],
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a fourth decorative display [for example, the display of FIGS. 20 (10) to 21 (21)].
The decorative display of one of the plurality of decorative displays of the decorative pattern is a fifth decorative display of the decorative display [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 21 (22) to 22 (42)],
The variation display of the first decoration design and the variation display of the second decoration design are continuous display variations of the decoration design,
When the first meter display is in a different state between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display [for example, at the timing of FIG. In contrast, when the meter rises at the timing shown in FIG.
The variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol are continuous variation display of the decoration symbol,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol [for example, empty at the timing of FIG. 21 (19). The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 21 (29) in contrast to the state of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, after the variable display of the first decorative symbol is finished, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started, and after the variable display of the second decorative symbol is finished, the fourth decorative symbol is displayed. After the fourth decorative symbol is displayed, the fifth decorative symbol is displayed. After the fifth decorative symbol is displayed, the sixth decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative display of the decorative pattern may be started. In this case, when the variation display of the fifth decorative symbol is finished, the big hit symbol may be stopped. Alternatively, when the variation display of the sixth decorative symbol is finished, the big bonus symbol is stopped. It may be displayed.

  The first meter display may be a display in which the state is necessarily different between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display, and the fourth meter display is The display may always be different between the fourth decorative symbol variation display and the fifth decorative symbol variation display.

Also,
“The fourth meter display is a display that starts displaying in the fourth state [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9), etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  As described above, the fourth state may be an empty state.

  By doing so, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the change to the sixth state (for example, the meter is full) from the time the meter appears or changes.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that may start display in the fourth state, or may be a display that always starts display in the fourth state. .

Also,
[The fourth meter display is the fourth state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 16 (9)] to the fifth state [for example, the state accumulated from the third scale shown in FIG. 16 (14)]. The display may change to
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 16 (18)],
The fourth meter display is a display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9), etc.] that may be displayed in the fourth state.
The fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed in the fifth state,
When the display of the fourth meter display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the fourth meter is more likely to change to the sixth state when the display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state. An aspect may be sufficient.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that does not start in the fifth state, or a display that may start in the fifth state. Also good.

  Further, the fifth state may be a state representing a fifth quantity or number, and the fifth quantity or number is the fourth quantity or number and the sixth quantity or number. It may be an amount or number between.

  The fourth meter display may be a display that always starts in the fourth state, or a display that always changes from the fourth state to the fifth state, Furthermore, the display may always change from the fifth state to the sixth state. Alternatively, the fourth meter display may be a display that always starts in the fifth state, or a display that always changes from the fifth state to the sixth state. .

Also,
[The first meter display is the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 25 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated from one scale shown in FIG. 25 (9)] The display may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 25 (12)],
The first meter display is a display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 25 (4), etc.] that may be displayed in the first state.
The first meter display is a display [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 34 (4)] that may be displayed in the second state.
The first meter display, when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, it is easier for the first meter display to change to the third state when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state. An aspect may be sufficient.

  The first meter display may be a display that does not start in the third state or a display that may start in the third state. Also good.

  Further, the second state may be a state representing a second amount or number, and the second amount or number is the difference between the first amount or number and the third amount or number. It may be an amount or number between.

  The first meter display may be a display that always starts in the first state, or a display that always changes from the first state to the second state, Furthermore, the display may always change from the second state to the third state. Alternatively, the first meter display may be a display that always starts in the second state, or a display that always changes from the second state to the third state. .

Also,
[The first meter display is the first state [for example, the empty state shown in FIG. 25 (4)] to the second state [for example, the state accumulated from one scale shown in FIG. 25 (9)] The display may change to
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 25 (12)],
The fourth meter display changes from the fourth state [e.g., the empty state shown in FIG. 16 (9)] to the fifth state [e.g., the state accumulated from the third scale shown in FIG. 16 (14)]. Is a display that may change,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state [for example, the full tank state shown in FIG. 16 (18)],
The case where the fourth meter display is in the fifth state is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as a big hit symbol in the end than in the case where the first meter display is in the second state,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display of the first meter may be a display that may be started in the first state, and the display of the first meter is started in the second state. The fourth meter display may be a display that may be displayed in the fourth state, or the fourth meter display may be The display may start in the fifth state.

  In addition, when the display of the fourth meter is started in the fifth state, it is finally a big hit than when the display of the first meter is started in the second state. The symbol may be easily displayed.

  Here, the display start patterns of the first meter display are summarized. The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state and may change to the second state, the display is started in the first state, and the second state. The display may change to the third state via the display, the display starts in the first state, the display may change to the third state, and the display is in the second state. Is started and the display may change to the third state, the display is started in the first state, the fourth state is followed by the fifth state, and the sixth state. The display is started in the fourth state, the display may be changed to the fifth state, the display is started in the fourth state, and the sixth state is displayed. The display may change to the state of, the display is started in the fourth state, and the display is started through the fifth state. A display case is to change the state, the display state of said fifth is started, a display that may change the state of said six. The same applies to the display start pattern of the fourth meter display.

  Note that the display is started in the fourth state and does not have to change to the first state. Further, the display may be started in the second state and may not be changed to the first state.

Also,
'The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
In the first meter display, the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 19 (c)] is displayed for the first number of times (for example, three times). A display that changes from the first state to the third state;
In the fourth meter display, the first icon [for example, the icon of the blue meter rising item UpIb shown in FIG. 19 (i)] is displayed for the fourth number of times [for example, once]. A display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state,
The fourth number of times is less than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, if the state changes in a small number of times, the amount of change in one time is large.

Also,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed by a first effect [for example, an effect by a mini game shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an acquisition effect of the first meter display.

  The first meter display may be a display that is always started by the first effect.

Also,
“The display means can display a holding icon [for example, the first holding icon h1, the second holding icon h2 etc.] corresponding to the number of holding balls in the holding display area [for example, the holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 26]. Means,
The first meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area,
The fourth meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display area may be an icon display area. Further, for example, the first meter display is a display that is displayed integrally with the hold display area, and the fourth meter display is a display that is displayed integrally with the hold display area. There may be.

  The display unit may be a unit that always displays a hold icon corresponding to the number of held balls in the hold display area. The display means may be means for always displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when the hold icon is displayed.

Also,
“One of the plural types of meter displays is a seventh meter display [for example, a rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 19 (m) and (n)],
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, when the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit may be rich. In addition, if the seventh meter display changes from the seventh state [for example, empty state] to the ninth state (for example, full state), even if the big hit symbol is surely displayed finally. Good. Further, the seventh meter display may be a display that always changes from the seventh state to the ninth state.

  Further, when the first meter display is changed to the third state, the decorative symbol change display displayed on the display means when the first meter display is changed to the third state. When the big hit symbol is surely displayed and the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state, the display means is displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. In the variation display of the decorative symbol being displayed, the big hit symbol may be surely finally displayed.

  When the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be surely finally displayed.

Also,
'The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display [for example, pseudo continuous effect shown in FIG. 26] that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state.
The notice display is a display [for example, a super reach production shown in FIG. 17] that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, as the notice display, the pseudo-continuous effect display, the operation means related display, the notice display about the big hit (the normal notice display or the pre-read notice display), the notice display about the effect (for example, the super reach effect), and the like are listed. Can do. That is, as the notice display, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a pseudo-continuous effect display, and the pseudo-continuous effect display may start when the first meter display changes to the third state. The pseudo-continuous effect display may be a display that may start when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the pseudo continuous effect display may be a display that always starts when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the pseudo continuous effect display is the fourth meter display. The display may always be started when the display changes to the sixth state.

  The notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the notice display is the fourth meter display is the sixth display. The display may always be started when the state changes to.

  Here, operation means provided at a position where the player can operate is provided, and the display means is means capable of displaying an operation means related display, and the operation means related display is a display related to the operation means. The operation means related display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display. The display may start when the state changes to the sixth state. The display related to the operation means may be a display imitating the operation means, a display prompting to operate the operation means (operation promotion display), or an operation of the operation means. It may be a display relating to the effective period (more specifically, a display of the remaining period of the operation effective period (remaining period display)), a display reminiscent of the operation means, or these displays. It may be a combination of the above or a display including at least one of these displays. Further, the operation means related display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation means related display is the fourth meter display. The display may be started whenever the state changes to the sixth state.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a normal notice display, and the normal notice display is a variable display of a decorative symbol displayed on the display means when the display of the normal notice display is started. Is a notice display for the jackpot in the display, the normal notice display is a display that may start when the first meter display changes to the third state, the normal notice display is The display may be started when the four meter display changes to the sixth state. Here, the normal notice display may be a super reach effect display, for example. In addition, the normal notice display may be a display that is always started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the normal notice display is the fourth meter display that is The display may always be started when the state changes to the sixth state.

Also,
The first state in the first meter display is a state representing a first quantity or number [for example, an empty state or vice versa)
The third state in the first meter display is a state representing a third quantity or number [eg, a full state or vice versa)
The fourth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a fourth quantity or number [eg, an empty state or vice versa]
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a sixth quantity or number [for example, a full state or vice versa)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first amount or number and the third amount or number are different amounts or numbers, and the fourth amount or number and the sixth amount or number are different amounts or numbers. May be.

  Further, the third amount or number is an amount or number smaller than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is an amount smaller than the fourth amount or number or It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display decreases, and the fourth meter display is The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display decreases.

  The third amount or number is an amount or number greater than the first amount or number, and the sixth amount or number is an amount greater than the fourth amount or number. It may be a number. That is, the case where the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state is a case where the first meter display increases, and the fourth meter display is The case of changing from the fourth state to the sixth state is a case where the fourth meter display increases.

  Further, the first state is a full state, the third state is an empty state, the fourth state is a full state, and the sixth state is an empty state. On the contrary, the first state is an empty state, the third state is a full state, the fourth state is an empty state, and the sixth state is The state may be a full tank state.

  Further, the first meter display may change from the fourth state [for example, the meter frame is red and empty] to the sixth state [for example, the meter frame is red and full]. Yes, the fourth meter display may change from the first state [for example, the meter frame is white and empty] to the third state [for example, the meter frame is white and full]. is there.

Also,
“The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be partially different (for example, only the meter frame mf) or different in color (for example, white and red, etc.),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different colors. Note that the colors may continue to be different. Alternatively, the colors may be different only for a certain period. That is, the color may change, and the color may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Further, it is only necessary that the colors when the display is started are different from each other. Alternatively, the colors when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  The first meter display includes a frame display and an increase / decrease display that increases / decreases in the frame display, and the fourth meter display increases / decreases in the frame display and the frame display. The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different only in the color of the frame display, or may be different only in the color of the increase / decrease display. The colors of both the frame display and the increase / decrease display may be different. The frame display may be circular or rectangular, and the shape is not limited.

  The first meter display and the fourth meter display may be different in only part of the colors.

Also,
'The first meter display and the fourth meter display are different in size.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different sizes (display sizes). The size may be continuously different. Alternatively, the size may be different only for a certain period. That is, the size may vary, and it may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or only different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Moreover, the magnitude | size when a display is mutually started should just differ. Alternatively, the sizes when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

Also,
'The display position of the first meter display and the fourth meter display are different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
That is, the first meter display and the fourth meter display can be distinguished by different display positions. The display position may be continuously different. Or a display position may differ only for a fixed period. That is, the display position may change, and may be different between the first state and the fourth state, or may be different between the third state and the sixth state. Furthermore, what is necessary is just to differ in the 2nd state mentioned later and a 5th state. Moreover, the display position when a display is mutually started should just differ. Alternatively, the display positions when the display ends (disappears) may be different from each other.

  “Meter display” in the above description may be replaced with “display indicating a certain amount or number”, “first meter display” is “first display”, and “fourth meter display” is “ It may be replaced with “fourth display”.

  In the following, including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One state of the plurality of types of states in the first meter display is a first state,
One of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a third state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states,
One state of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a fourth state,
One of the plurality of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, than when the first meter display does not change from the first state to the third state. The expectation of jackpot is high,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, than when the fourth meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state. High expectations for jackpots,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
The degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is higher than the degree of expectation that the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state. high,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The display means is means capable of displaying a decorative design,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed while the decorative design is stopped.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
The fourth meter display is a display that starts to be displayed in the fourth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
One state of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
When the first meter display is started in the second state, the expectation of jackpot is higher than when the display is started in the second state,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 5,
Of the plurality of types of display, one display is a first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state when the first icon is displayed a first time,
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state when the first icon is displayed a second time.
The second number of times is less than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
One display of the plurality of displays is a jackpot display,
The third state in the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the third state is displayed,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display is displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the sixth state is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
The second state of the first meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the second state is displayed,
The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a display state indicating that the jackpot display may be displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol on which the fifth state is displayed,
If the fifth state is displayed than the second state, the jackpot display is more likely to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a pseudo-continuous effect,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The pseudo continuous notice is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 9,
One display of the plurality of types of display is an operation promotion display of the operation means,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The operation promotion display is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The display means can display a plurality of types of effects,
One of the multiple types of effects is a certain effect,
The certain effect is an effect in which the jackpot display is easily displayed in the variation of the decorative design in which the certain effect is displayed,
The certain effect is an effect that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The certain effect is an effect that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the configuration requirements included only in the description of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like are not included in the other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it is realized as a single technical idea.

  Hereinafter, other game machines (for example, ball game machines such as pachinko machines and spinning game machines such as slot machines) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 42 to 128 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 42 to 128 in principle, and even when overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, FIG. In the description using FIG. 128, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 128 are given priority.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs low sound) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is stored in the outer frame 102, the outer frame 102 is electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102. A pair of floating connectors is provided, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected to each other). Become.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk of the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at an amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor is provided for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a high-frequency speaker that outputs high sound) and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. It has been. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, a light source that uses an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp, and may be referred to as a lamp if it emits light, such as a fluorescent lamp, a cold cathode tube, and the like. It corresponds to.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of the game, the chance button 136 for changing the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 44) by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 The chance button lamp 138 for emitting the chance button 136, the ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and the balance of the player with respect to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving a return instruction and a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and card unit status. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided. In the operation key unit 137, as the cross key, the up and down keys of the up key and the down key, and the left and right keys of the left key and the right key are arranged, and a determination key is arranged at the center of the cross key. Yes. A cancel key is also arranged below the cross key to the right. The pachinko machine 100 does not include the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and the front frame door 106 has an upper plate 126, a lower plate 128, a ball removal button 130, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball launch handle 134, a chance button 136, and a chance button. All or part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the lower plate full tank detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided.

  The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include the door 108 with a ball storage tray) is open with respect to the main body 104. If the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the rendering means provided in the front frame door 106 (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122, and the chance) Button lamp 138. Production by production movable body is included in front frame door 106 (including production movable body), ball rental display section display, chance button 136, ball rental operation button 140, return operation button 142, and The operation key unit 137 can be operated and the lower pan full detection sensor can be detected.

  In the present embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that constitutes a power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102, the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray) The game board 200 may include a door 108), and the game board 200 is configured to be supplied with a power supply voltage from the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. The ball launching handle 134 has a launch stop switch (not shown) that disables the launching (injection) of the game ball due to the operation of the ball launching handle 134 by the player's operation, and the player touches the ball launching handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated. In addition, when the touch sensor detects that the ball launching handle 134 has been operated from a state in which the ball launching handle 134 has not been operated while the demonstration screen is displayed, a dedicated effect may be performed. . For example, an effect display by the display means, an effect sound by the sound output means, a light emission effect by various decoration LEDs and a light guide plate, and an effect movable body (provided on the game board or frame) can be mentioned. The effect may be performed by four types of effect means, and may be performed by one or more types of effect means. Further, even with the same type of effect means, there may be effect means for performing an exclusive effect and effect means for not performing it. (For example, the effect moving body of the frame performs a dedicated effect, but the effect moving body of the game board does not perform the dedicated effect, or the effect moving body A of the game board performs the dedicated effect, but the effect moving body B of the game board. (For example, this is also applicable to other production means.)
The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. 42, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 43 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 42 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the main body 104 of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball that passes through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball and drops to a dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is provided on the main body 104 and is detachable from the main body 104. When the payout device 152 is mounted at a predetermined position, the payout device 152 is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing related to the effects, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 45) and a payout board case 172 for housing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk, The launch board case 176 that houses the launch board 174 that constitutes the launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 45) that performs control processing relating to the above, and the power source control unit 660 (see FIG. 45) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are constructed. In addition, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated. , And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. The main board case 158 in which the main board 156 is housed, the first sub board case 162 in which the first sub board 160 is housed, and the second sub board case 166 in which the second sub board 164 is housed are the game board 200. , A payout board case 172 containing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, a launch board case 176 containing a launch board 174, a power supply having a power switch 178 and a RAM clear switch 180. A power supply board case 184 that houses the board 182 and the CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.

  FIG. 44 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and a normal symbol display device 210. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). 43), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 43 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the dispensing device 152 shown in FIG. 43 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed below the first special figure starting port 230. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided, but three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three start openings, two first special figure start openings may be provided, one second special figure start opening may be provided, and conversely, one first special figure start opening may be provided. There may be provided two second special figure starting ports. Moreover, when there is only one special figure display device, the three start ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more start ports may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 44 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, only one variable winning opening is provided, but two variable winning openings may be provided. Here, when two variable winning ports are provided, the other variable winning port is always closed while one of the first variable winning port and the second variable winning port is opened. However, both variable winning openings may be open. Further, three or more variable prize winning openings may be provided.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach. An out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensor of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234), and a game that has passed the sensor of the starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230, second special figure starting opening 232). It is a sensor configured to be able to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the out mouth. In addition, the sensor comprised so that detection of only one part among a winning opening, a starting port, and an out port may be sufficient.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 42, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 44 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, a spec sticker 290 representing the specs of the gaming table is attached to the game board 200 at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times, a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing, a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (assuming that this circuit includes two counters), It is equipped with. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. The random value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Note that the random value generation circuit 318 is built in the basic circuit 302, but may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including predetermined ball detection sensors, for example, sensors for detecting game balls passing through each start port, winning port, and variable winning port, and a lower plate full tank sensor. The sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304, the random value generation circuit 318, etc. in the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 or the second 2 a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of a special figure holding lamp 216, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, a special figure 2 holding lamp 220, a high-accuracy middle lamp 222, and the like; Driving members, for example, driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 as a normal electric accessory, driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 as a special electric accessory, etc. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the various solenoids 332 included is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and uses the latched value as a built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won at the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through the information output circuit 336 and an external terminal board (not shown) to an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, the game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in the above.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but is configured not to transmit a command signal to the main control unit 300 from the first sub control unit 400. doing. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency, and the like. A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, the ROM 406 may be provided in the basic circuit 402. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects a game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and a game table frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, the shielding device 246, and the like. The sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120 are connected. The sensor circuit 428 includes various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, and the like, and button sensors 426 that detect pressing of various buttons constituting the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137. A detection signal is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time and the number of times, and the CPU 504. A VDP (video display processor) 516 that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the signal, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative symbol display device 208. And is equipped. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating that is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a main body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 is opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 is opened, and the like. If the sensor is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch solenoid 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  46A to 46D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has been balled. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 46 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol pattern of FIG. In FIG. 46 (a), nine types of special maps "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure I" are shown. In FIG. 46 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are illuminated.

In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  In this way, in this embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is finished. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 46A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG.46 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 46 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown. Of these, five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 46 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Further, when 15R-RUB, 8R-RUB and 4R-RUB are notified, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG.46 (d) shows an example of the usual stop symbol aspect. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 46 (d), the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

  Next, the main controller power-on process executed by the CPU 304 of the main controller 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a) is a flowchart of the main controller power-on process, FIG. 47 (b) is a flowchart of the return activation process, and FIG. 47 (c) is a flowchart of the initial activation process. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, stack pointer initialization is performed. In this stack pointer initial setting, a stack initial value is set (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304.

  Subsequently, in step S102, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value (this value). In the example, it is determined whether or not it is 9V) or higher. When the voltage value of the power source is less than the predetermined value (step S102: No), the process waits until the voltage value of the power source becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value, and when the voltage value exceeds the predetermined value (step S102: Yes), Proceed to step S103.

  In step S103, internal register initialization is performed. In this internal register initial setting, the WDT 314 is activated, the access permission to the RAM 308, the numerical value that determines the execution period of the main control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later is set in each register of the timer circuit 312, and the main control unit 300 After initial processing of serial communication between the control unit 600 and the payout control unit 600 and processing such as setting the maximum value of hardware random numbers, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game shop operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is ON (the RAM clear is necessary) (step S104: Yes), the process goes to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary) (step S104: No), the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and it is determined whether or not the power status information is information indicating suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend (step S105: No), the process proceeds to step S108 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state, and an initial activation process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the power status information is information indicating suspend (step S105: Yes), the process proceeds to step S106.

  In step S106, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and the calculated check It is determined whether or not the result of the sum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the result of the checksum is normal). If the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal) (step S106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S107 to return to the state before the power interruption. Execute startup processing. On the other hand, when the result of the checksum is other than a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal) (No at Step S106), the process goes to Step S108 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Then, an initial activation process described later is executed.

  Here, the return activation process will be described with reference to FIG. When the return activation process is started, in step S201, initial setting at the time of return activation is performed. Specifically, a process for setting information indicating “return start” in the power status information, a process for setting the magnetic detection abnormality flag to OFF, and a device error (an error flag due to magnetic detection, winning abnormality, etc.) Processing for clearing, processing for clearing the previous device error status, processing for clearing the device error status for security signals, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, in step S202, the address after the storage area that was initially set in step S201 is set as an address for starting RAM clearing, and then the return activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the return activation process, for example, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read and reset (mainly set) to the stack pointer. In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and a power recovery command is set in this transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in a sub-command transmission process in a timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later. .

  Next, the initial activation process will be described with reference to FIG. When the initial activation process is started, initial setting of soft random numbers is performed in step S301. Specifically, an initial setting of soft random numbers used in special drawing or ordinary drawing is performed.

  Subsequently, in step S302, the addresses after the storage area that was initially set in step S301 are set as addresses for starting the RAM clear, and then the initial activation process is terminated.

  In addition, in the initial activation process, for example, setting of prohibition of interrupt, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (this setting), etc. are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initial activation process of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the command setting transmission process (step S405) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, as with the power recovery command. Are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, after the return activation process or the initial activation process is executed, a RAM clear process is performed in step SS109. In this RAM clear process, the storage area of the RAM 308 after the RAM clear start address set as described above is cleared (initialized).

  Subsequently, in step S110, a sub-control related activation setting is performed. In this sub-control-related activation setting, the activation waiting counter of the first sub-control unit 400 is set, and in the present embodiment, the sub-command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 three times. Therefore, processing for setting an initial value of the sub-control command continuous transmission counter stored in the RAM 308 is also performed.

  In step S111, output port setting is performed. In this output port setting, design data, firing position designation signal, error status signal, prize ball signal, universal signal, normal electric accessory (second special figure starting port 232, electric chew) operating signal, normal figure operation Medium signal, easy winning status signal, special signal per special signal, special signal small hit signal (limited to models equipped with small hits), special signal changing signal, special signal variable time reduction status signal, special electric accessory (variable prize) Mouth 234, Attacker) In-operation signal, Condition device in-operation signal, Continuing action device in-operation signal, Big prize opening solenoid signal, Ordinary electric accessory solenoid signal, Symbol LED data, External terminal board signal, etc. are set Set the output port. Moreover, after finishing the process of this step S111, it transfers to the main control part main loop process. Here, the winning easy state may indicate a power support state.

  Next, the main control unit main loop process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. It is a flowchart of a main control part main loop process.

  When the main control unit 300 finishes executing the above main control power-on process, the main control unit main loop process starts to execute the main control unit main loop process. After setting, in step S402, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted (restarted). In step S403, a basic random number initial value update process is performed (step S403). In this basic random number initial value updating process, an initial value generating random number counter for generating an initial value of the special figure determining random number counter and an initial value of the general figure determining random number counter is updated. The initial value generation random number counter can be updated by, for example, obtaining a value from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 and adding 1 to the obtained value when the numerical range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0-20. To the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area.

  In step S404, after setting interrupt permission, in step S405, a subcommand transmission process is performed). In this sub-command transmission process, it is confirmed whether there is a command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. If there is a command to be transmitted, a process for transmitting the command is performed. In step S406, after performing other determination random number update processing, it progresses to step S407. In the other determination random number update processing, processing such as updating of the special figure variation time determination random number and the normal diagram variation time determination random number is performed.

  In step S407, it is determined whether or not the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 9V). : Yes), the process returns to step S401 to continue the main control unit main loop process, and if it is less than the predetermined value (step S407: No), the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, a power interruption process is performed. In this power interruption process, after setting the interrupt prohibition, the power status information is set to “suspend”. Further, a checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register having an initial value of 0, and a predetermined storage of the RAM 308 is performed. Store in the area. Thereafter, after setting to prohibit access to the RAM 308, the HALT state is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of main controller timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms). The main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S501, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S502 and step S503, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S403 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is used. The special figure variation time determination random number counter and the normal figure variation period determination random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter. In order to determine this, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area. In the present embodiment, a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 1 and a counter for acquiring the random value in FIG. 2 may be provided separately.

  In step S504, it is determined whether or not the interrupt function is limited (whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated). If the interrupt function is limited (the first sub-control unit 400 is not activated). In the case (step S504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S519, and when the interrupt function is not limited (when the first sub-control unit 400 is activated) (step S504: No), the process proceeds to step S505. move on. Here, the interrupt function is limited means that the activation waiting counter of the first sub control unit 400 set in step S110 of the power-on process is not 0, that is, in step S504, the first If it is determined that the activation waiting counter of the sub-control unit 400 is 0, it is determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated, and the process proceeds to step S505. If the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command for confirming whether or not the first sub-control unit 400 is activated. If a confirmation command is returned from 400, it may be determined that the first sub-control unit 400 has been activated. In step S505, it is determined whether or not a specific error (magnetic detection error in the present embodiment) is occurring. If a specific error is occurring (step S505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S520. If the specific error is not occurring (step S505: No), the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212 is counted for the time for displaying the symbol on the first symbol display device 212. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed or stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S507, processing such as input port status update is performed. In this input port state update processing, etc., the special figure starting port (first special figure starting port 230, second special figure starting port 232), general map starting port 228, and out port 240 via the input port of the I / O 310. The presence / absence of input of signals relating to switches such as the variable prize opening (attacker) 234 and the prize winning opening (general winning opening 226) is monitored and stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308.

  If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area. Further, when it is determined that the winning at the start opening and the winning opening is abnormal, the information stored in the signal state storage area as being invalid is deleted.

  In step S508, a winning opening winning process is performed. In this winning award winning process, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information.

  This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in the above-described step S507, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there has been a prize when the detection is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 100 μs) after the detection signal is input. Note that if the detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it may be determined that there has been a prize.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S507, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228.

  For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S508, a winning opening counter updating process is also performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when there is a winning at the winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, each winning opening or each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. The value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In the winning opening winning process in step S508, a winning acceptance process is also performed. In this winning acceptance process, whether the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the universal drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234 are won matches the winning determination pattern information. The determination result is used. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as the special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area.

  Further, when a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is read from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. Obtained as a random number value, obtains a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value, and stores it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a winning at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is acquired as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening. In addition, when the random number of a special figure is acquired, special figure prefetching processing (presence / absence judgment, symbol, prefetch lottery of variation time) is also performed. The special figure prefetch process will be described in detail later.

  In step S509, a prize-related error check process is performed. In the prize-related error check process, a prize-related abnormality is confirmed and monitored, and a process for setting an abnormality according to the result of the process is performed. Some switches may not detect an abnormality. In step S510, an out switch input update process is performed. In this out switch input update process, the number of game balls that have passed through the sensor provided in the out port 240 is detected and updated. The input result of this out switch is mainly used for production.

  In step S511, serial command management processing is performed. In the serial command management process, a process of receiving a command from the payout control unit 600, a process of transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed. In addition, as a command which the main control part 300 transmits to the payout control part 600, the communication confirmation command (communication state with the payout control part 600) transmitted after progress of the starting waiting time of the 1st sub control part 400 after power activation is passed. And a command for notifying the starting method of the main control unit 300 (initial start and return start), and a prize ball number command for instructing payout of game balls for designated prize balls.

  The command received by the main control unit 300 from the payout control unit 600 includes a communication confirmation return command (response command indicating that the payout control unit 600 has received a command from the main control unit 300), a test test signal Commands that contain information on the occurrence of commands (prize ball signal output request), information on the occurrence of payout errors (including no errors), and prize ball payout operation status commands (whether or not award balls are being paid out) And a command indicating that the payout is in progress (instructing the first sub-control unit 400 to turn on / off the LED).

  Next, in step S512, special figure state update processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The special figure state update process executes one of the following eight processes according to the special figure process state. The special figure state update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S513, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of one of the winning symbols and the off symbol. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid 332 of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S514.

  In step S513, a general drawing related lottery process is also performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S514, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S507 are read, the presence or absence of a predetermined error is monitored, and if a predetermined error is detected, the first sub-control unit 400 Device information indicating the presence or absence of an error is set in transmission information to be transmitted. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S515, external output signal management processing is performed. In the external output signal management processing, processing for preparing to transmit an external terminal board signal is performed. In step S516, a subcommand management process is performed. In this sub-command management process, preparations for transmitting various commands to the first sub-control unit 400 are made. The output schedule information (subcommand) to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, and bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), Bits 11 to 14 are command types (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, Information that can specify the type of command such as a RAM clear command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the value of the special symbol probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special symbol related lottery process, and the like. In the case of a change stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included, and in the case of the winning effect command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc. are included. In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the jackpot round number, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence. In the present embodiment, when there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, a large winning opening winning command is set.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is selected by the 15R jackpot flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery process. The information indicating the timer number, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308 is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game frame lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period. Information indicating the control information, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game being held, etc. is set.

  In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data stored in the RAM 308 is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the game board lamp 442, the game table frame lamp 452, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Information indicating the effect control information to be performed, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game being held, etc. are set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S516, a general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S517, display display setting processing is performed. In this display display setting process, the display (LED lighting pattern) such as “Number of reserved balls, combination of symbols”, status (during electric support or non-electric support), right-handed state, etc. Performs processing to set data to be output. In step S518, output management processing is performed. In this output management process, a process of outputting a control signal set in each process to a solenoid or LED, a process of transmitting a prepared command to the first sub-control unit 400 or the payout control unit 600, and the like are performed.

  In step S519, a sub control activation waiting wait process is performed. In this sub-control activation wait process, in order to wait for the first sub-control unit 400 to start and become communicable, the sub-control activation wait counter is decremented by 1, and this activation wait counter becomes 0. If so, preparations for transmitting a predetermined command are made. Note that the predetermined command includes one or more commands such as a power-on command and a command related to the payout control unit 600 (for example, a command indicating that all errors have been canceled, a lower pan full error) A command indicating that there is a payout ball shortage error, a main control communication error command (a command indicating that communication with the payout control unit 600 is in an abnormal state), a CR unit unconnected error There are a command indicating that is generated, a firing position command (a command for notifying the firing position according to the state), and the like.

  In step S520, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S501 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the process returns to the main control unit main loop process. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the special figure state update process (step S512) in the main controller timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the special figure state update process.

  In step S601, the special figure processing state address is acquired and saved, and in the next step S602, processing corresponding to the value indicated by the special figure processing state stored in the RAM 308 is executed. Specifically, here, based on the value indicated by the special figure processing state, a special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 51A, a process during symbol variation shown in FIG. 52, and a special figure shown in FIG. The display confirmation weight process, the hit start weight process shown in FIG. 54 (a), the special electric charge operation process shown in FIG. 55, the special electric charge remaining ball detection process shown in FIG. 58, the special electric charge operation end process shown in FIG. One of the hit end display weight processing shown is executed.

  In step S603, the easy winning status is set to ON. In step S604, the state change of the special figure processing state is determined. In the next step S605, the presence / absence of the state change of the special figure processing state (change in the value indicated by the special figure processing state) is determined. When there is no state change (when the value indicated by the special figure processing state has not changed) (step S605: No), the special figure state update process is terminated, and there is a change in the special figure processing state. If this is the case (if the value indicated by the special figure processing state has changed) (step S605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the “waiting for change” state. If applicable (step S606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608, and if not applicable (step S606). : No), the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not the special figure processing state is set to the “hit start display wait state”. If applicable (step S607: Yes), the process proceeds to step S608. Step S607: No), the special figure state update process is terminated.

  In step S608, a sub-command transmission request is set (in this embodiment, after setting a transmission request for a gaming state command including a special drawing and a normal gaming state, a firing position including information on whether or not the player is in a right-handed state. After the command transmission request is set), the special figure state update process is terminated. The order of sub-command transmission requests is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission requests may be reversed, or a plurality of command transmission requests may be collectively performed in one process.

  Next, the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51A is a flowchart of the special figure related lottery process executed in the special figure state update process.

  This special figure related lottery process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “waiting for change” in step S602 of the special figure state updating process.

  In step S701 of the special figure related lottery process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In the next step S702, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 2 reserved ball number is 0. In the case of (when there is no special figure 2 variable game hold) (step S702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S703, and when other than 0 (when there is special figure 2 variable game hold) (step S702: No), the process proceeds to step S705 to execute the process related to the special figure 2.

  In step S703, the special figure 1 reserved ball number stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In the next step S704, it is determined whether or not the acquired special figure 1 reserved ball number is 0. When there is no variable game hold (step S704: Yes), the special drawing related lottery process is terminated, and when it is other than 0 (when there is special figure 1 variable game hold) (step S704: No). In order to execute the processing relating to the special figure 1, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the value of the number of reserved special figure 2 balls stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one. When the process related to special figure 1 is executed, the process is executed in the RAM 308. The stored special figure 1 holding ball number is decremented by one. In step S706, special figure random number transfer processing is executed. In this special figure random number transfer process, when the process related to special figure 2 is executed, the random number value stored in the random number storage area corresponding to the reservations 2 to 4 in special figure 2 is stored in 3 is shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to 3, and when the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 in FIG. The random number value stored in the random number storage area to be shifted to the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 1 to 3 in FIG. 1 and the random number storage area corresponding to the hold 4 in FIG. 1 is cleared. Thus, the game machine (pachinko machine) in this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority change machine. In addition, each of FIG. 2 and FIG. 1 can store up to 4 holds.

  In step S707, a lottery process per special figure is performed. Although details will be described later, in this special drawing lottery process, whether or not the special figure 2 variable game (or special figure 1 variable game) is successful is determined. In step S708, a display symbol lottery process is performed. In the display symbol lottery process, the special symbol 2 symbol determination table (or the special symbol 1 symbol determination table) is referred to, and the second special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery processing per special symbol in step S707 and the random number value. The lottery of the special figure display symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the display device 214 (or the first special figure display device 212) is performed.

  62A shows an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 62B shows an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is determined in the display symbol lottery process in step S708, the special symbol 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 62A is referred to and the special symbol by the special symbol lottery process in step S707 is referred to. Based on the result of the determination in FIG. 1 and the numerical range of the random number value, the display symbol data of the special figure 1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  Further, when the display symbol data of the special figure 2 is determined in the display symbol lottery process in the step S708, the special symbol lottery process in the step S707 is referred to with reference to the special symbol 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. On the basis of the result of the determination of special figure 2 and the numerical value range of the random number, the display symbol data of special figure 2 is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be displayed is determined, symbol data to be displayed on the special symbol display device is set. The symbol data set here is acquired again in the display device display setting process (step S517) in the main control unit timer interrupt process, and is controlled to be displayed on the special figure display device. After the symbol data is set, the determined symbol (symbol type information) is determined. If the symbol data is lost, the process ends.

  When the determined symbol (symbol type information) is a big hit or a small hit symbol, a process for setting data to be set at the end of the hit (data setting process after the hit is completed) is performed. The after-hit data setting process is a process for setting a gaming state set after the win according to the symbol determined by the lottery.

  Returning to FIG. 51A, in step S709, a special figure fluctuation time lottery process is performed. In this special figure variation time lottery process, a variation time table (not shown) is referred to, and the result of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) by the lottery process per special figure in step S707 and the numerical value range of the random number value. Then, after selecting the special figure variation time timer, the special figure related lottery process is terminated.

<Lottery processing per special figure>
Next, with reference to FIG. 51 (b), the lottery process per special figure (step S707) will be described. FIG. 51B is a flowchart of the lottery process per special figure (step S707) in the special figure-related lottery process.

  In step S801 of the special figure lottery process, the lottery per special figure is performed with reference to the determination table. In the present embodiment, both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are used for the lottery per special figure using the same success / failure determination table, but separate special determination tables for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are provided. You may make it prepare.

  FIG. 61A is a diagram showing an example of the high / failure determination probability table, and FIG. 61B is a diagram showing an example of the low / probability determination probability table. In the lottery process per special figure in step S801, if the special figure 1 is determined to be true or false, if it is in the special figure high probability state, the special decision high probability table shown in FIG. In the case of the low-probability state shown in FIG. 61, the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. 61B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, the big hit, the small hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, when determining whether or not the special figure 2 is determined in the lottery processing per special figure in step S801, if the special figure is in a high probability state, refer to the high probability table for determining appropriateness shown in FIG. 61 (a). In the case of the special figure low probability state, the failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. 61B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  Referring back to FIG. 51 (b), in step S802, it is determined whether or not the determination result of lottery per special drawing (lottery result) in step S801 is other than “big hit”. If it is not “big hit” (step S802). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S803, and in the case of “big hit” (step S802: No), the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, a special figure small hit lottery process is performed using the small hit determination table.

  FIG. 61 (c) is a diagram showing an example of the small hit determination table. In the special figure small hitting lottery process in step S803, the special hitting lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (c) is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hitting determination table and the acquired random number value, the special figure is determined. Select the result of whether or not to win a small lottery. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Returning to FIG. 51B, in step S804, the RAM 308 is based on the determination result of lottery per special drawing (lottery result) in step S801 and the determination result of lottery (lottery result) in special drawing small lottery in step S803. Is set to any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “lack”. In the next step S805, information indicating “special figure changing” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special symbol state update processing, the symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 52 is called and executed.

  In step S806, the value of the special figure determination random number stored in the RAM 308 is cleared. In the next step S807, a subcommand (special figure change start command) transmission request is set. In the next step S808, the special figure is displayed. After setting the basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the change is in progress (2) (or special figure 1), the lottery process per special figure is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the process during symbol variation executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the process during symbol change executed in the special figure state update process. This symbol changing process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “special figure changing” in step 602 of the special figure state update process.

  In step S901 of the process during symbol variation, the special figure operation type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and the address of the update target RAM is calculated according to this special figure operation type. .

  In step S902, by referring to the address destination calculated in step S901, the special figure fluctuation time timer set in step S709 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired, and whether the special figure fluctuation time timer is 0 or not. Determine whether or not. As a result of the determination, when the special figure fluctuation time timer is 0 (when the set special figure fluctuation time has elapsed) (step S902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S905, and when it is not 0 (set special figure fluctuation time) If (No has passed) (step S902: No), the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the special symbol display symbol. If it is not the update timing (step S903: Yes), the symbol variation processing is terminated, and if it is the update timing (step S903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, after the special symbol display symbol data is updated, the symbol variation processing is terminated.

  By this special figure display symbol data updating process, in the case of special figure 1, the first special figure display device 212 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. In the case of Special Figure 2, the second special symbol display device 214 is used to repeat the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. "Change display of special figure 2" is performed.

  In step S905, the special figure display symbol data selected in step S708 of the special figure related lottery process is acquired and set, and in the next step S906, information indicating "special figure display weight state" is set in the special figure processing state. To do. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure display confirmation wait process shown in FIG. 53 is called and executed.

  In step S907, the display symbol update data is cleared, and in the next step S908, basic signal information (for testing) indicating that the fluctuation of special figure 2 (or special figure 1) is stopped is set, and the next step In S909, the symbol determination frequency information signal stored in the RAM 308 is set to ON, so that the symbol determination frequency information signal is output from the external terminal board 349.

  In step S910, a transmission request for a subcommand (special symbol variation stop command) is set, and in the next step S911, symbol type information stored in the RAM 308 (the symbol of the special symbol 1 shown in FIG. 46A), or After obtaining the special figure display confirmation timer indicating the time for maintaining the special figure stop display on the basis of the symbol type information, the special figure display confirmation timer is set based on the symbol type information shown in FIG. 46 (b). The process during change is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the special figure display determination wait process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the special figure display determination wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This special figure display confirmation weight process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special figure display weight state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. It is.

  In step S1001 of the special figure display confirmation weight process, it is determined whether or not the special figure display confirmation timer set in step S911 of the symbol changing process is larger than 0. If it has not elapsed (step S1001: Yes), the special figure display confirmation weighting process is terminated. If not (the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1001: No), step S1002 Proceed to

  In step S1002, the symbol determination number information signal set in step S909 of the symbol variation processing is cleared (set to OFF), and in the next step S1003, the special symbol variation time shortening status at the time of symbol stop (special symbol variation game) (In this embodiment, a status indicating any one of the normal gaming state, the probability-changing gaming state, and the short-time gaming state) is saved in the RAM 308 as a saved special figure variation time reduction status described later.

  In step S1004, the success / failure determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired. In the next step S1005, it is determined whether or not the acquired determination result type is “big hit”. As a result of this determination, if the success / failure determination type is “big hit” (step S1005: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010. If the correct / failure determination type is other than “big hit” (step S1005: No), the process proceeds to step S1006. Then, the number of time reductions in the special figure stored in the RAM 308 is updated (one time reduction number is subtracted).

  In step S1007, the success / failure determination type set in step S804 of the special drawing related lottery process is acquired. In the next step S1008, it is determined whether or not the acquired determination result type is “small hit”. As a result of this determination, if the determination type is “small hit” (step S1008: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1010. If the determination type is other than “small hit” (step S1008: No), step In step S1009, information indicating “waiting for change” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 51A is called and executed.

  In step S1010, basic signal information (for test) indicating the special symbol winning / not-accepting type and symbol type is set, and in the next step S1011, RAM clearing in the designated range is executed. Here, the winning / notifying type, the number of operations of the special winning combination, the number of winnings of the big winning opening (variable winning opening 234), the operating pattern of the special electric winning combination, the operating state of the special electric winning combination, the total number of winnings per win, the flag relating to the abnormal winning of the large winning opening, In addition to clearing information such as the winning end display timer type, at the time of big hit, further clear the easy-to-win status and the special figure status.

  In step S1012, information indicating a “hit start display wait state” is set as the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit start wait process shown in FIG. 54A is called and executed. In step S1013, the winning total winning number is set to 0, and in the next step S1014, a transmission request for a subcommand (winning start command) is set.

  In step S1015, symbol type information is set. In step S1016, a hit start display timer is set according to the symbol type information set in step S1015. In step S1017, according to the symbol type information set in step S1015. After setting other information signal setting types, the special figure display determination wait process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54A, the hit start wait process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 54A is a flowchart of the hit start wait process executed in the special figure state update process. The winning start weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates the “winning start display weight state” in step S602 of the special figure state updating process. .

  In step S1101 of the winning start weight process, it is determined whether or not the winning start display timer set in step S1016 of the special figure display confirmation weight process is larger than 0. If not (step S1101: Yes), the winning start weight process is terminated. If not (when the special figure display confirmation time has elapsed) (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, after executing a special power combination release process described later, the hit start wait process is terminated.

  Next, the special power release process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54B is a flowchart of the special power release process (step S1102) in the hit start weight process.

  In step S1201 of the special power combination release process, information indicating “special power combination operation state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric utility operation process shown in FIG. 55 is called and executed.

  In step S1202, the value of the number of winning prizes in the RAM 308 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “main control unit winning counter”) and the operation state of the special electric character are cleared, and in the next step S1203, the subcommand (special electric power) is cleared. Set the request to release the role release command. Thereby, the first sub-control unit 400 can recognize that the round has started. In step S1204, the symbol type information set in step S1015 of the special symbol display confirmation weight process is acquired. In the next step S1205, a special electric actor action pattern data table is set based on the acquired symbol type information. For example, as shown in FIG. 57 (a-1) to FIG. 57 (a-3), the special electric role operation pattern data tables are prepared for the number of types of special figures that are big hits and small hits. FIG. 57 shows only a part of them. The special electric combination operation pattern data table stores special electric combination operation data indicating the opening / closing pattern of the variable prize opening 234 for each round. As shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) to FIG. 57 (b-3), the special power combination operation data includes information (open timer pattern, close timer pattern) indicating the open / closed state of the variable winning opening 234, the open state or One or a plurality of timer pattern data composed of time information (special power combination opening / closing timer) for maintaining the closed state is stored. Thereby, various variations can be given to the opening / closing operation of the variable prize opening 234 in one round.

  For example, in the big hit game in the case of big hit with special figure A, as shown in FIG. 57 (a-1), in the 1R to 15R, the special electric power operation data 1 shown in FIG. Then, after the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 29500 ms by the opening timer pattern 2, the closing timer pattern 3 is controlled so that the variable winning opening 234 is closed and the operation is ended.

  Also, in the big hit game in the case of big hit in the special figure C, as shown in FIG. 57 (a-2), the above-mentioned special electric charge operation is performed in the 1R to 4R, 6R to 8R, 10R to 15R. While the above-described operation is performed with reference to data 1, the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 is performed with reference to the special electric charge operation data 4 shown in FIG. Be controlled. That is, at the 5R and 9R, after the variable winning opening 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, the operation that the variable winning opening 234 is kept closed by 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1 is executed four times. After that, the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 17500 ms by the opening timer pattern 3, and thereafter, the variable winning opening 234 is closed by the closing timer pattern 3 and the operation is finished.

  Further, in the big hit game in the case of big hit in the special figure E, as shown in FIG. 57 (a-3), the above-mentioned special electric power operation data 1 is referred to in the first to fourth rounds as shown in FIG. 57 (a-3). On the other hand, from the 5R to 15R, the special electric combination operation data 2 shown in FIG. 57 (b-2) is referred to, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening 234 is controlled. That is, at the 5R to 15R, after the variable winning opening 234 is first opened for 180 ms by the opening timer pattern 1, the variable winning opening 234 is kept closed by 2820 ms by the closing timer pattern 1, and then the closing timer pattern 3, the variable prize winning opening 234 is controlled to be maintained in the closed state as it is. Note that another closing pattern timer (for example, the closing pattern timer 1 or the like) may be set before the closing pattern timer 3 is set.

  In step S1206, the number of operation of the special electric combination (round number) is acquired. In the next step S1207, the acquired number of operation of the special electric combination (round number) is updated. Subsequently, in step S1208, the special power combination operation data corresponding to the updated number of operations of the special power combination (number of rounds) is read to set the operation pattern of the special power combination. In step S1209, a special power combination control process (details will be described later) is performed. In next step S1210, after the special power combination winning detection timer is cleared, the special power combination release process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the special electric character operation process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the special electric utility operation process executed in the special figure state update process. This special power combination operation process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure process state indicates “special power combination operation state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process.

  In step S1301 of the special electric actor operation process, the maximum number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired, and in step S1302, the number of winnings stored in the RAM 308 is acquired. In step S1303, the acquired maximum number of winnings is compared with the number of winnings, and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is smaller than the maximum number of winnings. If the number is smaller (when the number of winnings <the maximum number of winnings) (step S1303). : Yes), the process proceeds to step S1304. If not (when the number of winnings> = the maximum number of winnings) (step S1303: No), the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the special timer opening / closing timer corresponding to the open timer pattern or the closing timer pattern being executed, which is set in step S1208 of the special electric actor release process, is greater than zero. If the opening / closing timer has not elapsed (step S1304: Yes), the special electric power actuating process is terminated, and if not (when the special electric power opening / closing timer has elapsed) (step S1304: No), step S1305 is performed. Proceed to In step S1305, a special power combination control process (details will be described later) is performed. In the next step S1306, a special power combination opening / closing timer pattern is acquired. In the next step S1307, a closing timer pattern among the acquired special power combination opening / closing timer patterns. , It is determined whether or not the special power combination is being operated (whether or not the closing timer pattern is set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)).

  As a result of the determination, when the special power combination is operating (when the closing timer pattern is not set in the information indicating the end of the operation (closed timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: Yes), the special power combination operating process is terminated. When the special power combination is not operating (when the closing timer pattern is set to information indicating the end of the operation (closing timer pattern 3)) (step S1307: No), the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, information indicating the “remaining sphere detection state” is set as the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric charge remaining sphere detection process shown in FIG. 58 is called and executed.

  In step S1309, the special electric utility operation interval timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, in step S1310, other information signal transmission determination timers are cleared, and in step S1311, a transmission request for a subcommand (big prize closing command) is issued. Set.

  In step S1312, the special electric prize winning detection timer stored in the RAM 308 is set. Here, the special electric prize winning detection timer is a timer for effectively detecting game balls remaining in the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) after the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) is closed. It is. In step S1313, after setting the drive signal (large winning opening solenoid signal) for driving the solenoid (332) of the large winning opening (variable winning opening 234) to OFF, the special electric character operation processing is ended.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the variable winning opening 234 changes to the difficult entry state when the maximum number of winning balls has passed to the passing area after entering the easy entry state. It functions as an example of variable winning means.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the special power combination control process (step S1209, step S1305) executed in the special power combination release process and the special power combination activation process will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the special power combination control process executed in the special power combination release process and the special power combination activation process.

  In step S1401, special power combination control data stored in the ROM 306 is acquired. Specifically, the control data of the operation pattern to be executed this time is acquired from the operation patterns of the special power combination to be executed, which is read and set in step S1208 of the special power combination release process. To do. For example, if the operation pattern of the special electric character indicated in the special electric character operation data 1 is set and the round is started, the “open timer pattern 2” indicated by “(1)” in FIG. ”Is acquired. Further, after the operation pattern indicated by the control data indicated by “(1)” in FIG. 57B-1 is completed, the “closing timer” indicated by “(2)” in FIG. The control data of “Pattern 3” is acquired.

  Subsequently, in step S1402, opening / closing information indicating whether the variable prize opening 234 is opened or closed is acquired based on the acquired control data of the operation pattern of the special electric character. For example, if it is “open timer pattern”, data (opening information) for opening the variable winning opening 234 is acquired, and if it is “closed timer pattern”, data for closing the variable winning opening 234 (closed) Information).

  In step S1403, a special electric combination opening / closing timer is acquired based on the control data of the operation pattern of the special electric combination acquired in step S1401 and the opening / closing information acquired in step S1402. For example, when “open timer pattern 2” is acquired and the open / close information is “open information”, an open timer of 29500 ms is acquired. When “closing timer pattern 1” is acquired and the opening / closing information is “closing information”, a closing timer of 2820 ms is acquired.

  In step S <b> 1404, information indicating acceptance is set in the special power prize winning / impossible state stored in the RAM 308. When the information indicating that the special power combination winning / impossible state is acceptable is set, it can be accepted that the game ball has passed the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1 of the variable winning opening 234) provided in the variable winning opening. If there is information indicating that acceptance is not possible, even if the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor (count switch SW1) provided in the variable winning opening, it becomes invalid. In step S1405, special electric signal information (test signal) is set. In step S1406, preparation for updating the special winning opening solenoid signal is performed. In this process, preparation for driving the special winning opening solenoid is performed, and a drive signal is output in the output management process (step S518) in the timer interrupt process described above. In step S1407, the special power combination opening / closing timer of the special power combination opening / closing timer is set, and then the special power combination control process is terminated. That is, in this process, the open timer or the close timer acquired in step S1403 is set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the special electric power remaining sphere detection process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the special electric charge remaining sphere detection process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric character remaining sphere detection process is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “remaining sphere detection state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1501 of the special power combination remaining ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the special power combination operation interval timer set in step S1309 of the special power combination operation process is in operation. If not (step S1501: Yes), the special electric combination remaining sphere detection process is terminated. If not (when the special electric combination operation interval time has elapsed) (step S1501: No), the process proceeds to step S1502. move on.

  In step S1502, a special power combination operation delay timer stored in the RAM 308 is set, and in step S1503, information indicating "special power combination operation end state" is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special electric utility operation end process shown in FIG. 59 is called and executed. That is, it becomes a state of the interval between rounds.

  In step S1504, after the special power combination signal information (test signal) is cleared, the special power combination remaining ball detection process is terminated. Note that a subcommand transmission request (for example, an inter-round interval start command) may be set after clearing the special power signal information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the special electric utility operation end process executed in the special figure state update process will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the special electric utility operation end process executed in the special figure state update process. This special electric utility operation end process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates "special electric utility operation end state" in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1601 of the special power combination operation end process, it is determined whether or not the special power combination operation delay timer set in step S1502 of the special power remaining ball detection process is in operation. If it is in operation (step S1601: Yes). ), The special electric utility operation end processing is terminated, and if not (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, the symbol type information is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol win / rejection type is a small hit. If it is a small hit (step S1602: Yes), the small hit is handled in step S1603. After acquiring the hit end display timer, the process proceeds to step S1608. On the other hand, if the special figure win / loss type is not a small hit (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1604, and a predetermined number of times is set as the maximum winning opening number stored in the RAM 308. In step S1605, the number of times of opening the special winning opening is compared with the number of opening of the special winning combination, and it is determined whether or not the number of opening of the special winning combination is less than the maximum opening number of the large winning opening, that is, whether or not the winning is not finished. . If the winning has not ended (step S1605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1606 to execute the above-mentioned special electric character release process, and the special electric character operation end process is ended. That is, processing for starting the next round is performed. On the other hand, if the winning is over (step S1605: No), the process proceeds to step S1607.

  In step S1607, a hit end display timer corresponding to the symbol type information is acquired. In step S1608, the hit end display timer acquired in step S1603 or step S1607 is set. In step S1609, information indicating “hit end display wait state” is set in the special figure processing state. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the hit end display wait process shown in FIG. 60 is called and executed. In step S1610, after setting a transmission request for the subcommand (hit end command), the special electric utility operation end processing is ended.

  Next, the hit end display weight process executed in the special figure state update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the hit end display wait process executed in the special figure state update process. This hit end display weight process is a process that is called and executed when the information set in the special figure processing state indicates “hit end display wait state” in step S602 of the special figure state update process. is there.

  In step S1701 of the winning end display weight process, it is determined whether or not the winning end display timer set in step S1608 of the special electric utility operation end process is in operation (step S1701: Yes). The winning end display weight process is terminated. If not (step S1701: NO), the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the symbol type information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is saved in the stack area. In step S1703, the basic signal information (for testing) is cleared. Information indicating "waiting state" is set. Thereby, in step S602 of the next special figure state update process, the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. 51A is called and executed.

  In steps S1705 to S1707, the display symbol data, symbol type information, and the total number of winning prizes are cleared. In step S1708, the saved symbol type information is reset, and in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the small hit is completed. If the small hit is completed (step S1709: Yes), the winning end display weight process is performed. When the process is finished and the process is finished with other than the small hit (when finished with the big hit) (step S1709: No), the process proceeds to step S1710.

  In step S1710, setting data (probability change, short time, hidden probability change) after hitting is acquired, and in step S1711, data corresponding to the setting data after hitting (probability change status (special figure probability state status, normal figure probability state status)) , Time reduction (Special figure fluctuation time reduction fluctuation frequency, Fluctuation time correction fluctuation frequency, Easy winning status fluctuation frequency), Time reduction status (Special figure fluctuation time reduction status, Normal figure fluctuation time reduction status, Open extension status), Variation time lottery The state (information for determining the variable time lottery table and the like) is set, and the setting data after clearing the hit is cleared, and then the hit end display wait process is ended.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 functions as an example of a game control unit that can execute a big hit game.

  Next, the special figure prefetching process in the winning opening winning process in step S508 shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of special figure prefetching processing. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 64A to 64C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S508a). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S508b. If it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S508d.

  In step S508b, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value) is stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area before the special figure related lottery process shown in FIG. Read ahead. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 61, and the special figure design determination table shown in FIG. 62, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is illustrated. Prior determination is made prior to the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure-related lottery process shown in 51. Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S508c following step S508b, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S508d.

  In step S508d, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S508e. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S508e, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S508f, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (ordinary high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S508h. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S508f, the increased special figure 1 starting information (a combination of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) is stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area prior to the special figure related lottery processing shown in FIG. Read ahead. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 61, and the special figure design determination table shown in FIG. 62, the stop pattern of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is illustrated. Prior determination is made prior to the display symbol lottery process S708 in the special figure-related lottery process shown in 51. Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S508g following step S508f, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S508h, “predetermined” information indicating that start information is not prefetched without prefetching the increased special figure 1 start information is stored in place of the stop symbol information in FIG. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S405), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 63, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 64 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 64A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 64 (a), the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 64A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 64B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 64 (b), the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 64B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 64B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is expressed as “none”.

  FIG. 64 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 64C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, the determination result and the special figure variation time are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and is also stored in the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information. Can be sent.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 65A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S4001 of FIG. 65A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S4003 following step S4001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4005. . In step S4005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S4007 following step S4005, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S4009 following step S4007, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S4007, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S4011, following step S4009, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S4009 according to the detection result is the effect data corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Process to change to.

  In step S4013 subsequent to step S4011, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S4009, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S4015 subsequent to step S4013, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to the game board lamp 442 or the game table frame lamp 452 in the effect data read out in step S4009, this command is used as the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game table. This is output to the frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  In step S4017 following step S4015, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S4009, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S4019 following step S4017, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S4009, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S4003.

  FIG. 65B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S4031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 65C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S4041 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S4003 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S4003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S4043 following step S4041, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S4019) of the first sub control unit main process, and the random number value update process for other effects is performed. Etc.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 66A is a flowchart of main processing executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S5001 in FIG. 66A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S5001. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S5003 following step S5001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5005. . In step S5005, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S5007 following step S5005, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S5009 following step S5007, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S5007, processing such as reading effect data (effect data by the decorative symbol display device 208) corresponding to the command from ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S5011 following step S5009, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 516 in the effect data read in step S5009, this command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S5003.

  FIG. 66B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S5031 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 66C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle. In step S5041 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S5003 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S5003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S5043 subsequent to step S5041, a random number value for other effects is updated.

  FIG. 66D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S5011 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S5051, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S5053 following step S5051, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S5053: Yes), the process proceeds to step S5055. If not (step S5053: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S5055, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S5051, the CPU 504 sets information on the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, the image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S5057 following step S5055, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S5059 following step S5057, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S5059: Yes), The process proceeds to step S5061, and if not (step S5059: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S5061, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 67A is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 67B is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. . The decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. Also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This hold frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The variation icon h0 can be displayed in a state of being placed on the pedestal h0s, and when the variation icon h0 is displayed, the fact that the symbol variation is being displayed is informed. Note that the change icon h0 is not displayed when the symbol confirmation display is in progress. A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game, for example, a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. Note that the base hs0 of the variation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM does not have to be displayed at all times, and specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, N look-ahead notices, notices in the symbol change display, and symbol change display holds accumulated) May be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by the user setting. In FIG. 67 (a), since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode). May change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display.

  The fluctuation icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that is displayed after the hold is consumed and the special figure variable game is started, in other words, an icon related to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon with the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area to the variable icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as a variable icon, or expressed as a variable icon moving. Good. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. This variation icon is displayed in a display size (display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon. Thereby, although the change icon and the hold icon may be easily identified, they may be the same size. In addition, the variation icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of whether or not the change is appropriate (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically erased at a timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed.

  In the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Then, in the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, a second decorative design (fifth design) smaller than the first decorative design is a combination of decorative designs of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stop is displayed. Note that the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display (in this case, “4” and “0”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is displayed. It should be noted that the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7 segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). Also good. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order.

  Further, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it can be moved up and down or rotated depending on the contents of the effect. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 67A, the family crest member 224E is located at the initial position. The initial position of the family crest member 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production.

  Further, on both the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first large board acting 224Ga with the letters “Large”, which is one of the production movable bodies, and the second with the letters “Board”. A large board behavior object 224Gb, a third large board behavior object 224Gc with the letters “behavior”, and a fourth big board behavior object 224Gd with the letters “mai” are arranged. Each of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd can rotate around the center and can move toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . In addition, the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior article 224Gd incorporate light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of effects.

  In addition, above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand box accessory 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so that it can move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. . The thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the Senryo box accessory 224H incorporates light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of effects.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of these decorative design display device 208, family crest role 224E, first large board behavioral feature 224Ga to fourth large board behavioral role 224Gd and thousand carton box role 224H, The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body via the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 67 (a), the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 4th symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the 4th symbol by the light emission mode of the LED, for example. The fourth symbol display device 284 may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The fourth symbol display device 284 is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. While the special symbol symbol is stopped, the LED is turned on, while the special symbol symbol variation is blinking or extinguished. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67B, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height of the display area is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Furthermore, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable vertically along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It should be noted that the rendering operations of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above may not be configured to be able to all be performed, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to. In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform an effect operation (that is, may be fixed). Further, the rendering operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the rendering operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be different. For example, the number of rendering operations that can be performed is different. Or the directing operation that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may also be configured to perform a rendering operation. Specifically, the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs an effect operation, and either one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate. Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. Further, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device, and are named for convenience. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion thereof is covered with a decorative member that constitutes the effect device 206, and a part thereof cannot be visually recognized. Note that the decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. Also, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the universal figure reservation lamp 216 are illustrated. Omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is disposed on the right side at the bottom of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is disposed on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a holding frame. This hold frame can also be seen as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the left side of the first UI unit 280, a variation icon h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on the base hs0, and notifies that the symbol variation is being displayed. A navigation character YM made up of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right side of the variation icon h0. The second UI unit 281 has a holding icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four holding icons can be displayed. Note that the base hs0 of the variation icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 67 (b), since four variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, four hold icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In FIG. 67 (b), the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode). Depending on the situation, the display mode may change. Thereby, it is possible to perform a notice display or a pre-read notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is the decorative symbol “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7”. Stopped in combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed by another display device for presentation (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. Part of the combination of symbols (one or two decorative symbols match) or all may be mismatched. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second hold number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the hold icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Moreover, you may divide and display a 2nd holding | maintenance number display to the decoration symbol display apparatus which is different in special figure 1 and special figure 2. FIG. Further, the second number-of-holds display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may not be displayed on first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed by other effect display devices (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, etc.). May be. The second hold number display may display the hold number of only one of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and display the hold number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As this background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a gaming state (a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, a short time state, etc.) is displayed. Note that the background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display that is performed as a notice or pre-read notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the determination result. In addition, a plurality of types of background display may be displayed in a certain gaming state (any one or more of a normal gaming state, a probability variation state, a hidden probability variation state, and a time reduction state). In this case, it may change with the law (for example, the background display A → the background display B → the background display C → the background display A →... If it collapses, it may be a jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice).) The order may change randomly regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are each provided with a frame (bezel) on the outer periphery, but may be frameless. Moreover, a decoration member and LED may be provided in the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move up and down or rotate according to the contents of the effect. . In the example shown in FIG. 67 (b), the family crest character 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the family crest character 224E shown in FIG. 67 (b) is the upper end of the family crest character 224E. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

  In addition, the above-mentioned thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move in the vertical direction according to the contents of the effect. The Senryo box accessory 224H is arranged in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the family crest role 224E and the Thousand box accessory 224H. It is possible to visually recognize the operation of each effect movable body.

  In FIG. 67 (b), a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Next, an example of an effect using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a) or FIG. 67 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect applicable in the present embodiment.

  68 (A1) to 68 (A2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a). That is, when the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand box action 224H are operated from the state shown in FIG. 68A1, the mode shown in FIG. 68A2 is obtained. Specifically, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are first positioned until the characters “large”, “board”, “behavior”, and “mai” are in front. Each rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to an overlapping position at the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, the thousand box action 224H is arranged on the front side of the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd, and the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd is the thousand box machine. Compared with the case where it is not overlapped with 224H, it is difficult to view. In addition, you may be comprised so that the thousand-thousand box combination 224H may not overlap with the front side of the 1st large board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th large board behavioral thing 224Gd. Further, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the thousand-thousand box role 224H and overlap with the thousand-thousand box role 224H.

  In FIG. 68 (B1), the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a), and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL easier to see. .

  68 (C1) to FIG. 68 (C4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a). Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 68 (C1) to (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I is provided as an effect movable body in place of the family crest member 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versatile writer, and is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to an arbitrary position. The POV display 280 includes a lift arm and an LED array that is rotatably attached to the tip of the lift arm. The lifting arm can be lifted and lowered by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion. In the LED array, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a line, and the attitude extending in the horizontal direction is the initial attitude of the LED array. The LEDs provided in the LED array may be full color LEDs or single color LEDs. A motor is built in the tip of the elevating arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotation shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) performs lighting control for each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on the versa data that is a kind of effect data. Do. By doing in this way, the light emission aspect of several LED changes during rotation of an LED array, and an afterimage is visually recognized by a player. That is, an afterimage of light is generated on the rotation trajectory of each LED, and a pattern is represented. In addition, the POV display 224I is disposed on the front side of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd and the thousand-thousand box actor 224H. Can be set.

  FIG. 68C1 shows a state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  68 (C2) shows a state in which the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the lifting arm, and the LED array overlaps with the front side of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. Therefore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, it is difficult to visually recognize the display screen as compared with the case where the POV display 224I is not overlapped.

  FIG. 68 (C3) shows a state in which the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating rotation from low speed to high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. Further, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbols, and these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

  In FIG. 68 (C4), the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, the letters “heat” are displayed, and a state in which a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed is shown. Note that the image displayed on the POV display 224I is not limited to that described above, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative design, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the luminance of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 and various lamps is lowered to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. Also good. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be dark-displayed.

  In FIG. 68 (D1), the light guide plate IL emits light in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b), and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made easier to visually recognize.

  68 (E1) to 68 (E2) show how the family crest member 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68 (E1), the family crest member 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position, and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, The change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM are more difficult to visually recognize than at least a part of the icons does not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (E2), the crest character 224E rotates in the clockwise direction (CW direction). The family crest character 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest character 224E may vibrate with rotation or instead of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascent may be performed and the rotation and vibration may not be performed. Note that the present invention can also be applied to the effect device 206 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 68 (F1) shows a state in which the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is operating in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). Specifically, it is shown that the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is moved from the initial position to a position that overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (F1), the first decorative symbol is made more difficult to visually recognize than the case where the first decorative symbol is not overlapped because the two-and-a-half box accessory 224H is overlapped. In this effect example, when the Senryo box combination 224H operates, the family crest combination 224E is prevented from operating so that the Senryo box combination 224H and the family crest combination 224E do not interfere with each other. Note that there may be a case where both the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H and the family crest accessory 224E are operating. In addition, when the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates, a retreat operation for moving the family crest accessory 224E further downward may be performed.

  In FIG. 68 (G1), in the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid so as to be continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. A scroll display is also made. That is, the background image is configured such that an area that has not been displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are slid can be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that can be seen by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Accordingly, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Can be displayed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward. The second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward and The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 68 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. A state of being displayed across the device 208N is shown. That is, the enlarged left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the enlarged right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Are displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M or the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol may not be displayed across the two display devices. For example, the enlarged left symbol is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed. Only the enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Moreover, the fluctuation icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbols may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  68 (I1) to FIG. 68 (I2) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 68 (I1) to (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided in place of the family crest character 224E. 68 (I1) shows a state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 68 (I2), the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to the position where the LED array overlaps the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and then the LED array rotates and is rotated at a constant rotation. The figure shows that the speed is reached and the rotation speed is constant, and the word “heat” is displayed.

  In FIG. 68 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the change icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are displayed differently from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  68 (K1) to FIG. 68 (K4) show the operation mode of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b). In the example shown in FIG. 68 (K1) to FIG. 68 (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 68 (K1) shows a state in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in the initial positions.

  FIG. 68 (K2) shows that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slidingly moved to positions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is scrolled in accordance with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. The display is made. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In other words, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are images displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the overlapping images are adjusted in accordance with the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can display with a sense of unity. As shown in FIG. 68 (K2), the family crest actor 224E moves downward from the initial position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. It has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 68 (K2 '), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without being scrolled. Further, the family crest character 224E may rotate at an initial position or vibrate when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in operation. You may vibrate while rotating.

  68 (K3) to 68 (K4), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are in close proximity to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The state of rotating integrally in the direction (CCW direction) is shown. FIG. 68 (K4) shows a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged so that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are aligned with the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Display that rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performed around the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N. As a result, the player may see that the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating, but the displayed image does not rotate.

  In FIG. 68 (L1), the modification of the production | presentation apparatus 206 shown to Fig.67 (a) is shown. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 68 (L1), the sub display device 208S is arranged below the decorative design display device 208 instead of the family crest actor 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative design display device 208. It overlaps at least part of the lower end. In the sub display device 208S, the respective displays on the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) described above are displayed. That is, on the sub display device 208S, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a state in which the savory character SBH is walking from the right side to the left side is shown. It is more difficult to view than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. As shown in FIG. 68 (L1 '), a display image (background image, Sabohan character SBH, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 208S.

  In FIG. 68 (M1), the operation modes of the sub display device 208S and the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are shown. In other words, the sub display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position that is substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The 1st large board acting 224Ga to the 4th large board behavior 224Gd are rotated to the positions where the letters “large”, “board”, “vibration”, and “mai” are in front, respectively, and then the decorative symbol display device 208 The sub display device 208S has moved to a position that is in the vicinity of both left and right ends of the sub display device 208S that has moved to a position that is approximately the front side. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a state in which a predetermined notice effect or a pre-read notice effect is being performed is shown. ing.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 71 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 70, and FIG. 72 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect shown in FIG. .

  In FIG. 69, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, the special symbol 1 hold lamp 218, the special symbol 2 hold lamp 220, and the general figure hold. A lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following description, the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (a) is applied for explanation, but the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b) can also be applied. Also, in the following, illustration of the family crest character 224E, the first large board behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior character 224Gd, the thousand-car box function 224H, and the light guide plate IL is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (1), the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image (shore background image) as shown in FIG. 67A is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second reserved number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in combination with the decorative symbol “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” in accordance with the stop indication of the first decorative symbol. In the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 69 is a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. Note that the hold icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  On the second UI unit 281, a hold icon representing the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed. The number of holds in FIG. 1 is represented not only by the number of lights in the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 but also by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. 1, and the number of holds in FIG. In addition to the number of lighting of the hold lamp 220, it is also represented by the number of hold icons and the second hold number display in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icon is displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon for winning.

  In FIG. 69 (1), two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281. Both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. It is displayed in a (round, non-patterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 69 (1), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are indicated by broken lines. In FIG. 69 (1), for ease of explanation, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are indicated by broken lines. However, the broken lines are not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, no hold icon in the special figure 2 is displayed. As described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 69 is the non-electric support state (non-time-short state), it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the special icon hold icon of the special figure that is easy to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 69 (1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon in FIG. 2 is displayed and the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed. In the non-electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed. In the electric support state, the hold icon shown in FIG. 1 may be displayed.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display of the special symbol is started in the special symbol display device by the start of variation → the start of blinking or extinction of the fourth symbol → the start of variation of the second decorative symbol → the start or deletion of the moving animation of the hold icon → decoration Although it is performed in the order of the change start of the symbols, this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 69 (2), the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design. It should be noted that the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 and the variation display of the fourth symbol may be started simultaneously, or after the symbol variation on the first special symbol display device 212 has started, the variation display of the fourth symbol. May be started, or the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 may be started after the variation display of the fourth symbol is started.

  In FIG. 69 (3), the second number-of-holds display is updated from 2 to 1, and a state in which the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started is shown. The update display of the second reserved number display and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol may be performed at the same time, or after the update display of the second reserved number display is performed, the change of the second decorative symbol is displayed. The display may be started, or the updated display of the second hold number display may be performed after the second decorative symbol variation display is started.

  In FIG. 69 (4), the movement animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 in the special figure 1 has started. Here, the movement (decrease) animation indicates that the hold icon (the target hold icon for the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves toward the base hs0 of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the hold icon that was in the display position of the second hold icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in the special drawing 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 67). . At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 69 (5), the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 69 (6), the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the change icon base hs0 and is displayed as the change icon h0. In addition, the hold icon that was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change reaches the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. Display starts. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. Note that the end of the movement animation and the start of the first decorative symbol change display may be at the same timing, or after the movement animation ends, the first decorative symbol change display may be started. The moving animation may end after the display of the variation of one decorative symbol is started.

  FIG. 69 (7) shows a state in which the variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (8), a state in which a navigation character notice by the navigation character YM is being performed is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navigation character notice is started, a balloon with the word “opportunity” displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM is displayed to notify that the expectation for the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (9), a state in which the conversation notice is started while the navigation character notice is being performed is shown. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. In addition, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In the Navi character preview, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of “Opportunity” to the character display of “No”, thereby informing that the sense of expectation for the big hit is further increased. Note that the timing at which Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “No”, or the display in the balloon after the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is displayed. May be updated to “NO”, or the conversation image CI1 of Tonosama may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “NO”. In addition, there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) to be promoted from a previously displayed notice (for example, “opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “Intense heat”) may not be performed. . In addition, the Navi character notice is not only a notice in the symbol change display, but a look-ahead notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice will be performed, an explanation display (characters appearing in various notices, game states, and effects of the pachinko machine 100) And explanation of stage of production, etc., also referred to as tutorial display).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (10), the conversation notice is updated and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation announcement, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the heel with the operation promotion notification image displayed together with the heel character is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and includes a button image 136a that imitates the chance button 136, and a remaining time display meter MT that represents the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is constituted by. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (10), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, no display corresponding to this is performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where you can. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Also, as shown in FIG. 69 (10), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and the Ton-sama's conversation image is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to view. In the Navi character notice, the balloon display changes from “No” to “Intense fever”, indicating that the expectation of a big hit is considerably high. Further, the display of the balloon overlaps with a part of the habit conversation image CI2. It should be noted that the timing at which the conversation image CI2 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense heat”, or after the conversation image CI2 is displayed in the balloon. The display may be updated to “Intense fever”, or after the display in the balloon is updated to “Intense fever”, the habit conversation image CI2 may be displayed. Thus, in this production example, the case where the conversation notice is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the conversation notice is not performed. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 does not have to be displayed in a reduced size (for example, the display having the same size as FIG. 69 (9) is displayed). It may be erased. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation valid period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (11). The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing shown in FIG. 69 (11).

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 69 (12) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation valid period started, and thereafter at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (13). A state in which the person presses the chance button 136 is shown. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (12), the navigation character notice has ended, and the balloon display has been deleted. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above-described operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 69 (14), in the frog conversation image CI2, the characters “It is intense heat” are displayed instead of the operation promotion notification image. There is a case. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is quite high. It should be noted that the notice character display such as “It is intense heat” may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period is not operated without operating the chance button 136. It may also be displayed when it has elapsed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (15), the Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 and the frog's conversation image CI2 are erased, the conversation notice is finished, and the first decorative symbol is easily visible. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 69 (16), after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, “decoration” is displayed on the right symbol as shown in FIG. 69 (17). 7 "is stopped and a reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an effect that the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 69 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the reach start animation. In the reach start animation in this production example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging / reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. It should be noted that an appropriate display mode of the reach start animation can be employed. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 69 (20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed in the left and right directions, respectively. In the first UI unit 280, the variation is changed. The icon h0 is left and the frame is framed out below the display area, and the hold icons h11 to h14 displayed on the second UI unit 281 (the hold icon h11 in the production example shown in FIG. 69 (20)) are also framed out. . Note that the start of moving display of the left and right symbols of the first decorative design and the start of frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be the same timing, or the first After the display of the left and right symbols of the decorative design starts, the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may start, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image starts, the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (22), the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting 224Ga and the second large board acting 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. In addition, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral substance 224Gd may not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69 (23), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image appears on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Note that the light guide plate IL may not emit light. For example, there may be a case where both of the operations of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior. Only the operation of the accessory 224Gd may be performed, and the light guide plate IL may not emit light. Alternatively, only the light guide plate IL may emit light, and the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act. The operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large board behavior object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed. Good.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 70 (25), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are initial. Return to position. The light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd return to the initial positions, respectively, or the first large board acting 224Ga to the second large board acting 224Gad. The start of the movement of the four large board acting items 224Gd to the initial position and the end of the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed simultaneously. Here, in FIGS. 69 (22) to (24), a series of effects performed by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting machine 224Gd and the light guide plate IL is performed. You may be comprised so that it may become a big hit rather than the case where an effect is not performed.

  FIG. 70 (26) shows a state of development to super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (26) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The animation is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed to show that the button effect is started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (29), the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 70 (30), the state in which the operation effective period is started and the gauge is decreasing is shown. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the chance button 136 is pressed is shown. When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above-mentioned operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 70 (32), a Tono-sama cut-in image CI3 is displayed, and a notice effect is provided to notify that the reliability of the jackpot is high. . The cut-in image CI3 of Tono overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is difficult to view compared to the case where the cut-in image CI3 of Tono-sama is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of Tono-sama may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or when the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of Tono-sama is deleted, and a state in which the animation display of the duel scene is continued is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the state where the second button effect is started after the development to super reach is shown. ing. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (35), the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 70 (36), the state where the operation effective period is started and the gauge is reduced is shown. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the chance button 136 is pressed is shown. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach. Then, the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the second button effect may be faster than the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach, or after the development to super reach. The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 70 (38), the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and the first board The behavioral accessory 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object. It is difficult to view compared to the case where it is not overlapped by 224Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. Further, the effect shown in FIG. 70 (38) may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be displayed in some cases. Further, there may be a case where only one of the effect image display and the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board acting machine 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the effect image display and the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth The operation of the large board acting 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd is started. And the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior machine 224Gd may be started simultaneously. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period, an effect display that is lost may be performed without the effect shown in FIG. 70 (38), and further, an effect display that is lost is displayed. After being performed, a revival effect may be displayed to produce a jackpot effect display. When the effect shown in FIG. 70 (38) is started, the displayed fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed, but may be continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 70 (39), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board behavioral 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral 224Gd. Is shown. Further, thereafter, FIG. 70 (40) shows a state in which the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-thousand boxing machine 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. However, it can be set appropriately. Moreover, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box act 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not performed.

  FIG. 70 (41) shows a state in which the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (42), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. Thereafter, in FIG. 70 (43), the effect image fades out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (44), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd each move toward the initial position. Has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is resumed while fading in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 70 (46). In FIG. 70 (46), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 70 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol to notify that it is a big hit. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 70 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 71 (49), the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Fluctuation fluctuation is started by the combination of decorative patterns. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure A at the timing shown in FIG. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol confirmation is stopped, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol continues, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 71 (51), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorations of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Display starts. Since this time is a big hit game started with a big hit with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, the special symbol display device 208 displays “special bonus” and the game It is notified to the person that it is a 15R probability variation big hit. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (52), a mini right-handed display for instructing a right hand is performed at the upper left corner of the display area. Note that mini right-handed display may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (53), after the right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to make a right-handed shot is displayed, the first round is started as shown in FIG. 71 (54). When the first round is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a round effect display and displays “decoration 7” indicating a combination of the decorative symbols when the big hit is in the lower right corner of the display screen. Has been done. In addition, mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and “1R” that is the current round is displayed in the upper right corner. In addition, you may make it display the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game, and the total number of prize balls acquired during the retreat.

  After that, when the big hit game is digested and the 15th round is started, as shown in FIG. 71 (55), the decorative design display device 208 performs a round effect display, and in the upper right corner of the display area, The current round “15R” is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (56) shows that the big hit game is over and the big symbol end effect display is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. Since the big hit game this time is a big hit game started as a 15R probability variable big hit, after the big hit game ends, the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state (a probability varying state with electric support). Therefore, in the jackpot end effect display, the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” indicating that effect is performed, and it is informed that the state will shift to a positive change state with electric support.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (57), a display (attention display) for calling attention to forgetting to remove the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 45) is performed. This warning display may be displayed only when the big hit game at the first big hit that was a big hit in a gaming state that is not in electric support, or it may be a big hit regardless of the situation where it was a big hit. It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 71 (58) shows a state before the big hit game is over and the state is shifted to the probability variation state with electric support and the first symbol variation display is started. In the probabilistic state with electric support, the background image is a background image for the probable state with electric support, and the decorative pattern is also displayed differently from the normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). . In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is formed at the lower center of the display screen, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is notified by the number of icons displayed. Here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square patternless and white display mode, and the display form (here, the shape) is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1, and the player Can be distinguished at a glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same. In FIG. 71 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 in FIG. The icon is shown with a broken line. 71 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is shown by a broken line for easy explanation, but this broken line is actually displayed. Not. Further, in the certain change state with electric support, the hold icon in FIG. 1 is not displayed, but may be displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed at the upper left corner of the display screen, and characters “bonus × ○” indicating the number of consecutive homes are displayed below the display. ing. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (58), since the first big hit game has ended, “bonus × 1” indicating that is displayed.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (60) instructs the player to make a right-handed strike. A right-hand notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the characters “please right-handed” are displayed on the translucent band image. In the right-handed notification, the decorative symbol is overlapped with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than when it is not overlapped. The right-handed notification is displayed only in the electric support state where the first big hit game is finished and shifted, but it may be displayed in the electric support state where the big hit game other than the first big hit game is finished and transferred. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game is finished and the electronic support state is entered. In addition, after shifting to the electric support state, a right-handed notification may be displayed even when it is detected that the player is left-handed. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has been won. In such a case, it may be determined that left-handed has been made and a right-handed notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (60), the second reserved number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 71 (61) shows that the decorative symbol variation display has started. Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-hand notification is displayed, the right-hand notification is not displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (62). Note that the mini right-handed display continues.

  FIG. 71 (63) shows a state in which there are four suspensions of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 2. That is, in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are lit to indicate that there are four holdings in the special figure 2, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 in the special figure 2 are displayed. Are displayed. In the second hold number display, “4” indicating that the hold number in FIG. 2 is four is also displayed.

  FIG. 72 (49a) shows another production example following FIG. 70 (48). 69 to 70, the case where “decoration 7” is reached and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol has been described. A case where “decoration 6” is displayed on the symbol will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (49a), a state is shown in which the first decorative symbol is fluctuated by a combination of decorative symbols having “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure B at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (50a), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not been determined to stop the symbol determination. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped. By seeing this, the player may be able to recognize that a big hit of either 5R probability big hit, 5R normal big hit, or 2R normal big hit has become.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Display starts. Since this time is a big hit game started with a big hit with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, the ornament symbol display device 208 displays “bonus” and the player It is reported that either the 5R probability big hit, the 5R normal big hit, or the 2R normal big hit is one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 72 (38b) shows another production example following FIG. 70 (37). FIG. 72 (38b) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation effective period but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6” is displayed on the middle symbol, and it is notified that the game is lost. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out and the animation display of the duel scene is resumed. Here, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, then the duel scene animation display fades out, and as shown in FIG. It is left and hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 72 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) scroll in from below the display area, and the holding icon And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (42 b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, shaking fluctuation is started with a combination of decorative symbols in which the first decorative symbol is “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display form of special figure I at the timing shown in FIG. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (43b), since the first sub-control unit 400 has not received the symbol variation stop command from the main control unit 300, it has not been determined to stop the symbol determination. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  Thereafter, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, as shown in FIG. 72 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are decorations “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”, respectively. In addition to the stop display by the combination of symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs display in a mode that the symbols are stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 72 (45b), the change icon deletion animation is displayed. In the fluctuation icon erasing animation display, the fluctuation icon h0 is gradually reduced, and finally, an animation display in which the fluctuation icon h0 disappears is performed as shown in FIG. 72 (46b). Note that the fluctuation icon erasing animation may be started before the special drawing stops.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, various customizations can be performed.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the contents of customization that can be performed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is not started even after a lapse of a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) after the symbol variation display is stopped, the mode is changed to the demonstration mode, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is The demo screen is displayed. It should be noted that during the period from when the special symbol change display is stopped until the mode is changed to the demonstration mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the combination of the stop symbols of the decorative symbols, and the operation means such as the chance button 136 is provided. In some cases, a special animation is displayed when you operate. In the demo screen, a dedicated animation is displayed, or a combination of a stop pattern of a decorative design (if the decorative design is composed of an image such as a character and a character image (including numbers), an image such as a character is displayed on the demo screen. Is displayed, the character image may be hidden, or both the character image and the character image may be displayed) or a movie including the model title (expectation level) May also include a presentation movie that introduces a high-priority notice or a highly anticipated reach, etc.), and there is also a period during which menu icons, volume adjustment icons, and brightness adjustment icons are displayed. . It should be noted that the demonstration mode may include a state in which a combination of stop display of decorative symbols is displayed.

  When the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1 is operated while the menu icon, the volume adjustment icon, and the brightness adjustment icon are displayed, an option menu is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, by operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 1, a volume adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the volume of the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Further, by operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137, a brightness adjustment window is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, such as a game board lamp 442 and / or a game platform frame lamp 452 shown in FIG. The light quantity of LED can be increased / decreased. Here, the game board lamp 442 includes the light guide plate IL shown in FIG. 67 and the like, but it may not be included. If the up / down key of the operation key unit 137 is operated while the volume adjustment window is displayed, the brightness adjustment window is displayed. Conversely, the operation key unit 137 is displayed while the brightness adjustment window is displayed. When the left and right keys are operated, the volume adjustment window is displayed.

  As will be described in detail later, an icon for “returning to the demo screen” is prepared in the option menu. When the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor positioned on this icon, the screen returns to the demo screen. be able to. When the special symbol variation display is started, the option menu is automatically ended, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol. Furthermore, if there is no operation for a certain period (for example, 1 minute) with the option menu displayed, the display automatically returns to the demonstration screen.

  In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the left and right keys of the operation key unit 137, the volume is determined, the display returns from the volume adjustment window to the demonstration screen, and the chance button 136 is pressed after operating the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137. When the button is pressed, the light amount is determined and the display returns to the demonstration screen from the brightness adjustment window. Further, even if the chance button 136 is not pressed, the display automatically returns to the demonstration screen after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) after the left / right or up / down key operation. When the special symbol variation display is started, the volume adjustment window and the luminance adjustment window are automatically disappeared here, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 73B shows the configuration of the option menu.

  In the option menu, “production customization”, “character selection”, “hold frame selection”, “hold display selection”, and “background display selection” can be roughly divided.

  “Auto button mode” of “production customization” may be the same response effect as when the operation means such as the chance button 136 is operated without operating the operation means such as the chance button 136. It is a mode. Note that ON / OFF written in “Option” in FIG. 73B means setting / non-setting and valid / invalid. “Long press automatic continuous hit” means that a long press is repeated for the operation means such as the chance button 136, and the press is repeated at a high speed during the long press. ) It is a function that performs the same response effect as the time, and the speed of repeated hits can be selected. The “group notice” is a kind of normal notice (notice of the change), and in this option menu, the player can select the reliability (expected degree) of jackpot of the group notice. For example, there is a 100% confidence that the fluctuation displayed in the group notice may be a big hit! ? If you want to increase the frequency at which the group notice appears as a notice of the change, set the reliability to 50%. Compared to when the frequency at which the group notice appears as the notice of the change is set to 50%. However, if you want to be displayed in the change as a big hit (big hit confirmed) notice, the reliability is 100%! ? Set to. “Winning sound notice” is a kind of pre-reading notice when the special figure starting point is won and the number of holds increases. The winning sound notice may be a notice of the change. The back button means that the operation valid period of the operation means such as the chance button 136 has started and / or that the operation valid period of the operation means is not notified. When “Navigation” is turned on (set), for example, the chance button lamp 138 is turned on during the operation valid period of the operation means, or a character display such as “It may be good to operate the operation means” is displayed. Will come to be. “No prefetching notice” is not performed for all prefetching notices other than the prefetching notice according to the display mode of the hold icon (for example, the prefetching notice other than the hold icon by the moving means (the movable movable body) or the display means). Equivalent to “ON”). “Premier up” is a setting for increasing the appearance frequency of the big hit rich or big hit finalizing effect (corresponding to “ON”). “No hold change” is a setting that does not make a pre-read notice according to the display mode of the hold icon (corresponding to “ON”). A “one-shot announcement” is a specific notice about the jackpot richness or jackpot confirmation (for example, the stage action by the stage moving body, the jackpot richness (bonus settlement confirmed) sound by the sound output means, the frame or the game board The notice by the light emission effect by some or all decoration LED is mentioned.)

  In this specification, “big hit confirmation” refers to the symbol fluctuation in which the big jackpot confirmation notice is displayed or the symbol fluctuation of the pre-reading target suspension when the notice of jackpot confirmation and / or the prefetch notice notice is displayed. When the pre-reading notice confirming the big hit is displayed, it indicates that the change or the pre-read target hold is necessarily a big hit (the same applies to the following description).

  In addition, the term “big hit rich” in this specification means a state of high expectation for the big hit, and even if the notice of the big hit rich and / or the pre-reading notice is displayed, the big hit rich notice is displayed. It is shown that even if a big hit rich pre-reading notice is displayed for the symbol variation or the symbol variation of the pre-reading target hold, it may be lost (the same applies to the following description). Further, the jackpot richness may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed (the same applies to the following description).

  In addition, the description of “hot” in this specification is a state of high expectation for the jackpot, but even if the hot notice and / or the pre-read notice notice is displayed, the hot notice is displayed. It shows that even if a hot pre-reading notice is displayed for fluctuation or a pre-reading-targeted symbol change, it may be lost (the same applies to the following description). “Hot” may indicate that the degree of expectation of jackpot is lower than the jackpot richness, and “hot” may indicate that the jackpot is rich or the jackpot is confirmed (the following explanation) The same applies to

  Further, “Daitomo” described in FIG. 73 (b) is a member service for registering a member and accessing a Web server through an Internet line. Level (lv) is obtained by accumulating experience values. The service is such that various benefits can be acquired according to the level. When this “Daitomo” member service is executed, the pachinko machine 100 is set to the user mode. Some pachinko machines 100 do not support “Daitomo” membership service. In the model of the specification corresponding to the member service of “Daitomo”, if the user mode is set and the level of Daitomo reaches the 15th level, the setting of the back button navigation is released as a kind of production customization. Also, in FIG. 73 (b), the item “Daitomo setting” is released simply by registering as a member and setting the user mode. Therefore, even if the level is 0 at the time of joining Daitomo, the reserved frame B can be used only by setting the user mode, for example, if the reserved frame is selected. Here, the reserved frame corresponds to a combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 shown in FIG. Note that “initial setting” means that the user mode is automatically selected when the user mode is not set. In addition, “Daitomo” can experience the membership before the official member registration, and the member who has experienced the membership can use the samurai character in the character selection as a trial play.

  In addition, as one of the benefits of Daitomo, there is an item that cannot be selected unless the level of Daitomo is raised. That is, among “character selection”, “hold frame selection”, “hold display selection”, and “background display selection”, items whose Daitomo level (lv) is displayed in “open condition” are displayed levels. This is an item that can be selected only after reaching (lv).

  FIG. 74 is a transition diagram of the option menu screen when the member service is not used.

  By operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137, the cursor moves up and down on the option menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. "Direction customization", "Character selection", "Hold frame selection", "Hold display selection", "Background display selection", "Initialization", "Return to demo screen" items connected by arrows Between each other, the cursor moves by operating the upper key or the lower key of the operation key unit 137, and a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item “production customization” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the production customization screen. Also, when the cursor is placed on the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the option menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, each of the “production customization screen”, “character selection screen”, “hold frame selection screen”, “hold display selection screen”, “background display selection screen”, and “initialization confirmation screen” has a “return” icon. Is displayed, and the user can return to the option menu screen by moving the cursor to the “return” icon and pressing the chance button 136. Further, the user may be allowed to return to the option menu screen without placing the cursor on the “return” icon or by pressing the cancel key of the operation key unit 137.

  Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is the option menu screen, the “production customization screen” Even in the “character selection screen”, “hold frame selection screen”, “hold display selection screen”, “background display selection screen”, and “initialization confirmation screen”, the screen shifts to the decorative symbol variation display screen.

  Next, the items described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 will be specifically described using display examples on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of calling an option menu screen, a volume adjustment window, and a brightness adjustment window from the demonstration screen. The example described here is an example for a pachinko machine 100 having a specification that does not support the “Daitomo” member service. The opening condition in FIG. 73 (b) is ignored, and any item is selected from the beginning. Is possible. In the following embodiments, an icon indicating the appearance of the cross key (up key, down key, left key, right key) of the operation key unit and an icon indicating the appearance of the chance button are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this case, a colorless and non-patterned icon indicates an operation unit that cannot be operated, and icons displayed in other modes (colored and / or patterned) indicate an operation unit that can be operated.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). The special symbol change display is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number in the special figure 1 and the hold number in the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the special symbol stop symbol is displayed. When a certain time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in this state, display of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI shown in FIG. 75 (1) is started. Even before a certain period of time has elapsed, the special symbol stop symbol display period has ended, and the next symbol variation display has not started (for example, the special symbol stop symbol determination in a state where there is no hold) If the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the cross key of the operation unit) is operated, the icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed. These icons MI, VI, and BI may be displayed on the condition that a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed symbol stop display period of the special figure has ended. Good. Alternatively, even if the display of these icons MI, VI, and BI is started, the option menu screen and volume adjustment can be performed even if the chance button 136 and the cross key of the operation key unit 137 are operated for a certain period (for example, 3 seconds). The window and the brightness adjustment window may not be displayed.

  In addition, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI may include a display (character display or image display) of the content being customized. For example, in the case of the menu icon MI, a character display or icon display for effect customization, in the case of the volume adjustment icon VI, a gauge display indicating the volume level, and in the case of the brightness adjustment icon BI, a gauge display indicating the light amount level is displayed. It may be included. Further, the menu icon MI may include a large item display (for example, “character selection” or the like) shown in FIG. 73B, or may not be included as shown in FIG. 75 (1). Also good.

  In FIG. 75 (2), the lower key 137d of the operation key unit is operated. It is the same even if the up key 137u is operated. The cross key is lit in white when there is no operation, but the pressed key changes to red, but the cross key may not be provided with a decorative lamp.

  By operating the down key 137d, the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (3). The brightness adjustment window BW is larger than the brightness adjustment icon BI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (3), the menu icon MI disappears, and the volume adjustment icon VI shifts to the position of the menu icon MI. A brightness adjustment window BW that is about four times as large as the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the light quantity of the LED such as the game board lamp 442 and / or the game stand frame lamp 452 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is the brightest five levels.

  In FIG. 75 (4), the down key 137d is operated once again, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 75 (6), the upper key 137u of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in the luminance adjustment window BW shown in FIG. Even if the up key 137u is operated in the state of 5 levels, the amount of light does not increase any more. Further, even if the lower key 137d is operated in the state of 1 level, the amount of light does not decrease any more. If no operation is performed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the display returns to the demonstration screen on which the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. However, if the upper key 137d or the lower key 137u is operated, The count start can be updated. That is, it is possible to extend the period until returning to the demo screen. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At this 0 level, the LED remains off.

  In FIG. 75 (8), the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated. The same applies when the left key 137l is operated.

  When the right key is operated, the volume control window VW is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (9). The volume adjustment window VW is larger than the volume adjustment icon VI. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (9), the volume adjustment window VW is on the menu icon MI side and is about four times the volume adjustment icon VI. The menu icon MI disappears and the brightness adjustment icon BI is displayed. In this example, the volume from the speaker 120 can be adjusted in five stages, and the initial value is three levels of an intermediate volume.

  In FIG. 75 (10), the right key of the operation key unit 137 is operated once again, and in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. In addition, even if the right key is operated in the state of the loudest five levels, the volume does not increase any more. Even if the left key is operated in the 1st level, the volume does not decrease any more. If no operation is performed for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), the screen returns to the demonstration screen on which the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. The period can be extended. It may be possible to set up to 0 level below 1 level. At the 0 level, the speaker 120 is kept muted (muted).

  When a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the last operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (13) displays a demo screen on which three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed. I'm back.

  In FIG. 75 (14), the chance button 136 is operated and the chance button 136 is operated, so that an option menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (15). The chance button 136 emits red light when the built-in chance button lamp 138 is pressed, but it may be lit red before being pressed. In this option menu screen, the background display, the hold frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear and appear under the “Menu” character display. Seven types of icons, such as a production customization icon, a character selection icon, a hold frame selection icon, a hold display selection icon, a background display selection icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen, are arranged in the vertical row from the top. It is displayed. A cursor icon cs that can be moved up and down with the up and down keys of the operation key unit 137 is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 75 (14), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icons are white, whereas the effect customization icon is lit red. In the option menu screen, a picture of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, in the operation key unit 137, a cross key pattern used for the selection operation and a chance button 136 pattern used for the determination operation are displayed. Furthermore, the pattern of the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the chance button 136 and the cursor icon cs and the cursor display among the cross keys is displayed in red. In the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  Here, even if the chance button 136 is operated during luminance adjustment or volume adjustment in FIGS. 75 (2) to (12), the option menu screen is not displayed, but may be displayed. . The initial position of the cursor icon cs at the start of the option menu screen display may be the top effect customization icon, the return icon, or other icons. Alternatively, it may be an icon of an item currently being customized.

  In FIG. 75 (16), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the effect customization icon, and as shown in FIG. 75 (17), the decoration symbol display device 208 has an effect customization screen. Is displayed. On the effect customization screen, a list of five lines is displayed. In the list, five items from the display of the small items in the effect customization shown in FIG. 73B ("01 auto button mode" to "05 back Button navigation ") and respective options (for example," OFF ON ", etc.) are displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. Below that, a confirmation icon for saving the setting changes, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, and an initialization icon for returning the settings to the initial value all at once are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left. ing. In the effect customization screen, a cursor display is used instead of the cursor icon. The initial position of the cursor display at the start of the production customization screen display is a return icon for returning to the option menu screen. The return icon on which the cursor display is displayed has a frame highlighted and further lit red. Of the displayed options, the currently set option is also displayed in red. For example, in the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 (17), the auto button mode is not set (OFF). Furthermore, the cross key image used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are also displayed in the lower right of the effect customization screen. In the effect customization screen, all of the keys 137u, d, l, and r of the cross key are displayed in red.

  In FIG. 75 (18), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the item of the auto button mode. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 (19), the frame of the item of the auto button mode is highlighted, and further, a balloon display is added, and the explanation of the auto button mode is displayed.

  In FIG. 75 (20), the right key 137r is operated while the cursor display is displayed in the item of the auto button mode. As a result, as shown in FIG. 75 (21), the currently set option of the auto button mode is changed to ON. That is, it was switched from OFF to ON. Note that when the currently set option is OFF and the left key 137l is operated, the key operation becomes invalid, but the same result as when the right key 137r is operated may be obtained.

  In FIG. 75 (22), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor display moves to the next item in the auto button mode (long press auto-strike). That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 (23), the frame of the item of long press auto-strike is highlighted, and further, a balloon display is added, and an explanation regarding this item is displayed. When the up key 137u is operated instead of the down key 137d, the cursor display moves to the confirmed icon when the setting is changed, and moves to the return icon when the setting is not changed. However, it may be moved to the confirmed icon with or without the setting change, or may be moved to the return icon.

  Thereafter, the lower key 137d is operated three times, and the cursor display moves to the bottom button navigation item. That is, on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 (25), the frame of the item of the back button navigation is highlighted, and further, a balloon display is added, and an explanation regarding this item is displayed.

  In FIG. 75 (26), the down key 137d is operated once more, and the list of five lines is updated as shown in FIG. 75 (27). In FIG. The item of the button mode disappears, and the cursor display is moved to the item with no pre-reading notice which was newly added instead of 06 in FIG. 73 (b).

  In FIG. 75 (28), the lower key 137d continues to be operated.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  The list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d, and on the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 76 (29) following FIG. 75 (28), 09 is the last small item of effect customization in FIG. 73 (b). The cursor is moved to the item of one notification.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (30), when the down key 137d is operated once again, the cursor display moves to the confirmation icon as shown in FIG. 76 (31), and the frame is highlighted in the confirmation icon. In addition, it is displayed in red.

  In FIG. 76 (32a), the chance button 136 is operated as a determination operation. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 76 (33a), a notification screen for notifying the completion of setting of the effect customization is superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side. Displayed. In addition, a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting for rendering customization is updated may be displayed. A return icon for returning to the option menu screen is displayed on the notification screen shown in FIG. 76 (33a), and the cursor display is displayed on the icon.

  In FIG. 76 (34), the chance button 136 is operated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG.

  Note that the return icon on the notification screen shown in FIG. 76 (33a) may be an icon for returning to the effect customization screen. By operating the return icon arranged on the effect customization screen, the option menu screen is displayed. It may be possible to return.

  After returning to the option menu screen, when the down key 137d is operated again with the option menu screen being displayed as shown in FIG. 76 (36) (see FIG. 37 (37)), FIG. ), The cursor icon cs previously displayed in the effect customization icon is moved down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon is red. Lights up.

  In FIG. 76 (39), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed as the character selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 76 (40), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character selection screen. Is displayed. A list of five lines is also displayed on the character selection screen, and five lists ("01 Yoshimune" to "05 Hani") are displayed in the list from the display of choices in the character selection shown in FIG. 73 (b). It is displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 76 (40), the cursor display is displayed in the item of Yoshimune, and on the left side of the character selection screen, the character pattern of the item for which the cursor display is displayed (here, the symbol of Yoshimune) is previewed. Has been. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for character selection is Yoshimune, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated. In the lower right of the character selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red chance used for the determination operation A picture of the button 136 is also displayed.

  The character set in the character selection here is always displayed, always appears at the time of production, or appears more frequently than other characters.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (41), when the down key 137d is operated once, as shown in FIG. 76 (42), the cursor display moves to the heel of the item one lower than Yoshimune. The picture is previewed.

  In FIG. 76 (43), the down key 137d is further operated five times, and the list is updated in accordance with the operation of the down key 137d. In the character selection screen shown in FIG. 76 (44), the list shown in FIG. The cursor display has moved to the item of 07 copanda which is the last choice of character selection.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (45), when the down key 137d is operated again, the cursor display moves to the return icon as shown in FIG. 76 (46), and the frame is highlighted in the return icon. In addition, it is displayed in red.

  Here, when the down key 137d is operated only once instead of the chance button 136 (FIG. 76 (47)), the list is updated, and as shown in FIG. Returning to the first list at the top, the cursor display has moved to that Yoshimune item. In FIG. 76 (49), the chance button 136 is operated. On the character selection screen shown in FIG. 76 (50), an animation display indicating that a character is determined is performed in the area where the preview display has been performed. Note that a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the character settings are to be updated may be displayed. In this example, however, an animation display indicating that the character is determined is displayed. Upon completion, the setting of the selected character is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 76 (51).

  It should be noted that even if the animation display indicating the determination of the character is finished, the character selection screen remains, and the return to the option menu screen can be performed by operating the return icon arranged on the character selection screen. Good.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 76 (52)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the reservation frame selection icon, and the reservation frame selection icon is lit red.

  In FIG. 76 (54), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the hold frame selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 76 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hold frame. A selection screen appears. A list of five lines is also displayed on the hold frame selection screen, and the list includes five options ("01 hold frame A" to "05" from the top of the display of options in the hold frame selection shown in FIG. 73 (b). Hold frame E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 76 (55), the cursor display is displayed on the item of the holding frame A, and the holding frame of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is displayed on the left window of the holding frame selection screen. With a preview. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for selecting the reserved frame is the reserved frame A. However, the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated reserved item that cannot be selected here. A frame may be prepared. Further, in the lower right of the hold frame selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for the selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only red), and a red icon used for the determination operation are displayed. A picture of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The hold frame set by the selection of the hold frame here is displayed as a first UI unit 280 and a second UI unit 281 at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 76 (56), the lower key 137d is operated once.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In response to a single operation of the down key 137d shown in FIG. 76 (56) following FIG. 76 (55), the cursor display is 1 of the holding frame A in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (57). The screen moves to the hold frame B of the next item, and the hold frame B is previewed in the left window.

  In FIG. 77 (58), the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed. In the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (59), when the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window on which the preview display is performed occurs, and the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected hold frame is updated. Is automatically performed, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 77 (60). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the setting of the hold frame is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold frame selection screen remains unchanged, and it may be possible to return to the option menu screen by operating the return icon arranged on the hold frame selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 77 (61)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the frame selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the hold display selection icon, and the hold display selection icon is lit red. In this state, the chance button 136 is pressed, and a hold display selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 77 (63). A list of five lines is also displayed on the hold display selection screen, and the list includes five choices (“01 icon A” to “05 icon” from the display of options in the hold display selection shown in FIG. 73 (b). E ") is displayed. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 77 (63), the cursor display is displayed on the item of the icon A, and the icon of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is previewed together with the hold frame in the left window of the hold display selection screen. Yes. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for selection of the hold display is the icon A, but the initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated icon that cannot be selected here. You may prepare. Also, in the lower right of the hold display selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for the selection operation (only the up and down keys 137u and d are red), and a red icon used for the determination operation. A picture of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The icons set by the hold display selection here are displayed as the hold icons h1 to h4 or the change icon h0 on the hold frame UI.

  Thereafter, the lower key 137d is operated twice, the cursor display moves to the icon C, and the icon C is previewed in the left window. In this state, the determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed, and on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (65), the effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window on which the preview display is performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected icon is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 77 (66). A confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that icon settings are to be updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the hold display selection screen remains unchanged, and the return to the option menu screen may be performed by operating the return icon arranged on the hold display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated again while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 77 (67)), as shown in FIG. The cursor icon cs displayed on the display selection icon moves down by one, and this time, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the background display selection icon, and the background display selection icon is lit in red.

  In FIG. 77 (69), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed as the background display selection icon, and as shown in FIG. 77 (70), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the background display. A selection screen appears. A list of five lines is also displayed on the background display selection screen, and all five options (“01 background A” to “05 background E”) in the background display selection shown in FIG. 73B are displayed in the list. Has been. That is, one item is displayed per line of the 5-line list. In FIG. 77 (70), the cursor display is displayed on the item of background A, and the background of the item on which the cursor display is displayed is previewed on the left window of the background display selection screen. As shown in 73 (b), the initial setting for background display selection is background A, but this initial setting itself may be eliminated, or a dedicated background that cannot be selected here is used. You may prepare. Further, in the lower right of the background display selection screen, a return icon for returning to the option menu screen, a cross key used for selection operation (up and down keys 137u, d only red), and a red icon used for determination operation are displayed. A picture of the chance button 136 is also displayed.

  The background set by the background display selection here is displayed as a normal background display in the decorative symbol display device 208. The background display in the normal state here does not include the background display in the look-ahead mode, the background display as a big hit notice of the change, or the background display in the electric support state. However, only the background display in the electric support state may be included.

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated four times, the cursor display moves to the background E, and the background E (empty background) is previewed in the left window. In this state, a determination operation by the chance button 136 is performed. On the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (72), an effect display Ed1 surrounding the left window on which the preview display is performed is generated again. When the effect display Ed1 disappears, the setting of the selected background is automatically updated, and the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 77 (73). In addition, a confirmation screen (for example, a screen on which a cancel icon and an update icon are displayed) for confirming that the background setting is updated may be displayed. Further, even if the effect display Ed1 disappears, the background display selection screen may remain, and the return to the option menu screen may be performed by operating the return icon arranged on the background display selection screen.

  After returning to the option menu screen, if the down key 137d is operated twice while the option menu screen is displayed (see FIG. 77 (74a)), as shown in FIG. 77 (75), The cursor icon cs displayed on the hold display selection icon moves to the bottom, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the return icon for returning to the demonstration screen, and the return icon is lit red.

  In FIG. 77 (76), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed as the return icon, and as shown in FIG. 77 (77), a demonstration screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is done. The demo screen here reflects the customized results. That is, the background has been changed to an empty background, and the hold frame UI is different from the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 75 (1). The mode name (in this case, auto button mode) is displayed. When the two modes are set to ON, they are displayed alternately in ascending order of customization numbers. For example, if the auto button mode 01 and the back button navigation 05 are turned on, the auto button mode and the back button navigation are alternately displayed in the upper right frame RW. In addition, when it is the same as the default setting, it may not be displayed in the frame RW, but may be displayed even if it is the same. Further, when no setting is performed, “OFF” may be displayed in the frame RW, or nothing may be displayed. In addition, the group advance notice for setting the reliability and the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting for setting the speed of repeated hitting may be set but not displayed in the frame RW. Furthermore, the set mode may not be displayed finely, but may be displayed, for example, “during production customization”.

  77 (79) includes a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, a first special figure hold lamp 218, and a second special figure hold lamp. 220 and a fourth symbol display device 284 are also shown. The normal symbol display device 210, the first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 shown in FIG. 77 (79) are all stopped. In addition, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (79) are stopped and displayed, and the fourth decorative symbol shown in FIG. 77 (79) is displayed. The symbol display device 284 also represents a stop display. Further, the normal symbol holding lamp 216, the first special figure holding lamp 218, and the second special figure holding lamp 220 shown in FIG. 77 (79) are all turned off, and are displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the displayed second hold number display, the hold number in FIG. 1 and the hold number in FIG. 2 are both zero. Therefore, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the fixed symbol is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 77 (80), there is a single ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, and the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 77 (80) starts the symbol variation display. However, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) in the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500 shown in FIG. 77 (80) are both decorative symbols. The fourth symbol display device 284, which has not started the variable display and is also controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500, also shows the stop display. In the fourth symbol display device 284 shown in FIG. 77 (80), the black square indicates that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is being stopped and the gray circle indicates the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol). The white square represents that the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner, and the white circle represents that the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (81), the first decorative symbol is still stopped and displayed, but the second decorative symbol starts variable display and is displayed in the upper right corner. In the display, “1” is displayed for a moment as the number of holds in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 77 (82), the number of holds in the special figure 1 that is displayed as “1” for a moment in the second hold number display is “0”. In addition, since the first special figure starting port 230 is won and it is digested immediately, the second hold number display may not be displayed as “1” even for a moment and may remain “0”.

  In FIG. 77 (83), an increase animation of the first hold icon h11 is started.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 77.

  In FIG. 78 (84) continuing from FIG. 77 (83), the increase animation is finished and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 78 (84) is an icon newly set by the hold display selection of effect customization, and is displayed in the default display mode (diamond-shaped and white display mode). Yes.

  In FIG. 78 (85), the first decorative symbol variation display has not yet been started, but after the start of the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and Erasure of three icons such as the brightness adjustment icon BI is started, and the display is transparent. The erasure here may be tailored to an animation, but is not necessarily an erasure animation. In FIG. 78 (86), erasure of these three icons MI, VI, and BI is completed.

  In FIG. 78 (87), the first hold icon h11 has started moving toward the base hs0 of the variable icon display area, and in FIG. 78 (88), the movement of the first hold icon h11 has been completed. On the base hs0 in the variation icon display area, the variation icon h0 in the default display mode (diamond-shaped non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. In FIG. 78 (89), the display of the first decorative symbol is finally started to change, and the first decorative symbol is changing at low speed. In detail, the left symbol starts the variable display first, the middle symbol starts the variable display, and then the right symbol starts the variable display finally. However, the order of starting the variable display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is not limited to this order, and the three left symbols, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may start the variable display simultaneously. In addition, before the display of the first decorative symbol is started, an animation by a decorative symbol (for example, an animation that returns to the original size after the decorative symbol is displayed once large, or an image and a character such as a character that is a decorative symbol) If the image is composed of images (including numbers), an image of a character or the like may be animated before the first decorative pattern starts to change).

  In FIG. 78 (91), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, if the left key 137l or the right key 137r of the operation key unit 137 is operated (see FIG. 78 (92)), FIG. 78 (93) As shown in FIG. 5, a bar display VB for volume adjustment is displayed on the holding frame UI. The volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decoration symbol (the third symbol), at least a part of the variation icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. . When the volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed, if the left key 137l is operated, the bar display is decreased by one level and the sound is reduced, and if the right key 137r is operated, the bar display is increased by one level and the sound is increased. The volume can be adjusted.

  In the present embodiment, even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, only the volume adjustment is always possible. Even if the volume adjustment is always possible, the volume adjustment bar display VB may not be displayed. Also, even during a big hit game, only volume adjustment is possible at all times. However, it may be restricted only for a certain period. For example, during the start effect of a big hit game, during an interval between rounds, during the end effect of a big hit game, during the execution of a super reach effect, during the fixed display of symbols on the special figure display devices 212 and 214, A result screen (for example, the number of balls to be played or / and / or at the end of the electric support (short time) state (for example, at the end of ST) The period during which the left and right keys 137l and 137r are used for production may be regulated during the display of the screen displaying the number of consecutive resorts. If the super reach production is a game production, it will be restricted until the result of the win / loss is notified, and after that, it may be adjustable, and after the three decorative symbols are aligned and start to shake, the adjustment is made. It may be possible, or all the period from the super reach production until the stop display is performed may be regulated.

  In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started may be possible only in the special figure low-probability general low-accuracy state. Even if the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137 is operated after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, the light amount adjustment is impossible, but the light amount adjustment bar The display may be displayed in the same manner as the bar display VB for volume adjustment, and the light amount may be adjustable, or the light amount may be adjusted without performing the bar display. Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special figure display devices 212 and 214 is started, it may be possible to set production customization, character selection, and the like.

  Further, when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated in a state where the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is turned off, that is, while the symbol is changing, the volume adjustment bar display VB is not displayed as in the present embodiment. Volume adjustment may be possible. The bar display VB for volume adjustment is configured to be erased if it is not operated for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), but when the left key 137l or the right key 137r is operated again before the certain period elapses. May be configured to update the count start for the certain period (that is, to extend the period until returning to the demo screen). If an operation of the left key 137l or the right key 137r is performed during the execution of the animation in which the volume adjustment icon VI or the like is erased by starting the change of the symbol, the erase animation is canceled halfway and immediately Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be erased, and a volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed instead. Alternatively, the volume adjustment icon VI or the like may be displayed again without canceling the erasure animation, or the volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed after the erasure animation is performed to the end.

  Further, even after the symbol variation display on the special symbol display devices 212 and 214 is started, until the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, whether or not the three icons MI, VI, and BI are displayed is determined. Regardless, the amount of light can be adjusted, or production customization, character selection, and the like can be set.

  Further, even when the volume adjustment and / or the brightness adjustment can be performed during the symbol variation, the adjustment bar display may not be displayed.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example described with reference to FIG.

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 79 (32b) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 76 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 79 (33b1). The return icon is highlighted in red and lit red. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 79 (33b2)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to return to the option menu screen is displayed on the effect customization screen from the front side (FIG. 79 (33b3)). ). In this confirmation screen, a return icon for accepting the return to the option menu screen and a cancel icon for stopping the return to the option menu screen are displayed. In FIG. 79 (33b2), the cursor display is changed to the cancel icon. It is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (33b4-1), the right key 137r is operated to move the cursor display to the return icon (FIG. 79 (33b5-1), or the cursor display is displayed in the cancel icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (33b4-2), the chance button 136 can be operated to return to the effect customization screen (FIG. 79 (33b5-2)).

  When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 79 (32c) instead of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 76 (32a), the cursor display is a return icon as shown in FIG. 79 (33c1). When the right key 137r is operated once more (FIG. 79 (33c2)), the cursor display moves to the initialization icon as shown in FIG. 79 (33c3). When the chance button 136 is operated in this state (FIG. 79 (33c4)), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to customize the production customization is displayed on the production customization screen in an overlapping manner (FIG. 79 (33c5)). )). In this confirmation screen, a “Yes icon” for accepting initialization and a “No icon” for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 79 (33c5), the cursor display is “No icon”. ”Is displayed. When the right key 137r is operated as shown in FIG. 79 (33c6-1), the cursor display moves to “Yes icon” (FIG. 79 (33c7-1). In this state, FIG. 79 (33c8-1) When the chance button 136 is operated as shown in Fig. 2, the effect customization is initialized, and the initialization is returned to the initial values for all the settings set by the player in the effect customization. Even if it is not set, it is possible to perform initialization, but it may not be possible.When initialization is completed, the initialization completion screen is displayed superimposed on the effect customization screen from the front side. (FIG. 79 (33c9-1)) Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 79 (33c6-2)), an effect customization screen reflecting initialization is displayed. That. In this example, but did not specifically set anything, all the items are turned OFF of the initial value.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing another modification.

  When the lower key 137d is operated only once as shown in FIG. 80 (74b1) instead of the lower key 137d shown in FIG. 77 (74a), as shown in FIG. 80 (74b2), The cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the initialization icon, and the initialization icon is lit red.

  In FIG. 80 (74b3), the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed as the initialization icon, and as shown in FIG. 80 (74b4), all the settings are displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208. A confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize is overlaid on the option menu screen from the front side. In this confirmation screen, a “Yes icon” for accepting initialization and a “No icon” for canceling initialization are displayed. In FIG. 80 (74 b 4), the cursor display is “No icon”. ”Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (74b5-1), the cursor display is moved to “Yes icon” by operating the right key 137r (FIG. 80 (74b6-1)) or the cursor display is displayed as “No icon”. In this state, the chance button 136 can be operated as shown in FIG. 80 (74b5-2) to return to the option menu screen (FIG. 80 (74b6-2)).

  As shown in FIG. 80 (74b6-1), when the chance button 136 is operated in a state where the cursor display is displayed as “Yes icon” (FIG. 80 (74b7-1)), initialization of all settings is executed. The In this initialization, everything set by the player is returned to the initial value. Although initialization can be performed even when nothing is set, it may be disabled. When the initialization is completed, an initialization completion screen is superimposed on the option menu screen from the front side (FIG. 80 (74b8-1)). Subsequently, when the chance button 136 is operated (FIG. 80 (74b9-1)), the screen returns to the option menu screen as shown in FIG. 80 (74b10-1).

  If the player does not return to the option menu screen after performing various customizations, there is no operation of the chance button 136 or the operation key unit 137 or the operation of the ball launching handle 134 for a certain period (for example, 5 minutes). May initialize various settings. Also, instead of the confirmation screen of FIG. 80 (74b6-1), the confirmation screen of FIG. 79 (33c5) may be displayed. Alternatively, the “Yes icon” may be removed from the confirmation screen, and the initialization may be performed after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Further, even if there is a “Yes icon”, if no operation is performed, it may be configured to be initialized after a certain period of time has elapsed since the confirmation screen was displayed. Alternatively, it may be initialized only when “initialize” is selected on the confirmation screen (here, when the chance button 136 is operated while the cursor display is displayed as “Yes icon”). .

  In addition, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment may be the same with respect to the initialization, and further, the initialization setting of various settings and the initialization of the volume and / or luminance may be performed at the same timing. One may be initialized before the other. Also, if you want to initialize the volume and the brightness at the same timing as the initialization settings of the various settings, do not display the confirmation screen for the initialization of the volume or the brightness. Alternatively, a confirmation screen for initializing settings of various settings, volume, and brightness may be displayed.

  Furthermore, a display for confirming whether or not to customize the effect customization setting may be automatically displayed during symbol variation. For example, it is always displayed when it is displayed once every 100 changes, after a fixed number of changes since the last display, or when a fixed number of changes have been made since the first start of change. Or may be displayed randomly (for example, when winning in the display lottery).

  FIGS. 80 (I) to (V ') are diagrams showing examples in which customization can be performed during the big hit round.

  In this example, for example, the player can select a music piece in the first round or the second round, and can reach a certain round after the second round and customize from the next round. Here, a certain round is a round that allows a V attacker to win a prize, and specifically, is 5 rounds. In FIG. 80 (I), the decorative symbol display device 208 in the fifth round is shown, and a letter V is displayed that indicates winning in the V attacker. Also, the title of the music selected by the music selection is displayed at the lower left of the screen.

  FIG. 80 (II) shows a period corresponding to the interval between rounds when the V attacker is closed. Even in the interval between rounds 5 and 6, the decorative symbol display device 208 still displays 5 rounds. Moreover, although the attacker is closed, the right-hand notification is continued.

In FIG. 80 (III), the attacker starts opening and the sixth round is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (III), a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a pattern of the chance button 136 are displayed. In other words, in this example, the effect customization can be executed in the sixth round, which is the next round of the five rounds that can be awarded to the V attacker. It may be executable only in the sixth round, or may be executable over a plurality of rounds after the sixth round.

  In FIG. 80 (IV), the chance button 136 is pressed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (V), the effect customization screen shown in FIG. Yes.

  Also, in FIG. 80 (V ′) shown as a modification of FIG. 80 (V), a display relating to only one line (only one item) in the list of five lines (here, a display relating to the auto button mode) is displayed. Yes. In this modification, all the customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r. .

  In addition, in the example of FIG. 80 (V) or the example of FIG. 80 (V ′), only part of the effect customization may be changed.

  In the example described above, customization can be performed from the next round of a certain round (for example, a round in which a V prize is won with a so-called V chance machine). Note that the customization may be performed from a certain round without being limited to the V accuracy machine.

  In addition, during the period when the music selection can be performed during the big hit game, the customization may not be performed, and the configuration in which the customization can be performed from the round in which the selected music is output may be employed. The music selection may be completed in the middle of the round, and the selected music may be output in the middle of the round. In this case, if the selected music is output even in the round in which the music is selected Customization can be performed within the round.

  In addition, the music may be determined at the end of the specific round, and in this case, customization can be performed after the specific round ends. Specifically, customization may be possible at the same time as the end of a specific round, or customization may be performed from the start of the next round of a specific round, between a specific round and the next round. It may be possible to customize from the interval between rounds.

  Further, customization may be performed at any time during the jackpot round. Also, customization may be possible at any time during the jackpot game. The term “big hit game” as used herein refers to a period between the eaves from the start of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot and including the round.

  Note that the period from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed until the first round is started is that, from the main control unit 300, the special electric accessory ( This is a period from when the attacker is turned on to when it is on, but includes a period in which the big hit game start effect is being executed. In addition, although the display (for example, the display of the special bonus) displayed in the big hit game start effect may continue to be displayed even if one round is started, it is one round until the attacker starts the first release. This is the period until the eye starts. Further, the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol is based on the confirmation display of the symbols in the special figure display devices 212 and 214, not the confirmation display of the decoration symbols. Also, if the game table is a right-handed notification before the attacker is released (for example, in the case of the first hit in FIG. 1 or every time a big hit is made), the timing at which this right-handed notification is started is also a big hit symbol. Is included in the period from when the message is confirmed and displayed until the first round is started.

  During the period from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed until the first round is started, the customization may not be performed, or the opposite may be performed.

  Further, customization may not be performed during the period from the end of the last round to the start of symbol variation in the shortest time. For example, customization may not be performed during the big hit end effect.

  Further, during the prepaid card removal forgotten warning display, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed, or vice versa.

  Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during a specific production (for example, a V prize production, music selection, probability change suggestion, etc.). Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during a period in which the effect selection (for example, music selection, effect mode selection, etc.) can be performed. Furthermore, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed even during the execution period of the effect using the operating means used for customization, or customization may be restricted before the effect is started. In this way, the customization restriction functions as a notice of the effect.

  Furthermore, contrary to the example shown in FIGS. 80 (I) to (V ′), it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed when a certain round is reached. For example, 1R to 14R can be customized, but it may not be possible when 15R is reached. Alternatively, customization can be performed from 5R to 12R, but it may not be possible after 13R.

  Further, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed while the two-dimensional code is being displayed. For example, when a two-dimensional code is displayed for a certain period during a big hit game, or when a two-dimensional code is displayed by a player's operation (for example, “Press button to display two-dimensional code”) (When a two-dimensional code is output by a button operation), customization may not be performed. Or, conversely, it may be configured to allow customization even during the display of the two-dimensional code. All or part of the display related to the two-dimensional code and customization may be displayed at a position where they overlap, or may be displayed at a position where they do not overlap. That is, a part or all of the two-dimensional code may be displayed so as to overlap a part or all of the display related to customization from the front side, and vice versa. A part or all of the code may be displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  80 (I) to FIG. 80 (V ′) describe the jackpot effect of a pachinko machine having a variable winning opening having a probability variation area, but the big hit of a pachinko machine having a variable winning opening having no probability variation area is described. It can also be applied to the so-called 1 type and 2 types of jackpots where the jackpot starts by winning the V prize.

  FIGS. 80 (VI) to (VIII) are diagrams showing an example in which customization can be performed during symbol variation display.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (VI), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. is there. In addition, in the upper right frame RW of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (VI), it is displayed that the auto button mode is currently customized, and below that, the effect customization is executed. A character display notifying that it is possible and a picture of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 80 (VII), the chance button 136 is pressed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (VII), the frame RW at the upper right of the screen disappears, and instead, one line shown in FIG. 80 (V ′). Only (only one item) is displayed (here, the display regarding the auto button mode). Also in this example, all effect customizations can be changed by scrolling the items with the up and down keys 137u and 137d of the operation key unit 137 and switching the items displayed with the left and right keys 137l and 137r.

  FIGS. 80 (IX) to (XI) are diagrams showing other examples that can be customized during the symbol variation display.

  Also in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80 (IX), both the first decorative symbol (third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) are not in the reach state, and all three decorative symbols are changing at high speed. is there. Further, in FIG. 80 (IX), the second display device 208P is arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208 (corresponding to the first display device). The second display device 208P has a smaller display screen than the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the second display device 208P is disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 80 (IX) is in an initial position and can be moved up and down. The second display device 208P partially overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 even at the initial position. When the second display device 208P is lowered from the initial position, the degree of overlap with the decorative symbol display device 208 increases.

  The second display device 208P displays a model title, and a display RW ′ indicating that the auto button mode is currently customized is displayed so as to overlap the model title from the front side. . Further, below the display RW ', a character display for notifying that the effect customization can be executed and a picture of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  In FIG. 80 (X), the chance button 136 is pressed, and on the second display device 208P shown in FIG. 80 (XI), the entire screen is switched to the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. Note that a part of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 or the like (for example, a customized display during execution) may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the remaining content may be displayed on the second display device 208P. Also, the same screen as the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 or the like may be displayed across the decorative symbol display device 208 and the second display device 208P. Furthermore, the display using the second display device 208P can also be applied to a display related to customization during the big hit game.

  The customization may be executed at any time as long as the symbol variation display is in progress. For example, it may be configured so that customization can be performed even when a super reach effect is being displayed. Or, conversely, it may be configured such that customization cannot be performed during display of the super reach effect. The super-reach production here includes the production of the snarl and the harbinger production until the judgment production such as duel production starts after reaching the reach state. For example, an effect of changing the display position of the left design and the right design of the decorative design assumed after entering the reach state, and an effect before the character display suggesting the development to super reach are included. In addition, when switching from a judge effect such as a duel effect to a decorative symbol display screen, it is included in the super reach effect until the decorative symbol display screen is switched.

  It should be noted that customization may be performed even in the production of the roaring part or the sign production, or the opposite may not be performed. Further, after switching to the result display screen of the judge effect or from the display of the judge effect to the display screen of the decorative design, the customization may be performed, or vice versa.

  Further, customization may be performed even during simultaneous production performed on a plurality of game machines, and conversely, it may not be possible during simultaneous production. Further, customization may be performed during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, or vice versa. Furthermore, during the temporary stoppage of the decorative design, customization may be performed only when it is finally a big hit, or it may not be performed in the opposite direction, and eventually it will be lost. Only in some cases, customization may be performed, or vice versa. Further, in a state where there is a hold, the customization may be performed until the symbol variation display ends and the next symbol variation display starts, or vice versa. Further, during the execution of a specific effect during the symbol variation display (for example, in the pre-reading mode), customization may be performed, or vice versa.

  Further, when customization is performed during the symbol variation display, the setting change may be applied from the symbol variation display, or the setting change may be applied from the next symbol variation display. Good.

  Also, during the user mode (Daitomo) setting, player operations (for example, display with chance button, switch with arrow key, etc.), list of missions achieved and game history (number of revolutions, number of balls played, number of missions cleared) , The jackpot number of the current play, the maximum number of consecutive play times of the current play, etc.) can be displayed, or the character, background, hold frame, hold display, etc. set by the user can be changed May be. In addition, while setting the user mode (Daitomo), a list of missions and game history achieved by player operations (for example, display with a chance button, switch with an arrow key, etc.) while setting the user mode (Daitomo) (Number of rotations, number of balls to be played, number of missions cleared, number of big hits of current play, maximum number of consecutive games of current play, etc.) Further, it may be configured to change the hold display or the like.

  In addition, when the mission is achieved while setting the user mode, an icon for notifying that the mission has been achieved may be displayed.

  Next, an example of the pachinko machine 100 having specifications corresponding to “Daitomo” member service will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 having this specification, the opening condition of FIG. 73 (b) is employed. The pachinko machine 100 having this specification has a top menu. This top menu can be called by operating the chance button 136 while the demo screen is displayed. The top menu may be called by simply operating the chance button 136 without going through the demonstration screen. Or, without operating the chance button 136, the display may be automatically switched from the demonstration screen. Furthermore, the demo screen may be replaced with this top menu.

  The top menu includes a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon.

  FIG. 81 (1) is a transition diagram of the top menu screen.

  Even on the top menu screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Of the items "Daitomo", "Model customization", "Initialization", and "Return to demo screen", the upper and lower keys of the operation key unit 137 can be operated by operating the operation key unit 137. When the cursor moves and the chance button 136 is pressed, a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item “Daitomo” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the Daitomo screen. If the cursor is placed on the item “return to demo screen” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the top menu screen to the demo screen.

  On the other hand, a “return” icon is displayed on each of the “daitomo screen”, “model customization screen”, and “initialization confirmation screen”. The cursor is placed on the “return” icon and the chance button 136 is pressed. Then, you can return to the top menu screen. Further, it is possible to return to the top menu screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed without placing the cursor on the “return” icon.

  Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the “Daitomo screen”, “ Even on the “model customization screen” and “initialization confirmation screen”, the screen shifts to a screen for displaying decorative symbols.

  FIG. 81 (2) is a transition diagram of the model customization screen.

  The transition diagram of the model customization screen shown in FIG. 81 (2) is the same as the transition diagram of the option menu screen shown in FIG. 74 except for “return to top menu” at the bottom and “top menu screen” on the right side. Therefore, a duplicate description is omitted. When the cursor is placed on the item “return to top menu” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative design display device 208 switches from the model customization screen to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 82 is a transition diagram of the Daitomo screen.

  Even on the Daitomo screen, the cursor moves up and down by operating the upper key 137u or the lower key 137d of the operation key unit 137. Among the items of "trial play", "password entry", "data save", "data clear", "quick start", and "return to top menu screen", the operation key units are connected between the arrows. The cursor moves by operating the upper key or the lower key of 137, and a screen corresponding to the item on which the cursor was displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed. That is, when the cursor is placed on the item “trial play” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the trial play screen. From the trial play screen, the top menu screen is displayed to move to a new registration screen or start trial play by moving the cursor by selecting the cross key 137u, d, l, r and determining the chance button 136. You can return to Furthermore, from the new registration screen, it is possible to move to the password input screen or to return to the Daitomo screen by moving the cursor by selecting the cross key 137u, d, l, r and determining the chance button 136. .

  When the cursor is placed on the “password input” item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the password input screen. On the password input screen, the display is repeated until the correct password is input. If the input password is correct, the screen is switched to the demo screen set to the Daitomo mode after a certain period.

  When the cursor is placed on the “data storage” item and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data storage confirmation screen. In the data saving confirmation screen, when “Yes” is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136, the screen moves to the two-dimensional code issue screen, where However, if “Yes” is determined in the same manner, a two-dimensional code is issued, and it is possible to shift to a demonstration screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set. On the other hand, whether it is a data storage confirmation screen or a two-dimensional code issuance screen, “No” is determined by the cursor movement by the selection operation of the cross key 137u, d, l, r and the determination operation of the chance button 136. In the case, each display is repeated.

  When the cursor is placed on the item “DATA CLEAR” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the data clear confirmation screen.

  When the cursor is placed on the item “quick start” and the chance button 136 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the Daitomo screen to the quick start start screen. On the quick start start screen, the screen switches to the demo screen set to Daitomo mode after a certain period of time.

  On the other hand, a “Return” icon is displayed on each of the “trial play screen”, “password entry screen”, “data save confirmation screen”, “data clear confirmation screen”, and “quick start start screen”. By moving the cursor to the “return” icon and pressing the chance button 136, it is possible to return to the Daitomo screen. Further, it is possible to return to the Daitomo screen even if the cancel key of the operation key unit 137 is pressed without placing the cursor on the “return” icon.

  Although not shown in this transition diagram, if there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 212 and 214 and the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, even if it is a Daitomo screen, the “trial pre-screen” Even if it is etc., it will transfer to the screen of the change display of a decoration symbol.

  Also, the reference numerals in parentheses shown in FIG. 82 are associated with the parenthesis figure numbers in FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a top menu screen and a Daitomo screen.

  A top menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. On this top menu screen, the background display, the hold frame UI, the navigation character YM, the first decorative symbol (third symbol), and the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) all disappear, and under the “Menu” character display, In the vertical row, four types of icons are displayed in order from the top, such as a Daitomo icon, a model customization icon, an initialization icon, and a return icon for returning to the demo screen. In FIG. 82A, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the bottom return icon, and the other icons are displayed in white, while the return icon is lit red. The initial position of the cursor icon cs when the display of the top menu screen is started is a return icon. Also, on the top menu screen, a cross key (up / down keys 137u, d only red) used for the selection operation and a red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right.

  The screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 83 (b1) is the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83 (a), where the cursor icon cs is displayed on the Daitomo icon, and the chance button 136 is displayed. It is a Daitomo screen displayed when pressed. This Daitomo screen returns to the trial play icon, password input icon, data save icon, data clear icon, quick start icon, and top menu screen in the vertical row from the top under the character display of “Daitomo”. Six types of icons, such as the back icon, are displayed. In FIG. 82 (b1), the cursor display is displayed on the top trial play icon, and the trial play icon is highlighted in red and further lit in red. Further, Yoshimune's character appears on the right side of the six types of icons arranged in a vertical row, and an explanation of the trial play is displayed. Also, below the display of the explanation, a cross key (up / down keys 137u, d only red) used for the selection operation and a red chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, a trial play screen shown in FIG. 83 (b1-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the trial play screen shown in FIG. 83 (b1-1), options that can be selected by various customizations are displayed as benefits of Daitomo's membership experience. Below that display, there is a confirmation icon to save the setting change, a back icon to return to the Daitomo screen, a “start icon” to start a trial play, and a new registration to newly register as a member Icons are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left. The cursor is displayed on the “start icon”, and this position is the initial position. When the right key 137r is operated once in this state, the cursor display is moved to the “new registration icon”, and when the determination operation is performed by pressing the fore chance button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays A new registration screen shown in FIG. 83 (b1-2) is displayed.

  In the new registration screen shown in FIG. 83 (b1-2), a large two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed on the left side, and on the right side, the two-dimensional code is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function, and the two-dimensional code QR1 is displayed. A text recommending that the user access a website (Daitomo site) with an embedded URL and obtain a password therefrom is displayed. Under the text display, a password input icon and a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen are displayed. In this example, the new registration screen is displayed via the trial play screen, but may be displayed without going through the trial play screen. For example, when a new registration icon is provided on the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b1) separately from the trial play icon, and this new registration icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, FIG. 83 (b1- The new registration screen shown in 2) may be displayed.

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b2), a cursor display is displayed on the password input icon, and an explanation about password input is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen shown in FIG. 83 (b2-1).

  In the password input screen shown in FIG. 83 (b2-1), an 8-digit password input area pw is displayed, and below it an alphabet, a symbol, and a numeric dial kw. The person who enters the password uses the cross keys 137u, d, l, r to move the cursor (displayed in gray and T is specified in FIG. 83 (b2-1-1)), and the character specified by the cursor. Is input to the password input area pw by the determination operation using the chance button 136, one character at a time, according to the password acquired from Daitomosite (see FIG. 83 (b2-1-1)). Under the dial kw, a return icon for returning to the Daitomo screen, an erase icon for erasing the input characters in the password input area pw, and a completion icon indicating completion of password entry are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left side. Has been.

  When the password input operation is completed, the chance button 136 is operated with the cursor displayed on the completion icon. If the input of the password is incorrect, an input error window shown in FIG. 83 (b2-1-2) is displayed. When this window disappears, the password input operation becomes possible again. The previously input password may be cleared from the password input area pw or may remain as it is. If the input of the password is correct, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the input completion window shown in FIG. 83 (b2-1-3) for a certain period of time, and then switches to the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode. .

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b3), a cursor display is displayed on the data storage icon, and an explanation about data storage is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, a data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83 (b3-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If trial play or quick start is being performed, or if no password is entered, the data save icon cannot be selected or this data save confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

  In the data storage confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83 (b3-1), a “Yes” icon for accepting data storage and a “No” icon for not storing data are displayed. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the two-dimensional code QR2 is generated and issued by the pachinko machine 100 (FIG. 83 (b3-2)). The two-dimensional code QR2 includes the URL of the Daitomo site, the player ID, the current game history information (for example, the number of games, number of balls played, number of jackpots, number of consecutive games, level of Daitomo mode, experience Value, mission achievement information, etc.) are embedded, and this two-dimensional code QR2 is read by a communication terminal with a photographing function, and the URL website embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 (Ditomosite) ), The data is stored on the server at Daitomosite. An end icon is displayed at the lower right of the data storage confirmation screen. When reading of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, when the end icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the end confirmation screen is displayed. Is displayed.

  In FIG. 83 (b 3-2-1), an end confirmation screen is displayed, and a “Yes” icon that acknowledges the end and a “No” icon that does not end are displayed. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to a demonstration screen in which the Daitomo mode is not set.

  Note that the data embedded in the two-dimensional code QR2 may be deleted from the pachinko machine after the generation of the two-dimensional code QR2 is completed, such as the current game history information, as shown in FIG. 83 (b3-2-1). When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, it may be erased from the pachinko machine 100, or may not be erased until data clear described later is performed.

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b4), the cursor display is displayed on the data clear icon, and the explanation about the data clear is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, a data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83 (b4-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If trial play or quick start is being performed, or if no password is entered, the data clear icon cannot be selected or the data clear confirmation screen is not displayed. On the contrary, it may be selectable or displayable.

  On the data clear confirmation screen shown in FIG. 83 (b4-1), there are displayed a “Yes” icon for accepting the deletion of data such as the game history information and a “No” icon for not deleting the data. Yes. When the “Yes” icon is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the data is erased from the pachinko machine, and an erase completion screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 83 (b 4-1-1), the erasure completion screen is displayed. This erasure completion screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and returns to the Daitomo screen.

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b5), the cursor display is displayed on the quick start icon, and the explanation about the quick start is displayed on the right side. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, a quick start start screen shown in FIG. 83 (b5-1) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This quick start start screen disappears after being displayed for a certain period of time, and the decorative symbol display device 208 switches to a demo screen set in the Daitomo mode.

  In the Daitomo screen shown in FIG. 83 (b6), the cursor display is displayed on the return icon, and on the right side, the return to the top menu screen is displayed. When the chance button 136 is operated in this state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to the top menu screen.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a model customization screen.

  When the second model customization icon on the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83A is selected and the chance button 136 is operated, the model customization screen shown in FIG. Is displayed. In this model customization screen, under the "model customization" character display, in order from the top in a vertical row, the production customization icon, character selection icon, hold frame selection icon, hold display selection icon, background display selection icon, initialization Seven types of icons such as an icon and a return icon for returning to the top menu screen are displayed. A cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of any one of these seven types of icons. In FIG. 84 (c), the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other icons are white, whereas the effect customization icon is lit red. In the model customization screen, a cross key pattern used for the selection operation and a chance button 136 pattern used for the determination operation are displayed on the lower right. Furthermore, the pattern of the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the chance button 136 and the cursor icon cs and the cursor display among the cross keys is displayed in red. In the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 84 (c1), an effect customization screen is displayed, but the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 75 (17) is that the choice of the input sound notice and the option of the back button navigation are unreleased. Is different. If Daitomo's password has not been entered or has not reached the level that satisfies the release condition, the screen shown in FIG. 84 (c1) is displayed.

  In FIG. 84 (c2), the character selection screen is displayed, but the character selection screen shown in FIG. 76 (40) is that all other options are unreleased except for Yoshimune's options. The difference is that even the character is not displayed as an option. In addition, even if it is an unreleased option, a part or all of the character image may be displayed, a silhouette image in the shape of a character may be displayed, and a display mode in which a selectable character can be recognized ( For example, a display including “Daitomo Lv.20 Princess is open” or the like may be displayed. Here, the display regarding the unreleased options can also be applied to other customized displays (in this example, the hold frame, the hold display, and the background display). If Daitomo's password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 84 (c2) is displayed. On this screen, only Yoshimune can be selected.

  On the other hand, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 84 (c2 '), a password is input or trial play is selected, so that a frog character can also be selected. However, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  In FIG. 84 (c3), the hold frame selection screen is displayed, but the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 76 (55) is that all the other options are unreleased except for the hold frame A option. There is a difference that the other options are not even displayed as the names of the reserved slots. If Daitomo's password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 84 (c3) is displayed. On this screen, only the holding frame A can be selected.

  On the other hand, on the hold frame selection screen shown in FIG. 84 (c3 '), since the password is entered, the hold frame B can also be selected. However, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  In FIG. 84 (c4), the hold display selection screen is displayed, but the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (63) is that all other options are unreleased except for the option of icon A. The other options are different in that they do not even display the name of any pending display. If Daitomo's password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 84 (c4) is displayed. On this screen, only icon A can be selected.

  On the other hand, on the hold display selection screen shown in FIG. 84 (c4 '), since the password is entered, the icon B can also be selected. Here, however, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  In FIG. 84 (c5), the background display selection screen is displayed. However, the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 77 (70) is that all other options are unreleased except for the background A option. The difference is that other options are not even displayed as background names. If Daitomo's password is not entered, the screen shown in FIG. 84 (c5) is displayed. On this screen, only background A can be selected.

  On the other hand, in the background display selection screen shown in FIG. 84 (c5 '), the background B can be selected because the password is input. Here, however, after 03, the level that satisfies the release condition has not been reached, and therefore cannot be selected.

  In FIG. 84 (d1), a confirmation screen as to whether or not to initialize all settings is displayed, but since it is the same as the confirmation screen shown in FIG. 84 (d2) shows the initialization completion screen, but since it is the same as the initialization completion screen shown in FIG. 80 (74b8-1), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 84 (e1) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen set in the Daitomo mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 84 (e1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). The special symbol change display is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number in the special figure 1 and the hold number in the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol variation display is not started after the special symbol stop symbol is displayed. Furthermore, below the second number-of-holds display, the current Daitomo mode level (here, level 1) and experience value (EXP) (here, 0) are displayed. That is, the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 84 (e1) corresponds to, for example, a screen immediately after newly registered and shifted to the demo screen.

  Further, a corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 84 (e1). For example, if Quick Start is set and this demo screen is displayed, the voice “Start Daitomo” is output, and if the trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, When the voice “play is started” is output and the password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed, the voice “start Daitomo. Let's do our best today” is output. Note that different sound effects are output when the corresponding sound effect is started by trial play, when it is started by quick start, and when it is started by entering a password. The same sound effect may be output, or the same sound effect may be output in two cases. Also, the sound effect may vary depending on the level of Daitomo, the previous game situation, and the like. Further, when returning to the demo screen set in the Daitomo mode shown in FIG. 84 (e1) through model customization, no sound effect may be output, and a dedicated sound effect may be output. An animation may be displayed together with the corresponding sound effect or instead of the corresponding sound effect. If the start of symbol variation is started while a sound effect or animation is being performed, the corresponding sound effect or animation may be interrupted (cancelled) halfway, but may be output as it is.

  Also, when this demo screen is displayed with quick start set, when trial play is set and this demo screen is displayed, or when password input is completed and this demo screen is displayed In at least one of the cases, the fixed period may be set so that the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83 (a) or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84 (c) cannot be called. The top menu screen shown in FIG. 83A or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84C may be called without waiting. Alternatively, in all of the above cases, the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83A or the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84C may not be called for a certain period.

  FIG. 84 (e1-1) shows a state in which a menu icon MI, a volume adjustment icon VI, and a brightness adjustment icon BI are additionally displayed after a certain period of time has elapsed since the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 84 (e1) is displayed. FIG.

  Note that the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are restricted from being additionally displayed for a certain period (for example, 1 minute) after the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83A is displayed. Also good. In addition, if the chance button 136 or the cross keys 137u, d, l, and r are operated during this fixed period, the operation is invalidated. However, it may be valid.

  Further, even when the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not being displayed (for example, immediately after the symbol variation display is stopped in a state where there is no hold, or immediately after it is stopped), The volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in 75 can be called. Further, when the volume adjustment window VW or the brightness adjustment window BW is called and no operation is performed for a certain period, the screen shown in FIG. 84 (e1-1) may be returned.

  Further, when the stop symbol is displayed in a state where there is no hold, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are not displayed for a certain period of time, and the certain period is illustrated in FIG. The model customization screen shown in FIG.

  Also, the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75 are called even during a period in which the top menu screen shown in FIG. 83A and the model customization screen shown in FIG. 84C cannot be called. May be possible.

  Further, when switching between the volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75 and the screen shown in FIG. 84 (e1-1), these windows VW and BW are also shown in FIG. 84 (e1-1). Both of them may not be displayed, and even in this state, the volume and brightness adjustment operations may be executable or may be restricted so that they cannot be executed.

  FIG. 84 (e2) is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration screen displayed via FIG. 83 (b3-2-1) after the two-dimensional code is issued in FIG. 83 (b3-2). The output sound from the speaker 120 here is a voice saying “Thank you for your work”. Further, the output sound effect may change depending on the state before the demonstration screen is displayed.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect using a variation icon.

  Here, the fluctuation icon h0 is summarized again. The fluctuation icon h0 is an icon corresponding to the special figure fluctuation game, which is displayed after the hold is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started, in other words, an icon relating to the symbol fluctuation display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes the change icon h0 simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More precisely, when the first hold icon h11 having the oldest start prize moves from the hold icon display area HIS to the change icon display area CIS, the moving icon is referred to as a change icon, or it is expressed that the change icon moves. May be. Alternatively, an icon after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area CIS is completed may be referred to as a fluctuation icon. The fluctuation icon h0 is displayed with a display size (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon) different from the hold icon h11. Thereby, although the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 may be easily identified, they may be the same size. Further, the variation icon h0 may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon h11. The change icon h0 can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon h0 can be regarded as an icon related to the hold, and can also be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before the timing at which the change success / failure result is notified, the same timing, or a timing after the timing. In addition to the default display mode (for example, a round, non-patterned and white display mode), multiple types of display modes for the normal notice are prepared for the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. The jackpot reliability (expectation) is different. The higher the reliability of the jackpot, the easier it is to finally display the jackpot symbol. In the following description, the expectation level of jackpot is expressed by the color. The default white is when “no change” is selected in the effect lottery for the display mode of the variation icon h0. The default white variation icon does not predict the expectation level of the jackpot, but the expectation level of the jackpot may be predicted (in this case, the icon color with the lowest expectation level of the jackpot is used). White blinking has the lowest expectation level for jackpots (0% or 0% or more and less than 1%). The color of the normal notice display mode is a so-called rainbow color (rainbow color) that changes to white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and seven colors in descending order of expectation of jackpot. The gold color is rich in jackpots, and the rainbow color has a higher expectation level for jackpots than that, and it may be said that, for example, the jackpot is confirmed. Note that this color relationship is the same for the color of the display mode of the pre-read notice by the hold icon. Hereinafter, when it is more than red, it means red, gold, and iridescent.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A1), the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is changing at high speed in the central region. In the upper left, the second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, a hold frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a variable icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variation icon display area CIS is provided in the center, and a base hs0 is arranged in the variation icon display area CIS. The hold icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bIl. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the change icon display area CIS, and in FIG. 85 (A1), the navigation character YM of Tono-sama character is displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (A1) is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol variation displays. For example, the display may be started simultaneously with the start of a certain symbol variation display, and may be continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may disappear temporarily or disappear. Further, the symbol variation display may be terminated, and the symbol variation display may be continuously displayed during the stop display, or may be temporarily disappeared or disappeared. And during the display of the next symbol variation display started continuously, it may be displayed continuously, or it may disappear temporarily or disappear. Alternatively, the display may end during the display of the next symbol variation display. Further, it may be displayed only during a part or all of the entire period during the display of one symbol variation display, and may not be displayed during the display of the next symbol variation display. The navigation character YM may be a so-called always-displayed character, but may not be displayed in any case. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display continues. Details of this point will be described later.

  Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 85 (A1), the hold icon (first hold icon h11) of the special figure 1 is displayed on the first stage hs1. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). A variation icon h0 is displayed on the base hs0 of the variation icon display area CIS. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is also a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

  In FIG. 85 (A 2-1), a treasure box icon I 1 of change notice display is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The change notice display corresponds to a notice indicating that other icons may change when the display is made. Other icons include the navigation character YM, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and a decorative symbol. That is, the icon or the like displayed before the display of the change notice display is started is an object to be changed. However, even if the display is started simultaneously with the start of the display of the change notice display or the display is started later, it may be changed. When the display of the change notice display is started, the player may or may not know what is changed. There may also be suggestions of what to change. Furthermore, even if a change notice display is displayed, there may be a fake notice that changes nothing depending on the change notice display. In addition, the change notice display may be determined as one object to be changed, or may be determined to be changed without fail.

  The treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 85 (A2-1) appears on the carpet icon I2. The carpet icon I2 is displayed only when it appears, and when the treasure box icon I1 reaches the display position of the effect icon display area DIS, it disappears on the spot or flies off the screen. As for the appearance timing of the icon of the change notice display, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol variation starts, when the variation icon h0 has been moved, when winning the special symbol starting point (when holding increases) , At the start of the pre-reading notice at the time of winning a prize, at the time of success of a certain effect, at the first stop of the first decorative design, at the time of temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous effect (at the start of re-variation), at the start of reach state, super reach At the start, you can list super-reaching, etc. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the appearance timing of the change notice display icon. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Also, there may be a plurality of display modes of the treasure chest icon I1, for example, the ease of change of the navigation character YM or the like changes depending on the display mode (size, color, animation) of the treasure chest or carpet. Also good. In addition, when the display mode is different from the normal display mode, such as the carpet icon I2, if the display mode is different from the normal display mode, the probability of changing is high, or a state advantageous to the player The probability of changing to a display mode may be high. For example, the probability of changing to a display mode with a high degree of expectation of jackpot may be high. Further, the change notice display may be a display that changes only the navigation character, but there may be a case where an effect display other than the navigation character (hold icon, change icon, notice notice of change, pre-read notice display, etc.) is changed. There may be. In addition, there are effects display other than navigation characters (holding icon, change icon, notice notice of change (timer notice, conversation notice, chance up meter, etc.), prefetch notice display (timer notice, background display for prefetch mode, etc.), etc. (1 presentation display, multiple presentation displays, or all presentation displays) may be configured so that the navigation character is not changed by the advance notice display, but the navigation character may be changed. Good. In addition, the change notice display may be configured to change the navigation character more frequently than changing the effect display other than the navigation character, but conversely, the frequency of changing the navigation character is other than the navigation character. The frequency may be less than the frequency of changing the display, and the two frequencies may be performed at the same frequency. Here, the effect display (the effect display other than the navigation character and the navigation character) is performed by “the advance notice for changing the effect display (the change notice display, the advance notice display for changing the effect display other than the navigation character. When the change is changed, the effect display that is changed infrequently by the notice A is changed by the notice A, compared to the case where the effect display that is changed by the notice A is changed by the notice A. May be configured to be easy to hit or not.

  In FIG. 85 (A 3-1), the carpet icon I 2 disappears and the treasure box icon I 1 remains. The treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM. In FIG. 85 (a 4-1), the display mode of the treasure chest icon I1 changes. That is, a change animation is displayed, a treasure box is opened, and an effect smoke image appears from inside, and the smoke image partially or entirely hides the navigation character YM, which is more obvious than before the smoke image appears. It becomes difficult to see. Note that when an icon other than the navigation character YM is displayed, the smoke image may cover a part or all of the display of the icon other than the navigation character YM from the front side. In addition, the treasure chest may not be opened. Furthermore, even if the treasure box is opened, another notice may be given. In FIG. 85 (A 5-1), the smoke image has disappeared and the display mode of the navigation character YM has changed. In other words, the scarlet (default color) kimono that the navigation character YM has been wearing has changed to a red kimono. It may be in a state where it is suggested that the change icon h0 is likely to change to red due to the change due to the change of the kimono of the navigation character YM to the red kimono. It may be determined that the display mode of the navigation character YM changes when the treasure chest icon I1 is displayed. In addition to the red kimono, it may be changed to a golden kimono or a rainbow kimono. Further, it may change to blinking white, blue, or green. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change corresponding to the color of the hold icon and / or the variation icon (for example, when the green hold is displayed in the hold 2, the navigation character YM is green. Change into kimono). Here, in the case where the color of the navigation character corresponds to the color of the variation icon and / or the hold icon, and when the display mode of the hold icon and / or the change icon has changed a plurality of times, it is digested first. The color of the hold icon or the variable icon to be displayed may correspond to the color of the navigation character, or the color of the hold icon to be digested later may be configured to correspond to the color of the navigation character. A color with a high expectation level for jackpots may be displayed with priority, or a color with a low level of expectation for jackpots may be displayed with priority. The color of the hold icon or variable icon with a high value may be displayed, and the hold icon or low expectation of the jackpot regardless of the color of the hold icon or the change icon itself The color of the moving icon may be displayed, the color of the holding icon and / or the changing icon that is changing may be reflected in the color of the navigation character, and the color of the navigation character is changing It may also be displayed at random from among the colors of the variation icons. In addition, the treasure chest icon I1 with the lid still open is still displayed beside the navigation character YM whose display mode has changed. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear simultaneously with the appearance of the smoke image, or may disappear together with the smoke image. The treasure chest icon I1 disappears at the timing of FIG. 85 (A 6-1), and only the Tono-like navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Up to this point, the first decorative symbol has been displayed with high-speed fluctuation.

  In FIG. 85 (A7), the first decorative symbol is in a reach state, and “decorative 7” is displayed in a shaking manner (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol. In the second decorative symbol, the temporary stop is not performed, and the three decorative symbols continue to display the variation. In FIG. 85 (8), the super-reach effect (swordsman reach effect) is developed, the background screen of the decorative design display device 208 changes to a wilderness background screen, and the temporarily stopped left design is the decorative design display device. The right symbol that has also been temporarily stopped moves to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the wilderness background screen h, a duel scene is displayed where the protagonist and the enemy swordsman face each other. In addition, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS disappear, and the first hold icon h11 also disappears. Further, although the height of the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed on it. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a Tono-sama navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed on the right base icon bIr. Note that during the super reach production, the entire holding frame UI may be hidden. That is, the base hs0 'in the variation icon display area CIS and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS may be hidden. Further, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden during the super reach production. Further, during the super reach production, any one or two of the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 may be hidden. Further, during the super reach production, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icon h0 are all hidden, and the hold frame UI (the left base icon bIl, the four stages hs1 to hs4, the base hs0 (hs0 ′)). The right base icon bIr) may be displayed, or conversely, the navigation character YM, the hold icon, and the change icons h0 may be displayed and the hold frame UI may be hidden.

  In FIG. 85 (A 9), Tono-sama's navigation character YM, which has been standing facing the front, changes to a pose that faces the change icon h 0 and holds the sword. In FIG. 85 (A10), a wave is oscillated from the sword of Tono-sama's navigation character YM, and in FIG. 85 (A11), the change icon h0 that has been white until then changes to red. As described above, the variation icon in the red display mode has a considerably high expectation degree for the big hit in the currently performed symbol variation display. In FIG. 85 (A12), the Tona-sama navigation character YM has returned to the posture in which it stands facing the front. 85 (A12) remains the red kimono display mode, but may return to the default display mode (dark blue kimono display mode).

  In FIG. 85 (A13), although not shown, a button effect is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136. In the remaining time display meter, the gauge is decreased as the operation valid period starts. Thereafter, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, a decorative cut-in image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a notice effect is provided to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. The cut-in image of Tono-sama overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and it is difficult to see compared to the case where the cut-in image of Tono-sama is not displayed. The cut-in image of Tono-sama may be displayed on the condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or is displayed even when the operation valid period has passed without the chance button 136 being operated. It may be done.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the cut-in image of Tono-sama is deleted, the duel scene animation display is continued, the button image and the remaining time display meter are displayed, and the button effect for the second time after developing into super reach. Is started. Thereafter, when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 starts, the player can accept the operation of the chance button 136 by the player.

  In the remaining time display meter, the gauge is decreased as the operation valid period starts. It should be noted that the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach. Then, the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter in the second button effect may be faster than the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter in the first button effect. In addition, the operation effective period in the first button effect after the development to super reach may be shorter than the operation effective period in the second button effect after the development to super reach, or after the development to super reach. The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed within the above-described operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, and the first large board acting as shown in FIG. 67 (a). 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral accessory 224Gd operate and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board acting part 224Gd, respectively, and the first large board acting part 224Ga to the fourth large board behavior object. It is difficult to view compared to the case where it is not overlapped by 224Gd. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are also at least partially overlapped by the first large board act 224Ga and the second large board act 224Gb, respectively, and are difficult to view. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd may be operated, for example, the first large board acting 224Ga to the second The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large board acting items 224Gd to operate. The effects in which the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd operate may be displayed on condition that the chance button 136 is operated, or the chance button 136 is operated. It may also be displayed when the operation valid period has passed without. Further, there may be a case where only one of the effect image display and the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board acting machine 224Gd is performed. Further, when both the effect image display and the operation of the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are performed, after the effect image is displayed, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth The operation of the large board acting 224Gd may be started, or the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large board behavior 224Ga to the fourth big board acting 224Gd is started. And the operations of the first large board acting tool 224Ga to the fourth big board behavior machine 224Gd may be started simultaneously. In addition, even when the chance button 136 is pressed within the operation valid period, the first big board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth big board behavioral thing 224Gd are not performed, and an effect display that is lost is performed. Furthermore, after the effect display that is lost is performed, the revival effect may be displayed and the effect display that is a big hit may be performed. In addition, when the effect which the 1st big board behavioral thing 224Ga-the 4th big board behavioral thing 224Gd operate | moves is displayed, the fluctuation icon h0 currently displayed will be hidden, but you may display continuously.

  Thereafter, the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H shown in FIG. 67 (a) operates to move downward, and overlaps the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd. . Further, thereafter, the light guide plate IL emits light. Note that the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-thousand boxing machine 224H, and the order of starting the light emission of the light guide plate IL are limited to those described above. However, it can be set appropriately. Moreover, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large board act 224Ga to the fourth large board act 224Gd, the operation of the thousand box act 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the division is not performed.

  After the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H starts to rise toward the initial position. Thereafter, the effect image fades out, and subsequently, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd each start moving toward the initial position. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene in which the display is interrupted is resumed while fading in. At this time, the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 85 (a 14-1). In FIG. 85 (a 14-1), a scene after Tono-sama and the swordsman cut each other is displayed.

  The animation of the navigation character YM in FIGS. 85 (A9) to (A12) corresponds to an effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon h0 (hereinafter referred to as “change effect”). This change effect can be seen as a part of the super reach effect, but can also be seen as an effect different from the super reach effect that was started when the super reach effect was started. As for the start timing of the change effect, in addition to the super reach effect, when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the movement of the change icon h0 is completed, when the prize is awarded to the special symbol start port (hold) At the time of winning), at the start of a pre-reading notice at the time of winning a prize, at the success of a certain production, at the first stop of the first decorative design, at the temporary stop or continuation in the pseudo-continuous production (at the start of re-variation), at the start of the reach state , And the start time of super reach can be listed. That is, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the start timing of the change effect. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  Also, the timing at which the change icon h0 changes is not only during Super Reach production, but also when the first decorative symbol changes at high speed, when the symbol change starts, when the change icon h0 finishes moving, and wins a special figure start opening. Time (when holding increases), start of pre-reading notice at the time of winning, success of a certain performance, first stop of the first decorative symbol, temporary stop or continuation in pseudo-continuous performance (at the start of re-variation), reach You can list the state start, super reach start, and so on. That is, all the above-mentioned enumerations may be used as the timing at which the change icon h0 changes. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied. Furthermore, the timing at which the change icon h0 changes may overlap with the button effective period in the button effect described above. It should be noted that the display mode of the variation icon may not be changed after a certain period during the super reach effect. The super reach production described here is also a game production, which includes a button production, and is a kind of so-called final judge production in which either the main character or the enemy wins. After the result of the final judge effect is displayed, the display mode of the variation icon may not be changed. In addition, when the navigation character YM performs an animation to change the display mode of the change icon, the display mode of the change icon h0 may be changed or there may be a failure. May be. That is, the change effect may be an effect that always changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0, and when the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed (successful) and when it is not changed (failure). There may be.

  Further, there may be a case where the change animation of the change icon by the navigation character YM is not performed. In this case, at the end of the super reach effect, the display mode of the change icon h0 may be changed after the end screen of the super reach effect and the screen on which the decorative symbols are displayed are switched by wipe. The display mode of the navigation character YM may be switched back to the default display mode (display mode of scarlet kimono) after being switched by wiping. The display mode as it is (the display mode of the red kimono) may be maintained.

  In FIG. 85 (A 15-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman fell and the main character, Tono-sama won, is displayed, and Tono-sama's navigation character YM also takes a victory pose. However, the middle symbol is not displayed yet, and the middle symbol of “decoration 7” is displayed in FIG. 16 (A 16-1), but the red variation icon h0 is still displayed, and the second ornament is displayed. The design is also changing. Moreover, at the stage of FIG. 16A, each of the first decorative symbols (left middle right symbol) is temporarily stopped (fluctuation fluctuation). In FIG. 85 (a 15-1), a big hit animation by the protagonist may be executed.

Here, FIG. 85 (15-1) before the middle symbol is displayed can be regarded as a super reach production, but it appears that the middle symbol is displayed and the victory is confirmed (a 16-1). ) Can be regarded as a super reach production, or can be viewed as a super reach production until just before the stop display is made. Further, as described above, the super reach production here corresponds to an example of the final judge production, and the super reach production is being executed until the final judge production result is finalized (for example, immediately before the stop display is performed). Also good.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is started with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. Note that the second decorative symbol is still displayed in a variable manner for all of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. The background here may be non-displayed, may be a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or may be the same background image as before super-reach is performed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of FIG. 1 may be displayed. Further, the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the navigation character YM may be displayed.

  Thereafter, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) is displayed in the display form of special figure A. In addition, although the 1st special figure display device 212 was stopped and displayed, since the 1st sub-control part 400 is the state which has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control part 300, it judges that it is a symbol fixed stop. Therefore, the fluctuation variation continues in the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the variation.

  After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation stop command, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” respectively. In the 4 symbol display device, the display in the mode that the symbol is stopped is performed.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and the winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the big win start effect display.

  During the super reach, both the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Here, when the button effect that is the final judge effect is started, a part or all of the holding frame UI may be hidden or disappeared. For example, the right base icon bIr may have been displayed until then, but the right base icon bIr may be hidden or disappeared when the final judgment effect is started. Further, when the final judgment effect is started, the variation icon h0 may be configured to be hidden or disappear, or the navigation character YM may be configured to be hidden or disappeared. Both characters YM may be configured to be hidden or disappear. In addition, when the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started. Furthermore, when other icons and mini-characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS are displayed so far, they may be configured to be hidden or disappear when the final judge effect is started.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (2-1) in place of FIG. 85 (2-1), a balloon display such as “Change!” May be added to Tono-sama's navigation character YM. As shown in (2-3), a balloon display such as “Preparing for change” may be added. Thereafter, returning to FIG. 85 (A 3-1), a treasure box icon I 1 of change notice display is displayed. The balloon character YM balloon display corresponds to a notice effect (a sign effect) of the start of the change notice display. In other words, it is a notice that suggests that the navigation character itself may change, such as “Change !?”, or the navigation character will be displayed in the future (“Preparing for change” will be displayed). Within a change or after a change that is marked “Preparing for change”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 85 (A 3-2-1) instead of FIG. 85 (A 3-1), the treasure box icon I 1 for the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS again. A carpet icon I2 may appear, and the treasure box icon I1 may fly over the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 85 (A 4-2) instead of FIG. 85 (A 4-1), the smoke image may be red. Depending on the type of change animation in the change notice display, the navigation character YM may change or change easily. In the case of FIG. 85 (A 4-2), it is predicted that the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a kimono having the same color as smoke. Also, the expected degree of change or the big hit in the hold may be notified according to the type of change animation in the change notification display.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 85 (a 5-2) instead of FIG. 85 (a 5-1), the color of the kimono of the navigation character YM does not change, and the navigation character YM itself may increase. . As described above, the change in the display mode of the navigation character YM may be a change in size or a change in shape (for example, a pose) in addition to a change in color. The color of the kimono of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (a 5-2) may be dark blue (default color), but may be changed to red. A part of the enlarged navigation character YM shown in FIG. 85 (A-5-2) overlaps a part of the treasure chest icon I1 from the front side. A part of the navigation character YM may overlap the entire treasure box icon I1 from the front side. Alternatively, at least a part of the treasure box icon I1 may overlap at least a part of the enlarged navigation character YM from the front side.

  In addition, the probability of changing the fluctuation icon h0, that is, the expected degree of jackpot, is higher in the display mode larger in the default color than in the display mode smaller in the default color, and in the display mode smaller in red. The red and large display mode may be higher. Moreover, as long as it is a size and a color, the color may be prioritized, for example, the red and small display modes may be higher than the default and large display modes. Or, conversely, the size may be prioritized. For example, the display mode larger in the default color may be higher than the display mode smaller in red. Furthermore, as for the size (display size) of the navigation character YM, there may be a plurality of sizes such as an intermediate size in addition to a case where it is large and a case where it is small.

  When the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the change icon h0 changes to red, and when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a gold kimono, the change icon h0 changes to a gold color. When the display mode is wearing a colored kimono, the variation icon h0 may change to a rainbow color. In addition, when the navigation character YM is in a display mode wearing a red kimono, the change icon h0 may be easily changed to a color (red, gold, rainbow) whose redemption expectation is higher than red. That is, if the change of the change icon h0 is successful, it may be determined that the color changes to red or higher, or the change itself to red or higher may be determined. However, even if the navigation character YM is in a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, the big hit expectation may change to a color below red (green, blue, white blinking, white). Furthermore, when the navigation character YM is in a display form wearing a rainbow-colored kimono that is a premier color, the color of the variation icon h0 may always be changed to the rainbow color. That is, when the navigation character YM is in a display form wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the navigation character YM is informed of a big hit directly by the display form of the navigation character YM. When the display mode is such as wearing a kimono (for example, red), if the display mode of the variation icon changes, the result is that it is easy to win big hits. Indirect notifications can be made.

  Further, the navigation character YM may change the variation icon h0 even when the display mode is not changed. Alternatively, the change icon h0 may be changed only when the display mode is changed. Furthermore, although the character of the main character is a so-called always-display character, the navigation character YM that changes the change icon h0 may be a character that is displayed only when the change icon h0 is changed. Further, it may be a character displayed only when a notice is given. Further, the character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above may be used as a character that changes the variation icon h0, or only the character set by the player in the character selection in customization is the variation icon. You may make it usable as a character which changes h0.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  85 (A 6-1) followed by FIG. 86 (A 6-2-1) to (A 6-2-3) and then returns to FIG. Until the treasure box icon I1 is hidden, the navigation character YM may change a plurality of times. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 86 (A 6-2-1) is a red kimono, but the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 86 (A 6-2-2) is a golden kimono. The treasure box icon I1 may disappear once and may be newly displayed. Further, a change notice display may be displayed over a plurality of variations. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 is repeatedly opened and closed.

  In addition, following FIG. 85 (A 6-1), a change animation as shown in FIG. 86 (A 6-3-1) to FIG. 85 (A 6-3-2) may be displayed. That is, the navigation character YM may be further promoted by a notice different from the notice of change notice (here, the UFO icon UFI). In FIG. 86 (a 6-3-2) continuing from FIG. 86 (a 6-3-2), a golden beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI that has come toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono. As shown in FIG. 86 (a 6-3-4a), the navigation character YM has been changed to a display mode with a golden kimono. Alternatively, in the same figure (A 6-3-3b) continuing from FIG. 86 (A 6-3-2), the gray beam from the flying UFO icon UFI is directed toward the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono. As shown in FIG. 86 (6-3-4b), the navigation character YM is enlarged while wearing a red kimono.

  Although the promotion has been described here, there may be a case where the navigation character YM does not change even when the beam is irradiated (so-called failure pattern), or when the beam is irradiated, the default display mode, There may be a display mode in which a blue kimono is worn, or the display mode may be reduced (downgraded).

In addition, FIG. 86 (A 14-2-1) may be displayed following FIG. 85 (A 14-1), which is a scene after Tono-sama and the swordsman cut each other in the super reach production. That is, as the middle symbol, “decoration 6” different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is displayed large (swaying display), and in the following diagram (A 14-2-2), the left symbol, the middle symbol, All the decorative symbols of the symbol are displayed once lighter than the normal darkness. In the same figure, a scene where Tono-sama fell is displayed. In FIG. 86 (A 14-2-3), the decorative symbols of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are all displayed in normal darkness again. In FIG. 86 (A 14-2-4), the wipe effect is displayed. This is performed to switch between the super reach effect scene (effect display) and the normal background (the background before the start of the super reach effect shown in FIG. 85 (A1)). In the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (A 14-2-5), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is temporarily displayed as a wipe of the same color with no pattern. In this wipe display, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, and the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed. The model title is displayed in the left corner. Note that the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may also be displayed. In FIG. 86 (A 14-2-6), the wipe-out is performed, the background returns to the normal background, and the display mode of the navigation character YM also returns to the default display mode. The display mode of the navigation character YM may return to the default display mode at the start of the wipe effect (timing in FIG. 86 (A 14-2-4)). In FIG. 86 (A 14-2-7), the wipe effect is finished, and “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a shaking manner. Yes. A hold frame UI is also displayed, and a change icon h0 and a first hold icon h11 are also displayed. The change icon h0 shown in FIG. 86 (A 14-2-7) remains in the red display mode, but may return to the default display mode, or the change icon h0 itself may be deleted. Good. On the other hand, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the display mode with the red kimono. In this example, the display that returns from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character is changed to the default state is not visible because the navigation character is not displayed, but the display that returns from the state in which the display mode of the navigation character has changed to the default state. May be visible. (For example, the display which switches from the state which the display mode of the navigation character changed to the default state, the animation display which returns to the default state from the state which the display mode of the navigation character changed, etc. are mentioned.)
At the time of wipeout (FIG. 86 (A 14-2-6) to FIG. 86 (A 14-2-7)), the fluctuation icon h0 and / or the navigation character YM are displayed but not displayed. There may be a case, and when it is displayed, it may be configured such that a rebirth effect is more easily performed than when it is not displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the revival effect is always performed when displayed, and the revival effect may or may not be performed when not displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 86 (a 14-2-1) to FIG. 86 (a 14-2-3), a part of the holding frame UI (pedestal hs0 ′ and the right base icon bIr) is displayed. The entire UI may be hidden, or only a part of the UI may be hidden. Further, the variation icon h0 may be hidden, or the navigation character YM may be hidden. Alternatively, both the variable icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be hidden. Further, when the hold icon has been displayed so far, the hold icon may be hidden. Further, other icons and mini characters displayed in the effect icon display area DIS may be hidden when they are displayed so far.

  FIG. 87 shows another modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to FIG. 85 (A 16-1), the display as shown in FIG. 87 (A 16-2-1) to FIG. 85 (A 16-2-2) may be performed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 87 (A 16-2-2), the entire screen starts to become thin. Thereafter, it disappears once in the re-drawing effect, and the screen shown in FIG. 87 (A 16-2-1) (the screen of Tono-sama win) may be displayed again, or FIG. 85 (A 14-2-3). ) (Screen of defeat of Tono-sama) may be displayed, or a combination of decorative symbols (in the case of a jackpot combination or a loss of combination) with a normal background as shown in the figure (A 16-2-3) A screen may be displayed with a shaking display.

  In addition, the navigation character YM and the variation icon h0 are also displayed on the redisplayed screen. If the display mode of the navigation character YM and / or the variation icon h0 is a red display mode, an advantageous jackpot confirmation (for example, a probability change) is performed. A big hit or a big hit with a long number of rounds) may be confirmed. Alternatively, if the display mode is not changed, the advantageous jackpot is not fixed, but if the display mode is promoted, the advantageous jackpot may be fixed, and the display mode is a golden or rainbow premium. If this is the case, an advantageous jackpot may be determined.

  FIGS. 87 (i) to (i12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM is displayed across a plurality of variations and also functions as a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 87 (1), a navigation character YM in a display form wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  In FIG. 87 (2), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 87 (I 3), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono remains displayed.

  In FIG. 87 (I-4-1), a change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started. That is, Tono-sama's navigation character YM, which has been in a standing posture (initial posture) up to that point, changes to a pose in which the variation icon h0 is directed and the sword is pulled out. In FIG. 87 (15), a wave is oscillated from the sword of Tono-sama's navigation character YM. However, in FIG. 87, the display mode of the change icon h0 remains the default, and the change effect is unsuccessful. Yes. In FIG. 87 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in the initial posture again.

  In FIG. 87 (8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started again. Even when the third symbol variation display is started, the display-type navigation character YM wearing the red kimono remains displayed. In FIG. 87 (9), the change animation of the variation icon h0 using the navigation character YM is started again. In FIG. 87 (11), the change icon h0, which has been white until then, is changed to red, and a normal notice is started. In FIG. 12 (12), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture while maintaining the display mode with the red kimono. After that, although not shown, the big hit symbol is fixedly displayed by the symbol variation display currently being performed.

  In addition, in FIG. 87 (ii-4-1) instead of FIG. 87 (ii4-1), the navigation character YM moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the hold icon display area HIS during the symbol variation display. In FIG. (I-4-2-2), a change animation for the hold icon is started. The movement of the navigation character YM may be an animation, or may be an aspect in which the display position is switched instantaneously. When the navigation character YM leaves the effect icon display area DIS, another display (for example, “Business trip” on the signboard) is displayed at the position (initial position) where the navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. An icon display indicating “medium” may be displayed.

  Note that the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or conversely, even if it always succeeds (the display mode of the hold icon changes). Good. Further, a change effect may be performed only for the hold icon to be prefetched. For example, only the state where the number of holds is 1 may be performed on the first hold icon h11, or may be performed on a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons). Furthermore, the change effect for the hold icon by the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times until the display mode is changed (successful) with respect to the pre-read target hold, and may not be performed again if one failure occurs. .

  Moreover, you may perform a change effect again with respect to the hold icon whose display mode changed once by the change effect. This applies not only to the hold icon but also to the change icon h0.

  Further, the navigation character YM may move from the effect icon display area DIS even in the change effect for the variation icon h0. The navigation character YM may move within the effect icon display area DIS even if it does not leave the effect icon display area DIS. Further, the navigation character YM may be movable only within the holding frame UI, or may be movable out of the holding frame UI.

  In this example, the change animation of the change icon h0 using the navigation character YM is performed every time from the change next to the change in which the color of the navigation character YM is red to the hold-down change of the prefetch target. There may be a variation in which no change animation is performed between the variation following the variation in which the color of the navigation character YM is red and the variation of the prefetch target. In addition, a change animation may be performed for a change in which the navigation character YM is red.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram illustrating an example of a combination of a change icon change effect and a change icon change effect by the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 88 (U1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  In FIG. 88 (2), an effect icon (here, UFO icon UFI) appears outside the holding frame UI and approaches the holding frame UI. Note that the effect icon may appear in the hold frame UI. As shown in FIG. 88 (U3), a white beam is emitted from the UFO icon UFI toward the second hold icon h12. As shown in FIG. 88 (U4), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is The display mode changes from the default display mode to the blinking white mode. In other words, the promotion is successful. There are a plurality of types of production icons, and the success probability of the promotion production may vary depending on the production icons that appear. For example, when the first effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be successful, and when the second effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be 80% or more successful. If the third effect icon appears, the promotion effect may be less than 50% successful. In FIG. 88 (4), the UFO icon UFI disappears. In FIG. 88 (5), three decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. In FIG. 88 (6), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 88 (U7), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed and the symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 88 (U8), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 88 (9), the navigation character YM in the default display mode changes to a pose that draws a bow, and the promotion effect of the hold icon by the navigation character YM is started. The promotion effect here is also an animation display. In FIG. 88 (U10), an arrow is fired, the arrow flies over the fluctuation icon h0, and in FIG. 88 (U11), the first holding icon h11 that is a display mode of white blinking is hit, In FIG. 12 (12), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from white blinking to blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. The promotion effect here may also fail (when the display mode of the hold icon does not change), or may be always successful (the display mode of the hold icon changes). Moreover, it may be performed for the first hold icon h11 only for the state where the number of hold is 1, or may be performed for a plurality of hold icons (which may include variable icons). Furthermore, the promotion effect may be performed any number of times until the display mode is changed (successful) with respect to the pre-read target suspension, and may not be performed again if one time is failed. Moreover, you may perform a promotion effect again with respect to the hold icon whose display mode changed once by the promotion effect. Note that the promotion effect by the navigation character may be an effect that is performed only for one of the hold icons, even if a plurality of the hold icons are displayed (that is, the position of the hold icon A moves as the hold decreases). Alternatively, the promotion effect by the navigation character is performed only for the hold icon A.), and the effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons and / or variable icons displayed in the hold icon display area. . In FIG. 88 (U13), the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. In FIG. 88 (U14), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. Has been. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 88 (U15), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In FIG. 88 (U16), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. The change icon h0 is an icon changed from the first hold icon h11 that has been changed to the blue display mode in the previous promotion effect, and is similarly displayed on the base hs0 in the blue display mode.

  In FIG. 88 (U17), a change notice display treasure box icon I1 appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS, and in FIG. 88 (U18), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box. Icon I1 remains. In FIG. 88 (U19), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image partially or entirely hides the navigation character YM. Is clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appeared. In FIG. 88 (u 20-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to a display mode with a red kimono. The treasure chest icon I1 disappears at the timing shown in FIG. 88 (U21), and only the Tono-sama navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The color of the display mode of the navigation character YM represents the reliability (expectation) of the jackpot of the currently displayed symbol variation display. Alternatively, it may represent the ease (promotion) of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon. Furthermore, although the hold icon is not displayed here, when the hold icon is displayed, the ease of change (promotion) of the display mode of the hold icon may be expressed.

  In FIG. 88 (U 23), a reach state is entered, and in FIG. 88 (U 24), a super reach effect is developed. When the super reach effect is developed, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS disappear in the hold frame UI, and the hold icon also disappears when the hold icon remains. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 88 (U24), the right base icon bIr disappears, and the foot portion of the Tono-sama navigation character YM wearing a red kimono disappears. Further, although the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is sinking, the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 88 (U25) in the super reach, the navigation character YM disappears completely, and the blue variation icon h0 is displayed on the lowered pedestal hs0 '. Although the navigation character YM has disappeared here, it may be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. Further, both the base hs0 'and the fluctuation icon h0 may disappear, or only one of them may disappear.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 88 (U27-1), as a continuation of the super reach production, a duel scene in which the main character and the enemy swordsman are confronting each other is displayed on the wilderness background screen h. . Again, both the base hs0 'and the change icon h0 are displayed.

  89 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 88, a modification, and the like.

  In FIG. 89 (U 29), all the decorative symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed lighter than the normal density, and a scene in which the lord is collapsed is displayed. Again, both the base hs0 'and the change icon h0 are displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (U30), the super reach effect is finished, the normal background is restored, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display, the base hs0 ′, and the variation icon h0 are displayed. Yes. In FIG. 89 (U 31), the display of the left symbol and the right symbol has been restored, and the pedestal that has been sunk until now is starting to rise with the change icon h0 on it. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 89 (U32), the combination of decorative symbols is displayed in a shaking manner, and the holding frame UI is also displayed again. The navigation character YM is displayed in a default display mode.

  Also, instead of FIG. 88 (U 20-1), in FIG. 89 (U 20-2), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a premium rainbow-colored kimono is worn. In this case, regardless of the display mode (color) of the variation icon h0, the display mode of the navigation character YM is rainbow, so that the big hit is confirmed. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon may be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premium rainbow color. When the navigation character YM functions as a pre-reading notice, the display mode of the hold icon to be pre-read may be changed to a display mode of red or higher, or may be changed to a premier rainbow color.

  In addition, in FIG. 89 (U27-2) instead of FIG. 88 (U27-1), the right base icon bIr is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the navigation of the display mode wearing a red kimono is performed. Character YM is displayed. The navigation character YM displayed here is only displayed and does not have to do anything. Alternatively, the navigation character YM itself may independently promote its own display mode, or change the display mode of the change icon. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may be changed by another notice display.

  Here, the notice with the effect icon (here UFO icon UFI) and / or the change notice display (here treasure box icon I1) is performed before one decoration symbol (for example, the left symbol) is temporarily stopped. It is configured so that after a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, a notice icon and / or change notice is not displayed, but one decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. There may be a case where an effect icon and / or a change notice display is performed later. In addition, although described as one decorative design, a plurality of decorative designs may be used, or all decorative designs may be used. In addition, in the state where the symbol (variable display by the special symbol display device) is completely stopped, the announcement icon and / or the change notice display is not performed, but it may be performed.

  FIG. 89 (E1) to FIG. 89 (E4-1) are examples in which the navigation character YM itself changes its own display mode.

  In FIG. 89 (E1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 89 (E2), the pose of the navigation character YM is changed and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 89 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a gray smoke image, making it difficult to see, and in FIG. (E 4-1), the display mode changes to a red kimono. ing.

  Further, in FIG. 89 (E 3-1) instead of FIG. 89 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a red smoke image, and thereafter, the navigation character YM is a red kimono. The display mode changes to Thus, the change animation itself may give a notice of the display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes. Further, the red smoke image may be a notice display for notifying that the display mode is changed to the red or higher display mode if the navigation character is successfully changed, and it is determined that the red smoke image is changed to the red or higher display mode. It may be a notice display.

  Further, in FIG. 89 (E 3-3) instead of FIG. 89 (E 3-1), the navigation character YM itself is wrapped in a rainbow-colored smoke image, or the currently displayed symbol variation display or After that, the big hit is confirmed (the big hit may be rich) by the symbol variation display started. As described above, the normal notice or the prefetch notice may be performed by the change animation itself. Note that the rainbow-colored smoke image may be a display for notifying that the navigation character is changed to the rainbow-colored display mode if the navigation character is successfully changed. In this case, even if the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed, the rainbow-colored smoke image is displayed. It is not necessary that the symbol variation and / or the hold in which the color smoke image is displayed be confirmed as a big hit (may be a big hit big).

  In addition, in FIG. 89 (E 4-1) instead of FIG. 89 (E 4-1), the navigation character is changed to another navigation character. Here, it has changed to a princess's navigation character. The character type to be changed may be a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization described above, or only a character set by the player in the character selection in the customization.

  In addition, in FIG. 89 (E 4-3) instead of FIG. 89 (E 4-2), the navigation character is changed to a navigation character that cannot be selected by the player (for example, a long character). It should be noted that the chief navigation character may be configured such that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the change icon is more easily performed than the navigation character YM, or the symbol change and / or hold that the navigation character has changed. You may be comprised so that the expectation degree of the jackpot may be high.

  In addition, the navigation character of the princess (bancho) may be configured so that the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variation icon is more easily performed than the navigation character YM, It may be configured so that the expectation of the jackpot on hold is high, or configured so that a princess (bancho) appears and / or a super-reach effect is likely to occur (or always occurs). It may be.

  When the navigation character YM changes to another navigation character, it may be configured to change only to a navigation character that can be selected by the player, so that the player is changed to a navigation character that cannot be selected. It may be configured, and there may be both a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and a case where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character. In both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player selects the navigation character that can be selected by the player. It may be configured such that the navigation character that cannot be promoted is more likely to promote the hold icon and / or the variation icon, or the symbol variation that the navigation character has changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold is high It may be configured as follows. Conversely, in both cases where the player is changed to a selectable navigation character and when the player is changed to a non-selectable navigation character, the player is more likely to play the game than the non-selectable navigation character. The navigation character that can be selected by the user may be configured to facilitate the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variation icon, or the symbol variation that the navigation character has changed and / or the expectation of the jackpot in the hold The degree may be high.

  Further, in FIG. 89 (E 4-1) instead of FIG. 89 (E 4-1), the character does not change, and its own change effect has failed.

  In this example, the navigation character YM itself changes its display mode independently, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is not entangled, but depending on the color of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display The display mode (color) in which the navigation character YM changes may be notified in advance. For example, when the red treasure chest icon I1 appears, it may be determined that the navigation character YM changes to a display mode of red or red or higher.

  Further, the color of the treasure box icon I1 may be used to predict the expected degree of jackpot in the currently displayed symbol variation display or the symbol variation display started thereafter. In other words, a normal notice or a prefetch notice may be performed according to the color of the treasure box icon I1.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in which the holding frame is temporarily invisible.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (1), the sea background is displayed. Moreover, the navigation character YM in the initial posture shown in FIG. 90 (1) is a default display mode. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  In FIG. 90 (2), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased and a third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 90 (4), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode remains displayed in the initial posture. Moreover, the background of the sea is still displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (4).

  In FIG. 90 (5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started, and the sea background is still displayed.

  In FIG. 90 (6), a background change notice, which is a kind of prefetch notice, is started. The background change notice target (prefetch target hold) is the hold increased at the timing of FIG. 90 (2) (second hold at this timing). In the background change notice, an image of a cocoon appears from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes a cocoon image by an animation in which the cocoon is closed (see FIG. 90 (7)). For this reason, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are overlapped from the front side by the image of the heel and become invisible. Instead of the bag image, an overlapping image from the front side may appear in the holding frame UI, the holding icons h11 and h12, the variation icon h0, and a part of the navigation character YM. Alternatively, the reservation frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM may have an effect in which images do not overlap at all.

  It should be noted that the background change notice may be started at the time of winning a pre-read target hold (timing in FIG. 90 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but is not limited to the next change, and may be started by the end of the pre-read target change. For example, the same background as the background change notice may be displayed at the start of the change of the prefetch target hold.

  In addition, in the background change notice, the expected image big hit expectation of prefetch target hold may be represented by the color of the appearance image (here, the image of the cocoon), or if the navigation character YM having the same color as the color of the cocoon appears. The navigation character YM functions as a notice of change and corresponds to a notice of change notice. Also, it may function as a notice of the background itself, such as changing to a mountain background if the color of the coral is green. Further, a plurality of types of background change notices may be prepared.

  In FIG. 90 (8), the bag opens, and the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM begin to appear. In FIG. 90 (9), the bag opens completely, and the bag image Disappeared. By the background change notice, the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the night background. The navigation character YM after the background change has changed to a character that depends on the changed background. Here, the character changes from Tono-sama character to robot character. In this example, one type of character corresponds to one type of background, but a plurality of types of characters may correspond to one type of background.

  In FIG. 90 (11), a reach state has been entered. In addition, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode between FIG. 90 (9-1) and FIG. Note that the display mode of the change icon h0 may change from the default display mode to the red display mode upon reaching the reach state. Although the hold frame UI is displayed, the hold icons h11 and h12 are all disappeared. After that, it evolved into a super reach production and changed to a super reach production background (here, the wilderness background). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 90 (13) displays a scene in which Tono-sama was defeated in the background of the wilderness. It should be noted that the navigation character YM of the robot overlaps the fallen lord, making it difficult to see.

  In FIG. 90 (14), the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is in a wipe display by the wipe-in. As shown in FIG. 90 (15), in the wipe display here, the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM disappear, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display disappear, and the model title is displayed in the left corner. Is only displayed. In FIG. 90 (16), wiped out, the background returns to the night background, and the navigation character YM also begins to appear.

  In FIG. 90 (17), the wipe effect is finished, and “decoration 7” — “decoration 6” — “decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a shaking manner. In addition, the hold frame UI is also displayed, and the display of the red change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 is resumed.

  In FIG. 90 (18), the symbol variation display is stopped and “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of misses, is stopped and displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  Then, after the first hold is digested and the symbol of losing is stopped and displayed, the next symbol variation display is started as shown in FIG. 90 (20-1). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol variation display has been started and the pre-read target pending symbol variation has ended, but the background remains the night background.

  In FIG. 90 (21), the background change notice is started again, and the image of the eyelid appears from the left and right, and the entire display screen becomes the image of the eyelid again here due to the animation that the eyelid is closed (FIG. 90 (22)). reference). In FIG. 90 (23), the bag opens, and the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 and h12, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM start to appear. In FIG. Disappeared. As shown in FIG. 90 (24), the background of the decorative symbol display device 208 has returned to the sea background, and the navigation character YM has also returned to the Tono-sama character.

  In addition, in FIG. 90 (9-2) instead of FIG. 90 (9-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM of the robot is changed to a display mode different from the default. The display mode (for example, color, shape, size, etc.) of the character depending on the background may also change depending on the reliability of the big hit. Or it may have changed from the first.

  Note that the navigation character YM may change depending on the production background, regardless of the background of the pre-reading notice. For example, when a coastal background, a castle town background, and a castle background appear in order, the navigation character YM may be changed depending on the background. The appearance order of the plurality of types of backgrounds may be random. Also, when the effect mode is changed by the player, the navigation character YM may change depending on the background change. In addition, a navigation character different from the navigation character depending on the production background may be displayed. For example, when the navigation character A is displayed in the effect background A and the navigation character B is displayed in the effect background B, the navigation character B may be displayed in the effect background A. Here, when the navigation character that does not match the effect background is displayed, the promotion effect of the hold icon and / or the variation icon is more easily performed than when the navigation character that matches the effect background is displayed. Alternatively, the navigation character may be configured to have a high degree of expectation of the symbol variation and / or the jackpot in the hold (or the big jackpot confirmation (may be a big jackpot richness)). It may be configured such that the occurrence frequency of the notice and / or super reach effect that the navigation character that does not match the background appears is high (or necessarily occurs).

  Or conversely, even if the background is changed, the type of the navigation character YM may not be changed, or may not be changed absolutely.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which a plurality of navigation characters YM appear in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 91 (or 1), the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 91 (or 2-1), a speech balloon for calling a friend is additionally displayed on the navigation character YM. The display of the balloon corresponds to a notice that another character (roar or princess) is displayed by the currently displayed Tono-sama navigation character YM. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-1), the display of the princess's navigation character YM1 is added in addition to the lord's navigation character YM, and the princess is successfully called. The appearance of the princess character may be an animation display or a mode of appearing instantaneously. In the case of animation display, an animation in which a character cannot be initially seen by a smoke image may be used, or an animation that appears by walking from the right end of the screen. This princess's navigation character YM1 is also the default display mode.

  In FIG. 91 (or 4), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols in a stopped manner. Tono-sama navigation character YM and princess navigation character YM1, both of which are the default display modes, are displayed in an initial posture. In FIG. 91 (or 5), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the next symbol variation display is started, the two navigation characters YM and YM1 remain displayed. Thus, the display of a plurality of navigation characters may span a plurality of variations. However, the displayed navigation character YM1 may disappear in the symbol variation display in which the navigation character YM1 appears. Even in this case, the previously displayed navigation character (here, Tono-sama navigation character YM) is displayed across multiple variations.

  In FIG. 91 (or 5), a speech balloon that calls a samurai is additionally displayed on the two navigation characters YM and YM1, and the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. In addition to the two navigation characters YM and YM1, the display of the navigator character YM2 is added, and the user has successfully called the bag. In other words, all three people are now ready. In this production, the probability that the variation icon h0 will change increases, the probability of changing to a premier or a color close to premier, and the expectation of hitting a big hit with the change is higher when one or more navigation characters gather. Or the degree of expectation for a big hit after the next change may be high. In addition, when all three people are together, the rainbow color of the premiere or the big hit may be confirmed. In FIG. 91 (or 7-1), the first decorative symbol is in a reach state with all three members in a uniform state, and “decoration 7” is swayed (temporarily stopped) for both the left symbol and the right symbol.

Further, instead of FIG. 91 (or 2-1), in FIG. 91 (or 2-2-1), a notice other than the navigation character YM itself is given. That is, in FIG. 91 (or 2-1), the navigation character YM
In this example, the roulette display icon RI is additionally displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the roulette notice is started. The roulette notice here may be dedicated to the appearance notice of another navigation character, or may be another notice (such as a pending change notice). In FIG. 91 (or 2-2), a princess character is displayed on the roulette display icon RI. After this, the princess's navigation character YM1 may appear, but no navigation character may appear (so-called failure), or a different navigation character (for example, a navy navigation character YM2) may appear. May appear. The roulette display icon RI is configured so that characters of characters that have already appeared are not displayed, but may be configured so that characters of characters that have already appeared. In this case, a plurality of the same characters may be displayed according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, if the princess character is stopped and displayed three times on the roulette display icon RI, For example, three characters may be displayed), the promotion effect of characters already appearing may be performed according to the number of characters displayed on the roulette display icon RI (for example, 3 characters of the princess are displayed on the roulette display icon RI). When the stoppage is displayed, the princess appears in the first time, the princess's kimono turns red in the second time, the princess's kimono changes to gold in the third time, etc.).

  Also, instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-2), there may be cases where no navigation character appears and fails.

  Also, instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), in FIG. 91 (or 3-3), not the princess's navigation character YM1, but the cocoon navigation character YM2 appears. Thus, the order of appearance is not determined, and different animations may be performed depending on the navigation characters displayed next to each other. For example, in FIG. 91 (or 3-1), Tono-sama's navigation character YM thought that the princess's navigation character YM1 would come, but the nephew's navigation character YM2 came, and a surprised animation was displayed. It may be a premiere production that comes before the princess. Also, depending on the order in which the characters appear, the probability that the variation icon h0 will change, the probability that it will change to a premier or near-premier color, the degree of expectation that will be a big hit due to the change, or a big hit after the next change will be changed. Expectations may change or may not affect them at all.

  Further, instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), as shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-4-1), the display position may be determined in advance by the character. That is, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-4-1), a Tono-sama navigation character YM is displayed at the left end, and a princess navigation character YM1 is displayed for one person. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-4-3), the heel navigator character YM2 is displayed at a position left by one person. In this way, even if the order of display positions (Tono-sama, niece, princess) is fixed, the order may be disrupted (dono, princess, niece). (A big hit finalizing effect) or a big hit big.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 91 (or 3-1) instead of FIG. 91 (or 3-1), when the number of navigation characters increases, the increase is indicated by a character display (here, “Hime Stock” "), Or may be notified by voice from a speaker, or by flashing a lamp or the like. In FIG. 91 (or 3-5-3), the fact that all the members have gathered is notified by character display. In addition, when everyone gathered successfully, the character display of “all members gathering” is always displayed, but a different character display (for example, “It ’s super hot” or “All members gathering”) is displayed. In this case, it may be a premier effect (a big hit finalizing effect), a big jackpot rich, or a specific reach mode may be surely started. In this case as well, in addition to the notification of the character display or instead of the notification of the character display, the notification may be made by voice from a speaker, or may be notified by blinking of a lamp or the like.

  Further, instead of FIG. 91 (or 6-1), as shown in FIG. 91 (or 6-2), characters other than Tono-sama, Hime, and Samurai (here, Minowa character YM3 imitating cactus) increase. In this case, it may be a premier effect (a big hit finalizing effect) or a big hit.

  In addition, if “爺” is displayed even though “Princess” is specified, it may be a premier production (a big hit finalizing production) or a big hit, and call “Princess”. However, if “が” is displayed more frequently, a big hit (or big hit is confirmed) may be given if the character (“princess”) as it is called appears. Further, depending on the display mode of a navigation character that calls another navigation character (in this example, Tono-sama), the other navigation character may be likely to appear (stock) or difficult to appear (stock). Also, depending on the type of navigation character that calls other navigation characters, there may be cases where other navigation characters are likely to appear (stock) or difficult to appear (stock). For example, it may be easier for other navigation characters to appear (stock) when the princess's navigation character calls than the Tono-sama navigation character. The characters that appear (stock) are not limited to different types of characters, and may be the same type of navigation characters. For example, a plurality of Tono-sama navigation characters YM may be displayed, or may be indicated as Tono-sama × 3. Moreover, even if it is the navigation character of the same kind, the display modes (color, shape, pose, size) may be different. Furthermore, the presentation performed after being displayed may differ depending on the character. For example, in the case where an effect of releasing a character from the effect icon display area DIS is performed, the pseudo-continuous effect start may be started when the lord is released, the hold is promoted when the princess is released, and the timer notice start may be started when the spear is released. . A plurality of characters may be emitted. Furthermore, when a plurality of characters are released simultaneously, an effect different from that of a single release may be performed. For example, if Tono-sama and Hime-sama are released at the same time, a pseudo-continuous production that is hotter than Tono-sama alone may be started.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a modification example and the like shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 92 (ki 1), the default display mode of the navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture, and the princess navigation character YM1 of the default display mode is displayed in the initial posture on the right side. ing. Also, a treasure box icon I1 of a change notice display is displayed on the right side of the princess navigation character YM1. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  In FIG. 92 (ki 2-1), the treasure chest icon I1 opens, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and only the princess's navigation character YM1 out of the lord's navigation character YM and the princess's navigation character YM1 has its smoke. Wrapped in images. That is, the smoke image does not reach the Tona-sama navigation character YM. In FIG. 92 (ki 4), the smoke image has disappeared, and the princess's navigation character YM1 has changed to a display mode with a red kimono. In FIG. 92 (ki 5), the treasure box icon I1 disappears.

  In FIG. 92 (ki 2-2-1) instead of FIG. 92 (ki 2-1), the pose of Tono-sama's navigation character YM is changed, and the hand holding the fan is raised. In FIG. 92 (ki2-2-2), Tono-sama's navigation character YM causes a smoke image to appear, and only the princess's navigation character YM1 is wrapped in the smoke image. In FIG. 92 (ki 2-2-3), the smoke image has disappeared, and the princess's navigation character YM1 has been changed to a display mode with a red kimono. Also, Tonosama's navigation character YM has returned to the initial posture.

  In FIG. 92 (ki 3-2-1) instead of FIG. 92 (ki 3-1), smoke images appearing from the treasure chest icon I1 are displayed for both the Tonosama navigator character YM and the princess navigator character YM1. Wrapping the navigation character. In FIG. 92 (ki 3-2-2), the smoke image has disappeared, and both the Tona-sama navigation character YM and the princess navigation character YM1 have changed to display forms with red kimonos. That is, the display mode has changed for both of them. Here, both have changed to the same color, but may change to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, although both of them are wrapped in a smoke image, only one may change and the other may remain the default.

  When a plurality of navigation characters are displayed, one navigation character (for example, princess) may be promoted and the other navigation character (for example, Yoshimune) may not be promoted. Further, both navigation characters may be promoted. In that case, the direction in which one of the characters (for example, princess) has changed may be hotter than the case in which the other character (for example, Yoshimune) has changed, and the expectation degree of jackpot may be the same. Moreover, the direction in which both characters have changed may be hotter than the case in which one character has changed. Moreover, the direction in which one character changes depending on the change mode may be hotter than the change in both characters. For example, a combination of the Tono-like navigation character YM in the default display mode and the Princess Navi character YM1 in the display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, and the Tono-sama navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono and the red With the combination of the princess navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a kimono, the former combination may be easier to hit than the latter combination. Further, both characters may be changed without fail. In that case, it may be configured to change to the same color, or may be configured to change to a different color. Further, the meaning of the character after the change may change depending on the character that changes. For example, if the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hot, the change is hot, and if it is the princess navigation character YM1 in the display mode wearing a red kimono, it is easy to develop into super reach. Also good. In addition, if the Tono-like navigation character YM in a display manner wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, the jackpot is confirmed, and if the navigation character YM in a display manner wearing a rainbow-colored kimono is confirmed, the jackpot with a probability change is confirmed ( Advantageous jackpot determination).

  In this example, there is one navigation character that is always displayed, and when another navigation character is called by the navigation character or when a plurality of navigation characters are always displayed, the navigation character YM is displayed. The present embodiment can also be applied when there is a period during which one or more navigation characters are displayed at a specific timing.

  FIGS. 92 (1-1) to 7 (7) show examples of effects in which button effects are involved with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 92 (<1>-1), the default display mode of the navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a default first hold icon h11 is displayed.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. In the button display icon 136D, a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is also displayed. In FIG. 92 (<3), the operation effective period is started, and in FIG. 92 (<4>), the remaining period meter is slightly decreased. In FIG. 92 (<5>), the chance button 136 is operated, and in FIG. 92 (<6>), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and the ton character is visually recognized by the effect image. It has become difficult. In FIG. 92 (<7>), the display character is changed to a Tono-sama navigation character wearing a red kimono.

  In FIG. 92 (<1-2-1), the default display mode of the navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture, but here, the button display icon 136D is not displayed. That is, the back button effect is performed. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 92 (<1-2-2), the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in FIG. 92 (<1-2-3). In response, the change animation of the navigation character YM is started. Thus, the display mode of the navigation character may change depending on the back button effect.

  It should be noted that both the back button effect and another button effect (with button display) may be changed, the back button effect may be given priority, or another button effect may be given priority. The same may be applied when the back button is overlapped.

  When the pre-read button notice overlaps with the change button notice (normal notice), the pre-read button notice may be given priority, or the change button notice may be given priority.

  In addition, in FIG. 92 (<2-2>) instead of FIG. 92 (<2-1>), the button display icon 136D is not added to the navigation character YM, but at a position away from the navigation character YM. The button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT are displayed at positions outside the effect icon display area DIS and also outside the holding frame UI. The display of the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT here is a notice different from the notice by the navigation character YM itself, and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be changed by this different notice. Note that the button image 136a and the remaining period meter MT may be displayed constantly or before the effective period starts.

  FIG. 93 shows an effect example in which the effect of the button hold icon is entangled with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 93 (ku-3-1), the default display mode of the navigation character YM is displayed in the initial posture. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, a first hold icon h11 is displayed. A first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 93 (ku-3-1) is a button hold icon, and a button image 136a is displayed on a white circle display. The remaining period meter MT is not displayed, but may be displayed. Here, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is within the period of the change. When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 93 (<1-3-2a>), a smoke image of an effect appears as shown in FIG. Part or all of the character YM is concealed, and is clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appears. Here, the button image 136a displayed on the first hold icon h11 is erased, and the first hold icon h11 does not cause any change (for example, change in display mode). That is, when the chance button 136 is displayed while the button hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not changed, and the navigation character YM is changed. is there. It should be noted that when the chance button 136 is operated outside the operation valid period, the navigation character and / or the button hold icon itself are not changed. However, there may be a case where a transition is made to FIG. 93 (<1-3-4) to be described later via the state shown in FIG. 93 (<1-3-3-3a).

  In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 93 (<1-3-2a>), as shown in FIG. 93 (<1-3-3-3b1), the button image 136a for the button hold icon disappears, An effect image may be applied to the first hold icon h11 and a change animation may be started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 93 (1-3-3b2), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 may change from a white circle display to a blue circle display. In addition, there may be a case where the display mode of the white circle display remains (after all, a failed pattern). In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 93 (<1-3-2a>), the process goes to FIG. 93 (<1-3-3-3b2) without going through (<1-3-3-3b1). As shown, an icon that is a button hold icon may change to a blue circle display mode without a change animation.

  Or, as shown in FIG. 93 (<1-3-3-3b1>), as shown in FIG. 93 (<1> -3-4), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains a white circle display, but the navigation character YM may change to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn. The change of the display mode of the navigation character YM here is not a change animation when it passes through FIG. 93 (<1-3-3-3b1>), but the display mode is switched instantaneously. In the case of passing through 3a), it is displayed after the change animation by the effect of the smoke image is executed. However, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed in the case of going through FIG. 93 (<1-3-3-3b1). There may be a case where it changes immediately after the chance button 136 is operated, or a case where the chance button 136 changes slightly later. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 93 (<1-3-2a), it is shown in FIG. 93 (<1-3-4) without going through (<1-3-3-3b1). Thus, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change.

  Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the chance button is not operated (FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-2b1)) and the next variation has started (the first decorative symbol variation has still started). In the case where the variation of the second decorative symbol has been started), the variation icon h0 may become a button hold icon, as shown in FIG. In this case, the button effect is carried over to the next fluctuation, and if the chance button 136 is operated within the operation effective period, the button image 136a disappears as shown in FIG. 93 (<1-3-2b3 '). The white circle display on which the button image 136a is displayed may change to a blue circle display mode (success pattern). In the case of a change, a change animation accompanied by an effect image such as a smoke image may be executed. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM is not changed, but may be changed. On the other hand, even if the chance button 136 is operated, the button image 136a disappears with respect to the change icon h0, but there is no change (for example, change in display mode) in the white circle display on which the button image 136a is displayed. It may not occur. That is, it is a pattern in which the change effect from the button hold icon has failed. Although the display mode of the navigation character YM has not changed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change. Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the next button has started without operating the chance button, the button hold icon may not be changed. You may be comprised so that it may change automatically after the next fluctuation | variation is started, without operating a button.

  Even if the button hold icon is displayed, if the next change is started without operating the chance button (FIG. 93 (<1-3-2b1>)), FIG. -2b2 '), an effect image is applied to the variation icon h0, and a change animation may be started. In this case, there may be a case of shifting to FIG. 93 (<1-3-2b3 ') or a case of FIG. 93 (<1-3-2b3>).

  Note that the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 93 (ku-3-1) is the default display mode, but the same applies to the navigation character YM in the promoted display mode. That is, in FIG. 93 (ku 1-3-4), the second promotion is performed. When there are a plurality of hold icons, icons other than the button hold icon may be changed. Further, the hold icon that has already changed may be changed by operating the button due to the button hold icon being displayed.

  In addition, when eight hold icons are displayed, for example, when N are stored, some or all of the hold icons are changed to button hold icons. Depending on the button operation, the hold icon, the change icon, and the navigation character YM are displayed. It may be configured to change. This is also applicable when only four hold icons are displayed.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating an example in which there is a period during which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (K1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 94 (Ke2), the hold in the special figure 1 is increased, and a third hold icon h13 is additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 is also a default display mode.

  In FIG. 94 (K3), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Even during the stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 94 (4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Further, the display mode of the second hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode in accordance with the start of the symbol variation display. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 94 (Ke 5-1), and in FIG. 94 (Ke 6-1), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. YM is displayed. Tono-sama navigation character YM shown in FIG. 94 (K 6-1) is the default display mode. Here, the navigation character YM is a notice (prefetch notice and / or notice of the change) corresponding to the prefetch target hold.

  The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning a pre-reading target suspension (timing in FIG. 94 (2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but is not limited to the next change, and may be started by the end of the pre-read target change. Further, the navigation character YM may be displayed whenever there is a pre-reading target hold, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won.

  In FIG. 94 (7), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM in the default display mode that is displayed during the symbol variation display stopped and displayed here remains displayed in the initial posture.

  Next, the next symbol variation display is started, and in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 94 (Ken 9-1), a treasure box icon I1 of a change notice display is displayed next to the navigation character YM in the default display mode. It is displayed. The navigation character YM is changed to a display mode with a red kimono wearing the same change animation as the change animation shown in FIG. 85 (A 4-1) (FIG. 94 (K 11)). Even if the change animation is executed, the display mode of the navigation character YM may remain the default display mode. Moreover, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change without the treasure chest icon I1 appearing. That is, there may be a case where the change notice display is not performed.

  In FIG. 94 (note 13), the change in the prefetch target hold has started, and the change icon h0 in the blue display mode is displayed. In addition, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is also displayed during this change. Therefore, the navigation character YM was not initially displayed, but after being displayed, it is always displayed across multiple variations.

  It should be noted that the navigation character YM may disappear when the change in the prefetch target hold currently being performed is completed. In this case, the navigation character YM may disappear after the three symbols or temporary stop (shaking display) in the variation of the decorative pattern of the pre-reading target hold until the symbol stops, or one or two decorative symbols May disappear once temporarily stopped (first stop or second stop).

  Further, the navigation character YM disappears at the stop display timing in FIG. 94 (K7) and does not have to be displayed across the fluctuation.

  Further, instead of FIG. 94 (Ke 5-1), as shown in FIG. 94 (Ke 5-2), the place where the navigation character YM is displayed is not limited to the production icon display area DIS, but a hold icon. It may be displayed in the display area HIS. Further, there may be a plurality of places where the navigation character YM is displayed, and the navigation character YM may also be displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Further, the navigation character YM may execute different effects depending on the displayed position. For example, the hold icon may be changed when displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon may be changed when displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Further, the probability of changing the variation icon may differ depending on the display position, and the reliability of the jackpot may differ. The location where the navigation character YM is displayed may always be only one display area (for example, the production icon display area DIS, the hold icon display area HIS, the variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  In place of FIG. 94 (K5-1), as shown in (K5-3) in FIG. 94, the navigation character YM is movable within the hold icon display area HIS (within the left base icon bIl). If the hold icon is displayed, the front side of the hold icon may be moved. That is, it is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon from the front side.

  On the other hand, instead of FIG. 94 (key 5-1), as shown in FIG. 94 (key 5-4), the navigation character YM may move behind the hold icon. That is, this time, the hold icon is displayed so as to overlap the navigation character YM from the front side.

  Note that the navigation character may perform an animation of moving through a plurality of display areas (for example, an effect icon display area DIS, a hold icon display area HIS, a variation icon display area CIS, etc.).

  FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating an example in which there is another period in which the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (K 6-2-1), a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and a change icon h0 of a default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, the pending digestion continues, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3a), the combination of the decorative symbols of the swaying is displayed in a shaking manner in the absence of the holding. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (K 6-2-4), the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is stopped and displayed in a state where there is no hold. The navigation character YM in the default display mode is still displayed.

  In FIG. 95 (K 6-2-6), there is a winning at the first special figure starting port 230 in a state where there is no hold, the symbol variation display is started, and the first decorative symbol has not yet started variation. The second decorative design has begun to fluctuate. At this time, the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (K 6-2-7), an increase animation of the hold icon representing the hold that has already been digested (the hold of the started symbol change display) is displayed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 95 (K 6-2-7) is displayed lightly, and an erase animation of the navigation character YM is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-8), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, and the hold icon h11 increased by the hold increase animation is displayed on the first stage hs1. Yes. At this stage, the navigation character YM has completely disappeared. In addition, actually, FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-6) to FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-8) is an event for a moment, but an erasing animation of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Although there is a time lag in the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, the navigation character YM disappears at the start of the symbol variation display from the state where there is no hold. The disappearing timing here may be before the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, may be simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol, or the variable display of the first decorative symbol. It may be after the start of. Further, when the hold increase animation is performed, it may be before the start of the hold increase animation, at the same time as the start of the hold increase animation, or after the start of the hold increase animation. Good.

  In addition, instead of FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3a), as shown in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3b1), there is a case where the vehicle enters the reach state, and the display mode of the navigation character YM is the reach state. It may be configured not to change inside, or conversely, it may change during the reach state. Further, the display mode of the variation icon may be configured not to change during the reach state by the navigation character YM, or conversely, may change during the reach state.

  In FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3b2), a super-reaching production is developed, and in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3b3), a duel scene in which Tosama and the enemy swordsman are facing each other is displayed. In FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3b3), the navigation character YM is displayed in the default display mode.

  It should be noted that the navigation character YM may be promoted when it is developed to super reach, and conversely, the navigation character YM is not developed to super reach, and is configured so that the display manner is not promoted in the case of normal reach. May be. Or conversely, even if it is a normal reach, the display mode of the navigation character YM may be promoted. For example, it may be promoted as a prefetch notice after the next change. In addition, when the “navigator character promotion” symbol is stopped as a middle symbol during normal reach, the display mode is promoted. Furthermore, the display mode may be promoted as a notice of the change (normal notice).

  Thereafter, in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3b4), the wipe effect described with reference to FIGS. 86 (A 14-2-4) to (A 14-2-6) is executed, and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 6-2-3b5), “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which are combinations of misses, are displayed in a shaking manner. The display mode of the navigation character YM remains the default display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-3b6), “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7”, which is a combination of misses, is stopped and displayed, and the navigation character YM is also the default. Are displayed as they are.

  When FIG. 95 (Ke 6-2-1) to (Ke 6-2-8) and (Ke 6-2-3b1) to (Ke 6-2-3b6) are put together, the symbol variation of the pre-reading target hold ends. Even if the hold becomes 0, the navigation character displayed as a notice corresponding to the prefetch target hold (prefetch notice and / or notice of the change) is not hidden, and the next change is started. When it is erased. It should be noted that the navigation character is displayed before the pre-reading target pending symbol variation ends (for example, before the decorative symbol is displayed with one or more temporary stops, simultaneously with the temporary stop, after the temporary stop, or after the decorative symbol is displayed. All symbols (3 symbols, left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol in this example) are temporarily stopped before and after temporary stop. It may be deleted before or after the symbol change of the pre-read target hold is ended (at the same time when the symbol (special symbol) becomes the stop display or after the stop display).

  FIG. 96 shows an example in which a maximum of eight hold icons are displayed.

  In the holding frame UI of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96, the variable icon display area CIS is provided at the left end, and the base hs0 is arranged. An effect icon display area DIS is provided at the right end. The hold icon display area HIS is located between the change icon display area CIS and the effect icon display area DIS, and the base icon bIm extends. Eight stages are arranged on this base icon bIm, and a hold icon is displayed on each stage. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (this a1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. The second hold number display shows that the hold number of the special figure 1 is “3” and the hold number of the special figure 2 is “2”, and five hold icons are displayed in total. Yes. These five hold icons are all in the default display mode.

  In the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 96, when there are five holds, the stage corresponding to the sixth hold is displayed in the same display mode (for example, white) as the first to fifth stages, and the seventh piece The eighth stages hs7 and hs8 are displayed in different display modes (for example, gray). In addition, until the third hold, the fourth stage is white, and the fifth and subsequent stages are gray. When the four holds, the fifth stage is white, and the sixth and later stages are white. The stage turns gray. As described above, the display mode of the stage changes according to the number of holds, but the stage may always have the same display mode regardless of the number of holds.

  In addition, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 96 (ko a2), the holding of special figure 2 is increased by one, and in the figure (ko a3), the holding increase animation is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Are displayed. The added sixth hold icon h6 is also the default display mode. Further, the seventh stage hs7 changes to white, and the gray stage is only the eighth stage hs8.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (this a5), a navigation character YM having a default display mode appears, and a balloon “two more full” is added. The navigation character YM appears when the number of suspensions is N or more (in this example, 6 or more).

  In FIG. 96 (this a6), the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 96 (this a7), seven hold icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. In addition, a balloon “One more full” is added. The added seventh hold icon h7 is also the default display mode. In addition, the last eighth stage hs8 also changes to white, and the gray stage has disappeared.

  In FIG. 96 (ko a8), the hold of special figure 2 is increased by one, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the figure (ko a9), eight hold icons are displayed, and the navigation character YM in the default display mode is displayed. Is added with a balloon “full tank”. The added eighth hold icon h8 is also the default display mode. In this example, the navigation character YM performs notification regarding the number of holds using a balloon, but it may not be performed.

  In this example, the navigation character YM may change when 8 holds are stored (when the tank is full). In FIG. 96 (this a10), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will change. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may always change when the hold is full. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image.

  In FIG. 96 (this a11), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode in which a red kimono is worn, and a balloon that “the hold is hot” is added to the navigation character YM, and a pre-reading notice is executed. . Note that the notice displayed in the balloon may be a notice of the change. Also, the degree of expectation for the jackpot on hold may be notified in advance by a notification displayed in a balloon. Further, in this example, the navigation character changes due to the symbol variation in which the hold is full, but the navigation character may be changed in accordance with the next variation of the symbol variation in which the hold is full. In addition, the navigation character may change for each symbol variation, and the symbol variation may be notified by changing the navigation character.

  The change of the navigation character YM is not limited to the color, and may be a display size, a pose, or a shape. Moreover, there may be a plurality of types of characters that appear, and the heat may vary depending on the character. For example, even if the navigation character of the princess in the display mode wearing a red kimono is hotter than the navigation character in the display mode wearing a red kimono, Good.

  FIG. 97 shows an effect example in which a normal decoration pattern is entwined with the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 97 (this b1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Furthermore, a special figure 1 first hold icon h11 with a circle representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that the special figure 1 first hold icon h11 is a default display mode. In FIG. 97 (this b1), the navigation character YM is not displayed, but the roulette display icon RI is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. The roulette display icon RI here displays a variation display of the usual decorative pattern. As a result, in addition to “○” and “×”, “Geki” as a big hit notice of the special figure of the variation "Atsu" is also included. In FIG. 97 (this b2), “◯” is displayed on the roulette display icon RI, and it is notified that the normal drawing lottery has been won.

  In FIG. 97 (this b3), the navigation character YM appears in the effect icon display area DIS. This navigation character YM is the default display mode, and appears when the player wins the regular drawing lottery. In the following FIG. 97 (this b4), since the regular drawing lottery is won, the electric Chu is released, and the navigation character YM notifies that the electric Chu is being released. In FIG. 97 (this b5-1), since the electric Chu is being opened, there is a winning after the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the number of reserved figures in the special figure 2 increases to four full. In FIG. 97 (this b6-1), the second hold number display shows that the hold number of Special Figure 1 is “1” and the hold number of Special Figure 2 is “4”. Four diamond-shaped hold icons representing 2 hold are displayed (see Fig. 2 first hold icon h21 to special figure 2 fourth hold icon h24). The four special figure 2 hold icons h21 to h24 are all in the default display mode. The pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed with priority over the hold icon of the special figure 1, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is designated as the special figure 1. It is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon of from the front side.

  In FIG. 97 (this b7), the notification during the opening of the electric chew by the navigation character YM is completed, and in the following FIG. 97 (this b8), since the opening time of the electric chew has ended, the roulette display icon RI itself disappears downward. I'm talking. It should be noted that the roulette display icon RI may be displayed until all the suspended symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is completed. In FIG. 97 (this b9), the roulette display icon RI has completely disappeared.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 97 (this b11), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. The navigation character YM, which is the default display mode, is displayed in the initial posture. In FIG. 97 (this b12), the hold of the special figure 2 first hold icon h21 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in this figure (this b13), the variation icon of the special figure 2 is displayed. A rhombus variation icon is displayed on the base hs0.

  In FIG. 97 (this b14), the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. This smoke image corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will change. However, even if the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image, it does not always change and may not change. In addition, the smoke image itself may not appear, or the smoke image may appear. Alternatively, the navigation character YM may always change when the hold is full. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to change whenever it is wrapped in a smoke image, or may not change even if it is wrapped in a smoke image.

  In FIG. 97 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM is changed to a display mode with a red kimono, and a balloon “This change is hot” is added to the navigation character YM. Yes. Further, the normal notice is also executed depending on the display mode of the navigation character YM.

  In addition, in FIG. 97 (this b15-2-1) instead of FIG. 97 (this b15-1), the navigation character YM remains in the default display mode, and the change effect has failed. In addition, a balloon “This change is” is added to the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, the reservation of the special figure 2 proceeds, and the symbol variation display of the last special figure 2 is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (this b15-2-3). Also here, the navigation character YM has a balloon “This change is”, and the effect by the navigation character YM is continued from the previous FIG. 97 (this b15-2-1). In FIG. 97 (this b15-2-4), a balloon “Farewell” is added to the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the effect by the navigation character YM is finished. The navigation character YM disappears from the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (this b15-2-5). In addition, when it is hot, the navigation character YM does not disappear, and the effect by the navigation character YM may continue further. On the contrary, the navigation character YM may necessarily disappear. Further, even when the super reach production is started between FIG. 97 (this b15-2-1) to FIG. 97 (this b15-2-4), the production by the navigation character YM is continued, and the navigation character YM is displayed. On the contrary, the effect by the navigation character YM may end and the navigation character YM may disappear.

  Note that the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 97 (this b1) to FIG. (This b15-1) and FIG. 97 (this b15-2-1) to FIG. Only the advance notice is performed and the prefetch notice is not made, but the prefetch notice may be made.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a change notice display is displayed on standby.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (sa1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. The navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 98 (sa 2), the hold in FIG. 1 increases and a third hold icon h13 and a fourth hold icon h14 are additionally displayed. The third hold icon h13 and the fourth hold icon h14 are also default display modes. Here, in this example, the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 is a prefetch target hold.

  In FIG. 98 (3), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Even during the stop display, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 98 (sa 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 98 (sa5), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a notice display that changes the display mode of the navigation character YM, but in this example, the navigation character YM itself is not displayed. However, since the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears, it has been notified (predicted) that the navigation character YM may also appear. The treasure box icon I1 in the change notice display is in a standby display until the navigation character YM appears. The stand-by display of the treasure box icon I1 is displayed on the carpet icon I2.

  In FIG. 98 (S7), the symbol variation display is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

  In FIG. 98 (sa 8), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

  In FIG. 98 (sa 9-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The navigation character YM has not yet appeared, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby.

  In FIG. 98 (sa 10-1), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested and the symbol variation display is started. Even when the symbol variation display is started, the navigation character YM does not appear, and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display remains on standby. Thus, the treasure chest icon I1 may be displayed across a plurality of variations.

  A smoke image is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 98 (sa 11-1). In FIG. 98 (sa 12), the smoke image disappears, and the tomb-like navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. It is displayed. Tono-sama navigation character YM shown in FIG. 98 (S12) is the default display mode. The smoke image here corresponds to a notice that the navigation character YM will appear. However, even if the smoke image is displayed, the navigation character YM does not always appear and may not appear. In addition, the smoke image itself may not be displayed, or the smoke image may be displayed without fail. Further, the navigation character YM may be configured to appear whenever the smoke image is displayed.

  The appearance of the navigation character YM may be started at the time of winning a pre-read target suspension (timing in FIG. 98 (S2)). In this example, it is started during the next change of the winning change, but is not limited to the next change, and may be started by the end of the pre-read target change. In addition, the navigation character YM may be displayed when there is a prefetch target hold, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won. In this example, the treasure box icon of the change notice display and the navigation character YM are the look-ahead notices for the same look-ahead target hold (the hold 4 represented by the fourth hold icon h14 shown in FIG. 98 (S2) in this example). However, the treasure box icon of the change notice display may be different from the prefetch target hold of the navigation character YM.

  In FIG. 98 (S12), when Tono-sama navigation character YM appears, only carpet icon I2 disappears, and treasure box icon I1 remains in effect icon display area DIS. That is, the standby display of the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display ends.

  In FIG. 98 (sa 14), the change of the prefetch target hold is started. The change animation using the treasure box icon I1 is performed during the change of the prefetch target hold. In FIG. 98 (Sa 15-1), a treasure box is opened, a smoke image comes out from inside, and envelops the Tono-sama navigation character YM. In FIG. 98 (S16), the smoke image disappears, and the display mode of the Tono-sama navigation character YM changes from the default display mode to a display mode with a red kimono. The navigation character YM that has changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono functions as a notice of the change (normal notice).

  It should be noted that the change effect of the navigation character YM using the treasure box icon I1 may be started at the time of winning a pre-reading target hold (timing in FIG. 98 (S2)). In addition, the navigation character YM may be displayed when there is a prefetch target hold, or may be displayed only when the effect lottery is won.

  In addition, in FIG. 98 (S 10-2-1) instead of FIG. 98 (S 10-1), no Tona-sama navigation character YM has appeared, but the carpet icon I2 has disappeared, and a change notice display treasure box is displayed. The icon I1 is in the standby display. In the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 98 (sa 10-2-2), a smoke image is displayed. The smoke image here extends beyond the display position of the navigation character YM to the variation icon h0, and the navigation character The display position of YM and the fluctuation icon h0 are covered from the front side by the smoke image. In FIG. 98 (sa 10-2-3), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM does not appear, but the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed to the red display mode. Here, the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variation icon h0 may not change, or the navigation character YM may appear and the display mode of the variation icon h0 may also change. On the contrary, the navigation character YM may not appear, and the display mode of the change icon h0 may not change.

  Further, instead of FIG. 98 (S11-1), in FIG. 11 (S21-2), the smoke icon is displayed, but the navigation character YM is not visible, and the carpet icon I2 disappears. The treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display has ended the standby display. Thus, the timing when the standby display ends may be before the navigation character YM appears. The timing at which the standby display ends may be simultaneous with the appearance of the navigation character YM. Furthermore, the timing of temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the timing of stop display of the decorative symbol, or the timing of the start of variation of the decorative symbol may be used. Note that the navigation character is not displayed for the same prefetch target hold after the standby display of the change notice display is finished, but the navigation character is displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change notice display is finished. (For example, a change after the next change after the standby display has ended, or within a change in which the standby display has ended). Further, the change notice display may not be displayed for the same prefetch target hold even after the standby display of the change notice display ends, but the change notice display may be displayed again for the same prefetch target hold (for example, the standby display). For example, the fluctuation after the next fluctuation of the fluctuation that ended and the fluctuation within the waiting display).

  Further, instead of FIG. 98 (S13), the carpet icon I2 disappears and the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed in FIG. 98 (S13-2-1). In 13-13-2), the treasure box is not opened, the navigation character YM is not changed, the display mode of the change icon h0 is not changed, and both the treasure box icon I1 and the navigation character YM are displayed. Disappears. Thus, although the navigation character YM has appeared, nothing happens and both icons may disappear. In this case, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is a false notice. Of the treasure chest icon I1 and the navigation character YM icon, only the treasure chest icon I1 may disappear, or only the navigation character YM may disappear. When both icons disappear, both may disappear at the same time, the treasure box icon I1 may disappear first, or the navigation character YM may disappear first.

  FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating an effect example using a hold frame different from the hold frame described so far.

  The holding frame UI shown in FIG. 99 (shi 1) is a closed type that extends over the entire effect display area 208d. That is, the hold frame UI and the components (the pedestal hs0 and the like) described so far are the same, but in the state of FIG. 99 (1), the area of the hold frame UI in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 The other areas are firmly distinguished by the left frame UIIf1, the upper frame UIIf2, and the right frame UIIf3, the sea background is displayed in the other areas, and the sea background is displayed in the holding frame UI. Is not displayed. Note that the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 99 (1) is the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIf2, the right frame UIF3, and the left base icon bIl and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in white, and the holding frame UI. Are promoted by changing these colors.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 99 (shi 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Here, the holding frame UI is displayed in front of the first decorative symbol, and the lowermost end portion of the decorative symbol changing at high speed is overlapped from the front side by the upper frame UIf2 of the holding frame UI. However, on the contrary, the decorative design may overlap the holding frame UI from the front side. Furthermore, a first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 99 (2-1), the treasure box icon I 1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I 2, and in FIG. 99 (S 3), only the carpet icon I 2 disappears, and the treasure box icon I 1 is It remains in the production icon display area DIS. In FIG. 99 (4), the treasure box icon I 1 is opened, and an icon with a character display of “frame promotion” appears from among them, and the promotion of the holding frame UI is notified (notice). In FIG. 99 (5), the holding frame UI is promoted, and the left frame UIf1, the upper frame UIIf2, the right frame UIIf3, the left base icon bIl, and the right base icon bIr are all displayed in red. Note that even if the “frame promotion” icon appears, the reservation frame UI may not be promoted. Further, when the “frame promotion” icon appears, the holding frame UI may be promoted without fail.

  Also, instead of FIG. 99 (Sh 2-1), in FIG. 99 (2-2-1), the lower half of the giant panda is displayed in the area where the sea background is displayed. Due to the lower body of this huge panda, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side. However, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are displayed in front of the lower half of the panda. This huge panda is passing from the top to the bottom and eventually enters the area of the reservation frame UI, and part or all of the reservation frame UI is overlapped from the front side by the huge panda, FIG. In the state shown in (Sh-2-2), only a part of each of the upper left and upper right of the holding frame UI is not yet overlapped with the panda image, but the state shown in FIG. Then, the entire holding frame UI is overlapped with the panda image. The appearance of a giant panda that covers almost the entire screen is a kind of change notice. Note that the entire holding frame UI is overlapped by a huge panda, but the huge panda may be displayed in a size that does not overlap the entire holding frame UI.

  FIG. 99 (Sh 2-2-4) shows one mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed, and the first hold icon h11 changes to a blue display mode ( The navigation character YM has also changed (promoted) to a display mode with a red kimono, and the hold frame UI has also been promoted to red display. Note that the display mode of the change icon may also be changed (promoted). Further, among the left frame UIf1, etc., all of the hold icon, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM may be changed, or only a part thereof may be changed. For example, only the left frame UIf1 or the like may change to red and the holding frame UI may only be promoted. Alternatively, as will be described later, a change may occur outside the holding frame UI.

  FIG. 99 (and 2-2-4 ′) shows another aspect of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the huge panda has passed. In addition to the change in the holding frame UI, There is also a change outside the holding frame UI. That is, the level of the level display Lv attached to each of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the first decorative symbol is increased. When this level rises, the reach production is easily started, the pseudo-continuous production is easily started, or the design is switched to a design that appears when the design is a big hit with certainty. Moreover, if the reach production is started in a state where this level is high, the degree of expectation of the big hit becomes high. Note that the background may change.

  If the appearance of a giant panda is a big hit announcement, the first decorative pattern may overlap the passing panda image from the front side so that it is displayed in front of the panda image. Even if it is a notice, the 1st decoration design may be overlapped with the picture of the panda which passes.

  Further, instead of FIG. 99 (Sh 2-1), in FIG. 99 (Sh 2-3-1), a wrinkle image for wiping effect is added to the holding frame UI. The state shown in 1) is a state where the haze image is fully closed (wipe-in state). On the other hand, the state shown in FIG. 2 (2-3-2) is a state where the haze image is fully opened (wipeout state).

  FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a treasure box icon I1 that has been used as a change notice notification icon appears as a hold icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (su1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, a treasure box icon is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 100 (su 2-1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of lost decorative symbols. In FIG. 100 (su 3), the treasure box icon The hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. The first hold icon h11 of the treasure box icon is displayed on the pedestal hs0 as the fluctuation icon h0, but the treasure box icon is also displayed as the fluctuation icon h0 here.

  In FIG. 100 (4), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the change icon h0 is opened, and a smoke image appears from the inside, and the smoke image is displayed on the navigation character YM displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the front side. Covering and changing animations are being executed. In FIG. 100 (su5), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has been changed to a display mode with a red kimono. In this example, the navigation character YM is changed by the change icon h0. Although the smoke image corresponds to a change notice, the smoke image may not overlap the change icon h0 that is a change candidate, or the smoke image may not appear.

  In addition, in FIG. 100 (su-1-2-1) instead of FIG. 100 (su1-1), the second hold icon h12 of the default display mode is also displayed. The second hold icon h12 is overlapped by the first hold icon h11 of the treasure box icon. That is, at least a part of the hold icon with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot overlaps at least a part of the relatively low hold icon from the front side. Note that at least a part of the hold icon in the prefetch notice mode may overlap at least a part of the hold icon in the default display mode from the front side. Alternatively, regardless of the degree of expectation of the jackpot, at least a part of the hold icon that is digested first may overlap at least a part of the hold icon that is digested later from the front side. In FIG. 100 (S1-2-2), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is executed. That is, a smoke image appears and the smoke image overlaps the second hold icon h12. In FIG. 100 (S1-2-3), the smoke image has disappeared, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 in which the smoke images overlap has changed.

  In addition, in FIG. 100 (Su2-1) instead of FIG. 100 (Su2-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and a change animation is executed. In the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and in FIG. (2-2-2), the smoke image disappears, and the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM are displayed. The aspect has changed. Here, both are changed to the same red color, but may be changed to different colors. For example, one may be red and the other may be gold. Alternatively, although both of them are wrapped in a smoke image, only one may change and the other may remain the default.

  In addition, in FIG. 100 (Su-2-3-1) instead of FIG. 100 (Su2-1), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon which is the first hold icon h11 is opened, and the change animation is also executed here. However, in the change animation here, the smoke image overlaps only the change icon h0 of the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM. In FIG. 100 (Su 2-3-2), only the display mode of the change icon h0 in which the smoke image disappears and the smoke images overlap is changed.

  Note that icons that are not overlapped by the smoke image (holding icon, fluctuation icon) and / or navigation character are also icons (holding icon, fluctuation icon) and / or navigation that are overlapped by the smoke image after the smoke image disappears. The display mode may change with the change of the display mode of the character (may be simultaneous with the change of the display mode or after the change of the display mode).

  FIG. 101 shows an effect example in which a meter effect is entangled with the navigation character YM.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (Set 1-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and a white meter display MW whose meter frame mf is white is displayed beside it. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 101 (set 1-1) is empty. When this meter display becomes full, the navigation character YM is promoted. It should be noted that by changing the display mode of the meter frame mf (for example, the color, the shape of the frame, etc.), the ease of storing the meter may be notified, or a pre-reading notification and / or a notification of the change may be performed.

  In FIG. 101 (set 2), a temporary stop (first stop) of the left symbol in the first decorative symbol is performed, and “decoration 4” is displayed in a shaking manner. A white meter rising item UpI is added to the symbol of “decoration 4”. In FIG. 101 (set 3), the meter rising item UpI moves to the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is displayed. It is displayed overlapping. As shown in FIG. 101 (set 4), the meter rising item UpI moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is increased by one level. In addition, the degree of meter rise varies depending on the color of the meter rise item. The white meter rising item UpI is raised by one level with respect to the white meter display MW.

  In FIG. 101 (set 4), the symbol variation display is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In FIG. 101 (set 5-1), the first hold icon h11 is displayed. Is suspended and symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 101 (set 7-1), the roulette display icon RI appears on the white meter display MW, and the roulette effect is started. In this roulette production, there is a case where something happens (when there is no loss) and a case where something does not occur (when there is a loss). As an example of something, there is a change of a hold icon, a normal notice (a notice of the change), and the like. In addition, for example, when there is a character-type super reach including Tono Super Reach, Hime Super Reach, and Samurai Super Reach as one kind of super reach, as an example of the above, the type of super reach to be developed (for example, Character-type super reach), specific super reach (for example, Tono Super Reach), and the like.

  In FIG. 101 (Set 8), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. In FIG. 101 (Set 9), the blue meter rising item UpIb is moved to the white meter display MW, and white It is displayed overlapping the meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 101 (set 10), the blue meter rising item UpIb moved to the white meter display MW is taken in (stocked) into the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is increased by two levels. The blue meter rising item UpIb is raised by two levels with respect to the white meter display MW. As a result, the white meter display MW shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 101 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In FIG. 101 (set 12), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 101 (set 11), the symbol variation display is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. In FIG. 101 (set 12), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is held. Has been digested and the symbol variation display has started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  A button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM shown in FIG. The button display icon 136D is a balloon display mode and corresponds to a notice by the navigation character YM itself. In the button display icon 136D, a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is also displayed. A part of the button display icon 136D overlaps a part of the white meter display MW (a part of the meter frame mf). The button display icon 136D may overlap the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

  In FIG. 101 (set 14), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 101 (set 15), the remaining period meter is decreased. In FIG. 101 (Set 16), the chance button 136 is operated. In FIG. 101 (Set 17), in response to the operation of the chance button 136, a meter rising icon MUI as a response display is added to the navigation character YM. The meter rise icon MUI is a balloon display mode, and a green meter rise item UpIm is displayed on the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. This meter up icon MUI also overlaps with a part of white meter display MW (a part of meter frame mf), like button display icon 136D. The meter up icon MUI may overlap the entire meter display or may be displayed at a position that does not overlap the meter display.

  Even when the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the response display may or may not be displayed. In addition, the response display includes displays other than the meter up icon MUI. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation valid period, the response display is not displayed, but a specific effect (for example, display of the meter up icon MUI) is displayed. ) May be displayed as a response display only. Moreover, even if the response display is not displayed, the meter may be configured to increase, or the meter is increased only when the response display is displayed, and the meter does not increase when the response display is not displayed. It may be configured like this.

  In FIG. 101 (set 18), the green meter rising item UpIm in the meter rising icon MUI moves to the white meter display MW and is displayed overlapping the white meter display MW. As shown in FIG. 101 (set 19), the green meter rising item UpIm moved to the white meter display MW is captured (stocked) in the white meter display MW, and the white meter display MW is increased by three levels. The white meter display MW shown in (Set 19) is full. In FIG. 101 (Set 20-1), the white meter display MW changes to the character display “promotion”, and a change animation (not shown) is started. In FIG. (Set 21), the display mode of the navigation character YM is red. The display mode is changed (promoted). The kimono color of the navigation character YM that has changed here matches the background color of the character display “promotion” shown in FIG. 101 (set 20-1), and at the stage of FIG. 101 (set 20-1). A display mode in which the navigation character YM changes is announced. Note that the change animation may be omitted. In addition, the white meter display shown in FIG. 21 (set 21) returns to the empty state, but may remain full. Further, when the meter display becomes full, the display mode of the navigation character YM may always change (promotion) or may not change (promotion) (in the case of failure).

  As shown in (1-2-1) instead of FIG. 101 (C1-1), the meter display may not always be displayed. As shown in FIG. 101 (C1-2-2), the meter rising item UpI may appear even when the meter display is not displayed. Also in this case, the meter rising item UpI moves to a predetermined position in the effect icon display area DIS as shown in FIG. 101 (C1-2-3). Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (Set 1-2-4), the meter display (here, the white meter display MW) appears after the movement of the meter rising item UpI is completed. In this case, the appearance of the meter rising item UpI is a notice that the meter display is displayed. Moreover, a meter display may be displayed according to the appearance of the meter rising item UpI. For example, it may be simultaneously with the appearance of the meter rising item UpI, or may be displayed at a timing between FIG. 101 (Set 1-2-2) and the same drawing (Set 1-2-3).

  In FIG. 101 (Set 1-2-5), the white meter display MW is raised by one level due to the meter rising item UpI. In the example shown in FIG. 101, when the meter display is displayed, the meter always rises thereafter. However, even if the meter display is displayed, the meter may not rise (equivalent to false). Alternatively, there may be a case where the meter rising item does not appear. Furthermore, the meter may not rise even if a meter rising item appears.

  In addition, the meter display may be displayed from the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears. In this case, the meter display is a pre-reading notice that the meter may accumulate. become. Alternatively, the meter display may be displayed simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display in which the meter rising item appears or during the symbol variation, and in this case, the meter display may cause the meter to accumulate within the variation. It will be a notice that there is.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the example described with reference to FIG.

  In place of FIG. 101 (Set 1-1), in FIG. 102 (Set 1-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed with no hold, and the white meter display MW in an empty state is displayed. It is displayed. The white meter display MW displayed in FIG. 101 (Set 1-1) was full at 6 levels, whereas the white meter display displayed in FIG. 102 (Set 1-3-1). MW is full at 5th level.

  In FIG. 102 (se-1-3-3a), a meter rising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM. In the meter rise icon MUI shown in FIG. 102 (C1-3-3a), a golden meter rise item UpIg is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 102 (Se 1-3-4a) is filled at a stroke by the golden meter rising item UpIg. Thereafter, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge mg) that increases in the meter frame mf is blue. However, if the meter is still stored, the blue gauge may be full. Alternatively, it may be filled with a golden gauge by being filled at a stretch by the golden meter rising item UpIg.

  On the other hand, also in FIG. 102 (set 1-3-b), a meter rising icon MUI is added to the navigation character YM, and here, a rainbow colored meter rising item UpIn is displayed. The white meter display MW shown in FIG. 102 (Se 1-3-4b) is also filled at a stretch by the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn. Thereafter, an animation in which the navigation character YM changes is started. At that time, the meter may be empty or may remain stored. When the battery is in the accumulated state, it may be full with the blue gauge, or it may be filled with the rainbow gauge when the rainbow colored meter up item UpIn is filled at once. It may be in a tan state.

  White, blue, green, red, gold and iridescent items are prepared as meter rising items. Among these items, only the rainbow-colored meter rising item UpIn and the golden meter-rising item UpIg are items that raise the meter by 5 levels at once. The white meter rising item UpI is increased by one level, the blue meter rising item UpIb is increased by two levels, the green meter rising item UpIm is increased by three levels, and the red meter rising item UpIr is increased by four levels.

  In addition, the rainbow meter rising item UpIn also functions as a jackpot confirmation notice. On the other hand, the golden meter rising item UpIg does not have such a function. Therefore, when the meter is full with one rainbow meter up item UpIn, when the meter is full with one gold meter up item UpIn, or other colors (white, blue, green, red) The meaning differs when the meter is full with a combination of meter-up items.

  In the meter display, the color of the meter itself (gauge) that increases in the meter frame mf is a white, blue, green, red meter rising item, and when the meter rises or becomes full, It may be a blue gauge.

  Note that the color of the meter rising item may have a function as a normal notice or a prefetch notice. Moreover, the expectation degree of jackpot may be represented by the color.

  Moreover, the color of the meter rising item and the color of the display mode of the navigation character YM may be linked, or may be linked. For example, when a golden meter rising item UpIg appears, the navigation character YM is easily changed to a display mode wearing a golden kimono, or always changes, and conversely, the navigation character YM displays a golden kimono. If it is an aspect, the golden meter rising item UpIg may easily appear or may necessarily appear.

  Further, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may function as a pre-reading notice or may function as a normal notice. Further, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may represent the degree of expectation of jackpot. Or, conversely, the order of appearance of the meter rising items and the combination of colors may be completely unrelated to the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  In this example, the meter is stored until the meter reaches 15 (the meter is full three times). In addition, in the meter display that is full at 6 levels in FIG. 101, the meter is accumulated until the meter becomes 18 (also the meter is full three times). Here, when the meter overflows due to the display of the meter rising item (for example, when the red Up icon is displayed when three meters are stored), the meter is set to 0 while the navigation character is promoted. You may make it save the part which is not saved. For example, when a red meter rising item UpIt is displayed when three meters are stored, the meter is full once, and the meter is further stored at two levels.

  If the meter overflows in the state where the meter is full twice, the meter may be filled up and the amount that cannot be stored may be displayed on the meter. For example, the meter may be returned to 0 when the prefetch target variation or the variation ends, or may be displayed regardless of the prefetch target variation or the variation. Also, it may be rounded down as much as it could not be stored. For example, the meter is stored, and the meter at that time may be zero, may be full, may be specially displayed, or may not be displayed. Good. Furthermore, it may be configured not to overflow. For example, when three are already stored, only two white meter rising items UpI or only one blue meter rising item UpIb are displayed.

  In the example starting with FIG. 102 (Set 1-4-1) instead of FIG. 101 (Set 1-1), in FIG. 101 (Set 1-4-2), a red beam is emitted from the flying UFO icon UFI. Irradiated toward the navigation character YM in the default display mode, the navigation character YM changes to a display mode with a red kimono as shown in FIG. "Is attached. By this “Up high probability”, it is informed that the meter rising item is in a state of being easily stored.

  Depending on the display mode of the notice that changes the navigation character YM, an “Up high probability” notification may occur or may occur. In addition, when the navigation character YM changes, the notification of “Up high probability” may be performed without fail, or a plurality of types of effect display (notice display) including the notification of “Up high probability” may be performed. The effect display including the notification of “Up high probability” may not be performed.

  Further, depending on the display mode (color) of the navigation character YM, the effect performed by the navigation character YM may be different. For example, the red navigation character YM is notified of “Up high probability”, the gold navigation character YM is displayed with intense heat, and the rainbow colored navigation character YM is displayed with an iron plate display. May be. Note that the navigation character YM having a different display mode may give the same notice (the same kind of notice).

  Instead of FIG. 101 (Set 5-1), in FIG. 102 (Set 5-2-1), the gauge of the white meter display MW is blinking white and is one level, and the kimono of the navigation character YM is also blinking white. Yes. Thereafter, after the meter is full and returns to an empty state, the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to a display mode with a green kimono in FIG. The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to green and rises to 3 levels. Thereafter, after the meter is full again and returned to an empty state, the display mode of the navigation character YM changes to a display mode with a rainbow-colored kimono in FIG. The gauge of the white meter display MW also changes to a rainbow color and is full. In this way, the meter storage state and the display mode of the navigation character YM may be configured to match. The color of the gauge and the color of the navigation character YM may also correspond.

  In addition, when all the meters are stored, a pattern in which the big hit is confirmed or the expectation degree of the big hit is high, and a pattern in which the meters are stored and released to produce an effect may be separately prepared. As an example of the latter, for example, when the meter is released when it is stored up to 2 levels, an effect equivalent to blue is performed, and when it is released when the meter is stored up to 4 levels, an effect equivalent to red is produced. Is done.

  103 is a diagram showing still another modification of the example described with reference to FIG.

  Instead of FIG. 101 (Set 6-1), in FIG. 103 (Set 6-2), a roulette display icon RI and a meter up icon MUI are displayed on the white flashing meter display MW ′ in which the meter frame mf flashes white. Is displayed, but a part of the meter rising icon MUI overlaps a part of the roulette display icon RI from the front side, and the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. It is difficult to see compared to the roulette display icon RI shown in FIG. On the other hand, a green meter rising item UpIm is displayed on the meter rising icon MUI shown in FIG. In addition, the meter rising icon MUI may overlap the entire roulette display icon RI from the front side, and conversely, at least a part of the roulette display icon RI may overlap from the front side to at least a part of the meter rising icon MUI. You may wrap. In addition, as a priority displayed on the front side, the icon added to the navigation character YM may be higher than the other icons. In this example, if there is a warning that the meter rising icon may be displayed, such as when the roulette display icon is displayed, the meter rising icon is displayed by displaying a white flashing meter that blinks the meter frame in white. Although there is a notification that there is a possibility of being displayed, even if there is a notice that the meter rising icon may be displayed, the meter frame may not be notified. You may be comprised so that it may not alert | report that a meter raise icon may be displayed. Further, the advance notice for notifying that the meter rising icon may be displayed is not limited to the meter frame, and may be performed by other display or production means.

  Instead of FIG. 101 (Set 7-1), in FIG. 103 (Set 7-2), the blue meter rising item UpIb is stopped and displayed on the roulette display icon RI. However, since the meter rising icon MUI still overlaps, it is difficult to view. In this way, the meter rising icons may overlap. In addition, when meter rise icons overlap, the priority displayed on the front side may be the display order of the meter rise icons, or the higher meter rise degree may be given priority, or the meter rise degree A lower value may be prioritized. Further, the meter rising icon does not overlap the navigation character YM from the front side, but may overlap.

  In addition, in FIG. 103 (Set 7-3-1) instead of FIG. 101 (Set 7-1), an image up for notifying (notifying) that a meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. 'Is displayed. However, at this stage, it is unclear which color meter rise icon is displayed, and thereafter, several color meter rise icons are displayed in the roulette display icon RI. In this way, when it is informed that the meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette effect, although the color is unknown, the roulette display icon RI is displayed as shown in FIG. 103 (set 7-3-2). The effect display Ed1 to which the aura is given is displayed so as to overlap from the front side. In the following FIG. 103 (Set 7-3-3), the effect display Ed1 is changed, and the blue meter rising icon is enlarged. At this stage, it is not known how many meters the meter rising icon is displayed in the roulette display icon RI. At this stage, a blue meter rising icon may also be displayed in the roulette display icon RI.

  In FIG. 103 (set 7-3-4), a display that is an enlargement of the blue meter rising icon that overlapped the roulette display icon RI becomes a blue meter rising icon UpIb, and the white blinking meter display MW It moves to 'and is displayed overlapping with white blinking meter display MW'. Further, the roulette display icon RI fades out and the display becomes light and gradually disappears. It should be noted that the meter rising item displayed in the roulette display icon RI may remain unknown. Thereafter, the blue meter rising item UpIb is captured (stocked) in the white blinking meter display MW ', and the white blinking meter display MW' is leveled up.

  Note that a blue meter rising item UpIb may appear in the roulette display icon RI and may be captured in the white blinking meter display MW ′. In this case, the blue meter rising item UpIb may be displayed in the roulette display icon RI before the effect display Ed1 is displayed, or may be displayed simultaneously with the display, May have been displayed. Alternatively, in the roulette display icon RI, a display in which the blue meter rising item UpIb is enlarged from the blue meter rising icon may be displayed before being displayed or simultaneously with the display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed after being displayed.

  In place of FIG. 101 (Set 20-1), in FIG. 103 (Set-20-2-1), the full white meter display MW temporarily changes to the character display of “Stock”, and the empty state is displayed. When returning to the white meter display MW, the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2. In this example, although the meter is full, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change until the treasure box is opened, and the change of the display mode of the navigation character YM is delayed. It should be noted that icons other than the navigation character (holding icon, variation icon) and other effects display that change only the display mode of the navigation character YM by opening the treasure chest icon I1 may be changed.

  As described above, the description related to the meter display described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 39 can be applied to the description with reference to FIGS. That is, all descriptions including the description that the rate of increase of the meter is different when the color of the meter frame is different can be applied. Alternatively, the matters described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103 can be applied to the description with reference to FIGS. 14 to 39.

  FIG. 104 shows an effect example in which the navigation character YM has a telop effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 (Part 1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed. The two hold icons h11 and h12 are in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 104 (Part 2-1), a telop display trp is displayed above the first decorative symbol. In this telop display trp, it is displayed that there is a possibility that the navigation character YM may change, and corresponds to an example of a change notice display. For example, a display such as “Navi-Character Change Highly Probable” and a character display such as “Navi-Character Change Highly Predictive” are flowed from the right to the left of the screen. In addition to this, no text is displayed on the telop display trp, and no text is displayed on the telop display. The telop display displays “XX high accuracy”, “XX & XX high accuracy”, “XX high accuracy”. It may be notified in advance that there is a possibility that “preparing”, “XX or XX high-definition preparing”, “high-definition preparing”, etc. may be displayed. Even if the plain telop display trp is displayed here, “XX high accuracy”, “XX & ○○ high accuracy”, “XX high accuracy preparation”, “XX or ○○ high accuracy preparation in progress” "," Preparing with high accuracy "or the like may not be displayed. In addition, “XX high preparation in preparation”, “XX or ○○ high preparation in preparation”, “high preparation in preparation”, etc. are displayed, and there is a possibility that a high probability state will occur for the effect displayed in the telop. You may alert | report this beforehand. “XX” and “XX” described here have various effects (for example, changes in hold (holding icon and / or variable icon), pseudo-ream, advance notice in a highly anticipated color, high expectation for jackpot This indicates the name of the notice (so-called harsh notice).

  The high-probability state for the effect described here is an effect that is notified in the telop rather than the case where the notice that is notified as the high-probability state by the telop display is not notified as the high-probability state by the telop display. This shows a state where the frequency of being performed becomes high. In other words, “Navi-Character Change Highly Probable” in FIGS. 104 (1) to (14), (2-2), (2-3), (8-2). "" Indicates a state in which the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to change than in the case where “Navi character change is highly likely” is not notified in the telop display. In addition, the “high accuracy preparation” included in “XX high accuracy preparation”, “XX or ○○ high accuracy preparation”, “high accuracy preparation”, etc. described above is displayed in a telop display. The staged display is now in a high probability state (changes after the next change that started displaying the telop that includes “Predicting high accuracy” or changes that started displaying the telop that includes “Preparing highly accurate”. )) (Or the possibility of a high probability state).

  In FIG. 104 (Part 3), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols. The telop display trp is displayed in front of the second decorative symbol, and the lower end portion of the second decorative symbol is overlapped from the front side by the telop display trp. However, conversely, the second decorative design may overlap the telop display trp from the front side.

  In FIG. 104 (part 4), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol variation display is started in FIG. 104 (Part 6). The telop display trp is continuing.

  In FIG. 104 (Part 7), a change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 104 (No. 8-1), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has changed to a display mode with a red kimono. Even if the change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing. After that, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol variation display is started also in FIG. 104 (No. 10), and the telop display trp is still continuing in FIG. 104 (No. 11).

  Note that the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display appears, the change animation is started, the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened, and the navigation character YM may be changed. In this case, it can be said that the display such as “Navi-Character Change Highly Probable” in the telop display trp notifies the appearance of the treasure chest icon I1 or the start of the change animation.

  In FIG. 104 (part 12), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started again, and the navigation character YM is wrapped in a smoke image. In FIG. 104 (Part 13), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has been changed to a display mode with a golden kimono. Even if the second change effect of the navigation character YM is successful, the telop display trp is continuing.

  While the telop display trp is being displayed, the change effect of the navigation character YM may be performed any number of times. However, if the navigation character YM changes once during the display of the telop display trp, then the navigation character YM is changed. It may be configured not to.

  In FIG. 104 (part 14), a reach state has been entered, but the telop display trp is still ongoing. As the timing at which the display of the telop display trp disappears, at the time of super reach start (for example, FIG. 88 (24)), at the temporary stop of the decorative symbols (for example, at the time of the first stop, at the second stop, at the third stop) , Symbol stop characters, start of next change, etc.

  In this example, the change effect is performed by the navigation character itself, but the navigation character may be changed by the change notice display, and the navigation character is changed only by the change notice display. It may be configured such that only a change effect by the navigation character itself is performed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 104 (part 2-1), as shown in FIG. 104 (part 2-2), the telop display trp may be performed in two upper and lower stages. Different contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp.

  In the telop display, a high-probability display may be displayed for other notices. For the same prefetch target hold, the displayed timing may be the same, and one may be later than the other. In addition, when one “XX high probability” telop display appears, the telop display may not be displayed or may be displayed for another prefetch target hold. In that case, a telop display (for example, “Navi-Character High Accuracy”) regarding the same notice may be displayed separately, and the display period of the same telop display may be extended. Further, the display position of the telop display may be determined in the display start order, or the display position for each telop may be fixed.

  Instead of FIG. 104 (part 2-1), the same contents may be displayed in the upper telop display trp and the lower telop display trp as shown in FIG. 104 (part 2-3). That is, a plurality of the same telop display may be displayed. In some cases, it is possible to appeal that the expectation of jackpot is higher when a plurality of displays are displayed than when only one is displayed. However, even if a plurality of items are displayed, the expectation degree of jackpot may actually be the same as when only one item is displayed. Moreover, you may repeat displaying a plurality of the same telop displays. That is, each time display of a telop display is started, a plurality of telop displays having the same contents may be displayed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 104 (No. 8-1), when the navigation character YM is changed (one or more times), as shown in FIG. May be notified by the telop display trp. In this example, a character display of “complete” is displayed. However, even if this notification is performed, the navigation character YM may further change.

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b).

  105 (1a-1) shows a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side.

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (only 1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four suspensions in FIG. 1 are stored, and four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In Fig. 105 (T2a-1), the first decorative symbol is in the reach state, and "Decoration 7" is displayed in a swinging manner (temporarily stopped) in both the left symbol and the right symbol. The display shifts to reach production, and all the displays disappear from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the first decorative symbol, the hold frame UI, the hold icons h11 to h14, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are disappeared.

  In FIG. 105 (a 4a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the symbol of the enemy swordsman on the entire screen. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays a reduced first decorative symbol, a change icon h0, and a navigation character YM. Note that the change icon h0 and the navigation character YM may be displayed on different decorative symbol display devices.

  In FIG. 105 (5a), the wilderness background that is the background display of the super reach effect is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. The first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a duel scene in which the main character and the enemy swordsman face each other.

  Here, in place of FIG. 105 (1a-1), in FIG. 105 (1a-2), a part of the holding frame UI is enlarged and displayed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display are displayed. It is displayed across the device 208L. That is, the hold icon display area HIS is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the variable icon display region CIS is displayed at the right end of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. ing. Further, the first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 are enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the fourth hold icon h14 is enlarged and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h13 is enlarged and displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Further, the navigation character YM is enlarged and displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Since the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a frame surrounding the display screen, this frame interferes with the image displayed across the frame.

  In addition, the right base icon bIr is not displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N in which the navigation character YM is enlarged, but the right base icon bIr may also be enlarged and displayed together with the navigation character YM.

  In addition, even if it is not enlarged and displayed as shown to FIG. 105 (only 1a-2), it may straddle a some display apparatus. For example, a pattern straddling from the beginning of the display, a pattern displayed straddling by moving from the original position, a pattern displaying straddling with an image change, or an image enlarged and displayed straddling Or a pattern in which the image is reduced and displayed across the screen. Further, when the enlarged display is performed as shown in FIG. 105 (1a-2), the expectation of the big hit is increased, the hold icon is easily changed, the change icon is easily changed, or the navigation character YM is displayed. May be easy to change. The navigation character YM may be displayed across a plurality of display devices. Here, in the case where the effect display is displayed across a plurality of display devices, and the display device A in the foreground partially overlaps the display area of the display device B, the display device B A part of the image displayed in the display area of the display apparatus B may be displayed in the display area overlapped by the display apparatus A in FIG.

  As described above, the items described with reference to FIG. 105 (1a-2) can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

  Further, instead of FIG. 105 (only 1a-1), in FIG. 105 (only 1a-3), a part of the holding frame UI is moved and displayed. That is, the effect icon display area DIS is moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the right base icon bIr is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A navigation character YM is also displayed on the right base icon bIr.

  As described above, when the navigation character YM moves to another display device, the navigation character YM may be easily changed, the expectation level of the big hit may be high, or a change in other effects (for example, holding) The change of the icon or the change icon) may be easily performed. Further, depending on the destination of the navigation character YM, the ease of change of the navigation character YM, the level of expectation of the big hit, and the ease of change of other effects (for example, change of the hold icon and the change icon, etc.) They may be different or may be the same without any influence. For example, the probability that the navigation character YM will change may be higher when moving to the third decorative symbol display device 208N than when moving to the second decorative symbol display device 208L. The above has described the movement of the navigation character YM, but the same applies to the case where the hold icon moves to another display device or the variation icon moves to another display device.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 105 (only 1a-3), it can be seen that the holding frame Ui is divided (broken). That is, the effect icon display area DIS is broken and moved to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, but may be moved to another location on the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  As described above, the matters described with reference to FIG. 105 (1a-3) can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

  Also, instead of FIG. 105 (only 1a-1), in FIG. 105 (only 1a-4), the navigation character YM is split when it moves. That is, when moving from the first decorative symbol display device 208L to another display device, it is divided into two and displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This can be regarded as an increase in the navigation character YM.

  In this way, when the navigation character YM is divided (increased), the navigation character YM may be easily changed, the expectation level of the big hit may be high, or a change in other effects (for example, a hold icon, It may be easy to change the variation icon).

  Further, since the right base icon bIr is also displayed at the location where the navigation character YM is displayed, it can be said that the effect icon display area DIS is also divided (increased).

  As described above, the items described with reference to FIG. 105 (1a-4) can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later. That is, in other production examples, the navigation character YM may be divided (increased) or may be necessarily divided (increased).

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b).

  In FIG. 106 (only 1b), the background of the sea is displayed over the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. Further, in the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 105 (only 1a-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four suspensions in FIG. 1 are stored, and four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 106 (T2b), the change animation of the navigation character YM is started, and the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image. Further, in the left and right second decorative symbol display devices 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 106 (only 3b), the smoke image disappears, the navigation character YM disappears from the effect icon display area DIS, and a signboard icon “searching” is displayed instead. The third decorative symbol display device 208N on the right side where the background display of the sea has disappeared displays the same character (Mr.) YM 'as the navigation character YM and is running. On top of that, a character display indicating that a search is in progress is displayed. Similarly, a silhouette display slt is displayed together with an image of the question mark on the second decorative symbol display device 208M on the left side where the background display of the sea has disappeared.

  The signboard icon “searching” may be a notification indicating that the navigation character YM is likely to succeed in the change effect (promotion effect). In addition, the success probability is higher when the signboard color is blue than white, and the success probability is higher when red than blue. If it is red, promotion may be confirmed. Moreover, although this color may change a color, a display character, etc., it may not change. Moreover, the display mode in which the navigation character YM may change may be suggested depending on the display mode of the signboard. For example, if the signboard is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode wearing a blue kimono.

  In FIG. 106 (only 4b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which have been in the fully open state (initial state) so far, are in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to approach each other. Come on. Note that this period corresponds to the period of the production effect.

  In FIG. 106 (only 5b-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position and stop. Here, the robot moves to a fully closed position (maximum movement position) in contact with each other and stops, but may be a position before contact.

  FIG. 106 (6b-1) is a diagram showing an example of the promotion success pattern. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the character (Mr.) YM 'who was running took a pose with his thumb up, A character display indicating level up is displayed on the screen. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to a real display, and a thousand carton box is displayed. The display mode in which the navigation character YM may change may be suggested depending on the display mode of the thousand-thousand box. For example, if the carton box is blue, the navigation character YM may change to a display mode with a blue kimono. In addition, the color box, the open / close state, and the like of this thousand box box may change, but may not change. In FIG. 106 (only 7b), the character (Mr.) YM 'displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N has been changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono.

  In FIG. 106 (8b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move in front of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so as to be separated from each other, and return to the initial state. . When each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial state, a wipe effect is performed in each of the decorative symbol display devices 208M and N. Both the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 106 (9b) are in the middle of wipe-in. In FIG. 106 (10b), the wipe-in is completed, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In addition, a wipe display in which only the model title is displayed is also displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 106 (T10b), a smoke image is displayed at the position where the signboard icon has been displayed.

  In the effect icon display area DIS of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 106 (only 11b), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM changed to a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed. Further, the wipe-out is started in each of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this example, the wipe-in animation (animation closing from the left and right) and the wipe-out animation (animation opening from the inside to the outside) are different, but the same animation may be used. In FIG. 106 (12b), the wipeout is completed, and the sea background is displayed across the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N. In one decorative symbol display device, the effect display displayed on the three decorative symbol display devices of this example may be performed. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and / or the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be replaced with one or more effect movable bodies that do not include a liquid crystal display device (for example, the effect movable body performs the effect operation). And the navigation character is promoted.)

  The change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 106 is applicable to the effect examples described so far, and is also applicable to the effect example described later.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of still another effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 67 (b).

  In the central first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 107 (only 1a-3-1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. Further, four suspensions in FIG. 1 are stored, and four suspension icons h11 to h14 are displayed. These four hold icons h11 to h14 are all in the default display mode. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 107 (only 1a-3-2), a moving animation is displayed in which the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In FIG. 107 (1a-3-2), the navigation character YM is exactly located between the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this case as well, since there is a frame surrounding the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, this frame obstructs the navigation character YM displayed across the frame. A navigation character YM having the same display size as that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (only 1a-3-3).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 107 (1a-3-2 ′), the navigation character YM displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the third decorative symbol display device. 208N shows an example of enlarged display. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (only 1a-3-2 ′), only the right hand and the right foot toe of the navigation character YM are displayed, but the right hand and the right foot toe are enlarged and displayed. Thus, the navigation character YM is immediately enlarged and displayed from the part that enters the third decorative symbol display device 208N. A navigation character YM having a display size larger than that displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (only 1a-3-3 ′). . In this way, when the navigation character YM is displayed in an enlarged manner, the navigation character YM may be more easily changed than the case where the navigation character YM is not displayed in an enlarged manner. The change of the production (for example, the change of the hold icon or the change icon) may be easily performed, or may be the same without any influence. When the navigation character YM is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be displayed in an enlarged manner or may not be displayed in an enlarged manner.

  The movement animation of the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. 107 can be applied to the effect examples described so far, and can also be applied to the effect example described later.

  Moreover, instead of FIG. 106 (it 8b), the pattern which failed in the change effect (promotion effect) of the navigation character YM is shown by FIG. 107 (it 5b-2). In FIG. 106 (4b), when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start to move closer to each other, and both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position. It is a failure. The second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N stopped in the middle also return to the initial state, but the notification of the change effect (promotion effect) failure is performed after returning to the initial state. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (only 5b-2), the character (Mr.) YM 'takes a pose in which he or she is looking backward. The failure notification may be started in the middle of returning to the initial state. Alternatively, failure notification may be started when the vehicle stops before reaching a certain position.

  Also, if both 208M and 208N stop before reaching a certain position, the failure may be a failure, but the navigation character YM may be promoted. Moreover, even if this change effect (promotion effect) fails, the navigation character YM may be promoted by another effect. This is also true for the productions that have been divided into successes and failures as described above.

  In addition, if the change effect (promotion effect) here fails, the navigation character YM is for the time being (for example, until the background display changes, or until the N times of change from the promotion failure, The change may be regulated until the change in the prefetch target hold related to the promotion failure is completed.

  Further, instead of FIG. 106 (6b-1), FIG. 107 (6b-2) shows the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol up to a certain position (for example, a fully closed position). A pattern in which the change effect (promotion effect) has failed although the display device 208N has moved is shown. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 107 (6b-2), as in the previous case, the character (Mr.) YM 'of the pose that is depressed backward is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the silhouette display slt is changed to a real display, and an orange box is displayed there.

  Thus, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the promotion effect may fail. Or, conversely, if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move to a certain position, the navigation character YM may be promoted. Moreover, even if it will be in the state shown to FIG. 107 (it 6b-2), the navigation character YM may be promoted, and conversely, if it will be in this state, failure confirmation may be sufficient.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect involving the navigation character YM by the effect device 206 provided with the second display device below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device).

  The background of the sea is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. On the other hand, the background of the sea is not displayed on the second display device 208S provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device), and the holding frame UI is displayed on the second display device 208S. ing. That is, a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS are provided, and a base hs0 is arranged in the change icon display area CIS. In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. In the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed. The second display device 208S may be fixed or may be capable of moving up and down.

  Further, in the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (1c), the first decorative design is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed on the second display device 208S. Furthermore, a default first hold icon h11 is also displayed on the second display device 208S.

  The second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (c) displays a wrinkle image for wiping effects. The state shown in FIG. 108 (c) is the state where the wrinkle image is fully closed (wipe-in state). It is. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (4), the wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (5c), the haze image is fully opened (wipeout state). On the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (5c) where the wipe effect is finished, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are not displayed. The mini game animation by is displayed. That is, by the wipe effect, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are not displayed, and the mini (fortune-telling) of betting (fortune-telling) changes (promotions) in the display mode of the navigation character YM. The game has started. Even in the same mini game, there may be a mini game in which a successful super reach production is started. At the stage of FIG. 108 (4c), it can be seen that the mini-game is started on the second display device 208S, but it is not known what the betting (fortune-telling) mini-game is, and FIG. I do not know until the stage. For this reason, there is a case where at least the second display device 208S can be focused until the explanation about the mini game (here, “Promotion of Yoshimune if entering the cup”) is performed.

  In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (only 6c-1), the cup-in is successfully completed. When the cup-in is successful, the wiping effect is started again. In FIG. 108 (7c), the cocoon image starts to close again, and the state shown in FIG. 108 (8c) is a state in which the cocoon image is fully closed (wipe-in state). is there. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (9c), the wipeout starts, and in the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (10c), the haze image is fully opened (wipeout state). In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 108 (or 10c) wiped out again, the hold frame UI, the hold icon h11, the change icon h0, and the navigation character YM are displayed. After the wipeout is completed in this way, the change animation of the navigation character YM is displayed on the second display device 208S (FIG. 108 (11c)). In the change animation here, the navigation character YM is overlapped by the smoke image, and in FIG. 108 (12c), the smoke image disappears and the navigation character YM is changed to the display mode of the red kimono.

  In addition, in FIG. 108 (6c-2) instead of FIG. 108 (6c-1), the cup-in fails. As described above, when the mini game in which the change (promotion) of the display mode of the navigation character YM is bet fails, the navigation character YM may never be promoted, but may be promoted. . If the mini game is successful as shown in FIG. 108 (6c-1), the navigation character YM may be absolutely promoted, but may not be promoted.

  It should be noted that when wiping out from FIG. 108 (8c), it may be a wipe effect that can suggest to the player that the navigation character YM may be promoted, or a display mode in which the navigation character YM changes. It may be a wipe effect that can be suggested.

  Further, the navigation character YM may have already changed (promoted) at the time of wiping out in FIG.

  Further, the second display device 208S may perform an effect operation during the execution of the mini game. Also, when succeeding (in this example, FIG. 108 (6c-1)), when failing (in this example, FIG. 108 (6c-2)), or in a stuttering effect (in this example, FIG. 108 (5c)). Different presentation operations may be performed. An effect operation by an effect movable body may be performed instead of the second display device 208S.

  Note that the mini game described with reference to FIG. 108 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where another effect is executed during the execution of the effect selected by the player.

  In the pachinko machine 100 in this description, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, “COPANDA” of 07 is set in “Character selection” shown in FIG. 73B, “Holding frame B” of 02 is set in “Holding frame selection”, and “Holding display selection” “Icon C” of 03 is set, and “Background E” of 05 is set in the background display selection.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (aa1) displays the holding frame UI of the holding frame B, and the effect icon display area DIS displays a copanda as the navigation character YM. Further, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 that is a default display mode of the icon C is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a a1), the background E (sky background) is displayed.

  In FIG. 109 (a2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is digested, the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 which is the default display mode of the icon C is displayed. A co-panda navigation character YM is also displayed.

  In FIG. 109 (a a3-1), a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 109 (a a4-1), the carpet icon I2 Disappears and the treasure chest icon I1 remains. In FIG. 109 (a a5), the change animation is started, the treasure box is opened, the smoke image of the effect appears from the inside, and the smoke image partially or entirely hides the navigation character YM. Is clearly more difficult to see than before the smoke image appeared. Note that the change animation may be started by operating the chance button 136. In this case, it may be a back button or an operation promotion notification may be performed. In FIG. 109 (a a6), the smoke image has disappeared, and the navigation character YM has changed from the co-panda to the head length. The longest character in the navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected by the player as shown in FIG. 73 (b). Note that the character may be changed to a character that can be selected by the player (for example, samurai or princess), or may be changed to a character that cannot be selected by the player.

  In FIG. 109 (a a7), the treasure box icon I1 disappears, and in FIG. 109 (a 8), a reach state is entered. The next-length navigation character YM shown in FIG. 109 (a a8) is added with a “NEXT” balloon icon that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect.

  In FIG. 109 (a a9), a pseudo-continuous pattern (design of Tono-sama character) is temporarily stopped on the middle design of the first decorative design, and in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped and displayed, thereby notifying that the pseudo-ream is executed. Here, the pseudo-ream is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that the larger the number of times the pseudo-ream is executed, the easier it is to win a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (a a11), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol again. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, “× 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol by the pseudo-ream is started is displayed in a large size so as to overlap the first decorative symbol. Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a12), the display of “× 2” is reduced and moved below the second decorative symbol.

  The next-length navigation character YM shown in FIG. 109 (a a13) is again provided with a “NEXT” balloon icon that suggests a pseudo-continuous effect, and the continuation of the pseudo-continuation is still expected. Then, after the temporary stop display is performed 0 times, or once or a plurality of times, it enters a reach state and further develops into a super reach production (swordsman reach production). The background screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a a15) changes to a wilderness background, which is the background display of the swordsman reach, and the main character and the enemy swordsman are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A duel scene facing each other is displayed. Further, in the hold frame UI, the left base icon bIl and the four stages hs1 to hs4 in the hold icon display area HIS are disappeared. Further, the base hs0 of the fluctuation icon display area CIS is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is also displayed on the base hs0. In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM having the longest length is displayed on the right base icon bIr.

  109 is provided with a “chance” balloon icon that wins a big hit, and the long-length navigation character YM performs a hit effect.

  109 (a a18) shows a scene after the swordsman and the swordsman slashed in the super reach production. Here, the lord has fallen down, A “decoration 6” that is different from the design (“decoration 7”) is displayed large (swaying). Although the height of the pedestal in the variation icon display area CIS is lowered, the lowered pedestal hs0 'is displayed, and the variation icon h0 is also displayed thereon. In addition, the navigator character YM having the longest length is also displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Thereafter, the wipe effect is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (a 19) is in the middle of the wipe-in. In FIG. 109 (a 20), the wipe-in is completed, and then the wipe-out is started. In the figure (a21), the navigation character YM of the co-panda starts to be visible while returning to the background of the background E (sky background). In FIG. 109 (a a22), the wipe effect is finished, and “decoration 7” — “decoration 6” — “decoration 7”, which is a combination of loses, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a shaking manner. The hold frame UI of the hold frame B is also displayed, and the display of the variable icon h0 that is the default display mode of the icon C is also resumed. In addition, a blue hold icon (prefetch hold icon) is displayed as the first hold icon h11.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 89 (E2) to FIG. 89 (E4-1), the navigation character YM itself may change its own display mode. In this example, the change animation using the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display has been lost, but the display mode of the navigation character YM has changed due to the effect using the treasure box icon I1. It may be easier to finally shift to a state advantageous to the player than when changing (for example, changing by himself) without using the treasure chest icon I1. Here, the advantageous state includes a transition to a big hit gaming state, a transition to a big hit gaming state with a large number of balls, and a transition to a probable change state and an electric support state.

  In this example, even if the hold increases while the hold icon is hidden, if the hold icon changes from hidden to displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is hidden There may be a pre-reading notice. If the hold increases while the hold icon is not displayed, the hold may be consumed (until it is displayed in the variable icon display area or until it is deleted from the variable icon display area). It may be configured to regulate the pre-reading notice and / or the notice of the change by the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased while the hold icon is not displayed, or the target with the fluctuation that the hold has increased. It may be configured such that the prefetching notice by the hold icon is restricted, and the prefetching notice and / or the notice of the change may be performed after the next change of the change in which the hold is increased.

  In this example, a prefetch notice with another hold icon may be performed during execution of a prefetch notice with one hold icon. However, a prefetch notice with another hold icon is performed while a prefetch notice with one hold icon is being executed. , Until the hold corresponding to the one hold icon is consumed (may be until it is displayed in the variable icon display area or may be deleted from the variable icon display area) Also good.

  In this example, the navigation character selected by the player may give a notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice, but the navigation character selected by the player will give the notice of the change and / or a look-ahead notice. You may make it not break. Further, the tutorial display may be performed by the navigation character selected by the player (for example, the tutorial display is performed by a balloon icon), but the tutorial display is performed by the navigation character selected by the player. You may make it not break. Further, in this example, there is a case where the change notice and / or the prefetch notice is performed by the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player, but the change notice and / or the prefetch notice may not be performed. In addition, the navigation character that cannot be selected by the player may be more easily promoted with the hold icon and / or the variable icon than the navigation character that can be selected by the player, or the navigation character may change. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation of the jackpot within the symbol variation and / or the hold is high (or the jackpot is confirmed (or the jackpot may be rich)), and / or a notice that the navigation character appears and / or It may be configured such that the occurrence frequency of the super reach effect is high (or always occurs).

  FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  Instead of FIG. 109 (a 3-1), in FIG. 110 (a a 3-2), instead of the treasure box icon I 1, a change notice is displayed by light emission of the light guide plate IL. That is, the change of the navigation character YM may be notified by a production means different from the production means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) on which the navigation character YM is displayed.

  Also, instead of FIG. 109 (a a-1), in FIG. 110 (a a3-3), instead of the treasure box icon I1, a change notice is displayed by the effect operation of the movable means (here, the crest character 224E). It is carried out. In other words, the family crest character 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position, and overlaps the fluctuation icon h0 and the navigation character YM. Although there is no hold icon here, if there is a hold icon, it also overlaps the hold icon. Thereafter, the family crest member 224E rotates clockwise (see the arrow in the figure). The family crest character 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the family crest character 224E may vibrate with rotation or instead of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascent may be performed and the rotation and vibration may not be performed. Further, the navigation character YM may be changed during the overlap, or may be changed after the rendering operation of the family crest actor 224E is completed, that is, after the family crest actor 224E returns to the initial position. Further, the ease of change to the navigation character YM and the color of the display mode after the change may be notified by a light emission effect by the LED provided on the family crest character 224E.

  Also, instead of FIG. 109 (a a3-1), in FIG. 110 (a a3-4), a change notice is displayed by sound output from the speaker 120 instead of the treasure chest icon I1. Note that the change notice display may be performed by the game board lamp 442 or the game frame frame lamp 452.

  Further, instead of FIG. 109 (a a-1), as shown in FIG. 110 (a a4-2), the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display is once displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, There is a case where the icon I1 jumps on the carpet icon I2. In this case, the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change, which corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  In addition, in FIG. 110 (a a6-2) instead of FIG. 109 (a a6-1), the display mode of the navigation character YM does not change even though the treasure box of the treasure box icon I1 is opened. Corresponds to a so-called failure pattern.

  Also, instead of FIG. 109 (a a-1), in FIG. 110 (a a6-3), the co-panda navigation character YM is the same co-panda, but a co-panda having a different clothing color (here, red clothing) The navigation character YM has succeeded in the change effect (promotion effect).

  In addition, in FIG. 110 (Ab1) instead of FIG. 109 (Aa3-1), as in the example shown in FIG. 108, the second display device 208S is provided below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). The hold icon display area HIS, the variable icon display area CIS, and the effect icon display area DIS are provided in the second display device 208S, and the base hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. . In the hold icon display area HIS, four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the base icon bIn. In addition, the navigation icon YM of the co-panda is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (a b1), a conversation notice is given by a notice of the character of the frog and the character display “Navi character changes”. It has been broken. In other words, the change of the navigation character YM is notified in advance by the production means (here, the decorative symbol display device 208) different from the production means (here, the second display device 208S) on which the navigation character YM is displayed. Yes. In the second display device 208S shown in FIG. 110 (a2), the navigation character YM is changed from the co-panda to a head length that is a character that cannot be selected by the player.

  Further, instead of FIG. 109 (a a2), a speaker 120 is shown in FIG. 110 (a c1). Further, the volume level set by the player in the volume adjustment window VW shown in FIG. 75 (9) and the brightness (light quantity) level set in the brightness adjustment window BW shown in FIG. 75 (3) are “user set values”. It is written on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, both are three levels. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 in this example, the volume and brightness set by the player are forcibly changed to the effect at the time of execution and output from the speaker 120, or the game board lamp 442 and / or the game frame. Since an LED such as the lamp 452 may emit light, it is written as “actual set value” on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is the same in the following examples. In FIG. 110 (ac2), the fact that there is a possibility that the “severe fever” notice may be performed is notified by the speaker 120, which is a stage means different from the stage means that may cause the “severe fever” notice. ing. The sound volume (actual setting value) of the speaker 120 at this time matches the user setting value. Thereafter, in FIG. 110 (ac3), the notice of “severe heat” is executed, the letter “severe heat” is displayed large on the decorative symbol display device 208, sound is output from the speaker 120, and the game board is used. The lamp 442 and the game frame frame lamp 452 emit light. The volume (actual setting value) at the time of execution of the “hot heat” notice exceeds the user setting value and is level 5, and the luminance (actual setting value) also exceeds the user setting value and is level 5. That is, the sound is output at a volume higher than the volume level set by the player, and emits light with a luminance higher than the luminance level set by the player. In addition, at the time of production, the volume and brightness may be forcibly below the user set value in addition to exceeding the user set value (hereinafter the same). In addition, the timing at which the volume and luminance are forcibly changed is not limited to this example. For example, the luminance may change at the timing when the sound that is approaching intense heat is output, or the sound that is approaching intense heat. The volume and brightness may change during the output. In addition, when a specific effect is executed, only the volume of the volume and brightness may be output exceeding the user set value, or only the brightness may exceed the user set value and light may be emitted. In some cases, both may be exceeded.

  Note that the user setting of the sound volume and the brightness may be possible even on a game machine that does not have the convenient sound volume adjustment window VW and the brightness adjustment window BW as described with reference to FIG. Any game console that can set the volume and brightness can be used. The technical idea here can also be applied when the player can set (adjust) the resolution of the image, the color of the image, etc. (hereinafter the same).

  As described above, the various technical ideas described with reference to FIG. 110 can be applied to the production examples described so far, and can also be applied to the production examples described later.

  FIG. 111 is a table summarizing the music that can be output from the speaker 120.

  In the game console in the example here, the user may be able to select the music output from the speaker 120. 111 in the table of FIG. 111 are songs that can be selected by the user according to the number of consecutive hits. For example, unless the jackpot is 15 consecutive villas, the song “Large behavior” cannot be selected. A plurality of music pieces may be selectable. For example, if 15 jackpots are made, all the music pieces with serial numbers 1 to 11 can be selected.

  The serial number 12 is a music that can be selected by operating the chance button 136 five times during the jackpot start interval (during the jackpot start effect execution). If the back button navigation mode is set, the jackpot During the start interval, guidance about operating the chance button 136 is notified, but not notified when the back button navigation mode is not set. Note that the guidance does not need to be notified when the back button navigation mode is set, and conversely, the guidance may be notified when the back button navigation mode is not set.

  The music numbers 13 and 14 are music numbers that can be selected on the condition that a big hit is made with a specific reach. “Collaboration SP” here refers to a super reach production where multiple characters co-star (for example, a super reach production where Yoshimune and Panda co-star at Swordsman Reach). “Big hit” means that the premier character “楓” appeared in the cut-in image in Super Reach and was a big hit.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the music selection described with reference to FIG. 111 is performed.

  In FIG. 112 (I 1), the probability variation state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) is present, and the first decorative symbol is changing rapidly. A second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (I 1). The hold number of Special Figure 1 is 3, and the hold number of Special Figure 2 is also 3. Further, the pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and in FIG. 112, only the hold icons h21 to h23 of the special figure 2 are shown. These three hold icons h21 to h23 are all in the default display mode. In addition, it is a big hit triple ream. Furthermore, the song title display section MN at the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (I 1) displays the song title of the currently outputted song (in this case, the default “may be there”). Is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a song having that song name. That is, the music that is output here is the music that is output in the probability variation state. Further, on the left side of the music title display portion MN, icons of up and down keys 137u, d of the operation key unit 137 are displayed, and it is notified that the music can be selected by operating the up and down keys 137u, d. In addition, a space background screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the space background screen is a background screen for a probability change state.

  In FIG. 112 (a 2), the lower key 137 d of the operation key unit 137 is operated, and in FIG. 112 (a 3), the song title in the song title display portion MN is changed to “mega giga summer”. Note that since the music is output from the speaker 120 with a slight delay (for example, 500 milliseconds) from the music selection operation, there is a period in which the music name on the music title display unit MN and the music actually output from the speaker 120 are different. Note that the music title displayed in the music title display unit MN may be configured so that the music actually output from the speaker 120 matches. In FIG. 112 (A4), the music of “Mega Giga Summer” is also output from the speaker 120. When a song is changed, the song is output from the beginning. For example, when the timing and time at which the song flows is determined by power-on or RTC (Real Time Clock) production, or from the continuation of the last output In such a case, the data may be output from the middle.

  In FIG. 112 (b), the special figure 2 hold increases and the special 2 is full (the hold number display displayed in the lower right of the decorative symbol event device 208 is updated to 4). The display of the fourth hold icon is slightly delayed from the update of the hold number display to 4, and in FIG. 6 (a), the fourth hold icon 24 in the pre-read notice display mode (white blinking) is displayed. Has been. After that, three suspensions of special figure 2 are digested. In FIG. 112 (b), the special symbol 2 is stopped, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss. Yes. In addition, the remaining number of reservations in FIG.

  In FIG. 112 (I 9), the last hold of the special figure 2 has been consumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started the variable symbol display. Even in the state of FIG. 112 (A 10), the selected music is still “Mega Giga Summer”, and in FIG. 112 (A 11), the chief character C11 appears and a music change notice is made. The song change notice is a jackpot notice including an effect that forcibly changes the song selected by the player to another song, and may be a normal notice or may be applied to a prefetch notice. . In this example, because the song change notice is displayed, the symbol change for which the song change notice is displayed is announced for the jackpot confirmation (or rich jackpot), but the symbol change for which the song change notice is displayed is lost. There may be cases. For example, if “Break DREAM”, which is the theme song of the chief choir of the character that appeared, is successful (the expectation of the big hit is high, or the big hit is confirmed (the jackpot may be rich)), ”Is not output, it may be a failure, and there may be a case where the symbol variation displaying the music change notice is lost. In addition, even when “sound DREAM” is not output and the music change advance notice fails, it may be notified that the big hit has been determined by another effect (for example, a resurrection effect). In addition, by displaying the music change notice, the jackpot is confirmed (or the jackpot richness) after the next change of the symbol change in which the music change notice is displayed / or the expectation of the big hit is higher than the case where a notice other than the music change notice is made. A pre-reading notice may be made to notice that the degree is high. Further, even when the music change advance notice fails, it may be configured to be notified that the big hit is surely confirmed by another effect (for example, a resurrection effect). However, the song change notice may forcibly replace the song selected by the player, which may be annoying for the player in some cases. It may be confirmed.

  A song change effect sound is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. Further, although the music of “Mega Giga Summer” output from the speaker 120 is not output, the music of “Mega Giga Summer” may be output. Note that the chief character C11 appearing in the music change notice raises one hand, and the hand overlaps a part of the song name display unit MN.

  In FIG. 112 (I 13), the song title in the song title display unit MN is changed to “Distance”, but no song is output from the speaker 120. It should be noted that even if the output of the music of “Mega Giga Summer” is output as it is in FIG. Alternatively, “Distance” changed by the music change notice may be output from the speaker 120. Here, as shown in FIG. 111, “Distance” is not a song released after “Mega Giga Summer” but a song different from “Make DREAM”. However, “Distance” is the music immediately before “Make DREAM” in the opening order. In the music change notice here, such a “Distance” music is put between them, and “Breaking DREAM” is finally output. It should be noted that “sound DREAM” may be displayed on the song title display unit MN at the stage of FIG.

  In FIG. 112 (I 14), the song change effect sound is output again from the speaker 120, and the long-length character C11 raises one hand. The music piece “Distance” is not output from the speaker 120 even after a certain period of time has passed since the music title in the music title display unit MN is changed to “Distance”, but may be output.

  In FIG. 112 (A 15), the song title in the song title display section MN is changed to “Make DREAM”, and a song change effect sound is output from the speaker 120 again. The music change notice may be successful at the stage where “sound DREAM” is displayed on the song name display unit MN, and in FIG. That is, when “sound DREAM” is displayed on the song name display unit MN, the “sound DREAM” music is always output from the speaker 120. In addition, even when “sound DREAM” is displayed, there may be a case where the music “sound DREAM” is not output from the speaker 120 and fails.

  Further, in this example, when the music change notice is displayed, “Make DREAM” is always output, but in FIG. 112 (I 15), the original “Mega Giga Summer” is displayed on the song name display unit MN. If this is the case, it is a failure (failure), and “mega giga summer” may also be output from the speaker 120 thereafter. Alternatively, the case where “Distance” is still displayed on the song title display unit MN at the timing of FIG. 112 (b) is also a failure (displacement), and “Distance” may also be output from the speaker 120 thereafter. The original “Mega Giga Summer” may be displayed on the song title display unit MN selected by the player, and the output of the “Mega Giga Summer” song may be started.

  It should be noted that depending on whether “Distance” is displayed on the song title display section MN at the timing of FIG. A jackpot expectation may be expressed for variations and / or symbol variations within the hold. That is, the expectation of jackpot may be higher when “Distance” is displayed than when “Your Fragrance” is displayed.

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot may be expressed for the change and / or the design change within the hold depending on the number of changes of the music by the music change notice. For example, it may be configured such that when the music is changed twice due to the music change notice, the fluctuation and / or the symbol fluctuation in the hold is likely to be a big hit. . In addition, when the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, 7 times) due to the music change notice, the fluctuation and / or the design fluctuation within the hold may be confirmed as big hit (or rich in big hit). On the contrary, when the music has changed a specific number of times (for example, once) due to the music change notice, it is possible to confirm the loss.

  In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (A19), “decoration 7” — “decoration 7” — “decoration 7”, which is a combination of jackpots with probability variation, is displayed in a shaking manner. In 20), the combination is displayed in a definite manner. In this example, when the music change notice is displayed, the music is always changed to “Breaking DREAM”, and then the “Breaking DREAM” music is output from the speaker 120, and “Delay DREAM” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Animation (including lyrics display) is displayed and a big hit. Even if the music change notice is displayed and the music is “sound DREAM”, the music “sound DREAM” is output from the speaker 120 and / or “sound DREAM” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The animation may not be displayed in some cases. In other words, even if a music change notice is displayed and the music is changed to a specific music, there may be a case where the next music is not displayed unless an effect display corresponding to the music is performed.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 112.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (a 21), a big hit game start screen is displayed, and a big hit start BGM is output from the speaker 120, during the big hit start interval (during the execution of the big hit start effect) It is.

  The timing in FIG. 113 (A 22) is the timing immediately after the first round is started. In the jackpot game effect in this example, the first round and the second round are music selection periods. On the decorative symbol display device 208, when the first round is started, a music selection screen is automatically displayed. The music selection may be started at the player's will, and in this case, the music selection screen may be called by operating the chance button 136 or the like. Even in the music selection period, when the music selection is completed, the music selection screen disappears and the round effect is started. The decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the first round (“1R”) and the number of balls (number of winning balls) (0 pt).

  A music release list GR is displayed on the music selection screen. Since it has achieved 4 consecutive villas with this big hit, “Kiseki no Universe” has been newly added to the music release list GR and can be selected. The “New Universe” display is marked with “New”. In this example, the newly added music is configured to be displayed in the second stage of the music release list GR, so that “may be there” and “mega giga summer” that have already been released. "Is not displayed. Here, the newly opened “miracle of miracle” is selected, and the rust portion of “miracle of miracle” is output from the speaker 120. In the music release list GR, the previous “gain DREAM” is not displayed, and “gain DREAM” cannot be selected. However, when the “profit DREAM” effect is executed, the “profit DREAM” may be released. In this case, the display position of “Make DREAM” in the song release list GR may be a position immediately below the song released up to the previous time (“Your Fragrance”) or “Kiseki no Kiseki” released this time. It may be a position directly under the “space”. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 113, since the release order is the sixth music, it may be the position of the sixth music from the top music, but in this case, three question marks are displayed side by side. It will be sandwiched. In addition, when the production of “Dream DREAM” is executed, “Make DREAM” among the songs released according to the current number of consecutive resorts (“Space of Kiseki”) and “Make DREAM” Only one may be released, or both songs may be released.

  In FIG. 113 (b), the down key 137d is operated, and the cursor csd is placed on a display in which three question marks below the display of “Kiseki no Universe” are arranged in the music release list GR. The display with three question marks is an unreleased display, and the song title is unknown. That is, in the music release list GR, it is unknown what music is scheduled to be released in the future. It should be noted that at the timing of FIG. 113 (A 24), the game ball is starting to win the attacker.

  When the cursor csd is aligned with a display in which three question marks are lined up, scrolling downward automatically starts (FIG. 113 (b)), the cursor csd goes to the end, and “there is there” Return to "Maybe". In addition, instead of automatically scrolling downward, the player may scroll by his own operation. Further, instead of displaying three question marks, the names of songs scheduled to be released in the future may be displayed lightly. Or, conversely, it is not necessary to notify that there is a song that is not open. That is, in the music release list GR, the display itself in which three question marks are arranged is not displayed, and only the opened music name may be displayed.

  Also in FIG. 113 (I 27), the automatic scrolling is not completed, and the rust portion of “the universe of miracle” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120. Note that during song selection, a part of each song (in this example, the rust portion) is output so as to loop, but it does not have to be looped. The music may not be output until the next is selected. Also, all of the music may be output from the beginning, or all of the back may be output from the middle of the music (for example, the rust portion).

  Also in FIG. 113 (A 28), the automatic scrolling has not ended and the cursor csd has not returned to the head "may be there", but the speaker 120 replaces "the universe of miracle" with " The output of the “rust” part may have been started. It may be configured such that the music “may be there” is not output until the cursor csd is set to “may be there”. FIG. 113 (b) shows that the cursor csd has reached the end of the music release list GR by automatic scrolling. In FIG. 113 (b), the cursor csd is “ It has returned to "I can't do it" and automatic scrolling has ended. Originally, the cursor csd corresponds to the display of the music from the speaker 120 after the cursor is positioned on the display of the target music (may be at the same time as the adjustment or before the adjustment). The output of the music is started, but “may be there” is output during the automatic scrolling, so in FIG. 113 (i 31), the music that was output at the time of FIG. 113 (a 30) The continuation of is output as it is. In addition, after the cursor csd is set to “may be there” (may be at the same time as it is set or before it is set), it may be newly “may be there”. May be newly started from the beginning of the chorus portion of “may be there” (that is, the beginning of the song output by the song selection).

  Thereafter, the down key 137d is operated once, and the cursor csd is set to the display of “Mega Giga Summer” as shown in FIG. In this state, the chance button 136 is operated as shown in FIG. 113 (b), and “mega giga summer” is determined. In the music release list GR shown in FIG. 113 (I 35), the determined “mega giga summer” is displayed in red, and a music determination sound is output from the speaker 120.

  When the music is determined in this way, the music selection screen is switched to the round effect screen. 112 is displayed on the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (i36), and the title “Mega Giga Summer” of the selected music is displayed at the lower left of the decorative design display device 208. Has been. Also, the music of “Mega Giga Summer” is output from the speaker 120. The selected music is output from the beginning when the round effect starts. In addition, when all the music is output not only from the chorus part but also from the beginning of the music when the music is selected, it may be output from the continuation at the start of the round effect.

  In addition, in FIG. 113 (I 15-2-1) instead of FIG. 112 (I 15-1), the song name “CREA” is displayed on the song title display unit MN of the decorative symbol display device 208. The song with this song name is a song not included in the table shown in FIG. That is, it is a music that the player cannot select. The music piece “CREA” is output from the speaker 120 shown in FIG. 112 (I 15-2-2), and the animation of the character “CREA” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lyrics of the song “CREA” are also displayed. As described above, when a song that cannot be selected by the player is output, the expectation level of the big hit may be high or the big hit may be confirmed. However, the case where it loses may be included. In the subsequent music selection by the player, the music “CREA” may be added as one of the selectable music in the music release list GR, or vice versa. , Adding may be prohibited. In addition, it is possible to select the music selection during the big hit game, it may be impossible to select the music selection during the pattern change, and vice versa, the selection is not possible during the big hit game selection, and the music selection during the pattern change. It may be possible.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of an effect produced by the effect device 206 shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (wa1), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed, and the change icon h0 of the default display mode is displayed. In addition, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 in the default display mode is displayed. Further, a navigation character YM having a default display mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 114, as in FIG. 110 (ac1), “volume” and “user set value” of “brightness” are shown in the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 in each figure, and “volume” in the lower right. And “actual setting value” of “luminance”. Also, the types of “BGM”, “SE (sound effect)”, and “light emission” among the effects that are actually being executed are shown.

  In FIG. 114 (wa1), the symbol variation BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value. According to the symbol variation lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 are Light is emitted at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

  In order to forcibly set the volume and brightness to actual setting values, the presentation control data itself may instruct to ignore the user setting value and execute the value specified by the presentation data. The sub-control units 400 and 500 may manage themselves based on a table in which effects that ignore the values are collected, or may be managed based on commands from the main control unit 300.

  In FIG. 114 (Wa3), the left symbol that has been temporarily stopped by the decorative symbol display device 208 has moved to the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 and has been temporarily stopped. The right symbol is moved to the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 114 (a3), the super reach development BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 according to the super reach development ramp pattern. However, it emits light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

  In FIG. 114 (Wa4), the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd operate and advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively, and enter the decorative symbol display device 208. It overlaps from the front side. In this state, the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. In FIG. 114 (Wa4), the BGM disappears, and the effect sound at the time of the movement of the super-reach development is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the lamp at the time of the movement of the super-reach development role is movable. According to the pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three-level luminance as the user set value. In this way, the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd and the light guiding plate IL perform the rendering operation, but the sound volume and the luminance remain at the user set values.

  It should be noted that the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd temporarily return to the initial position at an appropriate timing.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (a6), the scene after the main character Tono-sama and the enemy swordsman battle duel on the wilderness background screen is displayed. In FIG. 114 (Wa6), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game stand frame lamp 452 are displayed in accordance with the super reach lamp pattern. Light is emitted at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (Wa7-1), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and the button effect is started. In FIG. 114 (Wa8), the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 114 (Wa9), the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (Wa10). The chance button 136 is operated at a timing within the operation effective period. During this period (FIGS. 114 (a7-1) to 114 (a11-1), the super reach BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the super reach result sound effect sound is output. Are output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value in accordance with the symbol variation lamp pattern. It should be noted that the button effect may correspond to an indication that the effect of changing the volume and brightness settings may start.

  In response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. 114 (Wa10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (Wa11-1) displays the effect image from the display of the scene after the lord and the swordsman slashed each other. The display is switched to Ed2. In FIG. 114 (Wa11-1) in response to the operation of the chance button 136, BGM disappears, and the jackpot decision sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user set value. According to the lamp pattern, the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 also emit light with brightness of 5 levels exceeding the user set value. That is, both the volume and brightness are forcibly increased.

  Even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the effect described with reference to FIG. 114 (Wa11-1) is executed. However, if there is no operation of the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, the lost symbol may be temporarily stopped to perform a revival effect.

  In FIG. 114 (wa12), the first large board behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral object 224Gd are operated again, and advance from the initial position toward the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. It overlaps with 208 from the front side. In FIG. 114 (Wa13), the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H operates to move downward from the initial position, and the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd. In FIG. 9 (a14), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed again, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. During this time (FIG. 114 (Wa12) to FIG. 114 (Wa14)), as in FIG. 114 (Wa11-1), the jackpot sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at five levels exceeding the user set value. Then, the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light with brightness of 5 levels exceeding the user set value in accordance with the jackpot determination lamp pattern.

  Note that even when the effect is not performed due to a failure of the accessory, the volume and brightness may be changed from the user set value, or in this case, the user set value may be left unchanged.

  Moreover, when the button image 136 is displayed as shown in FIG. 114 (Wa7-1), the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed. That is, the volume and the brightness may be forcibly changed before the effect of operating the accessory is performed. The change here becomes a notice of the button effect as a result (and hence a jackpot notice), and such a previous change may be handled as one of the jackpot final effects.

  Here, the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed according to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect, but the operation of the accessory such as the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H and the movement of the accessory to the effect position are completed. The volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed according to the condition, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed at a timing other than the operation timing of the accessory. Further, the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed a plurality of times by one symbol variation, or the volume and the luminance may be forcibly changed only once at a maximum by one symbol variation. Further, here, the sound volume and the luminance are all changed, but only the sound volume may be changed, or only the luminance may be changed (the same applies hereinafter).

  Eventually, in FIG. 114 (Wa15), in response to the sub-control unit 400, 500 side receiving a command to return the light guide plate IL to the initial position and return the car box hand 224H to the initial position, the car box hand 224H moves upward. Start moving toward and return to the initial position. Here, the jackpot sound effect from the speaker 120 is pulled down to the user set value, and the brightness of the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emitting according to the jackpot determine lamp pattern also reaches the user set value. Has been lowered. This is returned to the user setting value when the sub-control unit 400, 500 side receives a command to return the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H to the initial position.

  Next, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (Wa16), the effect image Ed2 fades out and fades and gradually disappears. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The display of the scene after the swordsman slashes fades in. In addition, at this timing, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are beginning to return to the initial positions. During this time (FIG. 114 (Wa16) to FIG. 114 (Wa17)), similarly to FIG. 114 (Wa15), the jackpot sound effect is output from the speaker 120 at the volume set by the user. The game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 that emit light according to the confirmation lamp pattern also emit light at the brightness set by the user.

  It should be noted that the volume and / or luminance changes from the user set value during the period of the same sound data and / or light emission data as shown in FIG. 114 (Wa11-1) to FIG. The volume and / or brightness may return to the user setting value when switching to the light emission data. Conversely, the volume and / or luminance may change from the user set value across a period in which the sound data and / or the light emission data is switched one or more times.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (Ua18), the display of the scene after Tono-sama and the swordsman slashed each other is completely restored. In addition, at this timing, the first large board acting 224Ga to the fourth large board acting 224Gd are stopped at the initial position. In FIG. 115 (Wa18), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 according to the super reach win use ramp pattern. However, it emits light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. Note that the timing at which the sound volume and the brightness return to the original is not limited to the timing in FIG. 114 (Wa15) (the timing at which the accessory (thousand box accessory 224H) starts returning from the effect position toward the initial position). Display switching timing), the timing at which the duel scene victory is confirmed (timing in FIG. 115 (U19-1)), or the timing at which the combination of the big-decoration decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. It may be.

  In FIG. 115 (Ua19-1), a scene in which the enemy swordsman falls and the main character Tono-sama wins is displayed, and Tono-sama's navigation character YM also takes a victory pose. In FIG. 115 (Wa19-1), the super reach win use BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the voice of the main character “Yataze” is also the same as the user set value 3. The level is output from the speaker 120, and the game board lamp 442 and the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three-level luminance as the user set value in accordance with the super reach winning use lamp pattern.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the big winning decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, instead of FIG. 114 (Ua1-1), in FIG. 115 (Ua11-2), after Ton-sama and the swordsman slashed in response to the chance button 136 being operated in FIG. 114 (Ua10). Is switched to a display in which a symbol (“decoration 6”) different from the left and right symbols (“decoration 7”) is largely displayed (swaying display) as a middle symbol. This is a display suggesting that the button effect has failed, and at this time, the super reach defeat BGM is output from the speaker 120 at the same three levels as the user set value, and the game board lamp 442 according to the super reach defeat lamp pattern. And the game table frame lamp 452 emit light at the same three levels of brightness as the user set value. As described above, when the production fails, or when the loss is dense or the loss is confirmed, the volume and / or luminance need not be changed from the user set value, but the volume and / or luminance is changed from the user set value. Also good.

  In addition, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (U11-2 ′) instead of FIG. 114 (U11-1) is the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (U11-2). In this example, the volume is lower than the user setting value, and the luminance is lower than the user setting value. As described above, the volume and / or the luminance may be reduced when the production fails or when the loss is rich or the loss is confirmed. Further, the volume and / or the luminance may be decreased when the production is successful, or when the big hit is rich or the big hit is confirmed.

  In FIG. 115 (Wa-2-1) instead of FIG. 114 (Wa7-1), the button effect is not started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The main character, Tono-sama's character, displays an enlarged display, notifying that he has won. In this way, even when the effect using the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the effect (movable means) such as the thousand-thousand box accessory 224H is not involved, if a specific effect display is displayed, The volume and / or brightness may be forcibly changed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 115 (U7-2-3), the screen returns to the display of the scene after the swordsman and the swordsman cut each other, and the sound volume and brightness return to the same level as the user set value. ing.

  It should be noted that the volume and / or the luminance may be forcibly changed not only according to the accessory or display but also according to the effect by other effect means. Examples of other rendering means include a light guide plate IL, a versatile writer (POV display), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps), a second display means (for example, a sub liquid crystal display device), and the like. The volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed even in accordance with winning in a winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a start opening, an attacker) or passing through a specific gate. Furthermore, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed even in the effect performed when the game ball enters the effect sensor.

  In addition, instead of FIG. 115 (Ua19-1), in the example continued from FIG. 115 (Ua-19-2-1), it is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 of FIG. The display of the scene where the protagonist wins fades out as shown in the figure (Ua19-2-3), and then the first decorative design is displayed as shown in the figure (Ua19-2-4). The display is swayed by a combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7”. In this example, after the sound volume and the luminance are forcibly changed in FIG. 114 (Wa11-1), the state continues until FIG. 115 (Wa19-2-3), and then returns to the user set value. That is, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed is continued until the super reach effect is completed or until the same three decorative symbols are lined up and the shaking display is started. Moreover, you may continue until the shaking display is complete | finished. Further, the state in which the volume and the luminance are forcibly changed may be continued until the final judgment effect is finished.

  Note that the volume and / or luminance is forcibly increased during the operation of the accessory, but may be decreased. Further, when the user setting value is the maximum value or the minimum value, the volume or / and the luminance may not change. Alternatively, the player prepares a volume and brightness that cannot be set, and in this case, even if the value is changed to a value larger than the maximum value that is the user setting value or a value that is smaller than the minimum value that is the user setting value. Good.

  Further, the luminance may increase and the volume may decrease, and conversely, the volume may increase and the luminance may decrease. Also, the luminance may change and the volume may not change, and conversely, the volume may change and the luminance may not change. When the volume or brightness adjustment (setting) screen is displayed when the volume or brightness changes, the value set by the player may remain the same, or the value that is forcibly changed is displayed. May be. Further, the player may be able to adjust the volume or luminance when the volume or luminance is changed, or may not be adjustable when the volume or luminance is changed.

  FIG. 114 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed when the display mode of the hold icon changes. In this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed. It may be when the display mode of the fluctuation icon changes. Note that there may be a change in the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon in which the volume or / and the luminance are not forcibly changed. For example, when changing to a display mode in which the degree of expectation of jackpot is not so high, the volume and / or luminance need not be changed forcibly. For example, when the big hit expectation increases in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors, the volume or / and the brightness will not be forcibly changed unless the change is greater than red. Also good. Or conversely, when the display mode of the hold icon or the fluctuation icon changes, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed.

  FIG. 114 (c) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed at the appearance of an effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (hot effect). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (c), a conversation notice surrounded by a red frame appears. The hot effect is an effect in which red, gold, and rainbow colors are used. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed. The amount of change may be different when red (for example, one level up), when gold (for example, two level up), or when rainbow (for example, up to the maximum level), or the same. There may be.

  FIG. 114 (Ud) is an example in which the volume or / and the luminance may be forcibly changed when the revival effect is started after the decorative pattern of the loss is temporarily stopped. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 114 (Ud-2), a revival effect with a wipe effect is thereafter executed. In this case, the volume or / and the luminance may be changed prior to the result display. That is, the volume or / and luminance may be forcibly changed simultaneously with the start of the revival effect.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the holding frame selected by the player is changed.

  116 and 117, the above-described customization setting is performed. That is, in “Character selection” shown in FIG. 73 (b), “Copanda” of 07 is set, and in “Reservation frame selection”, “Reservation frame D” of 04 to which a wrinkle image for wiping effect is added The “hold display selection” is set to “icon C” of 03, and the background display selection is set to “background E” of 05.

  In the description here, the color used in the production represents the level of expectation of the big hit, and the degree of big hit expectation increases in the order of white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors. For example, the color etc. as a display mode of a pending | holding icon and a fluctuation icon are mention | raise | lifted. Hereinafter, the change of the color in the direction in which the degree of expectation for the big hit is increased may be referred to as promotion. This is the same in the following description. This can also be applied to the above description.

  A decorative frame display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (D1) displays a reserved frame UI of the reserved frame D, and a copanda as a navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 that is a default display mode of the icon C is displayed. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (D1), the background E (sky background) is displayed.

  Thereafter, the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is increased by two, and three holding icons h11 to h13 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the stop display shown in FIG. 116 (D3). Here, the pre-reading notice hold is the hold of the second hold icon h12.

  In FIG. 116 (D4), one hold is consumed and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (D4), the first decorative symbol has not yet started to change, but the second decorative symbol has started to change. In addition, the movement of the first hold icon h11 toward the base hs0 and the shift movement of the hold icons h12 and h13 have not yet started.

  In the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 116 (D5), the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the base hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 are started. The image appears from the left and right. Note that the movement animation of the first hold icon h11 toward the base hs0 and the shift movement animation of the hold icons h12 and h13 do not have to be performed during the appearance of the wrinkle image for the wipe effect. In FIG. 116 (D6), the bag image is in a fully closed state (wipe-in state), and the holding frame UI is not visible. In FIG. 116 (D7), the first decorative symbol also starts to be changed, and in FIG. 116 (D8), the first decorative symbol is changing at high speed. In FIG. 116 (D8) as well, the holding frame UI is in the wipe-in state.

  In FIG. 116 (D 9-1), the wipe-out is started and the wrinkle image for wiping effect is starting to open, and in FIG. In the wiping effect here, the holding frame is changed. In other words, the hold frame UI shown in FIG. 116 (D10) is a “hold frame R” different from the “hold frame D” selected by the player in the customization setting, and is surrounded by a red frame. Become a frame. The “holding frame R” is a holding frame that cannot be selected in the customization setting, but may be selected. It should be noted that this red frame makes the navigation character YM's feet invisible. The “holding frame R” is a holding frame having a function of notifying that the display mode of the holding icon is in a state of being easily changed. The character display is displayed. Note that the pre-reading target hold is the hold of the first hold icon h11 because one hold is consumed in FIG. 116 (d). Here, the “pending change !? time” corresponds to the above-described “high probability state regarding production”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (D12), a bomber icon I3 appears from the right end and passes over the holding frame UI. The bomber icon I3 launches a missile toward the hold icon, and the missile hits the first hold icon h11 that is the target of the pre-reading notice. The display mode of the first hold icon h11 that the missile hit is changed, and the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 116 (D13) is changed to a blue display mode, and the promotion effect is successful. Even if the bomber icon I3 appears, the missile is not fired, the missile does not hit any of the hold icons or the variable icons, or the display mode does not change even if the missile hits There may be. These all correspond to failure of promotion production.

  In FIG. 116 (D15), it is in the reach state, and in FIG. The pending change symbol has a red symbol and a blue symbol. When the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the pending icon is promoted in two stages, and when the blue pending change symbol is temporarily stopped, The display mode is promoted by one level. In FIG. 116 (D16), the red pending change symbol is temporarily stopped. In FIG. 116 (D17), the pending change animation is started. That is, the first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 116 (d17) is overlapped from the front side by the effect image Ed3, and in FIG. 116 (d18), the effect image Ed3 disappears, and the first hold icon h11 is It has changed to a red display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (D19), the medium symbol that has been the red reserved change symbol so far changes to “decoration 2”, and “decoration 1” − “decoration 2” − “decoration 1”. Is displayed in a variable display (temporary stop). In FIG. 116 (D20), the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the loss is confirmed.

  In FIG. 116 (D22), the red hold icon which has been the first hold icon 11 so far has moved to the base hs0 and is displayed as the change icon h0 in the red display mode. Even when the pre-reading notice target hold is consumed, the character display of “hold change !? time” continues to be displayed on the hold frame UI. In FIG. 116 (D23), a golden light beam is emitted from the navigation character YM toward the variation icon h0. In FIG. 116 (D24), the variation icon that has been red until now has changed to gold.

  In FIG. 116 (D26), the reach state is reached, and in FIG. In super reach production, the sky background switches to the wilderness background, and a duel scene is displayed. In the super-reach state, all of the holding frame UI remains except for the base hs0, and the holding icon also disappears. However, the fluctuation icon h0 has not disappeared, and the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal hs0. A pedestal hs0 shown in FIG. 116 (D28) is a pedestal of the “holding frame D” before it is changed by the wipe effect. That is, the original pedestal. However, it may be a pedestal of “holding frame R” after being changed by the wipe effect. Further, the pedestal hs0 and the fluctuation icon h0 may not be displayed during the super reach or from the normal reach state (FIG. 116 (D26)). Further, the entire hold frame UI and the hold icon may not be displayed. Further, when the super reach production is finished, the non-displayed items such as the hold frame UI and the hold icon may be displayed. After the super reach production is finished, the hold frame R is displayed and the next symbol variation is displayed. The hold frame D may be displayed from the start of display.

  In this example, even if the reach state is reached, the color of the frame of the holding frame UI remains red. Also good.

  It should be noted that the hold frame not selected by the player (for example, “hold frame R”) is more than the case where the pre-read hold icon is displayed on the hold frame selected by the player (for example, “hold frame D”). When the pre-read hold icon is displayed, it may be configured such that the jackpot symbol form is finally displayed easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the pre-read hold icon, or the hold frame selected by the player When the prefetch hold icon is displayed in a hold frame that is not selected by the player (for example, “hold frame R”) than when the prefetch hold icon is displayed in (for example, “hold frame D”). However, even if it is the display mode of the same prefetch hold icon, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed easily in the symbol variation corresponding to the prefetch hold icon. It may be.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 117 (E 9-2-1) instead of FIG. 116 (E 9-1), both the hold icon and the change icon are temporarily changed to a special mode (character). Further, the navigation character YM is also changed to a panda. In this example, after that, the display mode of each color is changed to reflect the expected degree of jackpot. Here, the ease of change to a color with a high expectation level for jackpots is determined according to the mode of the character once displayed.

  In FIG. 117 (D 9-2-2), a mini game is played with the panda of the navigation character YM. The character that has won the mini game changes to a color icon (holding icon or variable icon) with a high expectation level of jackpot. The Samurai character wins with a probability of 50%, the Princess character wins with a probability of 75%, and the Tono-sama character wins with a probability of 100%. In addition to the Tono-sama character, a premier character may be provided. The premier character changes to an icon of a jackpot-determined color (here, rainbow).

  In FIG. 117 (E 9-2-3), a janken game was played as a mini game, and everyone played janken at once. As a result, both Samurai characters lost and Tono-sama character won. A plurality of characters may win.

  In FIG. 117 (E 9-2-4), the wipe effect is started again, and the wipe image of FIG. (E 9-2-6)), in the holding frame UI shown in FIG. 9 (E 9-2-7), the second holding icon h12 is changed to a blue holding icon. Note that the holding frame UI remains “holding frame D”.

  117 (O1) to FIG. 117 (O12) are diagrams showing an example in which the navigation character YM and the treasure box icon I1 of the change notice display are displayed across a plurality of variations.

  117 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (O 1), and a copanda is displayed as the navigation character YM in the effect icon display area DIS. Further, two holds in FIG. 1 are stored, and a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12, which are the default display mode of the icon C, are displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (e), the background E (sky background) is displayed.

  In FIG. 117 (e 2), the hold in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the third hold icon h 13 is increased. Here, the pre-reading notice hold is a hold of the third hold icon h13. In FIG. 117 (O 3), the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 117 (O 4), one hold is consumed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The variation display of the decorative design has been started. In FIG. 117 (e-5), a treasure box icon I1 for change notice display appears on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS. In this example, a treasure box icon I1 of change notice display is displayed on standby. Thereafter, one hold is consumed, and the hold for the pre-reading notice becomes the hold of the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 117 (O7), the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss is stopped and displayed, and the treasure box icon I1 is continuously displayed on the carpet icon I2 in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 117 (e 9), the hold of the first hold icon h 11, which is the hold for the pre-reading notice, is consumed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. ing. In the effect icon display area DIS, the treasure chest icon I1 is still displayed while being placed on the carpet icon I2, and the treasure chest icon I1 is displayed across a plurality of variations. In FIG. 117 (O10), the carpet icon I2 disappears, the standby display of the treasure chest icon I1 ends, and the change animation starts. That is, in FIG. 117 (v. 11), the treasure chest of the treasure chest icon I1 is widened, a smoke image appears from the inside, and the navigation character YM is covered with the smoke image from the front side. In FIG. 117 (O12), the smoke image disappears, and the navigation character YM of the co-panda selected by the player in the customization setting described above has changed to the navigation character YM of the head length. The chief navigation character YM is a character that cannot be selected in the customization setting, but may be selected.

  In this example, a true symbol variation display such as a special symbol variation display is displayed, and a treasure box icon I1 of a change notice display is displayed in addition to the navigation character YM. The navigation character YM and the change notice display may be displayed across the re-variation. For example, the change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed by the change, and the navigation character YM that is always displayed is changed by the change notice display for the third time in the pseudo series, or before the change. The change notice display (the treasure box icon I1 and the carpet icon I2) is displayed due to the fluctuation, the change notice display continues to be displayed until the second pseudo series, and the navigation character YM that is always displayed by the change notice display is displayed at the third pseudo series. It may change.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram illustrating an effect example in the pachinko machine set to the auto button mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 in this example is set to the auto button mode, and the fact that it is set to the auto button mode is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 118 (A1), the symbol variation display is stopped and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbols of the losing background on the sea background. Further, one hold in FIG. 1 is stored, and a first hold icon h11 which is a default display mode is displayed. A navigation character YM is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS of the holding frame UI. A chance button 136 is shown on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button shown in FIG. 118 (A1) performs normal white lighting. In this example, it is configured that the chance button lamp 138 is always lit even outside the chance button operation valid period, but the chance button lamp is always off outside the chance button operation valid period. It may be.

  In FIG. 118 (A2), the hold of the first hold icon h11 is consumed, the symbol variation display is started, and then the conversation notice is started. When the conversation notice starts, the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama displayed with the character display of “chance” together with the character of Tono-sama is displayed. The display of Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is the first stage of the conversation notice. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1), the conversation notice is updated, and the conversation image CI1 of Tono-sama is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol. At the same time, a habit conversation image CI2 on which a button effect image is displayed is displayed. The button effect image is an image that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 within the operation effective period, and includes a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining time display meter MT representing the remaining time of the operation effective period. It is configured. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1), the operation valid period has not started, and even if the chance button 136 is operated, display corresponding to this is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the spear, but the player may recognize that the special symbol is fluctuating due to the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, or the like. There are cases where you can. It should be noted that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the frog conversation image CI2 or the lord's conversation image CI1 so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. In addition, as shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1), Tono-sama's conversation image CI1 is at least partially overlapped by the frog's conversation image CI2, and is more than the case where it is not overlapped. The display mode of the conversation image CI1 is difficult to view. In this example, it is easier to hit the jackpot when the conversation notice is made than when the conversation notice is not made. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord does not have to be displayed in a reduced size, and the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be deleted. Further, the conversation image displayed later may have a different size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high expectation for a big hit is displayed in this conversation. It may be a different size (larger or smaller) than the conversation notice B, which has a lower expectation for jackpot than the notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation effective period starts at the timing shown in FIG. 118 (A6). The player may be able to see an effect corresponding to the operation by operating the chance button 136 after the timing of FIG. 118 (A6). The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 118 (A6) starts blinking in white.

  At the timing of FIG. 118 (A7), the suspension of special figure 1 increases. However, the hold icon has not started to be displayed at this time. Further, the remaining time display meter MT is slightly reduced because the time has elapsed since the operation valid period was started. In FIG. 118 (A8-1), the first hold icon is displayed. The first hold icon shown in FIG. 118 (A8-1) is a button hold icon, and a red button image 136a is displayed on a white circle display. The remaining period meter MT is not displayed, but may be displayed. The chance button 136 shown in FIG. 118 (A8-1) changes to blue lighting and starts vibrating in response to the appearance of the button hold icon.

  In FIG. 118 (A10), a certain period elapses after the operation effective period of the button effect in the conversation notice starts. Then, the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, and as shown in FIG. 118 (A11), the strawberry conversation image CI2 is updated, and the response display for the auto button is “Summer vacation is still ~”. The character display is displayed. For the button hold icon, the auto button mode is not functioning, and the response display is not displayed unless the player actually operates the chance button 136. As shown in FIG. 118 (A12) to FIG. 118 (A13), as an operation promotion mode for the button holding icon, the chance button 136 continues to vibrate while being lit in blue.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (A15), the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 118 (A15) has finished oscillating, and has returned from blue lighting to normal white lighting. More specifically, at a certain timing in FIG. 118 (A14), the chance button 136 has finished oscillating and returned to white lighting. This is because the operation valid period of the button hold icon has ended. The operation effective period of the button hold icon may end, for example, when a predetermined effective period elapses, may end when the decorative symbol makes the first stop, It may be ended when the confirmation display is performed. However, the first hold icon h11 is still a display mode of the button hold icon. In FIG. 118 (A16), the hold of the first hold icon h11 that is the button hold icon is digested, and the symbol variation display is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (A16), the second decorative symbol has started the variable display, but the first decorative symbol has not yet started the variable display. The first hold icon h11 is still displayed.

  In FIG. 118 (A17), the hold reduction animation is started, and the first hold icon h11 of the button hold icon display mode starts moving toward the base hs0 of the variable icon display area CIS. In this figure (A19), the change animation is started on the pedestal hs0, and the change animation h0 of the blue display style is displayed in (A20). It has changed.

  FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in FIG. 118.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 119 (A22), the variation display of the first decorative symbol is started, and in the same diagram (A23), the first decorative symbol undergoes high-speed variation.

  In this example, the auto button mode is always set, but the chance button 136 is not operated until the symbol variation display changed to the button hold icon is confirmed and displayed regardless of whether or not the auto button mode is set. In this case, the display mode is automatically changed after the hold reduction animation. That is, while the button hold icon display mode is the hold icon, the icon changes to the blue display mode hold icon according to the operation of the chance button 136, but when the hold decrease animation is started (the fluctuation icon h0). The display mode does not change according to the operation of the chance button 136.

  Further, the auto button mode may be configured to end by operating the chance button 136 during the auto button mode. In that case, the automatic button mode may not be ended even if the chance button 136 is operated while the remaining period meter MT is displayed, or the chance button is not displayed even when the remaining period meter MT is displayed. When the button 136 is operated, the auto button mode may end.

  When the chance button 136 is not operated, the variation icon h0 may be displayed in the same manner as the button hold icon, or may not be changed to the variation icon h0 in the blue display mode. The display icon may change to a change icon h0. Further, even if the chance button 136 ends the vibration and returns to white lighting, the operation valid period may not end. Further, when there is no operation of the chance button 136, it does not change to the change icon h0 of the blue display mode, whether in the auto button mode or in the non-auto button mode. However, it may be changed, and may be changed during the auto button mode, but not changed during the non-auto button mode, or vice versa.

  Further, when the auto button mode is not set and the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the character display “Summer vacation is still ~” as shown in FIG. 118 (A11) is displayed. It is not updated to the conversation image CI2 of niece. However, it may be updated.

  In addition, in FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-1) instead of FIG. 118 (A5-1), a button display icon 136D is added to the navigation character YM. In the button display icon 136D, a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is also displayed. In addition, a meter display MW ′ is also displayed in FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-1). The button display icon 136D is a notice that does not change unless the chance button 136 is operated, and may be a notice of the change. In FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-2), the button display icon 136D is displayed together with the habit conversation image CI2 on which the button effect image is displayed. As described above, since the auto button mode functions for the button effect in the conversation notice, the button display icon 136D shown in FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-2) overlaps with the notice that changes without the button operation. Yes.

  In addition, in FIG. 119 (Aa5-3) instead of FIG. 118 (A5-1), a plurality of button effect images (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In this case, it is necessary to operate the chance button 136 a plurality of times, and the auto button function does not have to work even in the production that requires the chance button 136 to be operated a plurality of times. If the operation is performed a specific number of times (for example, once), the auto button function may work for the remaining button effect images.

  In addition, in FIG. 119 (Aa5-4) instead of FIG. 118 (A5-1), a button effect image (button) is displayed on the second display device 208S arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display device). An image 136a and a remaining time display meter MT) are displayed. In the example of FIG. 119 (Aa5-4), there is one button effect image displayed on the second display device 208S, but one or more button effect images displayed on the second display device 208S are The button function may be disabled.

  In addition, in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-1) instead of FIG. 118 (A5-1), a notification that prompts the decorative symbol display device 208 to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 is performed. In FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-2), a button striking effect is started, and a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) and a striking meter RHM are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. . The auto button function does not work for the button repeated striking effect, and the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-2) starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt an operation. Eventually, in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-5), continuous hitting of the chance button 136 is started, the continuous hitting meter RHM shown in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-6) is raised, and a response display is performed. In FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-5), the chance button 136 is started to be repeatedly hit and a response display such as an increase in the continuous hitting meter RHM is also performed. However, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-6) It continues to vibrate and continues to light blue. In the examples so far, the chance button 136 has only to be operated once. However, in this example, since the continuous hitting is necessary, the vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting are continued. In the case of a long press, the operation of the chance button 136 becomes longer as in the case of continuous hitting, so the technical idea here can be applied. The timing in FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-7) is the moment when the operation effective period has elapsed and the remaining time display meter MT has become zero. The vibration of the chance button 136 and the blue lighting continue until the remaining time display meter MT becomes zero. Thereafter, the chance button 136 immediately stops vibrating and returns to white lighting. The auto button function may be configured to operate when operated once or more. Also, in this example, the auto button function does not work, but the long press automatic continuous hit function is configured to work, so that the same response display as when performing a continuous hit operation by performing a long press for a certain period is performed. However, when the auto button function does not work, the long press auto-strike function may not work.

  120 is a diagram showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 118.

  In the example continued from FIG. 120 (A 8-2-1) instead of FIG. 118 (A8-1), after the button hold icon operation valid period starts, This is an example in which the chance button 136 is operated once before the auto button function is activated. In this case, both the response effect of the button hold icon and the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice are displayed. That is, the button hold icon is changed as a response effect of the button hold icon, and the habit conversation image CI2 is updated as the response effect of the button effect in the conversation notice. The change of the button hold icon corresponds to the prefetching notice, and the update of the habit conversation image CI2 in the conversation notice corresponds to the prefetching notice. The conversation notice may be a normal notice. In addition, the change of the button variation icon in FIG. 118 (A20) corresponds to the normal notice.

  It should be noted that only the response effect for which the auto button function does not work may be displayed. That is, only the change animation of the button hold icon may be displayed and the habit conversation image CI2 may not be updated. Or, conversely, only the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function may be displayed.

  In addition, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who does not operate the auto button function may be displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function may be displayed. On the contrary, in one operation of the chance button 136, only the response effect of the person who operates the auto button function is displayed, and in the second operation, the response effect of the person who does not operate the auto button function is displayed. It may be.

  Further, the above description using FIG. 120 (A A 8-2-1) to FIG. 120 (A A 8-2-4) was an explanation during the auto button mode setting, but the auto button mode is not yet set. The same applies to.

  Also, instead of FIG. 118 (A8-1), in FIG. 120 (Aa8-3), even when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 vibrates and emits light in a special color (in this case, blue). Indicates. Note that different notification may be performed when the auto button is not set and when the auto button is set.

  In addition, in FIG. 120 (Aa8-3 ′) instead of FIG. 118 (A8-1), when the auto button mode is not set, the chance button 136 does not vibrate and emits light in a normal color (here, blinking white). An example is shown.

  As another example, in FIG. 120 (Ab1), during the big hit game, the decorative symbol display device 208 is notified that the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (Ab2), a button effect image (button image 136a, remaining time display meter MT) is displayed along with the display of the third round. May be disabled, or conversely, the auto button function may be enabled.

  120 (Ba1-1) to FIG. 120 (Ba5) are diagrams showing an example of effects related to the back button. When the chance button 136 is operated at the timing of FIG. 120 (Ba1-1), an effect by the navigation character YM is started. However, the chance button 136 is normally lit white, does not vibrate, and the back button is not notified. In FIG. 120 (Ba2), when a button hold icon (first hold icon h11) in which the auto button function does not work appears, the chance button 136 starts to vibrate and changes to blue lighting to prompt an operation. In FIG. 120 (Ba3), the chance button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the first hold icon h11, which is a button hold icon, is changed (see FIG. 120 (Ba1-5)).

  120 (Ba1-2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 120 (Ba1-1), the only difference being that in FIG. 120 (Ba1-2), the chance button 136 starts to vibrate. It changes to blue lighting and becomes a point reporting the back button.

  The remaining period meter MT representing the remaining period of the operation effective period described so far will be further described in detail. The description here can be applied to any of the effect examples in which the remaining period meter MT described so far is displayed. The remaining period meter MT has a remaining time display area MT1 whose display mode changes according to the passage of time (in this example, a reduced display is performed), and a display mode that is behind the remaining time display area and according to the passage of time. Is composed of two elapsed time display areas MT2 (in this example, increasing display is performed). Here, the display mode (for example, color and shape) of the remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 may be displayed in a special display mode different from the default display mode. For example, when the display mode of the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in red instead of the default color (blue in this example), or the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is red instead of the default color (white in this example). The case where it is displayed by is mentioned. When the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a special display mode, and the remaining time display area MT1 is displayed in a reduced manner as time passes, it is displayed in a special display mode as time passes. In this case, the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) can be noticed. On the contrary, when the display mode of the elapsed time display area MT2 is displayed in a special display mode and the display area of the elapsed time display area MT2 is increased and displayed as time passes, Accordingly, the area displayed in the special display mode increases, so that the player who wants to see the special display mode in the elapsed time display area MT2 does not immediately operate the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136). There are cases where variations in the way of enjoying can be increased and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved. The remaining time display area MT1 and / or the elapsed time display area MT2 are displayed when the remaining period meter is first displayed (in the remaining time display area MT1, the remaining time meter is displayed first. (In the case of the elapsed time display area MT2, it may be the time when the elapsed time display area MT2 becomes visible for the first time after the remaining period display area MT1 decreases.) The display mode may be displayed, or may be configured to change from the default display mode to a special display mode when a certain period of time has elapsed after the operation valid period has elapsed.

  Further, the navigation character YM described so far will be further supplemented. The description here can be applied to any of the presentation examples in which the navigation character YM described so far is displayed. First, the navigation character may be configured not to make various notices. Further, another navigation character (hereinafter, “navigation character B”) may be displayed while the navigation character (hereinafter, “navigation character A”) is being displayed. In that case, it may be configured such that the navigation character B that is displayed later may overlap the navigation character A that is displayed earlier, and conversely, the navigation character B that is displayed later is displayed first. The displayed navigation character A may be overlapped, or the navigation character A and the navigation character B may be displayed at positions that do not overlap each other. For example, there is a case where the navigation character YM that is always displayed is overlapped by a navigation character that makes a notice of the change and / or a prefetch notice during one or more changes. Furthermore, a change notice display may be performed by performing an effect display that suggests that a change notice display may be displayed by a navigation character.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the overlap relationship between the display of the ball removal notification notified by the occurrence of the dish full tank error and the other display of each of the luminance adjustment windows BW.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α1), the holding frame UI is displayed on the background display of the sea, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. In addition, the combination of the decorative symbols (“decoration 4” — “decoration 1” — “decoration 7”) is displayed on both the first decorative symbol (the third symbol) and the second decorative symbol (the fifth symbol). The special symbol change display is stopped. Further, in the second hold number display displayed in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold number in the special figure 1 and the hold number in the special figure 2 are both zero. That is, there is no hold, and the symbol change display is not started after the special symbol stop symbol is displayed, and the menu icon MI, so as to overlap the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. A volume adjustment icon VI and a brightness adjustment icon BI are displayed. Also, a ball removal notification such as “please remove the ball” is displayed so as to overlap the lower part of the first decorative symbol from the front side. This ball removal notification display is a little transparent, and when the ball removal notification display is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, the rear display is slightly visible. Hereinafter, what is displayed so as to overlap from the front side, or displayed on the front layer may be simply expressed as “overlapping”. Note that the display of the ball removal notification may be a display in which the rear display is completely invisible. Further, a sound such as “please remove the sphere” is also output from the speaker 120.

  The display of the ball removal notification is shifted in display position from the second decorative symbol at the upper left and the second reserved number display at the upper right, and does not overlap these displays. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the second decorative symbol or / and the second reserved number display, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the frame RW at the upper right of the screen that notifies the current setting state, and does not overlap the frame RW. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the frame RW or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the holding frame UI, and does not overlap the holding UI. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the hold frame UI, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 121 (α2), the lower key of the operation key unit is operated, and the brightness adjustment window BW is displayed. The brightness adjustment window BW is displayed later than the display of the ball removal notification, but the display of the ball removal notification has priority, and the luminance adjustment window BW is displayed on the layer behind the display of the ball removal notification. It is displayed. That is, the display of the ball removal notification overlaps the brightness adjustment window BW.

  Eventually, the symbol variation display is started, and the luminance adjustment window BW, the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the luminance adjustment icon BI are also hidden. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. One decorative design is displayed in a variable manner. However, the ball removal operation is not performed yet, and the display of the ball removal notification is continued. The same applies to the case where the ball emptying operation is performed and the dish full tank error is once resolved, but the dish full tank error occurs again, and the display of the ball empty notification is newly displayed. The indication of the ball removal notification overlaps the variation display of the first decorative symbol. In FIG. 121 (α3), the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated, and a volume display bar display VB is displayed on the holding frame UI. The volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first decorative symbol, at least a part of the variation icon h0, and at least a part of the navigation character YM from the front side. In the following description, when the volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed, it is assumed that the left and right keys are operated and displayed each time. Further, by operating the up / down keys of the operation key unit, a bar display for brightness adjustment can be displayed, and the bar display for brightness adjustment is displayed at the same position as the bar display VB for volume adjustment. The following description of the volume adjustment bar display VB can be applied to the brightness adjustment bar display. However, the bar display for brightness adjustment and the bar display VB for volume adjustment may be displayed simultaneously. Further, the volume adjustment bar display VB or the brightness adjustment bar display may be always displayed or may be displayed only for a certain period. Moreover, it may be possible to display only while operating the left / right key or the up / down key.

  Further, the volume adjustment bar display VB and the ball removal notification display are displayed at positions that do not overlap. The ball removal notification display may be displayed so as not to overlap the bar display VB for volume adjustment, or may overlap.

  Further, the display of the ball removal notification is misaligned between the hold icon and the fluctuation icon, and does not overlap these icons. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the hold icon and / or the fluctuation icon, or may overlap. Also, the display of the ball removal notification is out of position with the display of the navigation character YM, and does not overlap the display of the navigation character YM. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the navigation character YM or may overlap.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α4), a super reach effect is performed and a duel scene in the background of the wilderness is displayed. The ball removal notification display is also displayed here, and the left design of “decoration 7” moved to the upper left, the right design of “decoration 7” moved to the upper right, and the display of the ball removal notification overlapped. ing. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification is overlapped with the display of the duel scene in the wilderness background. Note that the volume can be adjusted even during super reach, and the volume display bar display VB is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α4). The bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps the display of the duel scene in the wilderness background.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α5), a big hit game start screen is displayed, but the indication of the ball removal notification overlaps with the big hit start effect display here. Further, the volume can be adjusted even during the big hit game, and the volume display bar display VB is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α5). The bar display VB for volume adjustment also overlaps with the big hit start effect display. On the other hand, the display of the ball removal notification has a display position that is different from the right strike suggestion display at the upper left of the screen (a display different from the right strike warning, which corresponds to the mini right strike display in FIG. 71 (52) described above). There is no overlap with the right-hand suggestion display. The ball removal notification display may be displayed so as not to overlap the right-handed suggestion display or may overlap. The right-hand suggestion display may not be displayed on the big hit game start screen.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α6), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to right-handed is displayed. In this example, the right-handed instruction screen is a big hit from the first big hit (normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state) big hit state to the first big hit (single villa), but the latent probability change state. The big hit of the first time (single villa) from the first time (single villa) and the first one (single villa) from the sudden probability change state (high figure of high accuracy) Note that the latent probability variation state and / or the sudden probability variation state described above indicates only the state that has shifted from the normal state, and excludes those that have occurred in the probability variation state or the short time state). However, a right-handed instruction screen may be displayed for each jackpot. In this case, the right-handed instruction screen is overlapped with the display of the ball removal notification, while the right-handed suggestion display is not overlapped with the display of the ball removal notification. In this example, a right-handed warning display (corresponding to the right-handed notification in FIG. 70 (60) described above and the liquid crystal display during the right-handed right-handed warning in FIG. 126 described later) is displayed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Although not performed, a right-handed warning display may be performed while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed. Further, while the right-handed instruction screen is displayed, a left-handed warning display (corresponding to a liquid crystal display at the time of left-handed hitting warning in FIG. 126 described later) is not displayed, but may be displayed. Further, the right-hand suggestion display is performed while the right-hand instruction screen is displayed, but the right-hand suggestion display may not be performed while the right-hand instruction screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 121 (α7), the first round is started and a round effect is displayed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the round effect display. Note that the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the round number display at the upper right of the screen, and does not overlap the round number display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the round number display, or may overlap. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification has a different display position from the number of balls displayed (0 pt) at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap this number of balls displayed. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the number-of-balls display, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 121 (α8) in the fourth round, a promotion effect is performed that suggests whether or not there is a great chance that the second variable prize opening will be open for a long time and easy to pass V in the fifth round. As a result, a success effect indicating that the promotion effect is successful is executed. In other words, it is reported that the game is a big hit game in which the probability change condition is easily established. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of the success effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α8), the display of the star “V Chance GET” is also started. The display of the ball removal notification is shifted in display position from the display of “V Chance GET” indicated by the star, and does not overlap this display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the star sign “V Chance GET”, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 121 (α9), the fifth round is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays that it is the fifth round of the big hit game and prompts the player to pass V in this round. The message “Aim at V” is displayed. As a result, the player may be able to reliably pass V. The indication of the ball removal notification overlaps the indication “Aim at V”.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (α10), there is a passing (V passing) of the game ball to the probability changing operation region in the second variable winning opening, and the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the probability changing has been confirmed. The display of “V” is large. That is, the display of “V”, which is a notification that the probability change has been confirmed, is displayed based on the fact that V has passed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of “V”. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 121 (α10), the display of the star sign “V Chance GET” may be hidden.

  When the fifth round is completed, a big hit game end effect is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 121 (α11). In the above jackpot game, the probability change transition condition is satisfied by passing V in the fifth round, so the probability change state (special high probability map) is displayed while the symbol variation display is performed a certain number of times after the jackpot game ends. (High probability state). Therefore, in the end effect of the big hit game, the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” indicating that the state is shifted to the probability change state (the effect during probability change) is performed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush”. In the end effect of the big hit game, the right-hand suggestion display is displayed, but it may not be displayed.

  121 (α12) displays a prepaid card forgetting warning display (corresponding to the above-mentioned warning display in FIG. 71 (57)). The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the prepaid card forgotten warning display. In the end effect of the prepaid card forgotten warning display, the right-hand suggestion display is displayed, but it may not be displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α13), the display of the number of big hits (BONUS × 3) is displayed immediately below the right-hand suggestion notification on the upper left of the screen. In addition, a music title display portion MN is displayed on the upper right side of the screen, and icons of up and down keys of the operation key unit are displayed on the left side thereof. Further, the second hold number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen.

  The display of the ball removal notification has a display position that is different from the display of the number of jackpot reams, and does not overlap this display. The display of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the display of the number of jackpot reams, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the song title display unit MN and does not overlap the song title display unit MN. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed on the song title display unit MN so as not to overlap, or may overlap. Also, the display of the ball removal notification is out of position with the up / down key icons, and does not overlap the up / down key icons. The ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the up / down key icons, or may overlap. Further, the display of the ball removal notification is shifted in display position from the second hold number display at the lower right of the screen, and does not overlap the second hold number display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the second hold number display, or may overlap.

  Further, the volume adjustment bar display VB shown in FIG. 121 (α13) overlaps a part of the hold icon, but may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap.

  In FIG. 121 (α14), a big hit game start screen is displayed, and on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α15), a music selection screen shown in FIG. 113 is displayed. The ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the music release list GR.

  In FIG. 121 (α16), the music selection is completed and the round effect is started. In the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (α16), the song name of the currently selected song is displayed. The display of the ball removal notification is out of alignment with the song title display, and does not overlap the song title display. The indication of the ball removal notification may be displayed so as not to overlap the music title display, or may overlap.

  In FIG. 121 (α17) in the fourth round, a display “Aim at V at next R” is displayed on the right side of the screen. In FIG. 121 (α18) in the fifth round, “ The indication “Aim at V” is displayed, and the indication of the ball removal notification overlaps these indications displayed on the right side of the screen. 121 (α17) may correspond to the end of the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit 300 at the end of the fourth round. FIG. 121 (α18) is at the start of the fifth round, and may correspond to when the special electric power operating signal of the main control unit 300 is turned on from off. In this case, the period between FIG. 121 (α17) and FIG. 121 (α18) corresponds to the period of the inter-round interval from the end of the fourth round to the start of the fifth round. It is the period from on to off.

  In FIG. 121 (α19), “V” is displayed on the right side of the screen based on the fact that V has passed, and the ball removal notification display overlaps with this “V” display. ing. However, the bar display VB for volume adjustment does not overlap the display of “V”.

  121 (α20) may be in a state where a certain period of time has elapsed since the passage of V during execution of 5R, or at the end of 5 rounds (for example, the remaining sphere detection period of the main control unit) (Period corresponding to the end).

  After that, the big hit game progresses to 15 rounds (FIG. 121 (α21) to (23) in FIG. 121). In FIG. 121 (α24), the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush” is displayed as in the same figure (α11). ) Is displayed, and the ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB overlap the display of “Yoshimune RUSH rush”. In FIG. 121 (α24), the jackpot end display period is started and displayed after the end of the interval between rounds.

  Note that there is a time lag between the timing at the main control unit 300 and the actual timing because the command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 and received by the first sub control unit 400 to perform various controls.

  In FIG. 121, the previous round display is displayed as it is during the interval between rounds. For example, “5R” is displayed during the inter-round interval between 5 and 6 rounds, but all or part of the round display may be hidden during the inter-round interval. For example, only R may be displayed and the number portion may be hidden.

  The same applies to the end of the 15th round, and the round interval period may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  In this example, a right-hand warning display may be displayed during a big hit, but a left-hand warning display may not be displayed, but a left-hand warning display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that alerting | reporting regarding a warning may not be performed.

  As described above, the display of the ball removal notification has been described as an example. However, the description here is not limited to the display of the ball removal notification, and other errors (for example, various errors listed in the list of FIGS. 124 and 125). It is applicable to the display of the notification regarding.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating a display example of a ball removal notification.

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (β) is such that the display behind the ball removal notification display is completely invisible.

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ1) overlaps the volume adjustment icon VI in addition to the brightness adjustment window BW. That is, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ1) overlaps a part of the brightness adjustment window BW and a part of the volume adjustment icon VI. Note that the display of the ball removal notification may overlap the entire brightness adjustment window BW or may overlap the entire volume adjustment icon VI. In addition, the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ1) is a slightly transparent display similar to the display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. However, the display may be such that the rear side display is completely invisible, such as the ball removal notification display shown in FIG. 122 (β).

  The display of ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ2) overlaps the volume adjustment bar display VB displayed during the symbol variation display. This ball removal notification display does not overlap the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM overlaps the volume display bar display VB. The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ1) may also be a display that makes the rear display completely invisible, like the ball removal notification display shown in FIG. ,the same.). It should be noted that the display is not limited to the volume adjustment bar, but can be set by the player during the symbol variation, and the display related to the above-mentioned Daitomo (the effect customization screen shown in the above-described FIGS. 75 (V) and (V ′), etc. A list of missions achieved by player operation regardless of the state of change of the pattern during the setting of the song title display section MN, the brightness adjustment bar, and the user mode (Daitomo) shown in FIG. And game history (number of revolutions, number of balls, number of missions cleared, number of big hits of current play, maximum number of extended games of current play, etc.), character and background set by user, hold frame, hold display, etc. It can also be applied to displays that can be set and changed.

  The display of the ball removal notification shown in FIG. 122 (γ3-1) overlaps with the variation icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM. When the left and right keys of the operation key unit are operated in the state shown in FIG. 122 (γ3-1), a volume adjustment bar display VB is displayed. As shown in FIG. 122 (γ3-2), In the ball removal notification display and the volume adjustment bar display VB, the ball removal notification display has priority and is displayed on the front side. Note that the volume adjustment bar display VB may be given priority and displayed on the front side. In any case, the volume adjustment bar display VB also overlaps the variation icon h0 and the navigation character YM, and may overlap the hold icon h11.

  In FIG. 122 (γ4), contrary to FIG. 122 (γ3-2), the ball removal notification display is overlapped with the volume-adjusting bar display VB.

  In FIG. 122 (δ 3-1), the navigation character YM is displayed on the effect icon display area DIS. In FIG. 122 (δ 3-2), the navigation character YM jumps by animation, so that the ball removal notification is made. Is overlaid on the display. Here, the ball removal notification display overlaps with the navigation character YM, but the navigation character YM may overlap a part of the ball removal notification display. Further, the navigation character YM may not perform an animation that overlaps all or part of the display of the ball removal notification. This technical idea can also be applied to displays related to other errors described later.

  In FIG. 122 (ε), the indication of the ball removal notification has no frame display and is displayed only with characters.

  122 (ζ1) shows an example in which the display of the ball removal notification is composed of a character display and a peripheral image display 132G around the ball discharge lever 132 (see FIG. 1). By the peripheral image display 132G, the first decorative design and a part of each of the menu icon MI, the volume adjustment icon VI, and the brightness adjustment icon BI are overlapped.

  In FIG. 122 (ζ2), the surrounding image display 132G overlaps with the same character display as the character display of “Aim at V” shown in FIG. 121 (α9) to hide the character display.

  In FIG. 122 (ζ3), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the same display as the display of “Aim at V at next R” on the right side shown in FIG. 121 (α17).

  In FIG. 122 (η1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the character display of “Aim at V” and the display of the star mark “V chance GET”.

  In FIG. 122 (η2), the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the display of “Aim for V at next R” displayed on the right side.

  In FIG. 122 (θ1), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps a part of the volume adjustment bar display VB and hides a part of the volume adjustment bar display VB. That is, in this example, only the entire gauge portion is hidden. However, the peripheral image display 132G may overlap the entire volume adjustment bar display VB. In this example, the peripheral image display 132G does not overlap the character display of “Aim for V” and the display of the star mark “V chance GET”.

  In FIG. 122 (θ2), the peripheral image display 132G overlaps the entire gauge portion of the volume adjustment bar display VB and a part of “Aim at V at next R” on the right side.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a plurality of types of error displays are displayed.

  An example of error A to error E shown in FIG. 123 will be described later. In these errors A to E, the ball removal notification may or may not be included.

  In FIG. 123 (ι1), an error A notification transmissive display is displayed, and a warning sound for error A notification is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 123 (ι1 ′), an opaque display of the error A notification is displayed.

  In FIG. 123 (ι2), the transparency display of the error A notification overlaps with the change icon h0, the hold icon h11, and the navigation character YM, respectively, as in FIG. 122 (γ3-1). Is the same as the description in FIG. 122 (γ3-1).

  In FIG. 123 (ι 3-1), a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification transparency display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. That is, a newly generated error is displayed below, and in this example, the error that has occurred first is error A. From the speaker 120, the warning sound of the latest error E is output. Note that warning sounds may be output in the order in which all displayed errors occur.

  In FIG. 123 (ι 3-2), since error E has been eliminated, the transparency display of the error E notification disappears and a warning sound of error D is output from the speaker 120. That is, when the error that occurred last is canceled, a warning sound of the error that occurred before that is output.

  In FIG. 123 (ι3-2 ′), the volume adjustment bar display VB overlaps a part of a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification transparency display). Here, the bar display VB for volume adjustment overlaps the transparency display of the lowest error E notification, and the character display of the error E is hidden. A plurality of types of error displays may overlap the volume adjustment bar display VB.

  In FIG. 123 (ι 4-1), when errors occur in the order of error ABCDE, the error with the highest priority to be notified is displayed above, and the warning sound of the error with the highest priority is output from the speaker 120. Is done. An error having a high priority is an error having a high degree of importance (for example, a serious error for a game shop). Specifically, it may be the order of the list shown in FIG. In FIG. 123 (ι4-1), error B is the highest priority error.

  In FIG. 123 (ι4-2), since error B has been eliminated, the transparency display of error B notification disappears, and the warning sound of error E, which has been the second so far, is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 123 (ι5-1), error A occurs, a transparency display of error A notification is displayed, and a warning sound for error A notification is output from the speaker 120. In this state, error Z occurs. The error Z is an error for stopping the game. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (ι5-2), the display is a blue screen, and all the displays except the display related to the error Z are not displayed. ing. The error that stops the game here is an error (for example, a magnetic (magnet) detection error) that the main control unit 300 does not perform various lotteries. That is, it is an error that prevents the main control unit 300 from performing various lotteries, or even if it can be performed. The error displayed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, such as error Z, is not limited to an error that stops the game, but is, for example, an effect moving means error described later, an error that stops the payout operation, or the like. Also good. In addition, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. 126 to be described later may be error Z, but conversely, some or all of the various errors described in the list of FIG. May not be displayed in the error Z display mode. Further, if the main control unit 300 does not perform various lotteries, commands are not transmitted to the sub-control units 400 and 500, so that the sub-control units 400 and 500 do not perform various lotteries as a result.

  In FIG. 123 (κ1), the position of the error display is changed. That is, on the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208, a plurality of types of error displays (error A notification to error E notification opacity display) are displayed in the order of error occurrence. Note that the error display in FIG. 123 (κ1) is a display in which the display behind the error display is completely invisible, but it is a slightly transparent display so that the ball removal notification display overlaps from the front side. If displayed, the rear display may be slightly visible.

  In FIG. 123 (κ2), a ball removal notification display is added in the state shown in FIG. 123 (κ1). Here, the ball removal error (dish full tank error) is not included in the plural types of errors (error A to error E), but is included in the plural types of errors (error A to error E). Also good. Instead of the error of ball removal notification, an error with a high occurrence frequency may be displayed separately from a plurality of types of errors (error A to error E).

  A part of the ball removal notification error shown in FIG. 123 (κ2) is overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end. Note that all of the ball removal notification errors may be overlapped by a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  On the other hand, the ball removal notification error shown in FIG. 123 (κ2) overlaps with a plurality of types of error displays displayed at the left end.

  It should be noted that the error notification display related to the control on the sub-control units 400 and 500 may be overlapped by the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300, or vice versa. For example, the hitting warning display is overlapped by the ball removal notification display, and conversely, the ball removal notification display is overlapped by the hitting warning display. Further, both error notification displays are displayed at positions where the error notification display related to the control on the sub-control units 400 and 500 and the error notification display related to the control of the main control unit 300 do not overlap each other. May be.

  FIG. 123 (λ 1-1) is during symbol variation display, and a simultaneous effect executed on a plurality of game machines is started from the middle of symbol variation display. FIG. 123 (λ1-2) shows an example of a display screen of simultaneous effects at the normal time (no error occurs and before the first stop). As shown in FIG. 123 (λ1-2), in the normal time, the background display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the background display of simultaneous effects. The volume adjustment bar display VB may be displayed overlapping the background display of the simultaneous effect. However, the reverse may be possible. Further, although there is an example of error display shown in FIG. 123 (λ2 ′) described later, it may be displayed overlapping with the background display of simultaneous effects. However, the reverse may be possible.

  FIG. 123 (λ2) shows an example in which a simultaneous effect occurs during a super reach effect. During the super reach effect, the simultaneous effect display is displayed on the separate frame display OFD of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the player can enjoy the super reach effect and also see the simultaneous effect. be able to. In the case of a gaming machine equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a display of simultaneous effects is displayed on those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N. May be.

  FIG. 123 (λ2 ′) shows an example in which a simultaneous effect occurs during error notification display. Here, the situation that the super reach production is in progress also overlaps, but it may be the same even before the first stop of the decorative symbols, or in the normal reach state. The display of the simultaneous effect is displayed on the separate frame display unit OFD, and a plurality of types of error display (transparent display of the error A notification to the error E notification) are displayed without any change before the simultaneous effect is generated. The simultaneous effect display in the OFD is overlapped with a plurality of types of error displays.

  Note that the bar display VB for volume adjustment may overlap the simultaneous effect display in the separate frame display section OFD. Or, conversely, the display of simultaneous effects in the separate frame display portion OFD may overlap the bar display VB for volume adjustment.

  Further, in a gaming machine equipped with the second display device 208S, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, or the third decorative symbol display device 208N, those display devices 208S, 208M, 208N (hereinafter referred to as “second display means”). .) Overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 or the first decorative symbol display device 208L (hereinafter referred to as “first display means”), the first display according to the movement of the second display means. A part of the display on the means may be displayed on the second display means. In this case, an error display may be displayed on the second display means, or only the error display may not be displayed.

  As described above, in the description using FIGS. 121 to 123, the word “error” and the word “warning” are used, but it is not necessary to distinguish between the two, and it is a notification that an error has occurred. It may also be a notification that an instruction has been given to eliminate an error that has occurred or has occurred. Moreover, what is described as an error may have a higher priority than that described as a warning.

<Error notification / Errors that can be detected by the main controller>
Next, errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100.

  Errors that can be detected by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example include a magnetic (magnet) detection error, a switch (sensor) disconnection error, a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, a switch (sensor) level abnormality error, and a prize. Rate (general winning opening, start opening 2 (electrical chew), large winning opening (attacker)) abnormal error, large winning outlet exhaust excess error, large winning opening winning excess error, impact abnormal error, solenoid abnormal error, and the like.

  A magnetism (magnet) detection error occurs when the magnetic detection signal changes from off to on in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on), and the state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 10 ms). It is an error that returns when the error occurs. Switch (sensor) disconnection error is caused when the power is turned on (PW_WATCH signal is on) and any of the special figure 1 or 2 start port, normal start port (gate), or attacker is not connected (the harness is disconnected or the connector is disconnected) Occurs for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 ms), and the unconnected devices (Special Figure 1 and 2 start port, general start port, attacker) are connected in the power-on state (PW_WATCH signal is on) This error is returned when it is detected. A magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is an error that occurs when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection sensor detects a magnetic field (radio wave).

  The switch (sensor) level abnormality error is an error that occurs when a big ball is suspected. Among the winning rate abnormality errors, the error of the general winning opening is an error that occurs when the number of winnings to the general winning opening (for example, the general winning opening 226 shown in FIG. 3) is an abnormal value. The error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number of game balls are detected when a normal electric accessory (for example, the second special figure starting port 232 shown in FIG. 3) is not activated, and an error of the big prize opening Is an error that occurs when the number of winnings in a big winning opening (for example, the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 3) is an abnormal value.

  The big prize exit excess error occurs when the number of discharges is greater than the number of entries during the probability variation area valid period and outside the probability variation area validity period, and the next main control unit timer that has generated a large prize exit excess error This error is returned when interrupt processing occurs.

  The extra prize winning error is generated when the number of balls entered is greater than the number of balls discharged after the remaining ball detection time has elapsed (when the special electric utility operation interval timer is 0), and the number of balls entered is equal to the number of balls discharged. This error returns when the power is turned on or when the power is turned on again. In the return process for the extra prize winning prize excess error, the number of passes related to the probability variation area is set to zero.

  The impact abnormality error is a predetermined state in which the impact sensor level changes from OFF to ON while the switch power supply confirmation signal is OFF (= power is ON) and the probability variation area (specific area) is valid. This error occurs when the time (for example, 12 ms) continues, and returns when the level of the impact sensor changes from ON to OFF, or when it changes outside the probability variation region validity period and outside the probability variation region validity period.

  Solenoid abnormality error occurs when the photo sensor has never performed an operation that changes from OFF to ON or an operation that changes from ON to OFF during the probability variation area valid period. This error returns when timer interrupt processing occurs.

  In this example, the uppermost stage (magnetic (magnet) detection error) in FIG. 124 is the highest priority error because the main control unit 300 is prohibited from operating (not playable). However, the other error may be the highest priority error, and the priority may not be in the order of the list described in FIG. The details of the error occurrence conditions, the return conditions, the detection operation in the main control unit 300, and the return operation in the main control unit 300 are as shown in FIG. The term “when the winning end display period ends” of the return condition of the winning rate abnormality error of the big winning opening (attacker) means that the end display period of the big winning or the small winning end has ended.

<Errors that can be detected by the error notification / payout control unit>
Next, errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100.

  Errors that can be detected by the payout control unit 600 of the pachinko machine 100 in this example include a tray full tank error (bottom pan full error, dish full tank error), a payout shortage error, a payout number switch error, an illegal payout error, and a payout excess. Error, CR unit communication error, main control communication error (error when communication confirmation command from main control unit 300 is not received for a predetermined time (1000 ms in this example), CR unit not connected error, glass frame open error In addition to the inner frame opening error and the door opening error, there are a magnetic abnormality error, an external clock abnormality error, a magnetic field abnormality error, a switch level abnormality error, a switch disconnection error, an impact sensor error, etc. (not shown).

  In addition, each error occurrence condition, return condition, payout operation in the payout device 152, and fire operation in the launch device 110 are as shown in FIG. 125 (a). Note that “stop” described in the item “stop firing” shown in the figure is synonymous with turning off the firing permission signal.

  FIG. 125 (b) is a diagram showing a combination of a glass frame opening error and an inner frame opening error, which is a condition for generating a door opening error. The door open error occurs when at least one of the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error is in the generated state, and enters the released state when both the glass frame open error and the inner frame open error are in the released state. It is an error.

<Error notification / other examples>
The above-mentioned magnetic (magnet) detection errors include other errors (for example, magnetic field (radio wave) detection errors, switch non-connection errors (errors related to connector disconnection or disconnection of devices controlled by the main control unit), shock abnormality errors, (Payout control communication error, switch level abnormality error, winning rate abnormality error, door opening error, upper plate full error), the priority may be higher, or the priority may be the same.

  Also, for example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error and a low priority error occur at the same time, if the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error satisfies the output condition first, the operation for the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error is performed. After the execution, an operation of a magnetic (magnet) detection error may be executed. In that case, all the devices (decorative symbol display device) in which the notification by the decorative symbol display device 208, the lamps 418, 532, 542, and the speaker 120 is notified from the magnetic field (radio wave) detection error to the magnetic (magnet) detection error. 208, lamps 418, 532, 542, and speaker 120, etc.) may be switched (overwrite data), and only one or more partial devices (eg, speaker 120) may be overwritten and others One or a plurality of devices may continue notification for a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode>
Next, a specific example of an error notification mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating an example of a notification mode of error notification by the pachinko machine 100.

  The liquid crystal display described in FIG. 126 indicates an error display by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and displays the character display described in “”. Here, the error display by the display means is configured to be displayed until the error is cleared and is not displayed when the error is cleared. However, after the error is cleared, a certain period (for example, 10 seconds) is set. ) It may be configured to be displayed, or may be configured not to be displayed after a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the occurrence of the error even if the error has not been canceled. The display by the display means is not limited to the display by the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be an error display by lighting a segment or various lamps, a light emission display by a light guide plate, or a display by a POV display.

  The sound effect described in FIG. 126 may be a notification by sound output means (speaker 120 in this example), and the inside of “” is repeatedly output by sound. Here, the voice notification is configured to be repeatedly output until the error is canceled, but a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the error occurred even if the error has not been canceled. Then, it may be configured not to output sound, or may be configured to output sound for a certain period (for example, 15 seconds) after the error is released.

  The error illumination LED described in FIG. 126 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (position visible to the player), and is configured to be lit only when an error relating to payout occurs. However, it may be configured so that some or all of various errors related to the power supply, main control, and sub-control (sub-control) are turned on, or may be configured not to be turned on in part or all. Good. Further, the warning regarding the sub-control (in this example, the impact warning and the hitting warning) is configured not to turn on the error illumination LED, but may be turned on. Note that the error illumination LED may be constantly lit, or may be informed that an error has occurred by turning off when an error occurs. The payout illumination LED described in FIG. 126 is an LED provided on the front side of the front frame door 106 (position visible to the player), and is lit during a period when the payout device 152 is paying out. During the period when the payout device 152 is not paying out, the light is turned off. Further, the payout illumination LED is lit when a part of an error relating to payout (in this example, an insufficient payout error) occurs, but may be lit only during a period when payout by the payout device 152 is being performed, It may be configured to light up when an error relating to payout occurs. 126 refers to the decoration board 200 and the frame (in this example, the frame lamp 122 of the front frame door 106. The main body 104 (inner frame) and / or the outer frame 102 is provided with the decoration LED. Or may be configured so as not to be provided), and performs a light emission effect according to various effects. In addition, even if the decoration LED described in FIG. 126 performs a light emission effect when an error occurs, the decoration LED may stop and light up with a light emission pattern for an error. (As an example of recovery, it may be configured so that the lighting effect progresses in another layer even during an error and the lighting effect at the time of error recovery returns when returning from the error. However, it may be configured not to perform the light emitting effect until a timing at which it is easy to return (for example, at the start of a new light emitting effect), or may be configured to return from the effect data at the time when the error occurred. Good) Here, error notification by turning on various LEDs is configured to turn on or blink until the error is cleared, and to turn off when the error is cleared, but even after the error is cleared It may be configured to light up or blink for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the error occurred even if the error has not been canceled. Then it may be configured to turn off.

  The errors that can be detected by the pachinko machine 100 in this example are (1) errors related to payout (payout control unit 600), (2) errors related to power supply (power supply control unit 660), and (3) main control (main control unit 300). Etc., and (4) warnings related to sub-controls (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500). Each will be described below.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / payout error>
First, an error related to payout will be described. In this example, “error related to payout (payout control unit 600)” includes a tray full tank error (hereinafter also referred to as a “plate full tank error”), a glass frame open error, a payout shortage error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, A payout number switch error, a main control communication error, a CR unit unconnected error, a CR unit communication error, and a door open error can be mentioned. Here, the 7-segment LED for payout error display is provided on the payout control board (payout board 170) and is visible only when the main body 104 is opened with respect to the outer frame 102 (transparent or highly transparent). It is visible through a payout substrate case 172 made of resin.

  In this example, when an underfill full tank error occurs, the number “2” is applied to the light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). In addition to performing notification by the light emitting means by displaying, notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that the under-plate full error has occurred), and sound output means (In this example, a loudspeaker 120) is notified (in this example, a sound effect sound is output to the effect that an underfill full tank error has occurred). In this example, in the pachinko machine 100 having the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128, a case where a lower tray full tank error occurs when the lower plate 128 is full is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of the pachinko machine 100 having only the upper plate 126 (one storage plate), this error (dish full tank error) may occur when the upper plate 126 is full. .

  When a glass frame opening error occurs, the number “1” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED ( Flashing of the frame lamp or panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a glass frame opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, notification (sounding of a sound effect indicating that a glass frame opening error has occurred) is performed by the speaker 120).

  When a door opening error occurs, the number “1” is set on the first light emitting means (in this example, the 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). By displaying, notification by the first light emitting means is performed, and notification by the second light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame Flashing lamps and panel lamps), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, an indication that a door opening error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, Notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed.

  Further, the notification of the door opening error may be a notification of the glass frame opening error, and different notification modes (for example, notification by the display means) of the glass frame opening error and the inner frame opening error. Other notifications may be the same, or all notification modes may be different. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the game ball payout may be interrupted, and the game ball payout may be continued when the inner frame is opened.

  Further, when a payout number shortage error occurs, the number “3” is displayed on the first light emitting means (in this example, a 7-segment LED for payout error display provided on the payout control board (payout board 170)). Is displayed by the first light emitting means, and notification by the third light emitting means (LED for payout illumination in this example) (lighting LED for payout illumination is turned on in this example). Note that other error notification modes regarding payout, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG.

<Error notification / specific example of notification mode / power supply error>
Next, an error relating to the power supply will be described. Examples of the “error relating to the power supply (power supply control unit 660)” in this example include a blown fuse 1, a blown fuse 2, and a blown fuse 3. In this example, when an error relating to the power supply occurs, error notification is not performed. The cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and the measures are as shown in FIG. In addition, about the error regarding a power supply, although alerting | reporting is not performed in this example, you may alert | report by a display means, a sound output means, and various LED. Further, a power supply state confirmation LED may be provided on the power supply board. Here, the power status confirmation LED is always lit after power-on, and may be configured to be turned off when an error occurs. Conversely, when an error occurs when power is turned off after power-on It may be configured to be lit up.

<Error notification / specific example of notification mode / error related to main control>
Next, errors relating to main control and the like will be described. In this example, “error related to main control (main control unit 300)” includes magnetic (magnet) detection error, external clock error error, magnetic field (radio wave) detection error, switch level error, switch disconnection error, shock error Examples include errors, winning rate abnormality errors, winning prize excess winning errors, winning prize exhaust excess errors, solenoid error errors (large winning mouth error errors).

  In this example, when a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred, notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp) Flashing of the panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetism (magnet) detection error has occurred), and sound output means ( In this example, notification by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic (magnet) detection error has occurred) is performed.

In addition, when a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error occurs, notification (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or board lamp) is provided by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)). Lamp)), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, notification (sound effect sound indicating that a magnetic field (radio wave) detection error has occurred in this example) is performed by the speaker 120). In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  In addition, when an abnormal impact error has occurred, a notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) Blinking), notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that an abnormal impact error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) Notification (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that an abnormal shock error has occurred) is performed. In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Further, when an error in excess of winning a prize opening occurs, notification by a light emitting means (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp) in this example) (decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp in this example)). Lamp)), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, the display of characters indicating that a big prize opening excess error has occurred), and sound output means (in this example) Then, a notification is made by the speaker 120 (in this example, a sound effect sound is output to indicate that an extra prize winning prize excess error has occurred).

  In addition, when a big prize outlet discharge excess error occurs, error notification is not performed. It should be noted that error notifications (light emitting means (in this example, decorative LEDs (frame lamps and panel lamps)) (in this example, decorative LEDs (frame lamps and panel lamps flashing)) and display means ( In this example, a notification (displaying characters indicating that a big prize mouth discharge excess error has occurred in this example) by a decorative symbol display device 208) and a notification (in this example, a speaker 120) by a notification (this example) Then, a sound effect sound indicating that an extra prize exit excess error has occurred may be performed.

  In addition, when a solenoid abnormality error (a special prize opening abnormality error) occurs, a notification (in this example, a decoration LED (decoration LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) is used. Blinking of the frame lamp and the panel lamp), notification by the display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display of characters indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred), and sound output means (this In the example, notification by the speaker 120 (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a solenoid abnormality error has occurred) is performed. In addition, when the abnormality is resolved, the error is automatically canceled after 30 seconds.

  Note that the winning rate error error includes the general winning opening (in this example, the general winning opening 226), the starting opening 2 (in this example, the second special figure starting opening 232), and the large winning opening (in this example, the variable winning opening). 234), the same error notification may be performed, but different error notifications may be performed depending on the winning opening where the error has occurred. Another error corresponding to the winning rate error is an abnormal winning error. The abnormal winning error is a target game (for example, the general winning port 226, the second special figure starting port 232, the variable winning port 234, etc.) under certain conditions (for example, when the N-ball is launched, the big hit This is an error that occurs when more than a certain number of winnings are detected in the electric support (other than during normal high accuracy). When an abnormal winning error occurs, the state, notification, and measure of the gaming machine may be the same as the winning rate abnormal error.

  Note that an error relating to main control or the like may include a door opening error. In that case, when a door opening error occurs, notification by a light emitting means (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) (in this example, a decorative LED (frame lamp or panel lamp)) ), Notification by display means (in this example, decorative symbol display device 208) (in this example, display that a door opening error has occurred), and notification by sound output means (in this example, speaker 120) (In this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a door opening error has occurred) is performed. Note that other error notification modes relating to the main control, the cause of each error, the state of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) in error, and measures are as shown in FIG.

<Specific example of error notification / notification mode / warning / error related to sub-control>
Next, warnings and errors related to sub-control will be described. Examples of the “warning / error regarding the sub-control (first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500)” in this example include an impact warning, a hitting warning, and an effect moving means error. In this example, when an impact warning occurs, notification (in this example, display of characters indicating that an impact warning has occurred) is performed by display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208). No notification will be made.

  Further, when a hitting warning is generated, notification (display of characters indicating that a hitting warning has occurred in this example) by display means (in this example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and sound output means ( In this example, a notification is made by the speaker 120) (in this example, a sound effect sound indicating that a strike warning has occurred), but the notification by the light emitting means is not performed.

  The stage moving means error means various stage moving means (in this example, the stage movable body 224, the shielding means 246, the family crest actor 224E, the first large board behavioral 224Ga to the fourth large board behavioral 224Gd, and a thousand box). Production movable means provided on a game board such as an accessory 224H (in this example, the front frame door 106 may be provided on the main body 104 or the outer frame 102). If there is an effect moving means for the frame, it may not be included, or the effect moving means may not be provided on the frame). Is an error that occurs. The abnormality mentioned here indicates a case where the initial operation is not normally performed. For example, the sensor at the initial position of each effect moving means (ON when in the initial position) is in an OFF state. It may indicate a case where it does not turn ON even if retry operation is performed one or more times, or a case where it is determined that the sensor is kept ON. Further, the initial operation may be configured by all or any one or two of the origin return operation, the sensor check operation, and the full stroke operation. Here, the origin return operation is an operation of confirming the state of the sensor at the initial position and returning only the effect moving means whose initial position sensor is OFF (not at the initial position) to the initial position. The sensor check operation is an operation for confirming a sensor failure, and is an operation for performing a minimum operation for switching the sensor from ON to OFF. The full stroke operation is an operation in which the effect moving means moves to the maximum position where it can operate and returns to the initial position. The origin return operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. (For example, the effect moving means that is not at the origin position is returned to the initial position and the full stroke operation is performed as it is.) Further, the sensor check operation and the full stroke operation may be performed in one operation. Further, the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation may be performed in a predetermined order after the origin return operation is performed for all the effect moving means. (For example, when the initial movement is performed in the order of the production movable body A → the production movable body B → the production movable body C and the production movable body B is not in the initial position, the origin of the production movable bodies A to C is the origin. After the return operation is performed (appears to operate for the production movable body B), the sensor check operation and / or the full stroke operation are performed in the order of the production movable body A → the production movable body B → the production movable body C. In addition, after the effect moving means that is not at the origin position is performed in the initial operation, the other operations movable means may be configured to perform the initial operation. (For example, when the initial operation is performed in the order of the production movable body A → the production movable body B → the production movable body C, and the sensor of the initial position of the production movable body B is OFF, the production movable body B is initialized. The operation is then performed, and then the initial operation of the production movable body A → the production movable body C is performed.) When it is determined that the plurality of production movement means are not in the initial position, the production is started from the production movement means having a higher priority. An operation (an initial operation including an origin return operation or an origin return operation) may be performed.

  In addition, the effect moving means error may occur when the effect moving means causes various circuits (for example, the drive circuit of FIG. 45) when the connection of the effect moving means is not correctly connected, or when the harness of the effect moving means is disconnected or the connector is damaged. 422), etc., even if it is not normally connected. It should be noted that “error related to connection failure (wiring failure) of effect moving means” and “error that occurs when it is determined that there is an abnormality when performing various operations moving means when power is turned on” are different errors. The notification may be divided into two.

  Further, the effect moving means error is an error that may be displayed during display of the returning display, which will be described later, but may be configured not to be displayed during display of the returning display.

  The error related to the sub-control may be displayed in the same display mode (display area, font size, color, image shape, display position, etc.) as the error related to the main control and payout, and a different display mode. An error display may be displayed. Further, the warning related to the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display related to the sub control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning related to the sub-control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display related to the main control, but may be displayed in the same display mode. Further, the warning related to the sub control may be displayed in a display mode different from the error display related to the payout control, but may be displayed in the same display mode.

  Further, an error relating to sub-control (in this example, an effect movable means error) may be configured such that, in addition to the error display by the display means, a decoration LED provided on the frame or the game board 200 is lit or blinks. Alternatively, an error may be notified by the sound output means, or both of them may be performed.

Further, the error notification regarding the sub liquid crystal may be configured such that a part or all of the error notification is ended by the operation of the operation means (for example, the effect button 136 (chance button)) by the player. (For example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the effect moving means error is occurring, the error display is displayed as it is, but the error notification by the sound output means is ended and the game is ended. The blinking display by the decoration LED on the panel is finished, part of the decoration LED on the frame is turned off, and the blinking by the other part is continued as it is. It is conceivable that the notification is continued, the error notification of the effect means B is ended, a part of the effect means C is ended, and the other part is continued as it is.The effect means AC are sound output means, display means, Decorative LED, etc.)
When displaying the liquid crystal loading display when the power is turned on, an error display may not be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, or it may be displayed. Here, the liquid crystal loading display is a display indicating a state in which data stored in the ROM 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is being read. When reading of the data stored in the RON 506 of the second sub-control unit 500 is completed, a symbol stop display (symbol stop display displayed between the demo screen or symbol variation display) or a return indication (display in preparation) is displayed. The The display during return is a display that is displayed when the game control is returned during symbol fluctuation or big hit. If the symbol is changing, until the symbol stops (until the special symbol display confirmation timer becomes 0), If the big hit is being made, it is displayed until the big hit ends (until the hit end display timer becomes 0). It may be configured to return from the returning display to the symbol variation display at a specific timing during symbol variation (for example, the start of the super reach effect or the temporary stop display of the three decorative symbols). Various jackpot displays may be displayed from the returning display at a specific timing during the jackpot (for example, the start or end of a specific round, the start or end of a jackpot start effect, the start or end of a jackpot end display). Here, during the return display, all or part of the error display described above may be displayed. However, all or part of the other error displays are not displayed. May be. Further, the above-described error display is not displayed during the liquid crystal loading display, but some or all of the error displays may be displayed during the liquid crystal loading display. .

  The change effect display may be a change notice display.

  When the display mode of the hold icon is selected as the icon A by the player, the icon A is forcibly changed from the icon B to the icon G that can be selected by the player when the hold prefetch notice is started. There may be a case where the icon A changes to a mode of an icon that cannot be selected by the player when the reservation pre-reading notice is started.

  Note that a plurality of operation means related to effects may be provided. Here, when the operation unit A (for example, the chance button 136) and the operation unit B (lever) are provided, an image prompting the operation of the operation unit A (or an image indicating the appearance of the operation unit A or “operation unit”). Character display such as “Press A.” Hereinafter, an image prompting the operation of the operation means B (or an image showing the appearance of the operation means B, or “ Character display such as “Press the operating means B”, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “operating means image B”) may be configured so that the big hit symbol form is finally displayed more easily than the case where it is displayed. The image relating to the operating means on which the big hit symbol pattern is easy to be confirmed and displayed may be reversed, and the ease with which the big hit symbol pattern is fixed and displayed may not be changed. Here, the auto button function works for the operation means A, but the auto button function does not need to work for the operation means B, the operation means for which the auto button function works may be reversed, and the auto button functions for both operation means. The function may work, and the auto button function may not work for both operation means. Further, the navigation device image B may be configured such that the change in the display mode of the navigation character is more likely to be successful than the case where the operation device image A is displayed. The success rate of the change in the display mode of the navigation character may not be different depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, it may be the same.) In addition, the display mode of the navigation character is changed to a display mode with a higher expectation degree of big hit when the operation means image B is displayed than when the operation means image A is displayed. It may be configured so as to be easy, but may be reversed, and may be configured so that the display mode in which the navigation character is easily changed does not differ depending on the displayed operation means image. (That is, they may be the same.) Further, the frequency at which the operation means image A is displayed is higher than the frequency at which the operation means image B is displayed, but it may be reversed or the same. . Further, there may be an effect (promotion effect or demoting effect) in which the operation means image A changes to the operation means image B. Here, the period during which the operation means image A is promoted to the operation means image B may be outside the effective period of the operation means A and before the operation effective period of the operation means B is started. It may be outside the operation effective period of A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B, and during the operation effective period of the operation means A and outside the operation effective period of the operation means B. Alternatively, it may be during the operation effective period of the operation means A and during the operation effective period of the operation means B. The same applies to the case where the operation means image B changes to the operation means image A. In the above description, the two operation means, that is, the operation means A and the operation means B have been described as examples, but the same applies to three or more operation means.

  The effects that can be selected by the player are special figure start gates, general figure start entrances, general winning entrances, and / or effect gates (entering into the gate, no prize ball will be played even if a sensor is detected, only the effect There may be a case where the number of points increases according to the points obtained by passing through the gate to be performed. Here, the number of points obtained by passing and the effect to be acquired may have a one-to-one relationship, and when the point obtained by passing becomes a specific point, for example, in the decorative design display device 208 It may be configured such that “display for performing an effect for drawing an effect to be acquired (gacha effect)” is performed, and the effect won by the effect lottery by the first sub-control unit 400 is acquired.

  The player may be configured to be able to switch between display and non-display of the navigation character by operating the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). Switching between display and non-display of the navigation character may be possible at all times, or may be possible only during display of the navigation character, until a certain period of time elapses from the start of symbol variation (for example, one or more, or All decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, etc.) and may be configured so that navigation characters cannot be displayed or hidden during the super reach production, and the super reach production is in progress. The navigation character may be configured to be switched between display and non-display, or may be configured to be switched between display and non-display only when the symbol is stopped (when the special symbol is stopped).

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) is used. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and will be described more specifically with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 127 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 127, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 42 are not provided.

  FIG. 128 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 128), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by sticking this belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  A backlight (not shown in FIG. 128) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is disposed on the back surface of each reel 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted, and when the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 42 is provided.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Further, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 128, a display panel 1070 displaying a device title and the like can protrude toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 128 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S etc.],
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first icon [for example, a change icon h0],
The first icon is an icon (hereinafter referred to as “variation icon”) relating to a symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display] being executed,
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],
The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow display mode, etc.]
When the variation icon of the second display mode is displayed, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol mode than when the variation icon of the first display mode is displayed [for example, High expectations for jackpots]
One type of the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.]
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 87 (1) to FIG. 12 (12), etc.],
The second icon is an effect that changes the variation icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effects shown in FIG. 87 (i-9) to FIG. 11 (i11)]. Is an icon that may be used for
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [e.g., Tono-sama display mode wearing a default color kimono, Tosama-s display mode, co-panda display mode]
The second icon has a fourth display mode [e.g., white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow-colored kimono-like display mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot Icon that may be displayed in [Display Mode]
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the variable icon may be an icon that may be displayed in an icon display area in the display means, and the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area. . Further, the variable icon and the second icon may be icons that may be displayed simultaneously in the icon display area. That is, the second icon may be an icon displayed in the icon display area at the same time as the variable icon during the first period. Further, the second icon may be an icon that may be displayed outside the icon display area. Alternatively, the icon display area may be a movable display area, or may be a display area that may be divided and moved to different positions.

  “Straddling” means that a symbol stop display period (fluctuation stop period) is sandwiched between them. In addition, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the stop display of the symbol may be displayed, the icon that disappears in the middle, or the icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display It may be.

  In addition, “an icon that may be displayed across successive symbol variation displays” means “an icon that is always displayed and may be erased and then displayed again”. .

  The second icon may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

  The display means may be means for surely displaying a plurality of types of display.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second icon may be an icon displayed when a certain condition is satisfied. As an example of a certain condition here, there are n or more holdings, there is a holding for which a pre-reading notice is performed, a player is customizing, a certain notice (for example, a timer notice, Conversation notice etc.) is displayed, the second icon is a preview notice of a pre-reading notice, the second icon is stocked, and the expectation of jackpot in the running symbol change display is You can list things that are expensive, winning the lottery. In other words, the certain conditions may be all of the above-mentioned enumerations. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon different from the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, shark character , "Conversation notice including character display" Navi character changes ", 変 化 image, 襖 image for wiping effect, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 85 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6-3-2) to FIG. 93 (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 93 (K 1-3-1) to FIG. (K 1-3-4), meter production shown in FIG. 99 (2-2-2) to the same figure (Sh2-2-3), FIG. 110 (ab1) to (ab2), FIG. 90 (6) to the same figure (8), FIG. 117 ( D. 9-2-1) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  That is, the change effect display is a display that may be displayed in a state where the second icon is displayed in the third display mode, and the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It is a notice display about a mode changing from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.

  Further, the change effect display may be an icon that may be used for an effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon. Alternatively, the change effect display may be an icon that is not used for the effect of changing the display mode of the variation icon. In this case, the change effect display is a display of the second icon. It may be an icon used only for the effect of changing the aspect.

  The second icon may be an icon that always changes from the third display mode to the fourth display mode when the change effect display is displayed.

  The change effect display may be a display that may be displayed even when the second icon is not displayed.

Also,
“When the display effect does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 85 (3-2-1) to FIG. (1-3-1) to ((1-3-3b2), FIG. 110 (A4-2), FIG. 110 (A6-2)] are also icons,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The case where the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed is finally a jackpot symbol mode than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Is likely to be confirmed [for example, the expectation of big hit is high]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed” means “the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, and the second icon is It may be “when there is no change to the fourth display mode”.

  Further, the state in which the second icon is displayed in the third display mode is finally a big hit symbol mode than the state in which the second icon is displayed in the fourth display mode. The confirmation display may be difficult.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a warning display [for example, FIG. 88 (U20-1), FIG.97 (This b15-1)] about the jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the second icon may be a warning display about the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed”, “the warning of the big hit in the symbol variation display being executed is the second icon It may be done by.

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode for a notice of jackpot in the symbol change display being executed.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a pre-reading notice [for example, FIG. 93 (K5-1) to FIG. 96 (K13), FIG. 96 (Core a11)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the second icon may be a notice display of a prefetch notice” may be “a prefetch notice is performed by the second icon”.

  Here, the third display mode may be a default display mode, and the fourth display mode may be a pre-read notice display mode.

  The second icon may be an icon that also functions as the variable icon. That is, in this case, two types of variation icons are displayed by the first icon and the second icon.

  In addition, when both icons of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, than when both the icons are not displayed, Finally, the big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed.

  In addition, when both icons of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, either one of the two icons is displayed. It may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than when only the icon is displayed.

  In addition, when any one of the change icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, neither icon is displayed. It may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than the case.

  In addition, when both icons of the variation icon of the second display mode and the second icon of the fourth display mode are displayed, than when both the icons are not displayed, Finally, the big hit symbol mode may be easily displayed.

  In addition, the variation icon having a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the second display mode) and the second icon having a default display mode (for example, the third display mode) are displayed. The second state of the change icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the second display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) different from the default display mode are in the state of being displayed. It may be easier to finally display the big win symbol pattern than the state in which both icons are displayed.

  Or, conversely, the change icon of a display mode (for example, the second display mode) different from the default display mode and the second icon of the default display mode (for example, the third display mode) The state of being displayed is the change icon in the default display mode (for example, the first display mode) and the display mode (for example, the fourth display mode) different from the default display mode. It may be easier to finally display the big hit symbol form than the state where both the second icons are displayed.

  The variation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode. When the variation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is always displayed in a definite manner. May be. Further, the second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode, and when the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed. The confirmation may be displayed without fail. Even though the variation icon is displayed in the fifth display mode, the second icon may be displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode. Good. Further, even though the second icon is displayed in the sixth display mode, the variation icon may be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. Good.

  Furthermore, the variation icon may be displayed in the fifth display mode, and the second icon may be displayed in the sixth display mode. In this case, for example, advantageous jackpots are confirmed (for example, jackpot with probability change, long-round jackpot is confirmed), rare reach (for example, full rotation reach) is likely to appear, or other premier effects appear. It may be easy, or it may be easy to hit a revival. Or conversely, it may be difficult to hit the revival. Further, the mode of the operation means may be changed (for example, the button pops out, rotates, or dents, or the built-in lamp emits light in a rare light emission mode (for example, a rainbow light emission mode that changes to seven colors)). . Also, you can get special benefits for production customization, increase the number of productions that can be selected during the jackpot game, start a special super reach, or open a special jackpot round (for example, the second attacker opens) Round) may be started.

  In addition, the type of effect (for example, the type of super reach) may be suggested by the combination of the display mode of the variable icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, if the display mode of the variation icon is Tono-sama and the display mode of the second icon is a swordsman, it may be suggested to develop into a swordsman reach where Ton-sama and the swordsman battle. Alternatively, when the display mode of the change icon is 兜 and the display mode of the second icon is Tono-sama, it will function as a change notice (normal notice) only after the two icons are displayed. It may be configured.

  Further, the jackpot reliability (expected degree) may be different depending on the combination of the display mode of the variation icon and the display mode of the second icon. For example, the variation icon of the first display mode, the combination of the second icon of the fourth display mode, the variation icon of the second display mode, and the third display mode The jackpot reliability (expectation) may be different from the second icon combination.

Also,
“When the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the variation icon is displayed in the first display mode more than when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed. Easy to change from one display mode to the second display mode,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the probability that the variation icon of the first display mode changes to the second display mode is that the variation icon of the first display mode is determined by the second icon of the fourth display mode. In the case of changing to the second display mode, the variation icon of the first display mode is changed to the second display mode by the second icon of the third display mode. It may be high.

  Here, “than the case where the second icon of the third display mode is displayed” means “the second icon of the third display mode is changed from the first display mode to the first icon. It may be “than the case where an effect of changing to the second display mode is performed”.

  In addition, when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed, the change icon may surely change from the first display mode to the second display mode. In addition, when the second icon of the third display mode is displayed, the variation icon does not necessarily change from the first display mode to the second display mode, It may change.

  Further, when the second icon of the sixth display mode is displayed, the variation icon is displayed as the fifth icon more than when the second icon of the fourth display mode is displayed. The display mode may be easily changed.

  As described above, when the display mode of the second icon is changed, the display mode of the variation icon may be easily changed, and the display mode of the variation icon is always changed. Also good.

  Furthermore, the change icon of the display mode that is easy to change may be different depending on the display mode of the second icon. In addition, a notice that is likely to appear (a pseudo-continuous notice, a timer notice, a pre-read notice) may be changed depending on the display mode of the second icon.

Also,
There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 91, the example shown in FIG. 92 (ki 1) to the same figure (ki 5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, by displaying a plurality of the second icons, it may be easy to make a big hit, or the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon may be easily changed.

  Further, depending on a combination of a plurality of the second icons (a combination of the second icons having the same display mode or a combination of the second icons having a different display mode), it is easy to hit a big hit, a hold icon or the variation icon The display mode may be easily changed, or a notice that is likely to appear (a pseudo-continuous notice, a timer notice, a pre-read notice) may be changed.

Also,
“Equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136] provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated, the second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes [for example, examples shown in FIGS. 92 (1-1) to 92 (7)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, for example, the third display mode may change to the fourth display mode in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  The second icon is a display mode related to the operation unit, and the display mode may change according to the operation of the operation unit. The display mode related to the operation unit may be a display mode imitating the operation unit, a display mode that prompts the user to operate the operation unit (operation promotion display mode), It may be a display mode related to the operation effective period of the operation means (more specifically, a display mode of the remaining period of the operation effective period (remaining period display mode)), or a display mode reminiscent of the operation means. There may be a combination of these display modes, or a display mode including at least one of these display modes.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a meter display, and the operation of the operation means is accepted according to the state of the meter display, and when the operation of the operation means is accepted, the second icon The display mode may be changed.

  Further, when the operation means is operated in a so-called back button state in which notification for prompting operation of the operation means is not made even during the operation valid period of the operation means, the display mode of the second icon May change.

  Moreover, the display mode of the second icon may change according to the change of the effect mode.

  Further, the second icon may be an icon whose display mode can be changed by a customization operation by the player.

Also,
“The third display mode is a display mode selected by the player [for example, character selection of 73 (b)],
The fourth display mode is a display mode that is not selected by the player [for example, the display mode of the number shown in FIG. 89 (E 4-3)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display mode may be a display mode that can be selected by the player, and the fourth display mode may be a display mode that cannot be selected by the player. It may be a display mode that can be selected by a person.

Also,
“The second icon is displayed when the display mode changes without any other display effects [for example, FIG. 89 (1) to FIG. (3-1) and FIG. 92 (2-1). )-(Fig. 7)]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the display state of the second icon may change without any other display effect” means that “the display mode of the second icon depends on the effect of the second icon. May change. "

Also,
“The variation icon is an icon that has a display mode [for example, FIG. 100 (3) to FIG. 4 (4)] without any other display effects.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the display state of the variation icon may change without any other display effect” may mean that the display mode of the change icon may change due to the effect of the change icon. It may be.

Also,
“One type of the plurality of types of display is a third icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, etc.]
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of reserved balls (hereinafter referred to as “hold icon”),
The hold icon has a plurality of display modes [for example, icons A to G for holding display selection in FIG. 73 (b), FIG. 88 (2), FIG. Default display mode, blinking white, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, etc.)
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode, and the hold icon may be an icon that may be displayed in the fourth display mode. May be.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S etc.],
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a first icon,
The first icon is an icon related to a hold display [for example, hold icons h11 to h14, h21 to h24, a change icon h0, etc.]
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a default (white) display mode],
The first icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow color display mode, etc.]
One type of the plurality of types of display is a second icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM, etc.]
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across a continuous symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 87 (1) to FIG. 12 (12), etc.],
The second icon is an effect that changes the first icon from the first display mode to the second display mode [for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 87 (i-9) to (i11). Etc.] is an icon that may be used for
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a Tono-sama wearing a default-colored kimono, a display mode of a Tokusama, or a display mode of a copanda]
The second icon has a fourth display mode [e.g., white blinking, blue, green, red, gold, rainbow-colored kimono-like display mode, princess display mode, bancho display mode, robot Icon that may be displayed in [Display Mode]
The second icon is an icon that may change from the third display mode to the fourth display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second icon is displayed when the display mode changes without any other display effects [for example, FIG. 89 (1) to FIG. (3-1) and FIG. 92 (2-1). )-(Fig. 7)]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained. Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be displayed only for one symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon different from the first icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“One of the plurality of types of display is a change effect display [for example, treasure chest icon I1, UFO icon UFI, button hold icon, meter display MW, MG icon, giant panda, shark character , "Conversation notice including character display" Navi character changes ", 変 化 image, 襖 image for wiping effect, etc.]
The change effect display is an effect of changing the second icon from the third display mode to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. 85 (A 3-1) to FIG. (A 6-3-2) to FIG. 93 (A 6-3-4a), FIG. 93 (K 1-3-1) to FIG. (K 1-3-4), meter production shown in FIG. 99 (2-2-2) to the same figure (Sh2-2-3), FIG. 110 (ab1) to (ab2), FIG. 90 (6) to the same figure (8), FIG. 117 ( D. 9-2-1) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the display effect does not change even when the change effect display is displayed [for example, FIG. 85 (3-2-1) to FIG. (1-3-1) to FIG. ((1-3-3b2, FIG. 110 (A4-2), FIG. 110 (A6-2))] are also icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The second icon is an icon that may be a warning display [for example, FIG. 88 (U20-1), FIG.97 (This b15-1)] about the jackpot in the symbol variation display being executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[The second icon is an icon that may be a notice display of a pre-read notice [for example, FIG. 96 (core a11)] in FIGS.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
There are cases where a plurality of the second icons are displayed [for example, the example shown in FIG. 91, the example shown in FIG. 92 (ki 1) to the same figure (ki 5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“Equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136] provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated, the second icon is an icon in which the display mode changes [for example, examples shown in FIGS. 92 (1-1) to 92 (7)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first icon is an icon that has a display mode [for example, FIG. 100 (3) to FIG. 100 (4)] without any other display effects.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “the display mode of the first icon may change without any other display effects” means that “the display mode of the first icon is due to the advance notice by the first icon. May change. "

Also,
"The" icon related to the hold display "described above is a" concept icon that includes both a hold icon and a variable icon "
The said holding | maintenance icon is an icon [For example, holding | maintenance icons h11-h14, h21-h24] showing unsettled holding,
The fluctuation icon is an icon representing a digested hold [for example, a fluctuation icon h0].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The“ on-hold icon ”described above is a“ hold icon ”.
The said holding | maintenance icon is an icon [For example, the holding | maintenance icons h11-h14, h21-h24] showing unsettled holding,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the “icon relating to hold display” described above is a “fluctuation icon”, and the change icon may be an icon representing a reserved hold [for example, a change icon h0]. Good.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
"Production means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, game board lamp 442, game table frame lamp 452, thousand carton box accessory 224H, etc.]
Operation means [for example, chance button 136, operation key unit 137, second chance button, lever type operation means, etc.];
With
The effect means is a means capable of executing a plurality of kinds of effects,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a first production,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a second production,
If the operation means is operated during the first period [for example, the operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect [for example, “Summer vacation is not yet in FIG. ~ "Response display" may be executed,
In the auto button mode, when the first time [for example, the auto button function activation time (the time from FIG. 118 (A6) to FIG. 118 (A11))] has elapsed since the first period started, The first performance may be performed,
When the operation means is operated during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, the operation effective period (period from FIG. 118 (A8-1) to FIG. 118 (A14)]), [For example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode, a response display in which the continuous hitting meter RHM in FIGS. 119 (Aa5-5-6) to (Aa5-5-7) rises) Sometimes
In the auto button mode, even if a second time [for example, the auto button function activation time] elapses after the second period is started, the second effect is not executed [for example, FIG. Example of FIG. 119 (Aa5-5-2) and FIG.
In the auto button mode, the second effect is executed when the operation means is operated until the second time elapses after the second period is started. And
The state of the operation means is configured to be changeable from one state [for example, white lighting] of the first state and the second state to the other state [for example, special color (blue) lighting],
When the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the auto button mode [for example, FIG. 118 (A8-1) to FIG. A14) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. "
Explained.

  According to the described invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in the operation means. More specifically, since the state of the operating means may change during the second period in the auto button mode, the operating means is guided to prompt the user to operate the operating means. May be possible.

  Here, the auto button mode is a mode in which an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means may be performed even if the operation means is not operated. The non-auto button mode is a state where the auto button mode is not set.

  During the auto button mode, the operation of the operation means may be accepted (not invalidated), may or may not be accepted, or may not be accepted at all. The case of accepting and the case of not accepting may be accepted in the effect of A and not accepted in the effect of B, or may be accepted in the period of A and not accepted in the period of B. Furthermore, the operation means A (for example, the chance button 136) is accepted and the operation means B (for example, the operation key unit 137, the second chance button, the lever type operation means, etc.) is not accepted. Also good.

  In addition, during the period of the second period, presentation means other than the operation means (for example, display by display means, movable means, light emission means, etc.) may be changed.

Also,
“When the state of the operation means is changed from the one state to the other state during the second period in the non-auto button mode [for example, in the case of FIG. 120 (Aa8-3) ]
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  By doing so, since the state of the operation means may change during the second period in the non-auto button mode, the operation means is guided to prompt the user to operate the operation means. There are cases where it is possible. Also, regardless of whether the auto button mode is set or not, during the second period, notice that the second effect will not be executed unless the operation means is operated, and improve the willingness to operate the operation means. May be possible.

Also,
“At least a part of the first period may overlap with at least a part of the second period [for example, immediately before FIG. 118 (A8-1) to FIG. (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-1)],
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

Also,
“A period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period overlap in the auto button mode [for example, FIG. 118 (A8-1) to FIG. 119 (Aa5-2-2), FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-1)] in the period until immediately before, when the operation means is operated, the first effect and the second effect are displayed. At least one of the effects is executed [for example, FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-3) to FIG. 120 (Aa8-2-4)],
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Also good.

  If the operation means is operated from the start of the first period to the lapse of the first time, both the first effect and the second effect may be executed. Then, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed.

  For example, when two button displays are displayed during the auto button mode, one button display functions as the auto button mode, a response display is displayed according to the button operation, and the other button display is auto. The function of the button mode does not work, and there is a case where a sense of incongruity that the user has to operate the button by himself / herself is generated and the interest of the game is improved.

Also,
"When the operation means is operated in a period in which at least a part of the first period and at least a part of the second period overlap in the non-auto button mode, And at least one of the effects of the second effect is executed,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Here, both effects of the first effect and the second effect may be executed, only the first effect may be executed, or only the second effect may be executed. Also good.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the first period [for example, operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the first effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Note that the first effect may be executed even if there is no operation before the end of the first period.

Also,
“If the operation means is not operated during the second period [for example, operation effective period] in the non-auto button mode, the second effect is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

In addition, even if there is no operation before the end of the second period, the second effect may be executed.
“The effect means means image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). The second display device 208S, etc.)
The multiple types of effects are multiple types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a response display,
The response display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated,
The first effect is a first response display of the response effects [for example, a response display of “Summer vacation is still ~” in FIG. 118 (A11)]
The second effect is a second response display of the response effects [for example, an effect in which the hold icon changes to a blue display mode]
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

Also,
"One type of the plurality of types of display is an operation display,
The operation display is a display related to the operation of the operation means,
When the first operation display [for example, the button effect image (button image 136a and remaining time display meter MT) shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1)] is displayed as the operation display, When the operation means is operated, the first response display may be displayed,
If the operation means is operated when the second operation display [for example, the button image 136a shown in FIG. 118 (A8-1)] is displayed as the operation display, the first operation display is performed. Two response displays may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  The operation display may be a display including an image [for example, a button image 136a] representing the appearance of the operation means, or a display for prompting the operation of the operation means [for example, remaining time display meters MT, PUSH. Display, character display of “press”, display of an arrow indicating the operation direction, etc.].

Also,
“At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on the symbol change display being executed [for example, a notice effect on the jackpot in the symbol change display (normal notice)”,
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Note that both the first effect and the second effect may be, only the first effect may be, or only the second effect. May be.

Also,
“At least one of the first effect and the second effect is an effect on a symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display being executed is finished [for example, a symbol variation to be started next. Display, the next symbol variation display to be started next, or the announcement effect on the jackpot in the next next symbol variation display (pre-reading notice)],
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Note that both the first effect and the second effect may be, only the first effect may be, or only the second effect. May be.

Also,
“The first period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as“ first operation valid period ”),
The second period is a period during which the operation of the operation means is enabled (hereinafter referred to as “second operation effective period”).
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  It should be noted that meter display indicating the operation effective period of at least one of the first operation effective period and the second operation effective period [for example, display of remaining period meter MT shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1) ] May also be displayed during the auto button mode. Note that the remaining period meter MT may also be added to the button hold icon shown in FIG. 118 (A8-1).

  Further, the meter display may be a display by a gauge (a bar display that increases or decreases), or the display color changes with time, for example, a display that is grayed out when there is no remaining period. Good.

  Or, conversely, the meter indicating the operation effective period may be displayed only during the non-auto button mode, and may not be displayed during the auto button mode. For example, the remaining period meter MT is omitted from the frog conversation image CI2 shown in FIG. 118 (A5-1) in the auto button mode, and conversely, the button shown in FIG. 120 (Aa8-3) in the non-auto button mode. The remaining period meter MT may be added to the hold icon.

  Further, regardless of whether or not it is the auto button mode, when the meter indicating the operation effective period is displayed [for example, conversation notice shown in FIGS. 118 to 120] and not [for example, FIG. 118 to FIG. There may be a button change icon and a button hold icon 120 shown in FIG.

Also,
“The operation means is a means that may perform a production operation [for example, light emission, vibration, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

  Further, the first state is a state in which the effect operation is not performed [for example, a light-off state, a white lighting state, a vibration stop state], and the second state is a state in which the effect operation is performed [for example, , Lighting state, blue lighting state, vibration state].

  The first state may be a state where the operation means is stopped.

  Further, the effect means is provided with effect movable means [for example, a vibrator] inside, and the effect operation is an operation [for example, vibration] in which the effect movable means operates. Good.

  In addition, the second state may be deformed (for example, protruded or recessed), or the effect moving means is operating [for example, advanced state, backward state, vibrating state, rotating state, cured state, etc. Etc.].

  The operating means may be a means provided with a light emitting means.

The light emitting means is means capable of executing a driving operation such as lighting, blinking, or extinguishing,
The first state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in the first aspect,
The second state is a state in which the light emitting means is performing the driving operation in a second mode,
The first embodiment and the second embodiment may be different embodiments.

  The first aspect may be an aspect in which the light is extinguished, and the second aspect may be an aspect in which the light is on.

  The first aspect may be an aspect that is lit in the first color, and the second aspect may be an aspect that is lit in the second color.

  The second aspect may be a blinking aspect.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

Also,
“The gaming machine is a slot machine [eg, slot machine 1000].
A game stand characterized by that. "
Also explained.

In the above description,
[Production means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, the second display device 208S, speaker 120, gaming board lamp 442, gaming table frame lamp 452, thousand carton box accessory 224H, etc.]
The production means is a means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of production,
One type of production among the plurality of types of production is a first production,
The first effect is an effect selected by the player [for example, an effect by each option of (b) character selection in FIG. 73 (b), (c) an effect by each option of holding frame selection, ( e) production by each choice of hold display selection, (f) production by each choice of background display selection, music output production of the song name shown in FIG.
One type of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect by a navigation character YM, a music output effect, a hold frame UI effect, a hold effect, a background effect]
During execution of the first effect, when a third effect [for example, a change notice, treasure change notice, a wipe effect, a background change notice, etc. by the treasure box icon I1] is executed, the first effect When changing to the second effect [For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (a a3-1) to FIG. (A a6-1), FIG. 112 (a 11) to (a 15-1), FIG. For example, when background A is selected by the player in FIG. 90 (1), the background change notice in FIG. 6 (6) to FIG. 7 (7) (wipe-in and wipe-out of the wrinkle image for wiping effect) ), The background of the look-ahead notice displayed in (8) to (21) in the same figure changes, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Here, the third effect may be an effect of one type among the plurality of types of effects, and may be an effect executed by the effect means. Alternatively, the third effect may be an effect that is not executed by the effect means (for example, display means) but is executed by another effect means (for example, sound output means) different from the effect means. .

  The first effect may be a customized effect that can be selected in a demonstration mode in which the symbol variation display is not started for a certain period of time, or an effect that can be selected even during the symbol variation display. Also good. Furthermore, the first effect may be a super reach effect or a round effect during a big hit game that can be selected by the player.

  Further, the third effect may be, for example, an effect of notifying the remaining time until a simultaneous effect such as an island simultaneous effect is started.

  As an example of the production means, display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, a projector, etc.) , Light emitting means, sound output means, movable means, and the like. Further, a light guide plate that receives light from the side and emits light forward, and a POV display capable of displaying a picture by an afterimage effect can be listed as examples. As the production means, all of the above-mentioned enumerations may be used. On the other hand, some of those listed above may not be applied.

  Further, the effect means may be a device that performs a light emission effect, and in this case, the light emission mode (color, lighting pattern, light emission display displayed according to the light emission color, etc.) may differ depending on the mode. .

Also,
“The effect means is an image display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N). ), The second display device 208S, etc.]
The first effect is a first effect display [for example, an effect display by (b) character selection options in FIG. 73 (b) or (c) an effect display by hold frame selection options, (e) Production display by each choice of hold display selection, (f) production display by each choice of background display selection, song name shown in FIG. 111 displayed on the song title display unit MN of FIG. 112]
The second effect is a second effect display [for example, an effect display by the navigation character YM, an effect display by the holding frame UI, the song title display unit MN “Distance” in FIGS. ”, The song title display section MN“ Make DREAM ”in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the rendering means may be a plurality of image display means.

Also,
“The third effect is a third effect display [for example, a treasure chest icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button hold icon, a meter display MW, an icon of MG, a giant panda, and a character of“ 112, a conversation image including a character display of “change”, a spear image, a spear image for a wiping effect, a character C11 of the head length of FIG. 112 (A11) to FIG.
The third effect display may be performed by the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap with at least a part of the first effect display. That is, only a part of the third effect display may overlap with only a part of the first effect display, or only a part of the third effect display and the first effect display. All of the third effect display and only a part of the first effect display may overlap, or all of the third effect display may be overlapped. There may be a case where all of the first effect displays overlap. Further, at least a part of the third effect display may overlap at least a part of the first effect display from the front side (player side), and conversely, the first effect display. There may be a case where at least a part of is overlapped with at least a part of the third effect display from the front side (player side).

  In addition, the image display device displays a variation display of the decorative symbol, a stop display of the decorative symbol, an icon corresponding to the number of held balls (holding icon), and an icon regarding the symbol variation display being performed (variation icon). There is a case. The third effect display may be displayed closer to the first effect display than the decorative symbol variation display, or closer to the first effect display than the decorative symbol stop display. May be displayed near the first effect display than the hold icon, or closer to the first effect display than the variation icon. It may be done.

Also,
“Even if the third effect is not executed, the first effect may be changed to the second effect [for example, FIG. 89 (E1) to FIG. FIG. 92 (<2-1> to <7>)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, an operation means provided at a position where the player can operate may be provided, and the first effect may be changed to the second effect when the operation means is operated. .

  In addition, the change from the first effect to the second effect may be a change in the effect mode, the first effect corresponds to the effect mode set by the player, Even if there is a case where a change is made according to the operation of the operation means, and a case where a change is made in response to the start of execution of a pre-reading notice (intrusion into the pre-reading mode (corresponding to the second effect display)) Good.

Also,
“When the third effect is executed and the first effect is changed to the second effect [for example, in the case of FIG. 109 (a a-1) to FIG. 109 (a a6-1) ] Is changed from the first effect to the second effect without the execution of the third effect [for example, FIG. 89 (E2) to FIG. Easier to transition to a state that is more advantageous to the player [for example, a big hit gaming state, a big hit gaming state with a large number of balls, a probability change state, an electric support state]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Here, when the third performance is executed, a configuration in which the player is surely shifted to a state advantageous to the player may be employed. Or, conversely, even if the third performance is executed, there may be a case where the player does not shift to a state advantageous to the player.
Further, as the advantageous state, if the symbol variation display is being displayed, a big hit gaming state can be mentioned. Moreover, a super reach state may be sufficient and a pseudo-continuous production state may be sufficient. On the other hand, as an advantageous state, if the big hit game is being executed, the probability change state or the electric support state after the big hit game is ended can be given. Further, it may be a round promotion state in which the number of rounds is apparently increased.

Also,
“Equipped with operation means [for example, a chance button 136] provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated, the first effect may be selected [for example, the case of FIG. 76 (37) to FIG. 50 (50)]
When the operation means is operated, the third effect may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“When the first effect is not changed from the first effect to the second effect even when the third effect is executed [for example, FIG. 85 (3-2-1) to Fig. 3-2-2), Fig. 93 (K-1-3-1) to Fig. (K-1-3-3b2), Fig. 110 (A4-2), Fig. 110 (Aa6-2). If there is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  For example, when the effect means is a display means, the third effect may not be changed from the first effect display to the second effect display even if the third effect is executed. In the case where the means is a light emitting means, even if the third effect is executed, the first light emitting effect may not be changed to the second light emitting effect. When the third effect is executed, the first sound output effect may not be changed to the second sound output effect, and the effect means is a movable means. In some cases, even if the third effect is executed, the first operation effect may not be changed to the second operation effect.

  Alternatively, on the contrary, when the third effect is executed during execution of the first effect, the first effect may be changed to the second effect.

Also,
The second production is one of the productions that can be selected by the player.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Alternatively, the second effect may be an effect that cannot be selected by the player.

Also,
“Sound output means capable of outputting music [for example, speaker 120],
The effect means includes display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N, Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is a means capable of displaying a music display [for example, a music title display unit MN in FIG. 112 (A 15-1), (A 16) to (A 18), etc.],
The music display is a display related to the music output by the sound output means [for example, display of music title and lyrics]
The first performance is a first music display [for example, “Mega Giga Summer”],
The second performance is a second music display [for example, “gain DREAM”].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The first effect is an effect in which the second icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM] is displayed in the third display mode [for example, the default display mode]
The second effect is an effect in which the second icon is displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a white flashing, blue, green, red, gold, or rainbow-colored kimono-like display mode]. And
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed across a continuous symbol variation display [for example, in the case of FIG. 109 (a a1) to FIG. 109 (a a2)],
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, “stretching” is to sandwich a symbol stop display period (variable stop period). In addition, the second icon may be an icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be an icon that temporarily disappears in the middle. In addition, the icon that is continuously displayed during the display of the stop display of the symbol may be displayed, the icon that disappears in the middle, or the icon that continues to disappear during the display of the stop display It may be.

Also,
“The effect means is a display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L-N. , Second display device 208S, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One type of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
One type of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon,
One type of the plurality of types of icons is a third icon,
The first icon is an icon relating to the symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter referred to as “variation icon”) [for example, variation icon h0]
The second icon is an icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM] that may be displayed across a continuous symbol variation display,
The third icon is an icon corresponding to the number of held balls (hereinafter referred to as “hold icon”) [for example, hold icon h11],
The second icon is an icon different from the variation icon,
The second icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The variable icon is displayed in an icon display area [for example, a variable icon display area CIS in a hold frame UI having a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS] in the display means. The icon may be
The second icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [e.g., the production icon display area DIS in the holding frame UI],
The hold icon is an icon that may be displayed in the icon display area [for example, the hold icon display area HIS in the hold frame UI]
The first effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a first mode [for example, “hold frame D”],
The second effect is an effect in which the icon display area is displayed in a second mode [for example, “hold frame R”],
The first aspect is different from the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the icon display area may be an area where an area icon is displayed, an area where a holding frame is displayed, or an area where a user interface (UI) is displayed. It may be. The area icon may be a base icon, a stage icon, a frame icon, or the like. The area icon may be composed of a plurality of icons. The icon display area may be an area including a hold icon display area, a variable icon display area, and a second icon (for example, navigation character icon) display area.

  The third effect may be an effect of switching the aspect of the icon display area. Further, the third effect may be an effect in which a display overlapping from the front side is displayed in the icon display area.

Also,
"One type of the multiple types of production is the fourth production,
The fourth effect is a notice effect [for example, telop display trp shown in FIG. 104] that the third effect is executed before the third effect is executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[The third effect is a notice effect about a big hit in the symbol change display being executed [for example, a notice of a normal notice according to the color of a treasure box icon, a big hit confirmed (or a big hit big hit) notice by a bancho character C11) ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
[The third effect is an effect of a prefetch notice [for example, an effect of a prefetch notice by the color of a treasure box icon]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Also,
“The game machine is a slot machine [for example, a slot machine 1000].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  It should be noted that the above description of the decorative pattern change display may be a change display of the design (more specifically, a special figure), and the display of the decorative design stop display may be a symbol (more Specifically, it may be a special display) stop display.

  In addition, in the above description, “may be” may be replaced with “always to be”, “always to be”, “always become”, or the like. It may be replaced with “always XX”.

  In addition, even if the configuration requirements are included only in the description of the embodiment, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, the configuration requirements are not limited to other embodiments, examples, You may apply to a modification, various examples, an appendix, etc. That is, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the configuration requirements included only in the description of the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, and the like are not included in the other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even if it is applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it is realized as a single technical idea.

100 Pachinko Machine 120 Speaker 136 Chance Button 137u Up Key 137d Down Key 137l Left Key 137r Right Key 208 Decorative Symbol Display Device 208L First Decorative Symbol Display Device 208M Second Decorative Symbol Display Device 208N Third Decorative Symbol Display Device 300 Main Control Unit 400 1st sub-control unit 500 2nd sub-control unit 600 Dispensing control unit 1000 Slot machine pd3 3rd symbol pd4 4th symbol pd5 5th symbol UI Hold frame HIS Hold icon display area bIl Left base icon hs1 to hs4 1st stage 4th stage h1-h4, h11-h14, h21-h24 Hold icon CIS Fluctuation icon display area hs0 Pedestal h0, c Fluctuation icon YM Navi character I1 Treasure box icon DIS Production icon display area bIr Right base Icon MW White meter display MR Red meter display UpI White meter rise item UpIb Blue meter rise item UpIm Green meter rise item UpIr Red meter rise item UpIg Gold meter rise item MI Menu icon VI Volume adjustment icon BI Brightness adjustment icon VW Volume adjustment window BW Brightness adjustment window VB Bar display for volume adjustment

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display ,
Before Symbol than if you did not change in the state of the first full meter display from the sky of the state, more of when the meter display of the first changes to a full tank of state from an empty state, finally The jackpot design is easy to confirm and display ,
The fourth than if the meter display has not changed in the state of full from empty, is better when the meter display of said fourth changes to full state from empty, finally jackpot The design is easy to confirm and display ,
The fourth meter display that is displayed in an empty state is configured to be more easily changed to a full state than the first meter display that is displayed in an empty state.
It is characterized by that.

“Meter display” in the above description may be replaced with “display indicating a certain amount or number”, “first meter display” is “first display”, and “fourth meter display” is “ It may be replaced with “fourth display”.
In the above description,
“A game machine having display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N],
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, red meter display MR, rainbow meter display MN, white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. Numerical type meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.]
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 16, 19, etc., and the left side shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17). Meter display, left meter display shown in FIGS. 32 (4) to (18), or white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36].
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the like, and a right meter display shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17)]. 32 (5) to FIG. 15 (15), the right meter display, the red numeric meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters shown in FIG. ,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state rather than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state [for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of the example and the example shown in FIG. 31, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed and confirmed.
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full state rather than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full state [for example, FIG. 16 and FIG. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 17 or the example shown in FIG. 32], the jackpot symbol is finally configured to be easily displayed,
The fourth meter display that is displayed in an empty state is configured to be more easily changed to a full state than the first meter display that is displayed in an empty state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
Also,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9)]
The first meter display and the fourth meter display have the same size and display position [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 16 (4) and the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 9 (9). ],
The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partly or entirely different in color.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display on a certain background screen [for example, the background of a castle town] [for example, FIG. 16 (4)]
The display means is means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen [for example, FIG. 16 (9)],
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain stage stage [for example, a castle town stage]
If the first meter display is not displayed on the certain stage, the fourth meter display may be displayed [for example, the case shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to (25)]. If the fourth meter display is not displayed, the first meter display may be displayed [for example, the case shown in FIGS. 16 (4) to (8)]. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“It is configured such that the first meter display in the empty state changes and the fourth meter display in the empty state may be displayed [for example, FIG. 16 (6) to FIG. (9)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
'The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [e.g., white meter rising item UpI icon]
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to increase at a first increase rate [for example, an increase rate for one scale],
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to increase at a fourth increase rate [for example, an increase rate of 3 scales],
The fourth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“When the game ball wins a winning opening [for example, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, the general drawing starting opening, the general winning opening 226], the first icon may be displayed. Configured to be,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a blue meter rising item UpIb icon]
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to increase at a second increase rate [for example, an increase rate of two scales]
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to increase at a fifth increase rate [for example, an increase rate of 6 scales],
The fifth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the second increase rate,
The second increase rate [e.g., an increase rate for two scales] is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate [e.g., an increase rate for one scale],
The fifth increase rate [for example, an increase rate for 6 scales] is higher than the fourth increase rate [for example, an increase rate for 3 scales],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
`` The fourth effect may start with the first meter display being displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth character [e.g. Tono-sama character cd] changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display [e.g., FIG. 16 (6) to FIG. 9) Meter change effect using the change ball icon cI shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The fourth character is a character that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative pattern variation displays [for example, FIG. 16 (1) and FIG. ]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The first icon is an icon that may appear at the display position of the fourth character [for example, the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 26 (6)],
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter on the first meter display [for example, FIG. 26 (8)]
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the fourth meter display,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon relating to the symbol variation display,
The second performance may start with the hold icon displayed,
The second effect is an effect [for example, an example shown in FIG. 18] in which the fourth character changes the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means can display a holding icon [for example, the first holding icon h1, the second holding icon h2 etc.] corresponding to the number of holding balls in the holding display area [for example, the holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 26]. Means,
The first meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area,
The fourth meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“One of the plural types of meter displays is a seventh meter display [for example, a rainbow meter display MN shown in FIGS. 19 (m) and (n)],
The seventh meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed,
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of error displays [for example, displaying various errors described in FIGS. 124 to 126]
An error display [e.g., dish full error display] of the plurality of types of error displays is a display that may partially or entirely overlap with a part or all of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
'The certain error display is a display that may overlap a portion representing the accumulation state of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
`` Equipped with a storage tray that can store game balls,
The certain error display is a dish full error display,
The dish full tank error display is a display [for example, a character display such as “please remove the ball”] that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage dish.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display by the display means [for example, FIG. 20 (1), FIG. 20 (8) to FIG. ) White meter display MW]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is the first decorative display of the display [for example, the variable display stopped in FIG. 20 (1)].
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a variable display of the second decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 20 (3) to (9)],
The decorative display of the decorative pattern of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a variable display of the fourth decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 20 (10) to 21 (21)].
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is the fifth decorative display [for example, the display of FIGS. 21 (22) to 22 (42)],
The variation display of the first decoration design and the variation display of the second decoration design are continuous display variations of the decoration design,
When the first meter display is in a different state between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display [for example, at the timing of FIG. In contrast, when the meter rises at the timing shown in FIG.
The variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol are continuous variation display of the decoration symbol,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol [for example, empty at the timing of FIG. 21 (19). The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 21 (29) in contrast to the state of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed by a first effect [for example, an effect by a mini game shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
'The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 26] that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to a full state.
The notice display is a display [for example, super reach production shown in FIG. 17] that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to a full tank state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state, it is finally a big hit rather than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state. The design is easy to confirm and display,
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank, it is finally a big hit rather than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank. The design is easy to confirm and display,
The fourth meter display that is displayed in an empty state is more easily changed to a full state than the first meter display that is displayed in an empty state ,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise by a first amount,
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise by a fourth amount,
The fourth amount is greater than the first amount;
The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth display changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display.
It is characterized by that.

“Meter display” in the above description may be replaced with “display indicating a certain amount or number”, “first meter display” is “first display”, and “fourth meter display” is “ It may be replaced with “fourth display”.
In the above description,
“A game machine having display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N],
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, red meter display MR, rainbow meter display MN, white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. Numerical type meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.]
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 16, 19, etc., and the left side shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17). Meter display, left meter display shown in FIGS. 32 (4) to (18), or white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36].
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the like, and a right meter display shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17)]. 32 (5) to FIG. 15 (15), the right meter display, the red numeric meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters shown in FIG. ,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state rather than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state [for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of the example and the example shown in FIG. 31, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed and confirmed.
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full state rather than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full state [for example, FIG. 16 and FIG. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 17 or the example shown in FIG. 32], the jackpot symbol is finally configured to be easily displayed,
The fourth meter display that is displayed in an empty state is more easily changed to a full state than the first meter display that is displayed in an empty state,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [e.g., white meter rising item UpI icon]
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise by a first amount [for example, one scale],
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise by a fourth amount [for example, three scales],
The fourth amount is greater than the first amount;
The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect in which the fourth display [for example, Tono-sama character cd] changes the first meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, FIG. 16 (6) to FIG. 9) Meter change effect using the change ball icon cI shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
Also,
“One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a blue meter rising item UpIb icon]
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to rise by a second amount [for example, two scales],
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to rise by a fifth amount [for example, 6 scales],
The fifth amount is greater than the second amount;
The second amount [for example, the second scale] is larger than the first amount [for example, one scale],
The fifth amount [e.g., 6 divisions] is larger than the fourth amount [e.g., 3 divisions],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,
“A game machine having display means [for example, only the first decorative symbol display device 208L or a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to N],
The display means includes a plurality of types of meter displays [for example, white meter display MW shown in FIG. 19 and the like, red meter display MR, rainbow meter display MN, white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. Numerical type meter display DR, display using the number of characters shown in FIG. 37, etc.]
One meter display among the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIGS. 16, 19, etc., and the left side shown in FIGS. 31 (4) to (17). Meter display, left meter display shown in FIGS. 32 (4) to (18), or white numerical meter display DW shown in FIGS. 35 and 36].
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 19 and the like, and a right meter display shown in FIGS. 31 (5) to (17)]. 32 (5) to FIG. 15 (15), the right meter display, the red numeric meter display DR shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, or the display using the number of characters shown in FIG. ,
When the first meter display changes from an empty state to a full tank state rather than when the first meter display does not change from an empty state to a full tank state [for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of the example and the example shown in FIG. 31, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed and confirmed.
When the fourth meter display changes from an empty state to a full state rather than when the fourth meter display does not change from an empty state to a full state [for example, FIG. 16 and FIG. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 17 or the example shown in FIG. 32], the jackpot symbol is finally configured to be easily displayed,
The fourth meter display that is displayed in an empty state is configured to be more easily changed to a full state than the first meter display that is displayed in an empty state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
Also,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in an empty state is changed [for example, a red meter display MR shown in FIG. 16 (9)]
The first meter display and the fourth meter display have the same size and display position [for example, the white meter display MW shown in FIG. 16 (4) and the red meter display MR shown in FIG. 9 (9). ],
The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partly or entirely different in color.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying the first meter display on a certain background screen [for example, the background of a castle town] [for example, FIG. 16 (4)]
The display means is means capable of displaying the fourth meter display on the certain background screen [for example, FIG. 16 (9)],
The certain background screen is a background screen in a certain stage stage [for example, a castle town stage]
If the first meter display is not displayed on the certain stage, the fourth meter display may be displayed [for example, the case shown in FIGS. 16 (9) to (25)]. If the fourth meter display is not displayed, the first meter display may be displayed [for example, the case shown in FIGS. 16 (4) to (8)]. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“It is configured such that the first meter display in the empty state changes and the fourth meter display in the empty state may be displayed [for example, FIG. 16 (6) to FIG. (9)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
'The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [e.g., white meter rising item UpI icon]
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to increase at a first increase rate [for example, an increase rate for one scale],
When the first icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to increase at a fourth increase rate [for example, an increase rate of 3 scales],
The fourth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“When the game ball wins a winning opening [for example, the first special figure starting opening 230, the second special figure starting opening 232, the general drawing starting opening, the general winning opening 226], the first icon may be displayed. Configured to be,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“One of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a blue meter rising item UpIb icon]
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the first meter display is configured to increase at a second increase rate [for example, an increase rate of two scales]
When the second icon is displayed, the meter of the fourth meter display is configured to increase at a fifth increase rate [for example, an increase rate of 6 scales],
The fifth increase rate is an increase rate higher than the second increase rate,
The second increase rate [e.g., an increase rate for two scales] is an increase rate higher than the first increase rate [e.g., an increase rate for one scale],
The fifth increase rate [for example, an increase rate for 6 scales] is higher than the fourth increase rate [for example, an increase rate for 3 scales],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display is displayed, and the fourth effect is that the fourth character [eg, Tono-sama character cd] Is an effect of changing the meter display to the fourth meter display [for example, a meter change effect using the change ball icon cI shown in FIGS. 16 (6) to (9)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The fourth character is a character that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative pattern variation displays [for example, FIG. 16 (1) and FIG. ]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The first icon is an icon that may appear at the display position of the fourth character [for example, the white meter rising item UpI shown in FIG. 26 (6)],
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter on the first meter display [for example, FIG. 26 (8)]
The fourth character may use the first icon that appears at the display position of the fourth character to raise the meter of the fourth meter display,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon relating to the symbol variation display,
The second performance may start with the hold icon displayed,
The second effect is an effect [for example, an example shown in FIG. 18] in which the fourth character changes the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The display means can display a holding icon [for example, the first holding icon h1, the second holding icon h2 etc.] corresponding to the number of holding balls in the holding display area [for example, the holding frame UI ′ shown in FIG. 26]. Means,
The first meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area,
The fourth meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained .
Also,
“The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of error displays [for example, displaying various errors described in FIGS. 124 to 126]
An error display [e.g., dish full error display] of the plurality of types of error displays is a display that may partially or entirely overlap with a part or all of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
'The certain error display is a display that may overlap a portion representing the accumulation state of the first meter display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
`` Equipped with a storage tray that can store game balls,
The certain error display is a dish full error display,
The dish full tank error display is a display [for example, a character display such as “please remove the ball”] that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage dish.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
“The first meter display may be displayed during the display of the decorative symbol stop display by the display means [for example, FIG. 20 (1), FIG. 20 (8) to FIG. ) White meter display MW]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is the first decorative display of the display [for example, the variable display stopped in FIG. 20 (1)].
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a variable display of the second decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 20 (3) to (9)],
The decorative display of the decorative pattern of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a variable display of the fourth decorative pattern [for example, the variable display of FIGS. 20 (10) to 21 (21)].
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is the fifth decorative display [for example, the display of FIGS. 21 (22) to 22 (42)],
The variation display of the first decoration design and the variation display of the second decoration design are continuous display variations of the decoration design,
When the first meter display is in a different state between the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display [for example, at the timing of FIG. In contrast, when the meter rises at the timing shown in FIG.
The variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol are continuous variation display of the decoration symbol,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol [for example, empty at the timing of FIG. 21 (19). The meter is rising at the timing of FIG. 21 (29) in contrast to the state of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed by a first effect [for example, an effect by a mini game shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Also,
'The display means is a means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 26] that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to a full state.
The notice display is a display [for example, super reach production shown in FIG. 17] that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to a full tank state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Claims (20)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a first meter display,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a fourth meter display,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the sixth state,
When the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, rather than when the first meter display remains in the first state and does not change to the third state. It ’s easier for the jackpot symbol to be finalized,
When the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, rather than when the fourth meter display remains in the fourth state and does not change to the sixth state. In the end, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finalized.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The fourth meter display displayed in the fourth state is the sixth meter display rather than the probability that the first meter display displayed in the first state changes to the third state. Configured to have a higher probability of changing to a state,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the first meter display in the first state has changed,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
The fourth effect may be started in a state where the first meter display of the first state is displayed,
The fourth effect is an effect of changing the first meter display to the fourth meter display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 4,
The fourth effect is an effect using a fourth character,
The fourth character is a character that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous decorative symbol variation displays by the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed during display of a stop display of decorative symbols by the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a variation display of a plurality of decorative symbols,
The decorative display of one of the multiple decorative pattern displays is a display of the first decorative display,
The decorative display of the decorative pattern of one of the plurality of decorative displays of the decorative pattern is a variable display of the second decorative pattern,
The decorative display of the decorative pattern of one of the plurality of decorative displays of the decorative pattern is a variable display of the fourth decorative pattern,
The decorative display of the decorative pattern of one of the plurality of decorative displays of the decorative pattern is a variable display of the fifth decorative pattern,
The variation display of the first decoration design and the variation display of the second decoration design are continuous display variations of the decoration design,
The first meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the first decoration symbol and the variation display of the second decoration symbol,
The variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol are continuous variation display of the decoration symbol,
The fourth meter display is a display in which the state may be different between the variation display of the fourth decoration symbol and the variation display of the fifth decoration symbol.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
The fourth meter display is a display in which display is started in the fourth state.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the fifth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed in the fourth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may be displayed in the fifth state,
When the display of the fourth meter display is started in the fifth state than when the display is started in the fourth state, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the first state,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed in the second state,
The first meter display, when the display is started in the second state than when the display is started in the first state, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state,
The first meter display is a display that may change from the second state to the third state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fourth state to the fifth state,
The fourth meter display is a display that may change from the fifth state to the sixth state,
The case where the fourth meter display is in the fifth state is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as a big hit symbol in the end than in the case where the first meter display is in the second state,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 11,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons,
One icon of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon,
The first meter display is a display that changes from the first state to the third state when the first icon is displayed a first number of times.
The fourth meter display is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state when the first icon is displayed a fourth number of times.
The fourth number of times is less than the first number of times,
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The first meter display is a display that may be displayed by the first effect,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 13,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the number of held balls in a hold display area,
The first meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area,
The fourth meter display is a display partly or entirely overlapping the holding display area.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
One meter display of the plurality of types of meter display is a seventh meter display,
When the seventh meter display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice display,
The notice display is a display that may be displayed when the first meter display changes to the third state,
The notice display is a display that may be displayed when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
The first state in the first meter display is a state representing a first quantity or number,
The third state in the first meter display is a state representing a third quantity or number,
The fourth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a fourth quantity or number,
The sixth state in the fourth meter display is a state representing a sixth quantity or number;
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 17,
The first meter display and the fourth meter display are partly or entirely different in color.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 18,
The first meter display and the fourth meter display are different in size.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 19,
The first meter display and the fourth meter display have different display positions.
A game stand characterized by that.